volume 1 of 1 - kavi construction · 2020. 3. 25. · project manual volume 1 of 1 buildings d and...

PROJECT MANUAL

VOLUME 1 of 1

BUILDINGS D AND K RENOVATIONS

Submission: 100% Construction Documents For Bid

March 25th, 2020

Clarke Caton Hintz Architects 100 Barrack Street Trenton, NJ 08606 Tel: 609 883-8383

Contact Person: Stephen Doyle, AIA, LEED AP [email protected]

George Hibbs, AIA NJ License # 21AI01300200

Atlantic Cape Community College Clarke Caton Hintz Building D and K Renovations March 25, 2020 ACCC Bid #1859

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1

100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1 FRONT END SPECIFICATIONS Section 00 11 13 Public Notice Section 00 21 13 Information For Bidders Section 00 41 13 Form of Proposal (Bid Form) Section 00 43 13 Form of Bid Bond Section 00 43 16 Surety Disclosure Statement and Certification Section 00 43 19 Consent of Surety Section 00 43 43 Prevailing Wage Compliance Declaration Section 00 43 53 Statement of Ownership Section 00 43 63 Hold Harmless Agreement Section 00 43 73 Site Visit Verification Section 00 45 19 Affidavit of Non-Collusion Section 00 45 30 Stockholder Disclosure Certification Section 00 45 35 No Material Change of Circumstances Affidavit Section 00 45 36 Affirmative Action Language: Exhibit B and Affirmative Action

Acknowledgment N/A Notice of Additional Mandatory Construction Contract Language Section 00 45 40 Disclosure of Investment Activities in Iran Section 00 45 50 Contractor’s Equipment Certification Section 00 61 11 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor A101-2007 AIA Document A101-2007 Standard Form of Agreement

Between Owner and Contractor Section 00 61 12 Supplement to the Form of Agreement Section 00 61 13 Form of Performance and Payment Bond Section 00 61 19 Form of Maintenance Bond Section 00 62 11 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction A201-2007 AIA Document A201-2007 General Conditions of the Contract for

Construction Section 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 10 00 Summary Section 01 21 00 Allowances

Section 01 23 00 Alternates Section 01 25 00 Contract Modification Procedures Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination

Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements Section 01 40 10 Roof System Quality Control Section 01 42 00 References Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements Section 01 70 00 Execution Requirements Section 01 73 10 Cutting and Patching Section 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures Section 01 78 20 Operation and Maintenance Documents Section 01 78 36 Warranties



Section 01 78 39 Project Record Documents Section 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 41 19 Selective Structure Demolition

Section 02 82 13 Asbestos Abatement (Non-Friable) Section 02 82 33 Asbestos Abatement

Section 02 84 33 Non-Liquid PCB Material Remediation DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

Section 03 53 00 Concrete Toppings DIVISION 05 - METALS

Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 – WOOD PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry Section 06 40 23 Interior Architectural Woodwork Section 06 82 00 Fiber Reinforced Plastic Panels

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 21 11 Roof Insulation Section 07 42 16 Standing Seam Metal Roofing Section 07 53 00 EPDM Membrane Roofing Section 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS Section 08 11 10 Hollow Metal Doors Section 08 14 00 Flush Wood Doors Section 08 43 13 Aluminum Entrance and Storefronts Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware Section 08 80 00 Glazing DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Section 09 21 10 Gypsum Board Assemblies Section 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing Section 09 30 00 Tiling Section 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings Section 09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring Section 09 68 10 Tile Carpeting Section 09 72 00 Wall Coverings Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

Section 10 14 00 Signage Section 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories Section 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS Section 12 24 00 Roller Window Shades DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION Section 21 05 00 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression Section 21 11 00 Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping Section 21 13 00 Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems



DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Section 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation Section 22 10 05 Plumbing Piping Section 22 10 06 Plumbing Piping Specialties Section 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures DIVISION 23 – HVAC Section 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Section 23 07 13 Duct Insulation Section 23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings Section 23 34 16 Centrifugal HVAC Fans Section 23 36 00 Single Duct VAV Terminal Unit Section 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets Section 23 73 14 Commercial Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioners Section 23 81 26 Indoor Air Handling Units DIVISION 26 - ELECTRIC Section 26 05 11 Requirements for Electrical Installations Section 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 33.13 Conduit for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 33.16 Boxes for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 83 Wiring Connections Section 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices Section 26 21 00 Low Voltage Electrical Service Entrance Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices Section 26 28 13 Fuses Section 26 28 16.16 Enclosed Switches Section 26 51 00 Interior Lighting DIVISION 27 – INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY Section 27 10 00 Structured Cabling DIVISION 28 – FIRE ALARM Section 28 46 00 Fire Detection and Alarm

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


PUBLIC NOTICE 001113-1

PUBLIC NOTICE

ATLANTIC CAPE COMMUNITY COLLEGE

In accordance with Drawings and Project Manual, dated March 25, 2020 together with all work incidental thereto as prepared by Clarke Caton Hintz, 100 Barrack Street, Trenton, NJ, 08608. All bids should be addressed to the attention of Purchasing Department. Bids must be made on the proposal forms in the manner designated, enclosed in a sealed envelope bearing the name and address of the bidder and the proposal identification on the outside of the envelope. Sealed bids will be received by the Board of Trustees of the Atlantic Cape Community College at Building J, Conference Room J-202, at the Mays Landing Campus, 5100 Black Horse Pike, Mays Landing, New Jersey 08330. The deadline to submit sealed bids is Thursday April 23, 2020 at 10:00 AM prevailing time. Immediately thereafter, in Building J, Conference Room J-202, Atlantic Cape Community College Mays Landing Campus, bids will publicly opened and read aloud immediately thereafter for: A SINGLE OVERALL CONTRACT FOR: BUILDING D AND K RENOVATIONS MAYS LANDING CAMPUS ACCC Bid No. 1859

ATLANTIC CAPE COMMUNITY COLLEGE MAYS LANDING CAMPUS 5100 BLACK HORSE PIKE MAYS LANDING, NEW JERSEY 08330 Package must be accompanied with a Certified Check, Cashier’s Check or a Bid Bond drawn to the order of Atlantic Cape Community College for not less than ten percent (10%), and must be delivered to the attention of the Chief Business Officer, or the designated representative at the above place on or before the time of bid opening. Neither the Atlantic Cape Community College, nor the Architect will assume any responsibility for Bids mailed or misdirected in delivery. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days after the date set for the opening thereof. The right is reserved to reject any or all bids or to waive any informality in the bidding if it is in the interest of the Owner to do so. Bidding and Contract Requirements, Bid Forms, Specifications and Contract Drawings and other Contract Documents may be examined during normal office hours at Architect’s Office, 100 Barrack Street, Trenton, NJ, 08608. Project Bidding Schedule: Project Advertised for Bid March 25, 2020 Non-mandatory Pre-Bid Meeting March 31, 2020 at Room J-202 at Noon Last Day for RFI April 7, 2020 by 2:00 PM Issuance of Addendum (if required) April 13, 2020 by 5:00 PM Bid Submission April 23, 2020 by 10:00 AM


PUBLIC NOTICE 001113-2

Drawings and Project Manuals will be available at the Architect’s Office for review by Bidders. Construction Documents will also be available in PDF format via a secure web-link. For access to the link, please email Stephen Doyle [email protected] and Lauren Ferraro [email protected] . The bids will be publicly opened and read aloud at the time and place set forth above. No bids will be received after that time unless the contract is re-advertised for bids. Bidders are responsible for seeing that their bids arrive at the Purchasing Office at the address specified above before the opening date and time. Bids delivered in person or by express service should be delivered directly to the Purchasing Office. If the bid exceeds $20,000, bidder must be prequalified by the New Jersey Department of the Treasury, Division Building and Construction, prior to the date that bids are received. Any bid submitted under the terms of New Jersey Statues not including a copy of a valid and active Prequalification / Classification Certificate will be rejected as be non-responsive to bid requirements. Bidder must comply with P.L. 1999, C-238, the Public Works Contract Registration Act. Bidders are subject to the provisions of the County College Contracts Laws N.J.S.A. 18A:64A-25.25 governing bidding requirements. Bidders for contracts exceeding the bid threshold must be pre-qualified by the state of New Jersey, Department of the Treasury, Division of Property Management and Construction. Bidding Contractors must be pre-qualified as either “C008 General Construction” or “C009 General Construction / Alterations and Additions”. Each bid must be accompanied by an affidavit so certifying if applicable. The Contractor is required to conform to the requirements of the New Jersey Prevailing Wage Act P.L. 1963.c150. Copies of the Rate Determination are available for review online, on the State of New Jersey’s website. Bidders are requested to submit questions directly to Stephen Doyle [email protected] and Lauren Ferraro [email protected] with an email copy to Mr. Ed Perkins ([email protected]) at the Atlantic Cape Community College, Mays Landing, New Jersey 08330, prior to the date indicated above. A pre-bid meeting and project site walk through is scheduled to occur on the date and time indicated above. Bidders should meet at the J Building, Room J-202 at the Mays Landing Campus. The pre-bid meeting is not mandatory, but attendance is strongly encouraged. However, it is mandatory that the bidders must conduct a site visit, and the bidders must submit a Site Verification Form with their bids. “Bidders are required to comply with the requirements of Affirmative Action P.L. 1975, c.127 (N.J.A.C. 17:27) and P.L. 1999, c.238 The Public Works Contractor Registration Act.” and the requirements of P.L. 2004, c. 57 Contractors Business Registration Act.” By Order of: Board of Trustees Atlantic Cape Community College Mays Landing, New Jersey 08330

INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS 002113-1


SECTION 002113 - INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS

A. GENERAL TERMS

1. All papers bound or attached to these bid documents are a necessary part hereof. All bids are submitted subject to the requirements and conditions in the bidding documents.

2. Proposals for the Contracts as listed in the Public Notice as hereinafter described will be received for the performance of the Project. The bids shall cover all cost of any nature, incident to and growing out of the Work. In explanation but no in limitation thereof, these costs shall include the cost of all work, labor, materials, equipment, transportation and cost of all else necessary to perform and complete the Project in the manner and within the time required, all incidental expenses in connection therewith, all costs on account of loss by damage or destruction of the Project to the extent that the cost of such loss is not recovered from insurance carried by the Owner and the Contractor, and any additional expenses for unforeseen difficulties encountered, for settlement of damages and for replacement of defective work and materials.

3. Authority of Atlantic Cape Community College. On all questions concerning the interpretation of specifications; the acceptability of quality of materials or items furnished and work performed; the execution of the work; and the determination of payment due or to become due, the decision of the Atlantic Cape Community College Board of Trustees shall be final and binding.

4. Submission of Bids. Bidders are to seal their bids in an envelope. The outside of this envelope must display the title of the bid and the name and address of the bidder. No bids will be received after the date and time specified herein unless the contract is re-advertised for bids. Bidders are responsible for ensuring that their bids arrive at the Purchasing Office before the opening date and time. Bids delivered in person or by express service should be delivered directly to the Purchasing Office at the Atlantic Cape Community College, 5100 Black Horse Pike, Mays Landing, New Jersey 08330. Bids sent via regular mail should be sent to Purchasing Office at the Atlantic Cape Community College, 5100 Black Horse Pike, Mays Landing, New Jersey 08330, Building J, Room 230. Bids mailed to the Post Office box must be received one day prior to bid receipt date to insure timely receipt at the Bid Opening location. Neither the Atlantic Cape Community College, nor the Architect will assume any responsibility for Bids mailed or misdirected in delivery.

5. Modifications of Bids. Any bidder may modify a bid at any time prior to the scheduled closing time for the receipt of bids. The modification must bear an original signature of the bidder. It must be in a sealed envelope; the outside of this envelope must display the title of the bid, the name and address of the bidder, and the word "MODIFICATION."

6. Withdrawal of Bids. Any bid may be withdrawn prior to the scheduled time for opening bids or the authorized postponement thereof. No bidder may withdraw a bid within 60 days after the actual date on which it is opened.

7. Qualifications of Bidder. The College may make such investigation as it deems necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the terms of the contract, and the bidder shall furnish the College all the information for this purpose which the College may request. The College reserves the right to reject any bid if its investigation of the bidder reveals that, in the



opinion of the College, the bidder is not properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and complete it as outlined herein.

8. Bidding Contractors must be pre-qualified as either “C008 General Construction” or “C009 General Construction / Alterations and Additions”. Each bid must be accompanied by an affidavit so certifying if applicable.

9. Subcontracts. Each bidder is hereby advised that any person, firm or other party to whom it is proposed to award a sub-contract under the bidder's contract must be acceptable to the College. Evidence of sub-contractor performance security must be submitted with the bid. Subcontractor’s performance security can be provided by the Contractor or Subcontractor. All other certifications required of the bidder must also be obtained from any sub-contractor and furnished to the College prior to commencement of work. If Contractor intends and is licensed to also executing plumbing and gas fitting work; heating and ventilating systems and equipment; electrical work; structural steel and ornamental iron work, as applicable to project’s scope of work, this must be noted on subcontractor identification form (004336).

10. Under the County College Contracts Law, N.J.S.A. 18A:64A-25.25, all bids submitted shall set forth the name or names of, and evidence of performance security from, all subcontractors to whom the bidder will subcontract the work for general construction, plumbing and gas fitting work, heating and ventilating systems and equipment, or electrical work, or structural steel and ornamental iron work.

11. Interpretations, Clarifications and Addenda. Should any bidder find what appears to be an ambiguity, discrepancy or omission in any of the documents, the bidder shall at once notify the College which will determine whether written interpretations should be sent to all bidders. Every request for interpretation shall be addressed in writing to the College, and, to be given consideration, must be received at least nine business days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. All such interpretations and supplemental instructions will be issued in the form of written clarifications or addenda which will become part of the contract; and all such interpretations and supplemental instructions will be mailed to all prospective bidders at their respective addresses furnished for such purposes not later than seven business days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. The failure of any bidder to receive any such addendum or interpretation shall not relieve any such bidder from any obligation under this bid as submitted. No oral interpretations will be made to any Bidder as to the meaning of the drawings and specifications.

Addenda shall take precedence over the original drawings and specifications insofar as the definition, interpretation and intent of the Work are concerned. With the list of addenda, the order of precedence will be in ascending order of addenda numbering.

12. In the event of inclement weather, the College maintains the right to reschedule the bid opening.

13. New Equipment. All equipment, supplies and materials for which bids are requested shall be new, unless otherwise specified.

14. Obligation of Bidders. All bidders will be presumed to be familiar with the plans and specifications, notice to bidders, and all documents included in the bid documents including all addenda; and to have inspected the site. In addition, all bidders must inform themselves fully of the conditions relating to performance of the contract, any construction involved and the employment of any labor thereon. Failure to do any of the foregoing will not relieve any bidder of any obligation with respect to the bid as submitted and/or contract.



15. Waiver of Informalities/Rejection of Bids. The College may consider informal any bid not prepared and submitted in accordance with the bid documents and may waive any informalities; or it may for any reason reject any and all bids.

B. APPLICABLE LAWS AND REGULATIONS

1. Bidders on service contracts, or on equipment which require installation by the contractor, are

advised that the provisions of P.L. 1963, c. 150 (New Jersey Prevailing Wage Act) will apply to and be part of the contract. For job categories not covered under prevailing wage rates, bidders are required to pay to workers at least the legally established minimum wage at all times during the contract period.

2. Bidders are required to comply with the affirmative action requirements of P.L. 1975, c. 127 {NJAC 17:27}. For construction contracts, the successful vendor must submit State of New Jersey Form AA-201 (Initial Manning Report) and subsequent ongoing Manning Reports.

3. All equipment supplied to Atlantic Cape Community College and all installation work performed at Atlantic Cape Community College must comply with PEOSHA regulations and meet PEOSHA standards.

4. The successful bidder is required to keep informed of and to comply with all authorities having jurisdiction over the subject matter of the contract. The Owner shall be responsible for reimbursing the Contractor for all permits, governmental fees and licenses necessary for the lawful execution and completion of the work required by the contract. The Contractor will obtain construction permits from the Township of Hamilton, Atlantic County. The College is an exempt organization and no fee will be required for construction permits. The successful bidder is required to assist the Owner in obtaining permits.

5. Construction Contracts: Each bidder shall be pre-qualified in accordance with the standards of the New Jersey Department of the Treasury, Department of Building and Construction (N.J.A.C. 17:19-2.1 et. seq.), and shall submit with the bid a copy of the current Notice of Classification and Total Amount of Uncompleted Contracts.

6. State of New Jersey – Laws of 1977 Chapter 33: Conflict of Interest: No corporation or partnership shall be awarded any contract or shall any agreement be entered into for the performance of any work or the furnishing of any materials or supplies, the cost of which is to be paid with or out of any public funds, by the State, or any county, municipality or school district, or any subsidiary or agency of the State, or of any county, municipality or school district, or by any authority, board, or commission which exercises governmental functions, unless prior to the receipt of the bid or accompanying the bid of said corporation or said partnership, there is submitted a statement setting forth the names and address of all stockholders in the corporation or partnership who own 10% or more of its stock, or any class or of all individual partners in the partnership who own a 10% or greater interest therein, as the case may be. If one or more such stockholder or partner is itself a corporation or partnership, the stockholders holding 10% or more of that corporation's stock, or the individual partners owning 10% or greater interest in that partnership, as the case may be, shall also be listed. The disclosure shall be continued until names and addresses of every non-corporate stockholder and individual partner exceeding the 10% ownership criteria established in this act has been listed.



7. Americans with Disabilities Act (A.D.A.) Equal Opportunity for Individuals with Disability: The Contractor and the County College do hereby agree that the provisions of Title II of the Americans With Disabilities Act of 1990 (the "ACT") (42 U.S.C. S12101 et seq.) which prohibits discrimination on the basis of disability by public entities in all services, programs, and activities provided or made available by public entities, and the rules and regulations promulgated pursuant thereunto, are made a part of this contract. In providing any aid, benefit, or service on behalf of the County College pursuant to this contract, the Contractor agrees that the performance shall be in strict compliance with the Act.

8. Construction Contracts: Required Contractor Registration for Public Works Projects: “The Public Works Contractor Registration Act” (P.L. 1999, c.238), effective April 11, 2000, requires that all contractors and subcontractors must be registered with the New Jersey Department of Labor in order to bid on or engage in any contract for public work. Bidders must include evidence of registration, i.e. certificate from the Department of Labor indicating compliance, or copy of application for registration.

9. The College requires that the contractor demonstrate a safety and health program/plan referencing first aid, fire protection, housekeeping, illumination, sanitation, personal protective equipment, medical, exits and emergency action plans. This document will be site specific for inspection and training and will serve to communicate these work practices to all project contractors.

10. Business Registration Certificate, P.L. 2009, c.315: Effective September 1, 2004, N.J.S.A. 52:32- 44 requires mandatory “Business Registration” for any vendor doing business in the State of New Jersey. A copy of the Business Registration Certificate issued by the New Jersey Department of Treasury / Division of Revenue shall be provided no less than 10 (ten) business days prior to Board Approval. Please contact New Jersey Department of Treasury / Division of Revenue with any questions or concerns at (609) 292-1730.

Pursuant to N.J.S.A. 54:49-4.1, a business organization that fails to provide a copy of a business registration, or that provides false business registration information, shall be liable for a penalty of $25 for each day of violation, not to exceed $50,000 for each business registration copy not properly provided under a contract with a contracting agency.

11. Record Retention: N.J.A.C. 17:44-2.2 requires that the selected vendor shall maintain all

documentation for a period of five years from the date of final payment. Such records shall be made available to the New Jersey Office of the State Comptroller upon request.

12. Political Contributions: Any business entity making a contribution of money or any other thing of

value, including an in-kind contribution, or pledge to make a contribution of any kind to a candidate for or the holder of any public office having ultimate responsibility for the awarding of public contracts, or to a political party committee, which has received in any calendar year $50,000 or more in the aggregate through agreements or contracts with a public entity, shall file an annual disclosure statement with the New Jersey Election Law Enforcement Commission, established pursuant to section 5 of P.L 1973, c83 (C. 19:44A-5), setting forth all such contributions made by the business entity during the 12 months prior to the reporting deadline.

C. PREPARATION OF BIDS

1. All bids shall be made on the Bid Form which is included in the bid documents. All blanks on the

Bid Form must be appropriately filled in with cost amounts. Any alterations or erasures must be



initialed by the bidder. Bid prices must be in ink or typewritten, in both words and figures. No conditions, limitations or provision may be placed on a bid.

2. Each bid must give the full business address of the bidder and be signed by the bidder with his/her usual signature. Bids (including all required supporting documents) by partnerships must be signed with the partnership name by one of the members of the partnership or by an authorized representative, followed by the signature and title of the person signing. Bids, including all required supporting documents, by corporation must be signed with the legal name of the corporation, followed by the name of the state of incorporation and by the signature and title of the president, secretary, or other person authorized to bind it in the matter. The name of each person signing shall also be typed or printed below the signature. A bid by a person who affixes to his/her signature the word "president," "secretary," "agent," or other title without disclosing his/her principal, may be held to be the bid of the individual signing. When requested by the College, satisfactory evidence of the authority of the officer signing in behalf of a corporation shall be furnished.

3. Prices should include a sufficient amount to cover the cost of any and all work or material called for in addenda to the specifications or other instructions issued during the bidding period. Such additions shall automatically become a part of the contract.

4. Prices quoted shall include freight or other charges incidental to the delivery of the item bid upon.

5. Alternate Bids and Unit Prices for the various portions of the Work or Contracts shall be as stated in other Sections of the Specifications.

6. Attention is called particularly to the requirements for filling in all Alternate Bids called for on the Proposal Form, as the Owner reserves the right to award a Contract based upon the possible inclusion of one or more such Alternate Bids. The amounts of the Alternate Bids shall include any and all modifications to related, adjacent or surrounding work made necessary by use of such Alternate Bids. The Alternate Bids must be stated as additions to or deductions from the Base Bid, unless otherwise noted.

7. The term “No Bid” shall not be used with respect to Alternate Bids requested on the Proposal Form. The Bidder who does not desire to make a change from the Base Bid under a particular Alternate Bid shall so indicate by using the words “No Change”. Failure to bid or use of the term “No Bid” on any Alternate may cause rejection of an entire bid.

8. Conditions, limitations or provisos attached by the Bidder to the Proposal may cause its rejection.

9. The College is established under the authority of the State of New Jersey and is entitled to exemption from Federal, State and local taxes, including the New Jersey Sales Tax. No amount attributable to taxes should be included in bid prices.



10. When a catalog reference follows the description of any item in the specifications, it is intended as a means of more fully describing the item in the shortest possible space and is to be regarded as part of the description of the item. Catalog numbers have been adopted from their respective sources for purposes of identification and to establish minimum requirements for quality and design. The College will consider products of manufacturers which are equal in quality and design to the items specified if such products in all ways meet the specifications. The decision of the College as to whether an alternate or substitute is in fact equal shall be final.

After Award of Contract, any time and materials expended by the Architect and his engineers for the review of any substitutions will be charged back to Contractor in the form of Change Order.

11. Proposals shall be submitted in triplicate on the Form of Proposal furnished by the Architect properly filled out in the manner designated and duly executed, including Affidavits. Enclose one (1) original (Marked as “ORIGINAL” on the cover) and two (2) copies (Marked as “COPY” on the cover) of the Proposal. Proposal Forms shall not be altered or added to in any way. Lump sum bid or base bid prices shall be filled in, in ink or typewritten, in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount described in words shall govern.

a. Form of Bid Proposal (Bid Form, Section 004113 Form).

b. Certified Check or Form of Bid Bond (Section 004313 Form).

c. Surety Disclosure Statement and Certification (Form of Proposition of Surety) (Section 004316 Form) and evidence of performance security from the prime bidder all subcontractors to whom the bidder will subcontract the work.

d. Consent of Surety for prime bidder and/or all subcontractors to whom the bidder will subcontract the work at the time of the bid submittal (Section 004319). Note, if the General Contractor’s Consent of Surety covers any or all subcontractors, then the Consent of Surety is not required for subcontractors who are covered by the General Contractor’s Consent of Surety. General Contractor to provide proof at the time of bid.

e. Subcontractor’s Identification Form (Section 004336 Form).

f. Prevailing Wage Compliance Declaration (Section 004343 Form).

g. Hold Harmless Agreement (Section 004363 Form).

h. Site Visit Verification (Section 004373 Form).

i. Affidavit of Non-Collusive (Section 004519 Form), pursuant to N.J.S.A. 52:34-15.

j. Stockholder Disclosure Certification (Section 004530 Form).

k. No Material Change of Circumstances Affidavit (Section 004535 Form). Required for Bidder and all specialty trade sub-contractors named on the Form of Bid Proposal.

l. Affirmative Action Language: Exhibit B and Affirmative Action Acknowledgment (Section 004536 Form).

m. Disclosure of Investment Activities in Iran (Section 004540 Form).

n. Contractor’s Equipment Certification (Section 04550 Form).

o. Notarized State of New Jersey Form (DBC 701) noting total amount of uncompleted contracts. Required for Bidder and all specialty trade sub-contractors named on the Form of Bid Proposal. This form may be obtained from the New Jersey Department of Treasury



website under the Division of Property Management and Construction, Division Pages, Forms.

p. Certificate by the Department of Labor indicating compliance with “The Public Works Contractor Registration Act” (P.L. 1999, c.238) for compliance with this Act. Required for Bidder and all specialty trade sub-contractors named on the Form of Bid Proposal.

q. Proof of valid DPMC NOTICE OF CLASSIFICATION, as issued by the State of New Jersey, Department of Treasury, Division of Property Management and Construction (DPMC). Required for Bidder and all specialty trade sub-contractors named on the Form of Bid Proposal.

r. Contractor or Trade License required under applicable New Jersey Law for any trade or specialty area (applicable to plumbing, mechanical and electrical trades).

D. METHOD OF AWARD

1. Notification of the acceptance of the bid and award of the contract will be made as soon as practical

after the opening of the bids. Contract will be awarded after due consideration of all factors relevant to the bidder's responsibility as well as the price, so that the College, consistent with law, will gain the advantage of a contract which in its judgment will best serve the interests of the College and the public.

2. Award made to a Bidder not a resident of the State of New Jersey is conditioned upon Bidder designating a proper agent in the State of New Jersey on whom service can be made in the event of litigation.

3. If the successful Bidder is a corporation not organized under the laws of New Jersey, the award of contract and payment of consideration there under shall be conditioned upon Corporation promptly filing a certificate of doing business in the State of New Jersey pursuant to N.J.S.A. 14A:13-2 and complying with provisions of N.J.S.A. 14A:13-4.

4. In accordance with N.J.S.A. 40A:11-1, when alternates bids are requested by the contracting unit and included as part of the contract bid package, the College intends to award the alternates bids in the order of ranking indicated, starting with alternate Bid AB-1.

5. The determination of responsive, lowest bidder shall be made by the College based upon the verification that a submitted bid package is complete, the price of the base bid, along with the price indicated for the alternate bids that are accepted by the College.

6. In accordance with N.J.S.A. 18A:64A-25.20, whenever two or more bids of equal amounts are the lowest bids submitted by responsible bidders, the Owner may award the Contract to any one of such bidders as in its discretion it may determine.

7. Within 10 days after the giving of the Notice of Award, the successful Bidder shall be required to execute the Contract with the College. The form of agreement shall be the AIA A101-2017 edition, Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor, used with the A201-2017 edition, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.

8. Bidder acknowledges that this bid and the award of a contract are governed by the County College Contracts Law N.J.S.A. 18A:65A-25.1 et. seq. and that any legal challenges to the bidding process, the award or non-award of a contract, or the rejection of any bids, must be pursued before the Board of Trustees in accordance with P.L. 1994 Ch.48, Sec.6(f). The challenge or objection must be presented by filing a petition with the secretary of the Board of



Trustees within ten (10) calendar days of the decision to award or not award a contract. Proceedings on the petition shall be governed by the Rules Governing Hearings before the Board of Trustees of Atlantic Cape Community College, which rules may be obtained at the office of the Dean of Administration and Business Services.

E. BID SECURITY

1. Each bid must be accompanied by:

a. a certified check, or a cashier's check of the bidder in the amount of 10% of the base bid amount made out to "Atlantic Cape Community College," or

b. a bid bond made payable to the College prepared and duly executed by the bidder as principal, having as a surety thereon a surety company approved by the College in the amount of 10% of the total amount of the bid.

2. The surety company on a bid bond must be acceptable to the College, authorized to transact business in New Jersey, and must be named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts, U.S. Treasury Department. Where an attorney-in-fact has signed the bid bond, a certified and effectively dated copy of the power of attorney must be presented with the bond.

3. Pursuant to N.J.S.A. 18A:64A-25:18, the checks or bid bonds of all except the three lowest bidders will be returned, if requested, after ten days from opening of bids, Sundays and holidays excepted. Within three days after the award of contract and the approval of the Contractor’s performance payment bond, the bid security of the remaining unsuccessful bidders will be returned, if requested, Sundays and holidays excepted.

4. The bid security of the successful bidder shall be forfeited and retained as liquidated damages if he/she neglects or refuses to execute the contract and, where applicable, furnish a performance/payment bond within ten (10) days after notice of the award of the contract. Acceptance of forfeiture by the College shall not limit the remedies available to the College upon default, and it may recover full damages including Alternate Bids, which the Owner wishes to accept and that amount for which the Owner is obligated on award to another Bidder, in addition thereto in accordance with law.

5. The proposal guarantee shall similarly be forfeited as liquidated damages if the qualification

Questionnaire or Bid Affidavit required to be submitted contains a false, deceptive or fraudulent statement.

F. PERFORMANCE/PAYMENT BOND

1. Pursuant to N.J.S.A. 18A:64A-25.17, Proposals shall be accompanied by a Performance Security

in form as bound in these documents, assuring that satisfactory arrangements have been made between the surety and the Bidder by which surety agrees to furnish the Bidder with a Performance Bond and Maintenance Bond to include Surety Disclosure Statement and Certification in form as bound herein. The Performance Security shall be executed by an approved surety company authorized to do business in the State of New Jersey or by the individual if an individual surety is offered by the bidder.



2. Pursuant to N.J.S.A. 18A:64A-25.25, Bidders submitting proposals for this Contract shall include Performance Security in form as bound in these documents, as hereinbefore specified.

3. The Bidder to whom the Contract has been awarded shall, within ten (10) days after notification of award of contract, furnish and deliver a Performance and Payment Bond, equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Amount. If, at any time after execution and approval of a Contract and Performance-Payment Bond required by the Contract, such Bond shall cease to be adequate security for the Owner, the Contractor shall, within five (5) days after such notice to do so, furnish a new or additional Bond, inform sum and signed by such sureties as shall be satisfactory to the Owner. No further payment shall be deemed due nor shall any further payment be made to the Contractor unless and until such new or additional Bond be furnished and approved. Surety must be authorized to do business in the State of New Jersey.

4. Each bidder must submit with his bid a certificate from a surety company that it will provide the bidder with the bond described in paragraph F.3.

5. The surety company on a performance/payment bond must be acceptable to the College, must be authorized to transact business in New Jersey, and must be named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts, U.S. Treasury Department. The surety shall comply with all provisions of N.J.S.A. 18A:64A-25.17(c) et. seq. Evidence of compliance must be submitted in the form of the "Surety Disclosure Statement and Certification" which must be included with the bid. Failure to submit this statement will result in rejection of the bid.

6. Where an attorney-in-fact has signed the performance/payment bond, a certified and effectively dated copy of the power of attorney must be presented with the bond.

7. Prior to the start of the guarantee period and before the final payment is made, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with a Maintenance Bond in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the Final Contract Amount, to insure the replacement or repair of defective materials or workmanship during the one-year guarantee period.

8. The cost of all Bonds shall be paid for by the Contractor.

9. Attorneys-in-fact who sign Bid Bonds, Performance-Payment Bonds, Maintenance Bonds and Performance Security forms must accompany each bond or proposition with a certified and effectively dated copy of their power-of-attorney.

G. IRREVOCABLE LETTER OF CREDIT

1. At the time set for signing the contract, the successful bidder may deliver an Irrevocable Letter of

Credit (in lieu of the Performance/Payment Bond) in the amount of 100% of the accepted bid on the forms included in the RFP. The premium for such letter shall be paid by the bidder and will be part of the price quoted in the bid.

H. PERFORMANCE OF CONTRACT



1. Failure of a bidder to execute a contract awarded to him/her, or to comply with any or all of the terms and conditions thereof, may disqualify him/her from receiving future contracts. Such disqualification or the failure to disqualify shall not limit the remedies available to the College upon default and it may recover full damages in addition thereto in accordance with law.

2. Insofar as possible and if applicable, the successful bidder in carrying out the contract must employ such methods or means as will not cause any interruption of, or interference with, the work of any other contractor or any of the customary operations of the College.

3. Bidders shall acquaint themselves with the conditions to be found at the College and shall assume all responsibility for the performance of the contract. The College will not accept deliveries for contractors.

4. Successful bidders will guarantee:

a. to furnish adequate protection for all work and to repair damage of any kind for which they or their agents or employees are responsible;

b. to carry adequate insurance, as required by General and Supplementary Conditions, to protect the College from any and all claims on behalf of any person, firm or corporation arising out of any action or work performed by the successful bidders or their agents, or employees relating to the performance of the contract.

5. Indemnification.

a. The successful bidder shall indemnify and hold harmless the College and its agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses including attorneys' fees arising out of or resulting from the performance of the contract, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense

1) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and

2) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of the successful bidder, any subcontractor of the successful bidder, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder.

b. With respect to claims against the College by an employee of the successful bidder, any subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable the indemnification obligation under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the successful bidder or any subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.

c. The College may deduct amounts due to it under paragraph H.6 of this document from any sum or sums which may be due to the successful bidder under the contract.

6. The College agrees to make payment for the performance of the contract, subject to additions and deductions, within 60 days after performance has occurred and been found in compliance with the contract. Title to all supplies, materials and equipment shall pass to the College at the time of said payment.

7. Neither the final certificate of payment nor any provision in the bid documents or contract nor partial or entire use of the equipment, supplies or services by the College shall constitute an



acceptance thereof if not in accordance with the specifications and other documents included in the RFP, nor relieve the successful bidder of liability in respect to any express warranties or for faulty materials or workmanship. The successful bidder will agree to promptly remedy, without cost to the College, any defect which shall appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance if a standard manufacturer's warranty does not apply, unless a longer period is specified or allowed by the manufacturer. The College will give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness.

8. The work is to be completed as per the schedule indicated in Specification Section 011000 Summary.

I. INSURANCE

1. Before commencing the work, each Contractor shall procure and maintain until completion and

final acceptance of the work and shall cause each subcontractor to so procure and maintain, at least the following insurance:

a. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability. Worker's Compensation (statutory limits) and Employer's Liability Insurance with a limit of $500,000.00 covering each and every worker employed in connection with the work under contract, as provided for in each and every State and Federal statute applicable to Worker's Compensation.

b. Comprehensive General Liability. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance covering work under the contract (including premises/operations, products/completed operations, independent contractors, personal injury, broad form property damage and contractual liability coverage) with at least the following limits:

1) Bodily Injury and Personal Injury: $1,000,000.00 per occurrence.

2) Property Damage: $1,000,000.00 per occurrence.

c. Comprehensive Auto Liability. Comprehensive Auto Liability insurance covering all owned, hired and non-owned vehicles with at least the following limits of liability:

1) Bodily Injury: $1,000,000.00 per occurrence.

2) Liability: $1,000,000.00 per occurrence.

3) Property Damage Liability: $1,000,000.00 per occurrence.

2. Excess Liability Limits. Excess Liability coverage for personal injury and property damage shall be provided by the Contractor with a minimum limit of liability of $5,000,000.00.

3. Contractors may carry whatever additional insurance deemed necessary to protect themselves against hazards not covered by the Owner's Property Insurance, including coverage for theft, collapse, water damage, materials and equipment stored on site, and for materials and equipment stored off site, and against loss of owned or rented equipment and tools owned by mechanics or any tools, equipment, scaffolding, staging, towers and forms owned or rented by the Contractor, the value of which is not included in the cost of the work. Owner's "All Risk" Insurance does not cover theft of material unless installed and made an integral part of the building.

4. Subcontractors: Contractors shall require all their subcontractors to provide the aforementioned coverage as well as any other coverage that the Contractors may consider necessary and any deficiencies in their coverage and policy limits will be the sole responsibility of the contractors.



5. Certificates of Insurance. Before commencing operations, Contractor shall furnish to Owner a Certificate of Insurance evidencing:

a. The required coverage and limits written through an insurance company or companies acceptable to the Owner.

b. The effective and expiration dates of the policies.

c. Thirty (30) days written notice of cancellation or material change in any policies.

d. That a Waiver of Subjugation endorsement has been attached to all policies.

e. The fact that the Contractor's policies are primary insurance.

f. The contract number.

g. That Atlantic Cape Community College and their agents, and the Architect and their agents, are listed as additional insured.

6. Waiver of Subjugation: All insurance policies of the Contractor will be endorsed to waive all right of subjugation against the Owner.

7. The Owner as trustee shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five (5) days after the occurrence of the loss to the Owner's exercise of this power. The Owner as trustee shall, in that case, make settlement with the insurer.

8. Cancellation, Reduction, or Non-Renewal: If the insurance policies required herein are cancelled, or the coverage is reduced below the minimum specified, or expiration without renewal occurs before completion of the work, the Owner, at this option, may obtain the said certificates or policies, and charge the cost against money due the Contractor pursuant to the terms of this contract.

9. Builder’s Risk Insurance: The Contractor shall be required to secure and maintain Builder’s Risk Insurance for the project. Refer to Specification Section 006230 Supplementary Conditions for additional information.

END OF SECTION 00 21 13

FORM OF PROPOSAL (Bid Form) 004113-1


SECTION 004113 - FORM OF PROPOSAL (BID FORM)

PROPOSAL OF hereinafter called "BIDDER," a/an

□ corporation

□ partnership (check applicable term)

□ individual

organized and existing under the laws of the State of and doing business

as .

Bidder’s Address:

Bidder’s Phone Number:

TO: BOARD OF TRUSTEES OF ATLANTIC CAPE COMMUNITY COLLEGE 5100 Black Horse Pike Mays Landing, New Jersey 08330 (hereinafter called College.")

Members of the Board:

1. The bidder, in compliance with your Legal Notice inviting bids for the Bid of the BUILDING J RENOVATIONS AT THE MAYS LANDING, CAMPUS, located at 5100 Black Horse Pike in Mays Landing, New Jersey for the Atlantic Cape County Community College, having examined the specifications, drawings, Request for Proposal, various forms and related contract documents and the site of the proposed work and being familiar with all the conditions surrounding the proposed contract or the proposed construction, including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish and/or install the equipment, labor, materials and supplies and/or to construct the project in accordance with all the aforesaid documents within the time set forth therein and at the prices stated below. These prices are to cover all expenses incurred in supplying and/or installing the materials and equipment or performing the work required by the Request for Proposal of which this Bid Form is a part.

2. The bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda:

Addendum No. Dated:

Addendum No. Dated:

Addendum No. Dated:

Note: Failure to acknowledge all issued Addenda is a material defect to the bid.



3. The bidder agrees to deliver and/or install the materials and equipment and complete the project as described in the contract documents for the Base Bid Sum (words and numbers) of:

Prime Bidders shall be DPMC Classified for trades C008 (General Construction) or C009 (General Construction/Alterations and Additions). Provide proof of valid DPMC Notice of Classification, Total Amount of Uncompleted Contracts, (Form DBC-701), the Certification of No Material Adverse Change in Status Affidavit, Proposition of Surety, Consent of Surety and Trade License (when applicable) for the prime bidder and the listed subcontractors at the time of the bid submittal. Provide all subcontractor information per 18A:64A-25.25.

SINGLE OVERALL CONTRACT:

BASE BID Dollars (To Be Written in Full)

($ )

(Figures) Base Bid includes the $250,000.00 Allowance.

ALTERNATE BIDS:

ALTERNATE #1: State amount to be “ADDED TO” the base bid to provide all work and cost associated with installing new window assemblies at buildings D and K. Refer to the Alternate Specifications section 01 2300 for more detail about the scope of work.

ADD: $ Dollars

(To Be Written in Full) ($ )

(Figures) ALTERNATE #2:

State amount to be “ADDED TO” the base bid to provide all work and cost associated with installing a new ceiling system in the lobby of Building D. Refer to the Alternate Specifications section 01 2300 for more detail about the scope of work.

ADD: $ Dollars


(Figures) ALTERNATE #3:

State amount to be “ADDED TO” the base bid to provide all work and cost associated with installing new exterior windows and entrances at Building D. Refer to the Alternate Specifications section 01 2300 for more detail about the scope of work.

ADD: $ Dollars


(Figures)



NOTE: If written amount differs from the Numerical Figures, only the Written amount will be accepted as the correct BID. No conditions, limitations or provision may be placed on a bid.

4. The bidder understands that the College reserves the right to reject for any reason any and all bids and to waive any informalities in the bidding.

5. The bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of 60 days after the actual opening of the bids.

6. Within 10 days after receipt of written notice of acceptance of this bid and the award of the contract, the bidder will execute the contract with the College, and will deliver a performance payment bond and insurance certificate required by the RFP.



7. The bidder hereby certifies that all of the figures, computations and additions used in estimating the bid herein have been carefully checked and are accurate in all respects, and no claim shall be made as the basis for withdrawal of this bid after opening on the grounds of mathematical error.

8. The Forms noted below are part of the Bid package and must be properly completed and submitted with Bid Proposal. Failure to provide any items noted below may cause disqualification of Bid Proposal in accordance with the law. Proposals shall be submitted in triplicate on the Form of Proposal furnished by the Architect properly filled out in the manner designated and duly executed, including Affidavits. Enclose one (1) original and two (2) copies of the Proposal. Proposal Forms shall not be altered or added to in any way.

a. Form of Bid Proposal (Bid Form, Section 004113 Form).

b. Certified Check or Form of Bid Bond (Section 004313 Form).

c. Surety Disclosure Statement and Certification (Form of Proposition of Surety) (Section 004316 Form) and evidence of performance security from the prime bidder all subcontractors to whom the bidder will subcontract the work.

d. Consent of Surety for prime bidder and/or all subcontractors to whom the bidder will subcontract the work at the time of the bid submittal (Section 004319). Note, if the General Contractor’s Consent of Surety covers any or all subcontractors, then the Consent of Surety is not required for subcontractors who are covered by the General Contractor’s Consent of Surety. General Contractor to provide proof at the time of bid.

e. Subcontractor’s Identification Form (Section 004336 Form)

f. Prevailing Wage Compliance Declaration (Section 004343 Form).

g. Hold Harmless Agreement (Section 004363 Form).

h. Site Visit Verification (Section 004373 Form).

i. Affidavit of Non-Collusive (Section 004519 Form).

j. Stockholder Disclosure Certification (Section 004530 Form).

k. No Material Change of Circumstances Affidavit (Section 004535 Form). Required for Bidder and all specialty trade sub-contractors named on the Form of Bid Proposal.

l. Affirmative Action Language: Exhibit B and Affirmative Action Acknowledgment (Section 004536 Form).

m. Disclosure of Investment Activities in Iran (Section 004540 Form).

n. Contractor’s Equipment Certification (Section 04550 Form).

o. Notarized State of New Jersey Form (DBC 701) noting total amount of uncompleted contracts. Required for Bidder and all specialty trade sub-contractors named on the Form of Bid Proposal. This form may be obtained from the New Jersey Department of Treasury website under the Division of Property Management and Construction, Division Pages, Forms.

p. Certificate by the Department of Labor indicating compliance with “The Public Works Contractor Registration Act” (P.L. 1999, c.238) for compliance with this Act. Required for Bidder and all specialty trade sub-contractors named on the Form of Bid Proposal.

q. Proof of valid DPMC NOTICE OF CLASSIFICATION, as issued by the State of New Jersey, Department of Treasury, Division of Property Management and Construction



(DPMC). Required for Bidder and all specialty trade sub-contractors named on the Form of Bid Proposal.

r. Contractor or Trade License required under applicable New Jersey Law for any trade or specialty area (applicable to plumbing and electrical trades).

Written Signature:

Printed/Typed Signature:

Title:

Name of Firm:

Address:

Telephone Number: Fax Number

E-Mail Address: Taxpayer Federal ID Number



NOTE: DO NOT FAIL TO EXECUTE THIS OATH OR AFFIDAVIT:

AFFIDAVIT

STATE OF )

COUNTY OF )

SS:

(Name of Bidder or Bidders, or if Bidder is a corporation, name of Officer or Agent making Affidavit.)

being duly sworn, says that the several declarations and matters stated in the annexed estimate are in all respects true.

I hereby certify that I am the of the bidder submitting this proposal and that I am authorized to submit this bid on behalf of the bidder and that the information contained in all bidding documents submitted by the bidder is true and accurate. I further certify that the bidder and all subcontractors listed herein have sufficient means and experience to complete the work in accordance with the project specifications. I am aware that if any of the foregoing statements made by me are willfully false, I am subject to punishment.

Signature of:

(Bidder, if Bidder is an Individual)

(Partner, if Bidder is a Partnership)

(Officer, if Bidder is a Corporation)

Sworn and subscribed before me this

day of 20 .

NOTARY PUBLIC (Signature)

(Print Name)

Notary Public - State of

My Commission Expires

SEAL



END OF FORM OF PROPOSAL 004113

FORM OF BID BOND 004313-1


SECTION 004313 - FORM OF BID BOND

WE, THE UNDERSIGNED , a/an

□ Corporation

□ Partnership (check applicable term)

□ Individual

as Principal and , as Surety, are held firmly bound unto

Atlantic Cape Community College, as Owner, in the penal sum of $ , for the

payment of which we hereby jointly and severally bid ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators,

successors and assigns.

THE CONDITION OF THE ABOVE OBLIGATION is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to Atlantic Cape County Community College a certain Bid, attached hereto and hereby made apart hereof, to enter into a contract in writing, for the:

BUILDING D and K

RENOVATIONS AT THE MAYS LANDING CAMPUS

Atlantic Cape Community College Mays Landing, New Jersey 08330

NOW THEREFORE,

(a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract, properly completed in accordance with said Bid, and shall furnish a bond for the faithful performance of said contract and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid,

then this obligation shall be void; otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect; it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated.

The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunder set their hands and seals, and such of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by the proper officers, this

day of , 20 . (continued on next page)

FORM OF BID BOND 004313-2


ATTEST:

Principal: (L.S.)

Surety: By:

STATE OF ) : SS:

COUNTY OF )

On this day of 20 , before me personally came

to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did dispose and say;

he resides in that he is the

of the instrument; that he knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation, and that he signed his name thereto by like order.

(SEAL)

Notary Public of

My Commission expires

END SECTION 004313

SURETY DISCLOSURE STATEMENT AND CERTIFICATION 004316-1


SECTION 004316 - SURETY DISCLOSURE STATEMENT AND CERTIFICATION

surety(ies) on the attached bond, hereby certifies(y) the following:

1. The surety meets the applicable capital and surplus requirements of R.S. 17:17-6 or R.S. 17:17-7 as of the surety's most current annual filing with the New Jersey Department of Insurance.

2. The capital (where applicable) and surplus, as determined in accordance with the applicable laws of this State, of the surety(ies) participating in the issuance of the attached bond is (are) in the following amount(s) as of the calendar year ended December 31, (most recent calendar year for which capital and surplus amounts are available), which amounts have been certified as indicated by certified public accountants (indicating separately for each surety that surety's capital and surplus amounts, together with the name and address of the firm of certified public accounts that shall have certified those amounts):

3. (a) With respect to each surety participating in the issuance of the attached bond that has received from the United States Secretary of the Treasury a certificate of authority pursuant to 31 U.S.C. 9305, the underwriting limitation established therein and the date as of which that limitation was effective is as follows (indicating for each such surety that surety's underwriting limitation and the effective date thereof):

(b) With respect to each surety participating in the issuance of the attached bond that has not received such a certificate of authority from the United States Secretary of the Treasury, the underwriting limitation of that surety as established pursuant to R.S.17:18-9 as of (date on which such limitation was so established) is as follows (indicating for each such surety that surety's underwriting limitation and the date on which that limitation was established):

4. The amount of the bond to which this statement and certification is attached is $ .

5. If, by virtue of one or more contracts of reinsurance, the amount of the bond indicated under item (4) above exceeds the total underwriting limitation of all sureties on the bond as set forth in items (3)(a) or (3)(b) above, or both, then for each such contract of reinsurance:

(continued on next page)



(a) The name and address of each such reinsurer under that contract and the amount of that reinsurer's participation in the contract is as follows:

(b) Each surety that is party to any such contract of reinsurance certifies that each reinsurer listed under item 5(a) satisfies the credit for reinsurance requirement established under P.L.1993, c.243 (C.17:51B-1 et seq.) and any applicable regulations in effect as of the date on which the bond to which this statement and certification is attached shall have been filed with the appropriate public agency.




CERTIFICATE (to be completed by an authorized certifying agent for each surety on the bond)

I (name of agent), as

(title of agent), for

(name of surety),

a

□ Corporation

□ Mutual insurance company (check one)

□ Other

(indicating type of business organization) domiciled in (state of domicile),

DO HEREBY CERTIFY that, to the best of my knowledge, the foregoing statements made by me are

true, and ACKNOWLEDGE that, if any of those statements are false, this bond is VOID.

Signature of certifying agent:

Printed name of certifying agent:

Title of certifying agent:

Amended by L.1995, c.384 & 3,eff. Jan. 10, 1996; Section N.J.S.A. 18A:64A-25.17

END OF SECTION 004316


SECTION 004319 - ATLANTIC CAPE COMMUNITY COLLEGE CONSENT OF SURETY

A performance bond will be required from the successful bidder, including all subcontractors, on this project as N.J.S.A. 18A:64A-25.25 requires, and consequently, all bidders/vendors, including all subcontractors, shall submit, with their bid, a consent of surety in substantially the following form:

To:

(Owner – Atlantic Cape Community College)

Re: (Bidder/Vendor)

(Project Description)

This is to certify that the will provide to (Surety Company)

a performance bond in the full amount of the awarded contract in (Owner)

the event that said vendor is awarded a contract for the above project.

(Bidder/Vendor)

(Authorized Agent of Surety Company)

Date:

CONSENT OF SURETY MUST BE SIGNED BY AN AUTHORIZED AGENT OR REPRESENTATIVE OF A SURETY COMPANY AND NOT BY THE INDIVIDUAL OR COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE SUBMITTING THE BID.

THE CONTRACTOR MAY PROVIDE BONDING ON BEHALF OF THE SUBCONTRACTORS.


CONSENT OF SURETY 004319-1


SECTION 004343 - PREVAILING WAGE COMPLIANCE DECLARATION - SECTION III

To: Atlantic Cape Community College

Re: BUILDINGS D AND K RENOVATIONS MAYS

LANDING CAMPUS Atlantic Cape Community College

Atlantic County, Mays Landing, New Jersey

The Contractor hereby agrees to comply in all respect with the New Jersey Prevailing Wage Act, Chapter 150, P.L. 1963 as amended. A copy of the prevailing wage rates pertaining to the work and issued by the New Jersey Department of Labor and Industry entitled, “Prevailing Wage Rate Determination,” is on file in the Owner’s office or may be obtained from the New Jersey Department of Labor and Industry. For job categories not covered under prevailing wage rates, bidders are required to pay to workers at least the legally established minimum wage at all times during the contract period. In the event it is found that any worker employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor covered by the contract herein has been paid a rate of wages less than the prevailing rate required to be paid by such contract, the Owner may terminate the Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s right to proceed with the work or such part of the work as to which there has been a failure to pay required wages and to prosecute the work to completion or otherwise. The Contractor and his sureties shall be liable to the Owner for any excess costs occasioned thereby.

Before final payment is made by or on behalf of the Owner of any sum or sums due to the work, the Contractor or Subcontractor shall file with the Owner, written statements in form satisfactory to the commissioner of Labor and Industry certifying to the amounts then due and owing from such contractor or subcontractor filing such statement to any and all workmen for wages due on account of the work, setting forth therein the names of the persons whose wages are unpaid and the amount due to each respectively which statement shall be certified by the oath of the Contractor or Subcontractor as the case may be in accordance with the said New Jersey Prevailing Wage Act.

The prevailing wage rate shall be determined by the Commissioner of Labor and Industry or his duly authorized deputy or representative.

The undersigned is an (individual (partnership) (corporation) under the Laws of the State of

having principal offices at

BIDDER

SIGNATURE

NAME

TITLE

DATE


PREVAILING WAGE COMPLIANCE DECLARATION 004343-1


SECTION 004343 - STATEMENT OF OWNERSHIP

This is to certify that in accordance with Chapter 33, Laws of 1977, the names and addresses of all stockholders in this corporation or partnership who own 10% or more of its stock, of any class, or of all individual partners in the partnership who own a 10% or greater interest therein, as the case may be, are listed below. If one or more such stockholder or partner is itself a corporation, or partnership, the stockholders holding 10% or more of that corporations, stock, or the individual partners owing 10% or greater interest in that partnership, as the case may be, are also listed.

NAME ADDRESS

Authorized Person Printed Name:

Authorized Person Signature:

Representing:

Address:


STATEMENT OF OWNERSHIP 004353-1


SECTION 004363 - HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT

It is further agreed that the undersigned hereby agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Board of Trustees, its officers, employees, volunteers, and agents, from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses including reasonable attorney’s fees in case it shall be necessary to file an action, arising out of performance of the work herein, which is; 1) for personal or bodily injury, illness or death, or for property damage, including loss of se, and; 2) caused in whole or in part by

(Name of contractor)

negligent act or omission or that a subcontractor or that of anyone employed by them or for whose acts contractor or subcontractor may be liable. This indemnification and agreement shall apply in all instances whether the Board of Trustees, its officers, employees, volunteers and / or agents, is/are made a party to the action or claim or is subsequently made a party to the action by third-party-inpleading or is made a part to a collateral action arising, in the whole or in part, from any of the issues emanating from the original cause of action or claim.

Full Name of Contractor:

Business Address:

Zip Code:

Telephone Number:

Project Description:

Authorized Person Printed Name:

Authorized Person Signature:

Witness Printed Name:

Witness Signature:


HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT 004363-1


SECTION 004373 - SITE VISIT VERIFICATION

In submitting this proposal, I verify that I have personally visited the site and acquainted myself with the conditions there existing as noted in the specifications.

Sworn to and subscribed before me (signature)

This day of

Printed Name:

Company Name:

Address:

Title:


SITE VISIT VERIFICATION 004373-1


SECTION 004519 - AFFIDAVIT OF NON-COLLUSION

Name of Project: BUILDINGS D AND K RENOVATIONS MAYS LANDING CAMPUS Atlantic Cape Community College

I, (Name) of the County of (County)

and the State of (State), of full age, being duly sworn according to law, on my oath, depose and say that:

I am (Official Position)

of the firm of (Bidder’s Name),

the bidder making the Proposal for the above named project, and that I executed the said Proposal with full authority to do so.

I, and to the best of my knowledge, the Bidder, and any officer, director, employee or other representative of the bidder, have not, directly or indirectly, entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free, competitive bidding in connection with the above named project.

All statements contained in said Bid and all Contract Documents and in this affidavit are true and correct, and made with full knowledge that the Board of Trustees of Atlantic Cape Community College relies upon the truth of the statements contained in said Bid and contract documents and in the statements contained in this affidavit in awarding the contract for the said project.

Sworn on behalf of:

Name of Firm (Bidder)

Signature of Official

Subscribed and sworn to me this

day of ,20

(name) (Seal)

Notary Public of: (State)


AFFIDAVIT OF NON-COLLUSION 004519-1

STOCKHOLDER DISCLOSURE CERTIFICATION 004530-1


SECTION 004530 – STOCKHOLDER DISCLOSURE CERTIFICATION

This statement shall be completed, certified to, and included with all bid and proposal submissions. Failure to submit the required information is cause for automatic rejection of the bid or proposal.

Name of Organization:

Organization Address:

City, State, ZIP:

Part I Check the appropriate box

I certify that the list below contains the names and home addresses of all stockholders holding 10% or more of the issued and outstanding stock of the undersigned

OR

I certify that no one stockholder owns 10% or more of the issued and outstanding sotck of the undersigned.

Part II Check the box that represents the type of business organization:

Sole Proprietorship

Corporation

Partnership

Subchapter S Corporation

Limited Liability Company (LLC)

Limited Partnership

Limited Liability Partnership (LLP)

Other (be specific):

STOCKHOLDER DISCLOSURE CERTIFICATION 004530-2


Sign and Notarize the form below, and, if necessary, complete the stockholder list below:

Name of Individual or Business Entity Home Address (for Individuals) or Business Address

Subscribed and sworn before me this day of

(day) (month, year)

(Notary Public)

My Commission Expires:

(Affiant)

(Print name and title of Affiant)

END SECTION 004530.


SECTION 004535 - NO MATERIAL CHANGE OF CIRCUMSTANCES AFFIDAVIT

I, being of full age under oath depose and say:

1. I am a(n) owner, partner, shareholder or officer of the company set forth below and am duly authorized to execute this affidavit on its behalf.

2. A statement as to the financial ability, adequacy of plant and equipment, organization and

prior experience of [Bidder], has been submitted to the Department of Treasury within one (1) year preceding the date of opening of bids for this contract.

3. I certify, that there has been no material adverse change in the qualification information of

[Bidder] since such statement was submitted to the Department of Treasury except:

.

SEAL

TITLE

COMPANY

Sworn to and subscribed before me on this day of , 20 .

Notary Public


NO MATERIAL CHANGE OF CIRCUMSTANCES 004535-1

AFFIRMATIVE ACTION LANGUAGE OF EXHIBIT B and ACKNOWLEDGMENT 004536-1


SECTION 004536 – AFFIRMATIVE ACTION LANGUAGE: EXHIBIT B and AFFIRMATIVE ACTION ACKNOWLEDGMENT

EXHIBIT B: N.J.S.A. 10.5-31 et seq. (P.L. 1975, c127)

N.J.A.C. 17:27-1.1 et seq.

MANDATORY EQUAL OPPORTUNITY LANGUAGE: CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS

During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows:

a. The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable, will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation or sex. Except with respect to affectional or sexual orientation and gender identity or expression , the contractor will ensure that equal employment opportunity is afforded to such applicants in recruitment and employment, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex. Such equal employment opportunity shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the Public Agency Compliance Officer setting forth provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.

b. The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex;

c. The contractor or subcontractor will send to each labor union, with which it has a collective bargaining agreement, a notice, to be provided by the agency contracting officer, advising the labor union or workers' representative of the contractor's commitments under this act and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment.

d. The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable, agrees to comply with any regulations promulgated by the Treasurer pursuant to N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et seq., as amended and supplemented from time to time and the Americans with Disabilities Act.

e. When hiring or scheduling workers in each construction trade, the contractor or subcontractor agrees to make good faith efforts to employ minority and women workers in each construction trade consistent with the targeted employment goal prescribed by N.J.A.C. 17:27-7.2; provided, however, that the Department of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program, may, in its discretion, exempt a contractor or subcontractor from compliance with the good faith procedures prescribed by the following provisions, A, B and C, as long as the Department of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program is satisfied that the contractor or subcontractor is employing workers provided by a union which provides evidence, in accordance with standards prescribed by the Department of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program, that its percentage of active "card carrying" members who are minority and women workers is equal to or greater than the targeted employment goal established in accordance with N.J.S.A. 17:27-7.2.



The contractor or subcontractor agrees that a good faith effort shall include compliance with the following procedures:

(A) If the contractor or subcontractor has a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for a construction trade, the contractor or subcontractor shall, within three business days of the contract award, seek assurances from the union that it will cooperate with the contractor or subcontractor as it fulfills its affirmative action obligations under this contract and in accordance with the rules promulgated by the Treasurer pursuant to N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et seq., as supplemented and amended from time to time and the Americans with Disabilities Act. If the contractor or subcontractor is unable to obtain said assurances from the construction trade union, at least five business days prior to the commencement of construction work, the contractor or subcontractor agrees to afford equal employment opportunities minority and women workers directly, consistent with this chapter. If the contractor's or subcontractor's prior experience with a construction trade union, regardless of whether the union has provided said assurances, indicates a significant possibility that the trade union will not refer sufficient minority and women workers consistent with affording equal employment opportunities, as specified in this chapter, the contractor or subcontractor agrees to be prepared to provide such opportunities to minority and women workers directly, consistent with this chapter, by complying with the hiring or scheduling procedures prescribed under (B) below; and the contractor or subcontractor further agrees to take said action immediately if it determines that the union is not referring minority and women workers consistent with the equal employment opportunity goals set forth in this chapter.

(B) If good faith efforts to meet targeted employment goals have not or cannot be met for each construction trade by adhering to the procedures of (A) above, or if the contractor does not have a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for a construction trade, the contractor or subcontractor agrees to take the following actions:

(1) To notify the Public Agency Compliance Officer, the Department of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program, and minority and women referral organizations listed by the Division pursuant to N.J.A.C. 17:27-5.3, of its workforce needs, and request referral of minority and women workers;

(2) To notify any minority and women workers who have been listed with it as awaiting available vacancies;

(3) Prior to commencement of work, to request the local construction trade union refer minority and women workers to fill job openings, provided the contractor or subcontractor has a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for the construction trade;

(4) To leave standing requests for additional referral to minority and women workers with the local construction trade union, provided the contractor or subcontractor has a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for the construction trade, the State Training and Employment Service and other approved referral sources in the area;

(5) If it is necessary to lay off some of the workers in a given trade on the construction site, layoffs shall be conducted in compliance with the equal employment opportunity and non-discrimination standards set forth in this regulation, as well as the applicable Federal and State court decisions;

(6) To adhere to the following procedure when minority and women workers apply or are referred to the contractor or subcontractor:

(i) The contractor or subcontractor shall interview the referred minority or women worker.



(ii) If said individuals have never previously received any document or certification signifying a level of qualification lower than that required in order to perform the work of the construction trade, the contractor or subcontractor shall in good faith determine the qualifications of such individuals. The contractor or subcontractor shall hire or schedule those individuals who satisfy appropriate qualification standards in conformity with the equal employment opportunity and non-discrimination principles set forth in this chapter. However, a contractor or subcontractor shall determine that the individual at least possesses the requisite skills, and experience recognized by a union, apprentice program or a referral agency, provided the referral agency is acceptable to the Department of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program. If necessary, the contractor or subcontractor shall hire or schedule minority and women workers who qualify as trainees pursuant to these rules. All of the requirements, however, are limited by the provisions of (C) below.

(iii) The name of any interested women or minority individual shall be maintained on a waiting list, and shall be considered for employment as described in (i) above, whenever vacancies occur. At the request of the Department of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program, the contractor or subcontractor shall provide evidence of its good faith efforts to employ women and minorities from the list to fill vacancies.

(iv) If, for any reason, said contractor or subcontractor determines that a minority individual or a woman is not qualified or if the individual qualifies as an advanced trainee or apprentice, the contractor or subcontractor shall inform the individual in writing of the reasons for the determination, maintain a copy of the determination in its files, and send a copy to the Public Agency Compliance Officer and to the Department of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program.

(7) To keep a complete and accurate record of all requests made for the referral of workers in any trade covered by the contract, on forms made available by the Department of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program and submitted promptly to the Department of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program upon request.

(C) The contractor or subcontractor agrees that nothing contained in (B) above shall preclude the contractor or subcontractor from complying with the union hiring hall or apprenticeship policies in any applicable collective bargaining agreement or union hiring hall arrangement, and, where required by custom or agreement, it shall send journeymen and trainees to the union for referral, or to the apprenticeship program for admission, pursuant to such agreement or arrangement. However, where the practices of a union or apprenticeship program will result in the exclusion of minorities and women or the failure to refer minorities and women consistent with the targeted county employment goal, the contractor or subcontractor shall consider for employment persons referred pursuant to (B) above without regard to such agreement or arrangement; provided further, however, that the contractor or subcontractor shall not be required to employ women and minority advanced trainees and trainees in numbers which result in the employment of advanced trainees and trainees as a percentage of the total workforce for the construction trade, which percentage significantly exceeds the apprentice to journey worker ratio specified in the applicable collective bargaining agreement, or in the absence of a collective bargaining agreement, exceeds the ratio established by practice in the area for said construction trade. Also, the contractor or subcontractor agrees that, in implementing the procedures of the procedures of (B) above, it shall, where applicable, employ minority and women workers residing within the geographical jurisdiction of the union.

After notification of award, but prior to signing a construction contract, the contractor shall submit to the Public Agency Compliance Officer and the Department of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program an initial project workforce report (Form AA 201) electronically provided to the public agency by the Division, through its website, for distribution to and completion by the contractor, in accordance with N.J.A.C. 17:27-7. The contractor also agrees to submit a copy of the Monthly



Project Workforce Report once a month thereafter for the duration of this contract to the Department of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program and to the Public Agency Compliance Officer.

The contractor agrees to cooperate with the public agency in the payment of budgeted funds, as is necessary, for the on-the-job and/or off-the-job programs for outreach and training of minorities and women.

(D) The contractor and its subcontractors shall furnish such reports or other documents to the Department of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program as may be requested by the Department of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program from time to time in order to carry out the purposes of these regulations, and public agencies shall furnish such information as may be requested by the Department of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program for conducting a compliance investigation pursuant to Subchapter 10 of the Administrative Code at N.J.A.C. 17:27.

Authorized Signature Name of Firm Date

END SECTION 004536

State of New Jersey

JON S. CORZINE Governor

DEPARTMENT OF THE TREASURY DIVISION OF PUBLIC CONTRACTS

EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY COMPLIANCE PO Box 209

TRENTON, NJ 08625-0209

R. DAVID ROUSSEAU State Treasurer

NOTICE OF ADDITIONAL MANDATORY CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT LANGUAGE

On Friday, August 28, 2009, Governor Corzine signed Executive Order No. 151 which enhances inclusion efforts for minorities and women to benefit from the New Jersey Economic Assistance and Recovery Plan and the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (ARRA). The Executive Order includes a provision which requires all state agencies, independent authorities and colleges and universities to include additional mandatory equal employment and affirmative action language in its construction contracts. It is important to note that this language is in addition to and does not replace the mandatory contract language and good faith efforts requirements for construction contracts required by N.J.A.C. 17:27-3.6, 3.7 and 3.8, also known as Exhibit B. The additional mandatory equal employment and affirmative action language is as follows:

It is the policy of the [Reporting Agency] that its contracts should create a workforce that reflects the diversity of the State of New Jersey. Therefore, contractors engaged by the [Reporting Agency] to perform under a construction contract shall put forth a good faith effort to engage in recruitment and employment practices that further the goal of fostering equal opportunities to minorities and women.

The contractor must demonstrate to the [Reporting Agency]'s satisfaction that a good faith effort was made to ensure that minorities and women have been afforded equal opportunity to gain employment under the [Reporting Agency] 's contract with the contractor. Payment may be withheld from a contractor's contract for failure to comply with these provisions.

Evidence of a "good faith effort" includes, but is not limited to:

1. The Contractor shall recruit prospective employees through the State Job bank website, managed by the Department of Labor and Workforce Development, available online at http://NJ.gov/JobCentralNJ; 2. The Contractor shall keep specific records of its efforts, including records of all individuals interviewed and hired, including the specific numbers of minorities and women;

New Jersey Is An Equal Opportunity Employer o Printed 011 Recycled and Recyclable Paper

3. The Contractor shall actively solicit and shall provide the [Reporting Agency] with proof of solicitations for employment, including but not limited to advertisements in general circulation media, professional service publications and electronic media; and 4. The Contractor shall provide evidence of efforts described at 2 above to the [Reporting Agency] no less frequently than once every 12 months . 5. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements set forth at N.J.A.C. 17:27.

To ensure successful implementation of the Executive Order, state agencies, independent authorities and colleges and universities must forward an Initial Project Workforce Report (AA 201) for any projects funded with ARRA money to the Division of Public Contracts EEO Compliance immediately upon notification of award but prior to execution of the contract.

If you have questions or require additional information, please contact the Division at 609-292-5473.

Public Agency Guidelines For Administering EEO in Public Contracts

"If awarded a contract, your company/firm shall be required to comply with the requirements of N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et seq. and N.J.A.C. 17:27 et. seq."

2.3 Mandatory Contract Language

All contracts issued by a Public Agency must contain the mandatory affirmative action language set forth in N.J.A.C. 17:27 et seq. During a review, Division representatives will review the Public Agency's contracts to ensure compliance with this provision.

For all goods, general services and professional services vendors, Public Agency contracts must include the affirmative action language of Exhibit A (see Attachment 2).

For all construction contracts, Public Agency contracts must include the affirmative action language of Exhibit B (see Attachment 3). Additional mandatmy language for State Agencies, Independent Authorities, Colleges and Universities is also required as a result of Executive Order 151 and P.L.2009, c.335 (see attachment 14).

2.4 Affirmative Action Evidence

All successful bidders for goods, general services and professional services contracts are required to submit evidence of appropriate affirmative action compliance to the Division and the awarding Public Agency. For 'I

construction contracts, evidence must be submitted to Dept. of LWD and the awarding Public Agency. Dur- ing a review, Division representatives will review the Public Agency files to determine whether the affirmative action evidence has been submitted by the vendor or contractor. Specifically, each vendor or contractor shall submit to the Public Agency, prior to execution of the contract, one of the following documents: I

I Goods, General Services and Professional Services Vendors

1

1. Letter of Federal Approval indicating that the vendor is under an existing federally approved or sanc- tioned affirmative action program. A copy of the approval letter must be provided by the vendor to the Public Agency and the Division (see Attachment 4). This approval letter is valid for one year from the date of issuance. Or,

I

1 2. A Certificate of Employee Information Report (hereafter "Certificate"), issued in accordance with N.J.A.C. 17:27 et seq. The vendor must provide a copy of the Certificate to the Public Agency as evidence of its compliance with the regulations. The Certificate represents the review and approval of the vendor's Employee Information Report, Form AA-302 by the Division (see Attachment 5). Or,

(Note: The period of validity of the Certificate is indicated on its face. Certificates must be renewed prior to their expiration date in order to remain valid. The Certificate is valid for three years for any vendor with 50 or more employees or for seven years for any vendor with less than 50 employees. The Public Agency should review any Certificate submitted to ensure the date is still valid.)

1 3. The successful bidder shall complete an Initial Employee Report, Fo1m AA-302 and submit it to the Divi-

sion with a check or money order for $150.00 made payable to "Treasurer, State of NJ" and forward a copy of the Form to the Public Agency (see Attachment 6). Upon submission and review by the Division, the Report shall constitute evidence of compliance with the regulations.

6

DISCLOSURE OF INVESTMENT ACTIVITIES IN IRAN 004540-1


SECTION 004540 – DISCLOSURE OF INVESTMENT ACTIVITIES IN IRAN

Company Name

Pursuant to Public Law 2012, c. 25, any person or entity that submits a bid or proposal or otherwise proposes to enter into or renew a contract must complete the certification below to attest, under penalty of perjury, that the person or entity, or one of the person or entity's parents, subsidiaries, or affiliates, is not identified on a list created and maintained by the Department of the Treasury as a person or entity engaging in investment activities in Iran. If the Department of Treasury finds a person or entity to be in violation of the principles which are the subject of this law, the Department of Treasury shall take action as may be appropriate and provided by law, rule or contract, including but not limited to, imposing sanctions, seeking compliance, recovering damages, declaring the party in default and seeking debarment or suspension of the person or entity.

I certify, pursuant to Public Law 2012, c. 25, that the person or entity listed below for which I am authorized to bid:

� is not providing goods or services of $20,000,000 or more in the energy sector of Iran, including a person or entity that provides oil or liquefied natural gas tankers, or products used to construct or maintain pipelines used to transport oil or liquefied natural gas, for the energy sector of Iran, AND

� is not a financial institution that extends $20,000,000 or more in credit to another person or entity, for 45 days or more, if that person or entity will use the credit to provide goods or services in the energy sector in Iran.

In the event that a person or entity is unable to make the above certification because it or one of its parents, subsidiaries, or affiliates has engaged in the above-referenced activities, a detailed, accurate and precise description of the activities must be provided below to Atlantic Cape Community College under penalty of perjury.

PLEASE PROVIDE FURTHER INFORMATION RELATED TO INVESTMENT ACTIVITIES IN IRAN You must provide a detailed, accurate and precise description of the activities of the bidding person/entity, or one of its parents, subsidiaries or affiliates, engaging in the investment activities in Iran outlined above by completing the boxes below.

PROVIDE INFORMATION RELATIVE TO THE ABOVE QUESTIONS. PLEASE PROVIDE THOROUGH ANSWERS TO EACH QUESTION. IF YOU NEED TO MAKE ADDITIONAL ENTRIES, USE ADDITIONAL PAGES

DISCLOSURE OF INVESTMENT ACTIVITIES IN IRAN 004540-2


Name: Relationship to Bidder/Vendor:

Description of Activities:

Duration of Engagement:

Bidder/Vendor Contact Name: Contact Phone Number:

Certification: I, being duly sworn upon my oath, hereby represent and state that the foregoing information and any attachments thereto to the best of my knowledge are true and complete. I attest that I am authorized to execute this certification on behalf of the below-referenced person or entity. I acknowledge that Atlantic Cape Community College is relying on the information contained herein and thereby acknowledge that I am under a continuing obligation from the date of this certification through the completion of contracts with the College to notify the College in writing of any changes to the answers of information contained herein. I acknowledge that I am aware that it is a criminal offense to make a false statement or misrepresentation in this certification, and if I do so, I recognize that I am subject to criminal prosecution under the law and that it will also constitute a material breach of my agreements(s) with Atlantic Cape Community College and that the College at its option may declare contract(s) resulting from this certification void and unenforceable.

Full Name (Print): Signature:

Title: Date:

Bidder/Vendor:

END SECTION 004540

CONTRACTOR’S EQUIPMENT CERTIFICATION 004550-1


SECTION 004550 - CONTRACTOR’S EQUIPMENT CERTIFICATION

CERTIFICATION TO DEMONSTRATE THE CONTRACTOR’S ABILITY TO PERFORM THE WORK WITH THE NECESSARY EQUIPMENT REQUIRED

****************************************************************

I am (an Owner, a Partner, or an Officer of the Company or Corporation and indicate which) of the Firm

(Name of the Firm)

. (State the Address of the Firm)

CHOOSE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING

***********************************************

( ) A. I hereby certify on behalf of (Name of the Firm)

that we are the actual Owner, Lessee or control all equipment necessary to perform the work of this Project.

( ) B. I hereby certify on behalf of

(Name of the Firm)

that we are not the actual Owner or Lessee of the equipment necessary to perform the work of this Project. The source from which the equipment will be obtained is as follows: (Provide Names, Addresses and Telephone Numbers)

NOTE: Should additional Names, Addresses and Telephone Numbers be required, please list them on a separate sheet and attach to this document.

CONTRACTOR’S EQUIPMENT CERTIFICATION 004550-2


Certificates from the Owner or Person in control of the equipment clearly granting our Firm the control of the equipment required for such time as may be required to perform the work of this Project are included and attached to this Certification.

(Signature)

(Typed Name and Title)

(Date)



SECTION 006111 – STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR

The Contract to be used for this Project will be the 2017 Edition of AIA Document A101 - STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR, with modifications set forth in Section 006150 – SUPPLEMENT TO THE FORM OF AGREEMENT included herein.

The 2017 Edition of AIA Document A101 - STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR is included herein as reference. The actual agreement will include the provisions/modifications as noted in Section 006150 – SUPPLEMENT TO THE FORM OF AGREEMENT also included herein.


STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 006111 - 1

AIA Document A101™ - 2017. Copyright© 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document , or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:16:13 on 08/29/2018 under Order No.5333596477 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale .

lnlt. 1

User Notes: (1399085132)

ꞏ =I--ꞏ:AIA

Document A101TM - 2017

Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum

AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the year (In words, indicate day, month and year.)

BETWEEN the Owner: (Name, legal status, address and other information)

and the Contractor: (Nam e, legal status, address and other information)

for the following Project: (Name, location and detailed description)

The Architect: (Name, legal status, address and other information)

ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS:

The author of this document has

added infonnation needed for its

completion. The author may also

have revised the text of the original

AIA standard form. An Additions and

Deletions Report that notes added

information as well as revisions to the

standard form text is available from

the author and should be reviewed. A

vertical line in the left margin of this

document indicates where the author

has added necessary information

and where the author has added to or

deleted from the original AIA text.

This document has important legal

consequences. Consultation with an

attorney is encouraged with respect

to its completion or modification.

The parties should complete

A101™-2017, Exhibit A, Insurance

and Bonds, contemporaneously with

this Agreement. AIA Document

A201™-2017, General Conditions of

the Contract for Construction, is

adopted in this document by

reference. Do not use with other

general conditions unless this

document is modified.

The Owner and Contractor agree as follows.

AIA Document A101™ - 2017. Copyright© 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document , or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:16:13 on 08/29/2018 under Order No.5333596477 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale .

lnlt. 2

User Notes: (1399085132)

TABLE OF ARTICLES

1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT

3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

4 CONTRACT SUM

5 PAYMENTS

6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION

7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION

8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

EXHIBIT A INSURANCE AND BONDS

ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary, and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement, and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, all of which form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than a Modification, appears in Article 9.

ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except as specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others.

ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be: (Check one of the following boxes.)

The date of this Agreement.

A date set forth in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner.

Established as follows: (Insert a date or a means to determine the date of commencement of the Work.)

If a date of commencement of the Work is not selected, then the date of commencement shall be the date of this Agreement.

§ 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement of the Work.

§ 3.3 Substantial Completion § 3.3.1 Subject to adjustments of the Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work: (Check one of the following boxes and complete the necessary information.)

AIA Document A101™ - 2017. Copyright© 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:16:13 on 08/29/2018 under Order No.53335964 77 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale.

lnit. 3

User Notes: (1399085132)

Not later than ( ) calendar days from the date of commencement of the Work.

By the following date:

§ 3.3.2 Subject to adjustments of the Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents, if portions of the Work are to be completed prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, the Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of such portions by the following dates:

Portion of Work Substantial Completion Date

§ 3.3.3 If the Contractor fails to achieve Substantial Completion as provided in this Section 3.3, liquidated damages, if any, shall be assessed as set forth in Section 4.5.

ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM § 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor's performance of the Contract. The Contract Sum shall be ($ ), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2 Alternates § 4.2.1 Alternates, if any, included in the Contract Sum:

Item Price

§ 4.2.2 Subject to the conditions noted below, the following alternates may be accepted by the Owner following execution of this Agreement. Upon acceptance, the Owner shall issue a Modification to this Agreement. (Insert below each alternate and the conditions that must be met for the Owner to accept the alternate.)

Item Price Conditions for Acceptance

§ 4.3 Allowances, if any, included in the Contract Sum: (Identify each allowance.)

Item Price

§ 4.4 Unit prices, if any: (Identify the item and state the unit price and quantity limitations, if any, to which the unit price will be applicable.)

Item Units and Limitations Price per Unit ($0.00)

§ 4.5 Liquidated damages, if any: (Insert terms and conditions for liquidated damages, if any.)

§ 4.6 Other: (Insert provisions for bonus or other incentives, if any, that might result in a change to the Contract Sum.)

AIADocumentA101™-2017. Copyright© 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:16:13 on 08/29/2018 under Order No.53335964 77 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale.

lnit. 4

User Notes: (1399085132)

ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS § 5.1 Progress Payments § 5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows:

§ 5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month, the Owner shall make payment of the amount certified to the Contractor not later than the day of the month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment of the amount certified shall be made by the Owner not later than ( ) days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. (Federal, state or local laws may require payment within a certain period of time.)

§ 5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various pmtions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form, and suppmted by such data to substantiate its accuracy, as the Architect may require. This schedule of values shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment.

§ 5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall show the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment.

§ 5.1.6 In accordance with AIA Document A201™-2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Constrnction, and subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows:

§ 5.1.6.1 The amount of each progress payment shall first include:

.1 That portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work;

.2 That portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed constrnction, or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing; and

.3 That portion of Construction Change Directives that the Architect determines, in the Architect's professional judgment, to be reasonably justified.

§ 5.1.6.2 The amount of each progress payment shall then be reduced by:

.1 The aggregate of any amounts previously paid by the Owner;

.2 The amount, if any, for Work that remains uncorrected and for which the Architect has previously withheld a Certificate for Payment as provided in Article 9 of AJA Document A201-2017;

.3 Any amount for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless the Work has been performed by others the Contractor intends to pay;

.4 For Work performed or defects discovered since the last payment application, any amount for which the Architect may withhold payment, or nullify a Certificate of Payment in whole or in part, as provided in Article 9 of AJA Document A201-2017; and

.5 Retainage withheld pursuant to Section 5.1.7.

§ 5.1.7 Retainage § 5.1.7.1 For each progress payment made prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, the Owner may withhold the following amount, as retainage, from the payment otherwise due: (Insert a percentage or amount to be withheld as retainagefrom each Applicationfor Payment. The amount of retainage may be limited by governing law.)

AIA Document A101™ - 2017. Copyright© 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:16:13 on 08/29/2018 under Order No.5333596477 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale.

lnit. 5

User Notes: (1399085132)

§ 5.1.7.1.1 The following items are not subject to retainage: (Insert any items not subject to the withholding of retainage, such as general conditions, insurance, etc.)

§ 5.1.7.2 Reduction or limitation ofretainage, if any, shall be as follows: (If the retainage established in Section 5.1.7.1 is to be modified prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, including modifications for Substantial Completion of portions of the Work as provided in Section 3.3.2, insert provisions for such modifications.)

§ 5.1.7.3 Except as set forth in this Section 5.1.7.3, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, the Contractor may submit an Application for Payment that includes the retainage withheld from prior Applications for Payment pursuant to this Section 5.1.7. The Application for Payment submitted at Substantial Completion shall not include retainage as follows: (Insert any other conditions for release of retainage upon Substantial Completion.)

§ 5.1.8 If final completion of the Work is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, the Owner shall pay the Contractor any additional amounts in accordance with Article 9 of AIA Document A201-2017.

§ 5.1.9 Except with the Owner's prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site.

§ 5.2 Final Payment § 5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when

.1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct Work as provided in Article 12 of AIA DocumentA201-2017, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final payment; and

.2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect.

§ 5.2.2 The Owner's final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment, or as follows:

§ 5.3 Interest Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. (Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.)

%

ARTICLE 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION § 6.1 Initial Decision Maker The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker pursuant to Article 15 of AIA Document A201-2017, unless the parties appoint below another individual, not a party to this Agreement, to serve as the Initial Decision Maker. (If the parties mutually agree, insert the name, address and other contact information of the Initial Decision Maker, if other than the Architect.)

AIA Document A1D1™ - 2017. Copyright© 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:16:13 on 08/29/2018 under Order No.5333596477 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale.

lnit. 6

User Notes: (1399085132)

§ 6.2 Binding Dispute Resolution For any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation pursuant to Article 15 of AIA Document A201-2017, the method of binding dispute resolution shall be as follows: (Check the appropriate box.)

Arbitration pursuant to Section 15.4 of AIA Document A201-2017

Litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction

Other (Specify)

If the Owner and Contractor do not select a method of binding dispute resolution, or do not subsequently agree in writing to a binding dispute resolution method other than litigation, Claims will be resolved by litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction.

ARTICLE 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION § 7.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201-2017.

§ 7.1.1 If the Contract is terminated for the Owner's convenience in accordance with Article 14 of AIA Document A201-2017, then the Owner shall pay the Contractor a termination fee as follows: (Insert the amount of, or method for determining, the fee, if any, payable to the Contractor following a termination for the Owner's convenience.)

§ 7.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201- 2017.

ARTICLE 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 8.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A201-2017 or another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents.

§ 8.2 The Owner's representative: (Name, address, email address, and other information)

§ 8.3 The Contractor's representative: (Name, address, email address, and other information)


lnit. 7

User Notes: (1399085132)

§ 8.4 Neither the Owner's nor the Contractor's representative shall be changed without ten days' prior notice to the other party.

§ 8.5 Insurance and Bonds § 8.5.1 The Owner and the Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance as set forth in AIA Document Al0l™-2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 8.5.2 The Contractor shall provide bonds as set forth in AIA Document Al0l ™-2017 Exhibit A, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 8.6 Notice in electronic format, pursuant to Article 1 of AIA Document A201-2017, may be given in accordance with AIA Document E203™-2013, Building Infotmation Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, if completed, or as otherwise set forth below: (If other than in accordance with AJA Document £203-2013, insert requirements for delivering notice in electronic format such as name, title, and email address of the recipient and whether and how the system will be required to generate a read receipt for the transmission.)

§ 8.7 Other provisions:

ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 9.1 This Agreement is comprised of the following documents:

.1 AIA Document Al0l™-2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor

.2 AIA Document Al 0l™-2017, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds

.3 AIA Document A201™-2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

.4 AIA Document E203™-2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, dated as indicated below: (Insert the date of the £203-2013 inco1porated into this Agreement.)

.5 Drawings

Number

.6 Specifications

Section

.7 Addenda, if any:

Number

Title Date

Title Date Pages

Date Pages

Portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding or proposal requirements are also enumerated in this Article 9.

.8 Other Exhibits:

(Check all boxes that apply and include appropriate information identifying the exhibit where required.)


lnit. 8

User Notes: (1399085132)

AIA Document E204™-2017, Sustainable Projects Exhibit, dated as indicated below: (Insert the date of the E204-20!7 incorporated into this Agreement.)

The Sustainability Plan:

Title Date Pages

Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract:

Document Title Date Pages

.9 Other documents, if any, listed below: (List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents. AJA Document A201™-2017 provides that the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor's bid or proposal, portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements, and other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. Any such documents should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.)

This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above.

OWNER (Signature) CONTRACTOR (Signature)

(Printed name and title) (Printed name and title)


SECTION 006112 – SUPPLEMENT TO THE FORM OF AGREEMENT

STANDARD AIA FORM

Work will be subject to provisions set forth by the American Institute of Architect's Standard AIA Document A101 "STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR", 2017 Edition, Articles 1 thru 8 inclusive, which are hereby made a part of this Contract.

MODIFICATION OF AIA FORM A101

The following supplements modify, delete from, and/or add to AIA Form A101 “Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor” as indicated by the following articles, paragraphs, etc. as noted below:

1. Following the title of the first page, delete the third paragraph in the right side margin “AIA

Document A201-2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, is adopted in this document by reference. Do not use with other General Conditions unless this document is modified.”

2. Articles, or portions thereof, that are not specifically modified, deleted, or superseded hereby, remain in full effect.

3. The Form of Agreement also may be supplemented elsewhere in the Contract Documents by provisions located in, but not necessarily limited to, the Project Manual.

ARTICLE 5 –PAYMENTS

5.1.8 Following the text: “Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows:” insert

“None.”

ARTICLE 8 – MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

8.2 Delete the text of 8.2 and substitute the following: No Interest will be paid by the Owner for sums due and unpaid under the Contract.

8.6 Following the text: “Other Provisions:” insert “none”:


SUPPLEMENT TO THE FORM OF AGREEMENT 006112-1

FORM OF PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND 006113-1


SECTION 006113 - FORM OF PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENT: That

we/I (Name of Contractor)

A

(Corporation, Partnership or Individual)

hereinafter called "Principal", and , (Surety)

of State of ,

hereinafter called the "Surety", are held and firmly bound unto the ATLANTIC CAPE COMMUNITY COLLEGE, Mays Landing, Atlantic County, New Jersey, hereinafter called "Owner", in the penal sum of

Dollars

(Written Amount)

($ ). (Figures)

in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors, jointly and severally to the Owner, firmly by these presents for the performance of the Construction Contract which is incorporated herein by reference and to pay for all labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance of said Construction Contract.

THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS such that Whereas the Principal entered into a certain

contract with the Owner, dated the day of , 20 , a copy of which

is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the construction of all work under Contract covering work for:



BUILDINGS D AND K RENOVATIONS AT THE MAYS LANDING CAMPUS

FOR THE

ATLANTIC CAPE COMMUNITY COLLEGE 5100 BLACK HORSE PIKE MAYS LANDING, NEW JERSEY, 08330

NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of said Contract including the payment for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance of said contract. During the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the Owner, with or without notice to the Surety, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all costs and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the Owner all outlay and expense which the Owner may incur in making good any default, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.

PROVIDED, FURTHER, that by accepting this obligation to ensure the faithful performance and proper fulfillment of the Contract, the Bonding Company agrees to assume all costs required to furnish additional manpower, materials, facilities, equipment, means and incidentals necessary, including night shifts, overtime operations, Sundays and holidays as may be necessary to insure the prosecution and completion of the work in accordance with phased substantial completion dates established in the Contract. The Bonding Company further agrees to reimburse and repay the Owner for all reasonable attorney’s fees, additional consequential Architectural, Engineering fees incurred by the Owner for consequential losses or damages including, but not limited to, additional design work, submittal reviews, correspondence, job meetings, reviewing applications for payment, punch lists and similar services by reason of Contractor’s default.

PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety, for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alterations or additions to the terms of the Contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the Project Manual accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this Bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any change, extension of time, alterations or additions to the terms of the Contract or to the work or to the Project Manual.

PROVIDE FURTHER, that no final settlement between the Owner and Contractor shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied.



IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in counterparts, each one of

which shall be deemed an original, this the day of , 20 .

ATTEST:

(Principal)

(Principal) Secretary

(SEAL)

BY: (S)

(Address-Zip Code)

(Witness as to Principal)

(Address-Zip Code)

ATTEST:

(Surety)

BY:

(Attorney-in-fact)

(Address - Zip Code)

(Surety) Secretary

(SEAL)

(Witness as to Surety)

(Address-Zip Code)

NOTE: Date of Bond must be prior to date of Contract. If Contractor is a Partnership, all partners should execute Bond.



The rate of premium on this Bond is $ per Thousand.

The total amount of premium charges is $ . (The above must be filled in by the Corporate Surety)

IMPORTANT NOTE

Surety Company executing Bond must be authorized to transact business in the State of New Jersey and rated as “A” or better as determined by A.M. Best Company.


FORM OF MAINTENANCE BOND 006119-1


SECTION 006119 - FORM OF MAINTENANCE BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we,

as Principal and

as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the ATLANTIC CAPE COMMUNITY COLLEGE, as Owner, in the amount of ONE HUNDRED PERCENT (100%) OF THE CONTRACT SUM.

($ ) (100% of the Contract)

for the payment of which well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns.

THE CONDITION OF THE ABOVE OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas, the Principal did on

, , 20 , enter into a Contract for:

BUILDINGS D AND K RENOVATIONS MAYS LANDING CAMPUS

FOR THE

ATLANTIC CAPE COMMUNITY COLLEGE 5100 BLACK HORSE PIKE MAYS LANDING, NEW JERSEY, 08330

WHICH said Contract is made a part of this Bond as though set forth herein: NOW, if the said Principal shall remedy without cost to the Owner any defects which may develop during a period of Two (2) years from the date established in the Final Certificate of Substantial Completion for the work performed under the said Contract, provided such defects, in the judgment of the Owner are caused by defective or inferior materials or workmanship.

The said Surety hereby stipulates and agrees that no modification, deletions or additions in or to the terms of the said Contract or the Drawings or Project Manual therefore shall in any way affect its obligation on this Bond.


FORM OF MAINTENANCE BOND 006119-2


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have duly executed this bond under seal this

day of , 20 .

ATTEST:

(Principal)

(SEAL)

(Principal) Secretary

BY: (S)

(Address-Zip Code)

(Witness as to Principal)

(Address-Zip Code)

ATTEST: (Surety)

BY:

(Attorney-in-fact)

(Address - Zip Code)

(Surety) Secretary

(SEAL)

(Witness as to Surety)

(Address-Zip Code)



SECTION 006211 – GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION

The General Conditions for the Contract for Construction to be used for this Project will be the 2017 Edition of AIA Document A201 – GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION included herein, together with modifications set forth in Section 007300– SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS included herein.


GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 007213 - 1

AIA Document A201™ - 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 19B7, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA ® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:17:19 on 0B/29/201B under Order No.5333596477 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale.

lnit. 1

User Notes: (2003007535)

Document A201™ - 2017

General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address)

THE OWNER: (Name. legal status and address)

THE ARCHITECT: (Name, legal status and address)

TABLE OF ARTICLES

1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

2 OWNER

3 CONTRACTOR

4 ARCHITECT

5 SUBCONTRACTORS

6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

7 CHANGES IN THE WORK

8 TIME

9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

11 INSURANCE AND BONDS

12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK

13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT

15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES

ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS:

The author of this document has

added information needed for its

completion. The author may also

have revised the text of the original

AIA standard form. An Additions and

Deletions Report that notes added

information as well as revisions to the

standard form text is available from

the author and should be reviewed. A

vertical line in the left margin of this

document indicates where the author

has added necessary information

and where the author has added to or

deleted from the original AIA text.

This document has important legal

consequences. Consultation with an

attorney is encouraged with respect

to its completion or modification.

For guidance in modifying this

document to include supplementary

conditions, see AIA Document

A503TM, Guide for Supplementary

Conditions.


lnit. 2

User Notes: (2003007535)

INDEX (Topics and numbers in bold are Section headings.)

Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Acceptance of Work 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3 Access to Work 3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 Accident Prevention 10 Acts and Omissions 3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5, 10.2.8, 13.3.2, 14.1, 15.1.2, 15.2 Addenda 1.1.1 Additional Costs, Claims for 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 Additional Inspections and Testing 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.4 Additional Time, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.l.6 Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 1.1.1 Aesthetic Effect 4.2.13 Allowances 3.8 Applications for Payment 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.5.4, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10 Approvals 2.1.1, 2.3.1, 2.5, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.12.10.1, 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.4.1 Arbitration 8.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.4 ARCHITECT 4 Architect, Definition of 4.1.1 Architect, Extent of Authority 2.5, 3.12.7, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.4, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.l, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.l, 12.2.l, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.4, 15.2.1 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2. l 0, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6.4, 15.1.4, 15.2 Architect's Additional Services and Expenses 2.5, 12.2.1, 13.4.2, 13.4.3, 14.2.4 Architect's Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5 Architect's Approvals 2.5, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 4.2.7

Architect's Authority to Reject Work 3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Architect's Copyright 1.1.7, 1.5 Architect's Decisions 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.l, 13.4.2, 15.2 Architect's Inspections 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Architect's Instructions 3.2.4, 3.3.l, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.4.2 Architect's Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Architect's Project Representative 4.2.10 Architect's Relationship with Contractor 1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.l, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.3.2, 13.4, 15.2 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3 Architect's Representations 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 Architect's Site Visits 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.l, 13.4 Asbestos 10.3.1 Attorneys' Fees 3.18.1, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3 Award of Separate Contracts 6.1.1, 6.l.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work 5.2 Basic Definitions 1.1 Bidding Requirements 1.1.1 Binding Dispute Resolution 8.3.1, 9.7, 11.5, 13.1, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.3.3, 15.4.1 Bonds, Lien 7.3.4.4, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Bonds, Performance, and Payment 7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.l.2, 11.1.3, 11.5 Building Information Models Use and Reliance 1.8 Building Permit 3.7.1 Capitalization 1.3 Certificate of Substantial Completion 9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5

AIA Document A201™ - 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:17:19 on 08/29/2018 under Order No.5333596477which expires on 02/20/2019, and is nol for resale.

lnit. 3

User Notes: (2003007535)

Certificates for Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.4 Certificates oflnspection, Testing or Approval 13.4.4 Certificates of Insurance 9.10.2 Change Orders 1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 7.3.10, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.2, 11.5, 12.1.2 Change Orders, Definition of 7.2.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK 2.2.2, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 11.5 Claims, Definition of 15.1.l Claims, Notice of 1.6.2, 15.1.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 15.4.1 Claims for Additional Cost 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 7.3.9, 9.5.2, 10.2.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 Claims for Additional Time 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 9.5.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.6 Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for 3.7.4 Claims for Damages 3.2.4, 3.18, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, 11.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Claims Subject to Arbitration 15.4.1 Cleaning Up 3.15, 6.3 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to 2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.l, I l.1, 11.2, 15.1.5 Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Communications 3.9.1, 4.2.4 Completion, Conditions Relating to 3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10, 12.2, 14.1.2, 15.1.2 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 9 Completion, Substantial 3.10.1, 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2 Compliance with Laws 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3

Concealed or Unknown Conditions 3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3 Conditions of the Contract 1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4 Consent, Written 3.4.2, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 13.2, 15.4.4.2 Consolidation or Joinder 15.4.4 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 1.1.4, 6 Construction Change Directive, Definition of 7.3.1 Construction Change Directives 1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3, 9.3.1.l Construction Schedules, Contractor's 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 5.4, 14.2.2.2 Continuing Contract Performance 15.1.4 Contract, Definition of 1.1.2 CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 5.4.1.1, 5.4.2, 11.5, 14 Contract Administration 3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to 3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1 Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of 1.5.2, 2.3.6, 5.3 Contract Documents, Definition of 1.1.1 Contract Sum 2.2.2, 2.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.8, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.2, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4, 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.1.2, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Contract Sum, Definition of 9.1 Contract Time 1.1.4, 2.2.1, 2.2.2, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 6.1.5, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.3.6, 7, 7, 7.3.10, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 12.1.2, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.6.1, 15.2.5 Contract Time, Definition of 8.1.1 CONTRACTOR 3 Contractor, Definition of 3.1, 6.1.2 Contractor's Construction and Submittal Schedules 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4.2.3, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2


lnit. 4

User Notes: (2003007535)

Contractor's Employees 2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance 11.1 Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner's Forces 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, I 1.3, 12.2.4 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors 1.2.2, 2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 4.2.4, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect 1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1 Contractor's Representations 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2 Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents 3.2 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work 2.2.2, 9.7 Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 14.1 Contractor's Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Contractor's Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.6,8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4 Coordination and Correlation 1.2, 3.2.l, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.1 I Copyrights 1.5, 3.17 Correction of Work 2.5, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, 12.3, 15.1.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2 Cost, Definition of 7.3.4 Costs 2.5, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 7.3.3.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, I 0.3.2, 10.3.6, 11.2, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14 Cutting and Patching 3.14, 6.2.5

Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4 Damage to the Work 3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4 Damages, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.3.2, 11.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Damages for Delay 6.2.3, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2, 14.3.2 Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of 8.1.3 Day, Definition of 8.1.4 Decisions of the Architect 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.l, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2 Decisions to Withhold Certification 9.4.l, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of 2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.3, 9.5.1, 9.5.3, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.l Definitions 1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1, 15.l.1 Delays and Extensions of Time 3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.l, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 Digital Data Use and Transmission 1.7 Disputes 6.3, 7.3.9, 15.l, 15.2 Documents and Samples at the Site 3.11 Drawings, Definition of 1.1.5 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of 3.11 Effective Date of Insurance 8.2.2 Emergencies 10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.5 Employees, Contractor's 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Equipment, Labor, or Materials 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2. l, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.l, 14.2.l.2 Execution and Progress of the Work 1.1.3, 1.2.l, 1.2.2, 2.3.4, 2.3.6, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.6, 8.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.l, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.l.4

AIA Document A201™ - 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects . All rights reserved, WARNING: This AIA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:17:19 on 08/29/2018 under Order No.5333596477 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale.

lnlt. 5

User Notes: (2003007535)

Extensions of Time 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.l, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.l, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 Failure of Payment 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment 4.2.l, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Financial Arrangements, Owner's 2.2.l , 13.2.2, 14. l. l. 4 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 Governing Law 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty) Hazardous Materials and Substances 10.2.4, 10.3 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 5.2.1 Indemnification 3.17, 3.18, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10.1, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.6.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.l.4, 15.1.4 Initial Decision 15.2 Initial Decision Maker, Definition of 1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker, Decisions 14.2.4, 15. l. 4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority 14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 1 5.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Injury or Damage to Person or Property 10.2.8, 10.4 Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.4 Instructions to Bidders 1.1.l Instructions to the Contractor 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.l, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.4.2 Instruments of Service, Definition of 1.1.7 Insurance 6.1.l, 7.3.4, 8.2.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.2.5, 11 Insurance, Notice of Cancellation or Expiration 11.1.4, 11.2.3 Insurance, Contractor's Liability 11.1 Insurance, Effective Date of 8.2.2, 14.4.2 Insurance, Owner's Liability 11.2 Insurance, Property 10.2.5, 11.2, 11.4, l 1.5

Insurance, Stored Materials 9.3.2 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy 9.9. l Insured loss, Adjustment and Settlement of 11.5 Intent of the Contract Documents l.2.l, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13 Interest 13.5 Interpretation 1.1.8, 1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.l, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1 Interpretations, Written 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Judgment on Final Award 15.4.2 Labor and Materials, Equipment 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.l, 14.2.l.2 Labor Disputes 8.3.1 Laws and Regulations 1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3.l, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Liens 2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8 Limitations, Statutes of 12.2.5, 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 Limitations of Liability 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.12.10.1, 3.17, 3.18.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.6.8, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, 12.2.5, 13.3.1 Limitations of Time 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.l, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5 Materials, Hazardous 10.2.4, 10.3 Materials, Labor, Equipment and 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.l, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2. l.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction 3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2 Mechanic's Lien 2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8 Mediation 8.3.l, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1, 15 .2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, 15.4.1, 15.4.1.1 Minor Changes in the Work 1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4


lnit. 6

User Notes: (2003007535)

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13 Modifications, Definition of 1.1.1 Modifications to the Contract 1.1.1, l.1.2,2.5,3.11,4.l.2,4.2.1,5.2.3, 7,8.3.1,9.7, 10.3.2 Mutual Responsibility 6.2 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of 2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2 Notice 1.6, l.6.1, 1.6.2, 2.1.2, 2.2.2., 2.2.3, 2.2.4, 2.5, 3.2.4, 3.3. l, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2. l, 7.4, 8.2.29.6.8,9.7,9.10.l, 10.2.8, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1, 14.2.2, 14.4.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 15.4.1 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Insurance 11.1.4, 11.2.3 Notice of Claims 1.6.2, 2.1.2, 3.7.4, 9.6.8, 10.2.8, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.l.6, 15.2.8, 15.3.2, 15.4. l Notice of Testing and Inspections 13.4.1, 13.4.2 Observations, Contractor's 3.2, 3.7.4 Occupancy 2.3.1, 9.6.6, 9.8 Orders, Written 1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.5, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.3.1 OWNER 2 Owner, Definition of 2.1.1 Owner, Evidence of Financial Arrangements 2.2, 13.2.2, 14.l.1.4 Owner, Information and Services Required of the 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Owner's Authority 1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3.32.4, 2.5, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.l, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7 Owner's Insurance 11.2 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work 2.5, 14.2.2

Owner's Right to Clean Up 6.3 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts 6.1 Owner's Right to Stop the Work 2.4 Owner's Right to Suspend the Work 14.3 Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 14.2, 14.4 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.2.2, 3.11, 3.17, 4.2.12, 5.3 Partial Occupancy or Use 9.6.6, 9.9 Patching, Cutting and 3.14, 6.2.5 Patents 3.17 Payment, Applications for 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.10. l, 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment, Certificates for 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Payment, Failure of 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Payment, Final 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment Bond, Performance Bond and 7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2 Payments, Progress 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.l.4 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9 Payments to Subcontractors 5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2 PCB 10.3.1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond 7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws 2.3.1, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.4.4, 10.2.2 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl 10.3.1 Product Data, Definition of 3.12.2 Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Progress and Completion 4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Progress Payments 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4


lnit. 7

User Notes: (2003007535)

Project, Definition of 1.1.4 Project Representatives 4.2.10 Property Insurance 10.2.5, 11.2 Proposal Requirements

l.1.1 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10 Regulations and Laws 1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Rejection of Work 4.2.6, 12.2.1 Releases and Waivers of Liens 9.3.1, 9.10.2 Representations 3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 Representatives 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.10, 13.2.1 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5. l, lO Retainage 9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.l, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor 3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3 Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and Architect 3.10.l, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor 3.12 Rights and Remedies 1.1.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.4 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights 3.17 Rules and Notices for Arbitration 15.4.1 Safety of Persons and Property 10.2, 10.4 Safety Precautions and Programs 3.3. l, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 Samples, Definition of 3.12.3 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Samples at the Site, Documents and 3.11 Schedule of Values 9.2, 9.3.1 Schedules, Construction 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2

Separate Contracts and Contractors 1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 12.l .2 Separate Contractors, Definition of 6.1.1 Shop Drawings, Definition of 3.12.1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Site, Use of 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Site Inspections 3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.9.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Site Visits, Architect's 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Special Inspections and Testing 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.4 Specifications, Definition of 1.1.6 Specifications 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14 Statute of Limitations 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 Stopping the Work 2.2.2, 2.4, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Stored Materials 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4 Subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.1 SUBCONTRACTORS 5 Subcontractors, Work by 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6.7 Subcontractual Relations 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1 Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.4, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Submittal Schedule 3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7 Subrogation, Waivers of 6.1.1, 11.3 Substances, Hazardous 10.3 Substantial Completion 4.2.9, 8.1. l, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2 Substantial Completion, Definition of 9.8.1 Substitution of Subcontractors 5.2.3, 5.2.4 Substitution of Architect 2.3.3 Substitutions of Materials 3.4.2, 3.5, 7.3.8 Sub-subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.2

AIA Document A201™ - 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:17:19 on 08/29/2018 under Order No.5333596477 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale .

lnit. 8

User Notes: (2003007535)

Subsurface Conditions 3.7.4 Successors and Assigns 13.2 Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4 Suppliers 1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6, 9.10.5, 14.2.1 Surety 5.4.1.2, 9.6.8, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 14.2.2, 15.2.7 Surety, Consent of 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Surveys 1.1.7, 2.3.4 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 14.3 Suspension of the Work 3.7.5, 5.4.2, 14.3 Suspension or Termination of the Contract 5.4.1.1, 14 Taxes 3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.4.4 Termination by the Contractor 14.1, 15.1.7 Termination by the Owner for Cause 5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.7 Termination by the Owner for Convenience 14.4 Termination of the Architect 2.3.3 Termination of the Contractor Employment 14.2.2

TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14 Tests and Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 12.2.1, 13.4 TIME 8 Time, Delays and Extensions of 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5

Time Limits 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.4 Time Limits on Claims 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.1.3 Title to Work 9.3.2, 9.3.3 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12 Uncovering of Work 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown 3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 Unit Prices 7.3.3.2, 9.1.2 Use of Documents 1.1.1, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.12.6, 5.3 Use of Site 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Values, Schedule of 9.2, 9.3.1 Waiver of Claims by the Architect 13.3.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 9.10.5, 13.3.2, 15.1.7 Waiver of Claims by the Owner 9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.2. l, 13.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Waiver of Consequential Damages 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Waiver of Liens 9.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4 Waivers of Subrogation 6.1.1, 11.3 Warranty 3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 15.1.2 Weather Delays 8.3, 15.1.6.2 Work, Definition of 1.1.3 Written Consent 1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.10.3, 13.2, 13.3.2, 15.4.4.2 Written Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Written Orders 1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.4.2, 14.3.1


lnit. 9

User Notes: (2003007535)

ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 Basic Definitions § 1.1.1 The Contract Documents The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement, and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive, or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor's bid or proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements.

§ 1.1.2 The Contract The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (I) between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect's consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect's consultants, or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties.

§ 1.1.3 The Work The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment, and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.

§ 1.1.4 The Project The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by Separate Contractors.

§ 1.1.5 The Drawings The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams.

§ 1.1.6 The Specifications The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance ofrelated services.

§ 1.1.7 Instruments of Service Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect's consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials.

§ 1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2. The Initial Decision Maker shall not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and shall not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith.

§ 1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents § 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as ifrequired by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results.


lnit. 10

User Notes: (2003007535)

§ 1.2.1.1 The invalidity of any provision of the Contract Documents shall not invalidate the Contract or its remaining provisions. Tfit is determined that any provision of the Contract Documents violates any law, or is otherwise invalid or unenforceable, then that provision shall be revised to the extent necessary to make that provision legal and enforceable. In such case the Contract Documents shall be construed, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to give effect to the parties' intentions and purposes in executing the Contract.

§ 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade.

§ 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.

§ 1.3 Capitalization Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles ofnumbered articles, or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects.

§ 1.4 Interpretation In the interest ofbrevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statemen t.

§ 1.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications, and Other Instruments of Service § 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and retain all common law, statutory, and other reserved rights in their Instruments of Service, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants' reserved rights.

§ 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them, subject to any protocols established pursuant to Sections 1.7 and 1.8, solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to the Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect, and the Architect's consultants.

§ 1.6 Notice § 1.6.1 Except as otherwise provided in Section 1.6.2, where the Contract Documents require one party to notify or give notice to the other party, such notice shall be provided in writing to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed and shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person, by mail, by courier, or by electronic transmission if a method for electronic transmission is set forth in the Agreement.

§ 1.6.2 Notice of Claims as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be provided in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly served only if delivered to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed by certified or registered mail, or by courier providing proof of delivery.

§ 1.7 Digital Data Use and Transmission The parties shall agree upon protocols governing the transmission and use of Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form. The parties will use AIA Document E203™-2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, to establish the protocols for the development, use, transmission, and exchange of digital data.

§ 1.8 Building Information Models Use and Reliance Any use of, or reliance on, all or a portion of a building information model without agreement to protocols governing the use of, and reliance on, the information contained in the model and without having those protocols set forth in AJA Document E203TM_2013, Building Inf01mation Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, and the requisite AJA Document


lnit. 11

User Notes: (2003007535)

G202™-2013, Project Building Information Modeling Protocol Form, shall be at the using or relying party's sole risk and without liability to the other party and its contractors or consultants, the authors of, or contributors to, the building information model, and each of their agents and employees.

ARTICLE 2 OWNER § 2.1 General § 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative.

§ 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor, within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of, or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner's interest therein.

§ 2.2 Evidence of the Owner's Financial Arrangements § 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. The Contractor shall have no obligation to commence the Work until the Owner provides such evidence. If commencement of the Work is delayed under this Section 2.2.1, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately.

§ 2.2.2 Following commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial ainngements to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract only if (I) the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner's ability to make payment when due; or (3) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum. If the Owner fails to provide such evidence, as required, within fourteen days of the Contractor's request, the Contractor may immediately stop the Work and, in that event, shall notify the Owner that the Work has stopped. However, if the request is made because a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum under (3) above, the Contractor may immediately stop only that portion of the Work affected by the change until reasonable evidence is provided. If the Work is stopped under this Section 2.2.2, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 2.2.3 After the Owner furnishes evidence of financial arrangements under this Section 2.2, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor.

§ 2.2.4 Where the Owner has designated information furnished under this Section 2.2 as "confidential," the Contractor shall keep the information confidential and shall not disclose it to any other person. However, the Contractor may disclose "confidential" information, after seven (7) days' notice to the Owner, where disclosure is required by law, including a subpoena or other form of compulsory legal process issued by a court or governmental entity, or by court or arbitrator(s) order. The Contractor may also disclose "confidential" information to its employees, consultants, sureties, Subcontractors and their employees, Sub-subcontractors, and others who need to know the content of such information solely and exclusively for the Project and who agree to maintain the confidentiality of such information.

§ 2.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner § 2.3.1 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities.

§ 2.3.2 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture, or an entity lawfully practicing architecture, in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.

AIA Document A201™ - 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:17:19 on 08/29/2018 under Order No.53335964 77 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale.

lnit. 12

User Notes: (2003007535)

§ 2.3.3 If the employment of the Architect terminates, the Owner shall employ a successor to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect.

§ 2.3.4 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work.

§ 2.3.5 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other infmmation or services under the Owner's control and relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor's written request for such information or services.

§ 2.3.6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2.

§ 2.4 Owner's Right to Stop the Work If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3.

§ 2.5 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such default or neglect. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect and the Architect may, pursuant to Section 9.5.1, withhold or nullify a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to reimburse the Owner for the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. If current and future payments are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. If the Contractor disagrees with the actions of the Owner or the Architect, or the amounts claimed as costs to the Owner, the Contractor may file a Claim pursuant to Article 15.

ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR § 3.1 General § 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative.

§ 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of its obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor.

§ 3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor § 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents.

AIA Document A201™ - 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:17:19 on 08/29/2018 under Order No,5333596477 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale.

lnit. 13

User Notes: (2003007535)

§ 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementaiy, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.4, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require.

§ 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall submit Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner, subject to Section 15.l.7, as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities.

§ 3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures § 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and shall be solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Owner and Architect, and shall J?ropose alternative means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect shall evaluate the proposed alternative solely for conformance with the design intent for the completed construction. Unless the Architect objects to the Contractor's proposed alternative, the Contractor shall perform the Work using its alternative means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures.

§ 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors.

§ 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already perf01med to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.

§ 3.4 Labor and Materials § 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or petmanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.

§ 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work approved by the Architect in accordance with Section 3.12.8 or ordered by the Architect in accordance with Section 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive.


lnit. 14

User Notes: (2003007535)

§ 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them.

§ 3.5 Warranty § 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.

§ 3.5.2 All material, equipment, or other special warranties required by the Contract Documents shall be issued in the name of the Owner, or shall be transferable to the Owner, and shall commence in accordance with Section 9.8.4.

§ 3.6 Taxes The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect.

§ 3.7 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws § 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded.

§ 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.

§ 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.

§ 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 14 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend that an equitable adjustment be made in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor, stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Architect's determination or recommendation, that party may submit a Claim as provided in Article 15.

§ 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15.


lnit. 15

User Notes: (2003007535)

§ 3.8 Allowances § 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection.

§ 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,

.1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;

.2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; and

.3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (I) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2. l and (2) changes in Contractor's costs under Section 3.8.2.2.

§ 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness.

§ 3.9 Superintendent § 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.

§ 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the name and qualifications ofa proposed superintendent. Within 14 days ofreceipt of the information, the Architect may notify the Contractor, stating whether the Owner or the Architect (l) has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.

§ 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner's consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed.

§ 3.10 Contractor's Construction and Submittal Schedules § 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall contain detail appropriate for the Project, including (l) the date of commencement of the Work, interim schedule milestone dates, and the date of Substantial Completion; (2) an apportionment of the Work by constrnction activity; and (3) the time required for completion of each portion of the Work. The schedule shall provide for the orderly progression of the Work to completion and shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents. The schedule shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project.

§ 3.10.2 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, shall submit a submittal schedule for the Architect's approval. The Architect's approval shall not be unreasonably delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, or fails to provide submittals in accordance with the approved submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals.

§ 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect.

§ 3.11 Documents and Samples at the Site The Contractor shall make available, at the Project site, the Contract Documents, including Change Orders, Construction Change Directives, and other Modifications, in good order and marked cunently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and the approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar required submittals. These shall be in electronic form or paper copy, available to the Architect and Owner, and


lnit. 16

User Notes: (2003007535)

delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed.

§ 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples § 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules, and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work.

§ 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.

§ 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship, and establish standards by which the Work will be judged.

§ 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is to demonstrate how the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.

§ 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve, and submit to the Architect, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents, in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of Separate Contractors.

§ 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.

§ 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect.

§ 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, unless the Contractor has specifically notified the Architect of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved ofresponsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, by the Architect's approval thereof.

§ 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such notice, the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.

§ 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law.

§ 3.12.10.1 If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely

AIA Document A201™ - 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:17:19 on 08/29/2018 under Order No .5333596477 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale,

lnit. 17

User Notes: (2003007535)

upon the adequacy and accuracy of the performance and design criteria provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by an appropriately licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings, and other submittals related to the Work, designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the services, certifications, and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.

§ 3.12.10.2 If the Contract Documents require the Contractor's design professional to certify that the Work has been performed in accordance with the design criteria, the Contractor shall furnish such certifications to the Architect at the time and in the form specified by the Architect.

§ 3.13 Use of Site The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, lawful orders of public authorities, and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment.

§ 3.14 Cutting and Patching § 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting, or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting, or patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting, or patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents.

§ 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors by cutting, patching, or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter construction by the Owner or a Separate Contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of the Separate Contractor. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold, from the Owner or a Separate Contractor, its consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.

§ 3.15 Cleaning Up § 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, constmction equipment, machinery, and surplus materials from and about the Project.

§ 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor.

§ 3.16 Access to Work The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect with access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located.

§ 3.17 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for defense or loss when a particular design, process, or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications, or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if an infringement of a copyright or patent is discovered by, or made known to, the Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for the loss unless the information is promptly furnished to the Architect.

AIA Document A201™ - 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA ® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document , or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:17:19 on 08/29/2018 under Order No.5333596477 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale.

lnlt. 18

User Notes: (2003007535)

§ 3.18 Indemnification § 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss, or expense is caused in pait by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18.

§ 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18. l shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.

ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT § 4.1 General § 4.1.1 The Architect is the person or entity retained by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.2 and identified as such in the Agreement.

§ 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities, and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified, or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.

§ 4.2 Administration of the Contract § 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner's representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and promptly report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract Documents, (2) known deviations from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (3) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of, and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of, the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

§ 4.2.4 Communications The Owner and Contractor shall include the Architect in all communications that relate to or affect the Architect's services or professional responsibilities. The Owner shall promptly notify the Architect of the substance of any direct communications between the Owner and the Contractor otherwise relating to the Project. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with Separate Contractors shall be through the Owner. The Contract Documents may specify other communication protocols.


lnit. 19

User Notes: (2003007535)

§ 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.

§ 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.4.2 and 13.4.3, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

§ 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect's action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5, and 3.12. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component.

§ 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may order minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4.

§ 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner's review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.1O; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10.

§ 4.2.10 Tfthe Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more Project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any change in the duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Project representatives.

§ 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.

§ 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either, and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith.

§ 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information.

AIA Document A201™ - 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA ® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document , or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:17:19 on 08/29/2018 under Order No.5333596477 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale.

lnlt. 20

User Notes: (2003007535)

ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS § 5.1 Definitions § 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The tenn "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a Separate Contractor or the subcontractors of a Separate Contractor.

§ 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor.

§ 5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work § 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the persons or entities proposed for each principal portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may notify the Contractor whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice ofno reasonable objection.

§ 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objectio n.

§ 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection . If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor ' s Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required.

§ 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person, or entity for one previously selec ted if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to. such substi tution .

§ 5.3 Subcontractual Relations By appropriate written agreement, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work that the Contractor, by these Contract Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies, and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate , the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor , identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.

§ 5.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts § 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that

.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor; and

.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract.


lnit. 21

User Notes: (2003007535)

When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor's rights and obligations under the subcontract.

§ 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension.

§ 5.4.3 Upon assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor's obligations under the subcontract.

ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS § 6.1 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts § 6.1.1 The term "Separate Contractor(s)" shall mean other contractors retained by the Owner under separate agreements. The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and with Separate Contractors retained under Conditions of the Contract substantially similar to those of this Contract, including those provisions of the Conditions of the Contract related to insurance and waiver of subrogation.

§ 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different pmtions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.

§ 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each Separate Contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with any Separate Contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any revisions to its construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner until subsequently revised.

§ 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces or with Separate Contractors, the Owner or its Separate Contractors shall have the same obligations and rights that the Contractor has under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6, and Articles 10, 11, and 12.

§ 6.2 Mutual Responsibility § 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and Separate Contractors reasonable oppmtunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.

§ 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a Separate Contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that would render it unsuitable for proper execution and results of the Contractor's Work. Failure of the Contractor to notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects prior to proceeding with the Work shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or Separate Contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall not be responsible for discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that are not apparent.

§ 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a Separate Contractor because of the Contractor's delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a Separate Contractor's delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction.

§ 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage that the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or Separate Contractor as provided in Section 10.2.5.


lnit. 22

User Notes: (2003007535)

§ 6.2.5 The Owner and each Separate Contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14.

§ 6.3 Owner's Right to Clean Up If a dispute arises among the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible.

ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK § 7.1 General § 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Constrnction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. A Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor. An order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone.

§ 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall proceed promptly with changes in the Work, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or order for a minor change in the Work.

§ 7.2 Change Orders § 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor, and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following:

.1 The change in the Work;

.2 The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and

.3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.

§ 7.3 Construction Change Directives § 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions, or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.

§ 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order.

§ 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods:

.1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation;

.2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;

.3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or

.4 As provided in Section 7.3.4.

§ 7.3.4 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the adjustment on the basis ofreasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.4 shall be limited to the following:

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:17:19 on 08/29/2018 under Order No.5333596477 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale, User Notes: (2003007535)

.1 Costs of labor, including applicable payroll taxes, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, workers' compensation insurance, and other employee costs approved by the Architect;

.2 Costs of materials, supplies, and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed;

.3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others;

.4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use, or similar taxes, directly related to the change; and

.5 Costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change.

§ 7.3.5 If the Contractor disagrees with the adjustment in the Contract Time, the Contractor may make a Claim in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.

§ 7.3.6 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.

§ 7.3.7 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor's agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order.

§ 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change.

§ 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect's professional judgment, to be reasonably justified. The Architect's interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15.

§ 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive.

§ 7.4 Minor Changes in the Work The Architect may order minor changes in the Work that are consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents and do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time. The Architect's order for minor changes shall be in writing. If the Contractor believes that the proposed minor change in the Work will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and shall not proceed to implement the change in the Work. If the Contractor performs the Work set forth in the Architect's order for a minor change without prior notice to the Architect that such change will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor waives any adjustment to the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time.

ARTICLE 8 TIME § 8.1 Definitions § 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.

§ 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.

§ 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8.

AIA Document A201™ - 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA ® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 23

lnit.

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:17:19 on 08/29/2018 under Order No.5333596477 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2003007535)

§ 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless othe1wise specifically defined.

§ 8.2 Progress and Completion § 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work.

§ 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, commence the Work prior to the effective date of insurance required to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner.

§ 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time.

§ 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time § 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by (l) an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, of an employee of either, or of a Separate Contractor; (2) by changes ordered in the Work; (3) by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties, adverse weather conditions documented in accordance with Section 15.1.6.2, or other causes beyond the Contractor's control; (4) by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and binding dispute resolution; or (5) by other causes that the Contractor asserts, and the Architect deterrnines,justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine.

§ 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.

§ 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION § 9.1 Contract Sum § 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.

§ 9.1.2 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed so that application of such unit prices to the actual quantities causes substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.

§ 9.2 Schedule of Values Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit a schedule of values to the Architect before the first Application for Payment, allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in the form, and supported by the data to substantiate its accuracy, required by the Architect. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. Any changes to the schedule of values shall be submitted to the Architect and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require, and unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's subsequent Applications for Payment.

§ 9.3 Applications for Payment § 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, ifrequired under Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. The application shall be notarized, ifrequired, and supported by all data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment that the Owner or Architect require, such as copies of requisitions, and releases and waivers ofliens from Subcontractors and suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents.

§ 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders.

AIA Document A201™ - 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. _ 24 lnit.

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:17:19 on 08/29/2018 under Order No.5333596477 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2003007535)

§ 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay.

§ 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage, and transportation to the site, for such materials and equipment stored off the site.

§ 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information, and belief, be free and clear ofliens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances, in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, or other persons or entities that provided labor, materials, and equipment relating to the Work.

§ 9.4 Certificates for Payment § 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either (l) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment in the full amount of the Application for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor; or (2) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in part as provided in Section 9.5.1; or (3) withhold certification of the entire Application for Payment, and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect's reason for withholding certification in whole as provided in Section 9.5.l.

§ 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data in the Application for Payment, that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information, and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion, and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has ( l) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work; (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures; (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment; or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum.

§ 9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification § 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, ifin the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.l. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of

.1 defective Work not remedied;

.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims, unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;

.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or suppliers for labor, materials or equipment;

AIA Document A201™ - 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 25

lnit.

AIA Document A201™ - 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software al 11:17:19 on 08/29/2018 under Order No.5333596477 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale.

lnit. 26

User Notes: (2003007535)

.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

.5 damage to the Owner or a Separate Contractor;

.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or

.7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.5.2 When either party disputes the Architect's decision regarding a Certificate for Payment under Section 9.5.1, in whole or in part, that party may submit a Claim in accordance with Article 15.

§ 9.5.3 When the reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld.

§ 9.5.4 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Contractor shall reflect such payment on its next Application for Payment.

§ 9.6 Progress Payments § 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect.

§ 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner, the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner.

§ 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor.

§ 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors and suppliers to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay, or to see to the payment of money to, a Subcontractor or supplier, except as may otherwise be required by law.

§ 9.6.5 The Contractor's payments to suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4.

§ 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors or provided by suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who perfmmed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust, or entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision.

§ 9.6.8 Provided the Owner has fulfilled its payment obligations under the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall defend and indemnify the Owner from all loss, liability, damage or expense, including reasonable attorney's fees and litigation expenses, arising out of any lien claim or other claim for payment by any Subcontractor or supplier of any tier. Upon receipt of notice of a lien claim or other claim for payment, the Owner shall notify the Contractor. If approved by the applicable court, when required, the Contractor may substitute a surety bond for the property against which the lien or other claim for payment has been asserted.

AIA Document A201™ - 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:17:19 on 08/29/2018 under Order No.5333596477 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is nol for resale.

lnit. 27

User Notes: (2003007535)

§ 9.7 Failure of Payment If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents, the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.

§ 9.8 Substantial Completion § 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use.

§ 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make an inspection to dete1mine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion.

§ 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion; establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance; and fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless othe1wise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion.

§ 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their w1itten acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in the Ce11ificate. Upon such acceptance, and consent of surety if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to the Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.9 Partial Occupancy or Use § 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, ifno agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect.

§ 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor, and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work.


lnit. 28

User Notes: (2003007535)

§ 9.9.3 Unless othe1wise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment § 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor's notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection. When the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled.

§ 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (I) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows ofno reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment, (5) documentation of any special warranties, such as manufacturers' warranties or specific Subcontractor warranties, and (6) ifrequired by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts and releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. Tf a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance. If a lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging the lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees.

§ 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed, corrected, and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of the surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims.

§ 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from

.1 liens, Claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;

.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;

.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents; or

.4 audits performed by the Owner, if permitted by the Contract Documents, after final payment.

§ 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a supplier, shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment.

ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract.

§ 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property § 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to


lnit. 29

User Notes: (2003007535)

.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;

.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody, or control of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a Sub-subcontractor; and

.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, and utilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.

§ 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with, and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities, bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury, or loss.

§ 10.2.3 The Contractor shall implement, erect, and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards; promulgating safety regulations; and notifying the owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities of the safeguards.

§ 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment, or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel.

§ 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections l 0.2.1.2 and l 0.2.1.3. The Contractor may make a Claim for the cost to remedy the damage or loss to the extent such damage or loss is attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18.

§ 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect.

§ 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition.

§ 10.2.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, notice of the injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter.

§ 10.3 Hazardous Materials and Substances § 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials or substances. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and notify the Owner and Architect of the condition.

§ 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor's notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of the material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of the material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will


lnit. 30

User Notes: (2003007535)

promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. Jf either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shutdown, delay, and start-up.

§ 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area ifin fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss, or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity.

§ 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be responsible for hazardous materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of the Contractor's fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances.

§ 10.3.5 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner's fault or negligence.

§ 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred.

§ 10.4 Emergencies In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in A1ticle 15 and Article 7.

ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 11.1 Contractor's Insurance and Bonds § 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Owner, Architect, and Architect's consultants shall be named as additional insureds under the Contractor's commercial general liability policy or as otherwise described in the Contract Documents.

§ 11.1.2 The Contractor shall provide surety bonds of the types, for such penal sums, and subject to such terms and conditions as required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.

§ 11.1.3 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished.

§ 11.1.4 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Contractor's Required Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Contractor becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide notice to the Owner of such impending or actual cancellation or


lnit. 31

User Notes: (2003007535)

expiration. Upon receipt of notice from the Contractor, the Owner shall, unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Owner, have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by the Contractor. The furnishing of notice by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of any contractual obligation to provide any required coverage.

§ 11.2 Owner's Insurance § 11.2.1 The Owner shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits ofliability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Owner shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.

§ 11.2.2 Failure to Purchase Required Property Insurance. If the Owner fails to purchase and maintain the required property insurance, with all of the coverages and in the amounts described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Owner shal I inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner, the Contractor may delay commencement of the Work and may obtain insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-Subcontractors in the Work. When the failure to provide coverage has been cured or resolved, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted. In the event the Owner fails to procure coverage, the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors to the extent the loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance to have been procured by the Owner. The cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by a Change Order. Tfthe Owner does not provide written notice, and the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain the required insurance, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all reasonable costs and damages attributable thereto.

§ 11.2.3 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Owner's Required Property Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Owner becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any property insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall provide notice to the Contractor of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration. Unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Contractor: (1) the Contractor, upon receipt of notice from the Owner, shall have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement ofreplacement coverage by either the Owner or the Contractor; (2) the Contract Time and Contract Sum shall be equitably adjusted; and (3) the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors to the extent any loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance had it not expired or been cancelled. If the Contractor purchases replacement coverage, the cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by an appropriate Change Order. The furnishing of notice by the Owner shall not relieve the Owner of any contractual obligation to provide required insurance.

§ 11.3 Waivers of Subrogation § 11.3.1 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees, each of the other; (2) the Architect and Architect's consultants; and (3) Separate Contractors, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees, for damages caused by fire, or other causes of loss, to the extent those losses are covered by property insurance required by the Agreement or other property insurance applicable to the Project, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require similar written waivers in favor of the individuals and entities identified above from the Architect, Architect's consultants, Separate Contractors, subcontractors, and sub-subcontractors. The policies of insurance purchased and maintained by each person or entity agreeing to waive claims pursuant to this section 11.3.1 shall not prohibit this waiver of subrogation. This waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity (1) even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, (2) even though that person or entity did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, or (3) whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the damaged property.

§ 11.3.2 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, to the extent pe1missible by such policies, the Owner waives all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.1 for damages caused by fire or other causes ofloss covered by this separate property insurance.


lnit. 32

User Notes: (2003007535)

§ 11.4 Loss of Use, Business Interruption, and Delay in Completion Insurance The Owner, at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain insurance that will protect the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property, or the inability to conduct normal operations, due to fire or other causes ofloss. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor and Architect for loss of use of the Owner's property, due to fire or other hazards however caused.

§11.5 Adjustment and Settlement of Insured Loss § 11.5.1 A loss insured under the property insurance required by the Agreement shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.5.2. The Owner shall pay the Architect and Contractor their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Owner, and by appropriate agreements the Architect and Contractor shall make payments to their consultants and Subcontractors in similar manner.

§ 11.5.2 Prior to settlement ofan insured loss, the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the terms of the proposed settlement as well as the proposed allocation of the insurance proceeds. The Contractor shall have 14 days from receipt of notice to object to the proposed settlement or allocation of the proceeds. If the Contractor does not object, the Owner shall settle the loss and the Contractor shall be bound by the settlement and allocation. Upon receipt, the Owner shall deposit the insurance proceeds in a separate account and make the appropriate distributions. Thereafter, ifno other agreement is made or the Owner does not terminate the Contract for convenience, the Owner and Contractor shall execute a Change Order for reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work in the amount allocated for that purpose. If the Contractor timely objects to either the terms of the proposed settlement or the allocation of the proceeds, the Owner may proceed to settle the insured loss, and any dispute between the Owner and Contractor arising out of the settlement or allocation of the proceeds shall be resolved pursuant to Article 15. Pending resolution of any dispute, the Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive for the reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work.

ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.1 Uncovering of Work § 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, ifrequested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time.

§ 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment to the Contract Sum and Contract Time as may be appropriate. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the costs of uncovering the Work, and the cost of correction, shall be at the Contractor's expense.

§ 12.2 Correction of Work § 12.2.1 Before Substantial Completion The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, discovered before Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor's expense.

§ 12.2.2 After Substantial Completion § 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of notice from the Owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during

AIA Document A201™ - 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA ® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:17:19 on 08/29/2018 under Order No.5333596477 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale.

lnit. 33

User Notes: (2003007535)

that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.5.

§ 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work.

§ 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2.

§ 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.

§ 12.2.4 The Contractor shal I bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors, whether completed or partially completed, caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.

§ 12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead ofrequiring its removal and cotTection, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.

ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 13.1 Governing Law The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located, excluding that jurisdiction's choice oflaw rules. If the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4.

§ 13.2 Successors and Assigns § 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract.

§ 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing constrnction financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate the assignment.

§ 13.3 Rights and Remedies § 13.3.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.

§ 13.3.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect, or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed upon in writing.

AIA Document A201™ - 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:17:19 on 08/29/2018 under Order No.5333596477 which expires on 02/20/2019, and is not for resale .

lnit. 34

User Notes: (2003007535)

§ 13.4 Tests and Inspections § 13.4.1 Tests, inspections, and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections, and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections, and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections, or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. The Owner shall directly arrange and pay for tests, inspections, or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations so require.

§ 13.4.2 If the Architect, Owner, or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection, or approval not included under Section 13.4.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection, or approval, by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section 13.4.3, shall be at the Owner's expense.

§ 13.4.3 If procedures for testing, inspection, or approval under Sections 13.4. land 13.4.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure, including those ofrepeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses, shall be at the Contractor's expense.

§ 13.4.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection, or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.

§ 13.4.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections, or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing.

§ 13.4.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work.

§ 13.5 Interest Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate the parties agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located.

ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT § 14.1 Termination by the Contractor § 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, for any of the following reasons:

.1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped;

.2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, that requires all Work to be stopped;

.3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4. I, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or

.4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.

§ 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, repeated suspensions, delays, or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3, constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less.


lnit. 35

User Notes: (2003007535)

§ 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days' notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, as well as reasonable overhead and profit on Work not executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination.

§ 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3.

§ 14.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause § 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor

.1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;

.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors or suppliers in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors or suppliers;

.3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or

.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.

§ 14.2.2 When any of the reasons described in Section 14.2.1 exist, and upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:

.1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;

.2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and

.3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work.

§ 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.

§ 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incmTed by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract.

§ 14.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience § 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work, in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.

§ 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay, or interruption under Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent

.1 that performance is, was, or would have been, so suspended, delayed, or interrupted, by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or

.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.

§ 14.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience § 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause.

§ 14.4.2 Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall

.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;


lnit. 36

User Notes: (2003007535)

.2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and

.3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders.

§ 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Owner shall pay the Contractor for Work properly executed; costs incurred by reason of the termination, including costs attributable to termination of Subcontracts; and the termination fee, if any, set forth in the Agreement.

ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 15.1 Claims § 15.1.1 Definition A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter ofright, payment of money, a change in the Contract Time, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. This Section 15.1.1 does not require the Owner to file a Claim in order to impose liquidated damages in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 15.1.2 Time Limits on Claims The Owner and Contractor shall commence all Claims and causes of action against the other and arising out of or related to the Contract, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, in accordance with the requirements of the binding dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement and within the period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and Contractor waive all Claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 15.1.2.

§ 15.1.3 Notice of Claims § 15.1.3.1 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered prior to expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party under this Section 15.1.3.1 shall be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later.

§ 15.1.3.2 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the other party. In such event, no decision by the Initial Decision Maker is required.

§ 15.1.4 Continuing Contract Performance § 15.1.4.1 Pending final resolution ofa Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 15.1.4.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted in accordance with the Initial Decision Maker's decision, subject to the right of either party to proceed in accordance with this Article 15. The Architect will issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decision of the Initial Decision Maker.

§ 15.1.5 Claims for Additional Cost If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given before proceeding to execute the portion of the Work that is the subject of the Claim. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4.

§ 15.1.6 Claims for Additional Time § 15.1.6.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case ofa continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary.


lnit. 37

User Notes: (2003007535)

§ 15.1.6.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated, and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction.

§ 15.1.7 Waiver of Claims for Consequential Damages The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes

.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and

.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit, except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.

This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.7 shall be deemed to preclude assessment of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 15.2 Initial Decision § 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2 or arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, and l 1.5, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim. If an initial decision has not been rendered within 30 days after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker, the party asserting the Claim may demand mediation and binding dispute resolution without a decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner.

§ 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the Initial Decision Maker's sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim.

§ 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense.

§ 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of the request, and shall either (l) provide a response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished, or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part.

§ 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding dispute resolution.

§ 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1.


lnit. 38

User Notes: (2003007535)

§ 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within 30 days from the date ofreceipt of an initial decision, demand in writing that the other party file for mediation. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within 30 days after receipt thereof, then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision.

§ 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy.

§ 15.2.8 Ifa Claim relates to or is the subject ofa mechanic's lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines.

§ 15.3 Mediation § 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract, except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.7, shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedentto binding dispute resolution.

§ 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2, the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings.

§ 15.3.3 Either party may, within 30 days from the date that mediation has been concluded without resolution of the dispute or 60 days after mediation has been demanded without resolution of the dispute, demand in writing that the other party file for binding dispute resolution. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for binding dispute resolution within 60 days after receipt thereof, then both parties waive their rights to binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision.

§ 15.3.4 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4 Arbitration § 15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement, any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. The Arbitration shall be conducted in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded.

§ 15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for mediation, but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes, receipt of a written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution oflegal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim.

§ 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.


lnlt. 39

User Notes: (2003007535)

§ 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement, shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4.4 Consolidation or Joinder § 15.4.4.1 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules, either party may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that ( l) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation, (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact, and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s).

§ 15.4.4.2 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules, either party may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration, provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to suchjoinder. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent.

§ 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation as those of the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement.

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 006230-1


SECTION 006230 – SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

STANDARD AIA FORM:

Work will be subject to provisions set forth by the American Institute of Architect's Standard AIA Document A201 "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", 2017 Edition, Articles 1 thru 15 inclusive, which are hereby made a part of this Specification.

MODIFICATION OF AIA FORM A201

Modify, supplement and/or add the following articles, paragraphs, etc. as noted below:

ARTICLE 1 – GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS add the following:

1.1.1 Delete the text of the paragraph and substitute the following:

The Contract Documents are enumerated in the agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. The Contract Documents include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instruction to bidders, sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposal or the Contractor’s bid or proposal and portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements.

1.1.2.1 The Owner reserves the right to hire a Construction Manager for the project. In the event

the Construction Manager is hired by the Owner, the Owner may substitute the CMA version of the AIA Documents A101 and A201 (2017), and the Contractor shall be bound thereby.

1.1.2.2 Assignment of the Work: Neither this Agreement nor any part thereof shall be assigned by

a Contractor to any person, firm, or corporation, without prior written approval of the Owner to such assignment. This provision shall not preclude the Contractor from subletting parts of the work to Subcontractors in accordance with general practices of the trade.

1.1.6.1 THE PROJECT MANUAL

The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract, and Specifications.



1.1.8 The term “Architect” shall include the Architect, its consultants and subconsultants, and the owners, principals and employees of each of them.

1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS add the following:

1.2.1.2 In the event of any conflict among or within the Drawings, Specifications, or Schedules,

the provisions specifying a better quality or greater quantity of work or materials or comply with more stringent requirements shall take precedence and shall be the provision used in estimating bids and performing the contract, unless otherwise directed in writing by the Architect. The Architect shall determine which of the conflicting items represents the work of better quality or greater quantity or more stringent requirements. Information not shown on the drawings but included in the specifications, and vice versa, is included and required in the base bid Contract and shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor at no additional cost.

1.2.1.3 During the course of the Work, should any ambiguities or discrepancies be found in the

Drawings, Specifications, or Schedules to which the Contractor has failed to call attention before submitting his bid, then the Architect will interpret the intent of the Drawings, Specifications or Schedules and the Contractor hereby agrees to abide by the Architect’s interpretation and to carry out the work in accordance with the decision of the Architect.

ARTICLE 2 - OWNER

2.1 GENERAL add the following:


The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have the following authority as delegated by the Owner. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative:

Owner is to mean ATLANTIC CAPE COMMUNITY COLLEGE.

Owner's authorized representative is to mean the ATLANTIC COUNTY IMPROVEMENT AUTHORITY.

2.1.1.1 The Owner’s Representative shall have the same access to the Work provided to the

Architect. He shall be consulted by the Contractor’s Superintendent on all matters pertaining to the Work and shall transmit all instructions of the Architect regarding the Work to the Contractor’s Superintendent.

2.1.1.2 The Owner’s Representative may, in addition to inspection by others required elsewhere

in the Contract Documents, inspect all Work under this Contract. While he will assist the Contractor’s Superintendent in obtaining additional information in explanation of the Contract Documents and will serve as liaison between the Contractor’s Superintendent and the Architect, he is not empowered to authorize deviations from the Contract nor to enter into the Contractor’s area of responsibility for supervision and construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, procedures or coordination or for safety of persons and



property. The fact that he may have permitted faulty Work or Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents to be performed shall not relieve the Contractor from any responsibility to perform fully in accordance with the Contract.

2.1.1.3 The Architect is to mean SPIEZLE ARCHITECTURAL GROUP, INC.


The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within a reasonable time after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic’s lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner’s interest therein.

2.1.2.1 Prohibited Interests: No official of the Owner who is authorized in such capacity and on

behalf of the Owner to negotiate, make, accept, or approve, or to take part in negotiating, making, accepting, or approving any architectural, engineering, inspection, construction, or material supply contract or any subcontract in connection with the construction of the Project shall become directly or indirectly interested personally in this Contract or in any part thereof. No officer, employee, architect, attorney, engineer, or inspector of or for the Owner who is authorized in such capacity and on behalf of the Owner to exercise any legislative, executive, supervisory, or other similar functions in connection with the construction of the Project, shall be directly or indirectly interested personally in this Contract or in any part thereof, any material supply contract, subcontract, insurance contract, or any other contract pertaining to the Project.

2.1.2.2 Owner's authorized representative is to mean SPIEZLE ARCHITECTURAL GROUP,

INC.

2.2 EVIDENCE OF THE OWNER’S FINANCIAL ARRANGEMENTS

Delete Article 2.2 in its entirety.

2.3 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER

2.3.3 Delete the text of paragraph 2.3.3 and substitute the following:

If the employment of the Architect terminates, the Owner shall employ a successor whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect.

2.3.6 Delete the text of paragraph 2.3.6 and substitute the following:

Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor electronic documents for the purpose of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2

2.5 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK delete the text of paragraph 2.5 and

substitute the following:



2.5.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such default or neglect . In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner’s expenses and compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure included but not limited to reasonable attorney’s fees. The Architect may, pursuant to section 9.5.1, withhold or nullify a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to reimburse the Owner for the Change Order. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor and/or its surety shall pay the difference to the Owner. If the Contractor disagrees with the actions of the Owner or the Architect, or the amounts claimed as costs to the Owner, the Contractor may file a Claim pursuant to Article 15.

2.5.2 If, in the opinion of the Architect, work to be corrected by the Owner is judged to be critical

or time critical, the Architect, will inform the Owner and Contractor of the crucial nature of the work. Upon notification, the seven day periods noted in Article 2.5.1 will each be reduced to three days.

2.6 INSPECTION, CONDEMNATION, AND REJECTION OF WORK AND MATERIALS (new

section)

2.6.1 The Owner reserves the right to inspect all goods and services provided or performed on the Project and condemn any goods or services which in its sole judgment do not conform to the specifications of the contract therefore.

ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR

3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR

add the following:


Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that (1) the Contractor has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, has submitted any discrepancy to the Architect prior thereto and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents; (2) prior to the execution of the Agreement, the Contractor and each subcontractor evaluated and satisfied themselves as to the conditions and limitations under which the Work is to be performed, including without limitation, (i) the location, condition, layout, and nature of the Project site and surrounding areas, (ii) generally prevailing climatic conditions, (iii) anticipated labor supply and costs, (iv) availability and cost of materials, tools and equipment, and (v) other similar issues. The Owner assumes no responsibility or liability for the physical condition or safety of the Project site or any improvements located on the Project site. Except as set forth in Paragraph 10.3, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing a safe place for the performance of the work. The Owner shall not be required to make any adjustments in either the Contract Sum or the Contract Time



in connection with any failure by the Contractor or any subcontractor to have complied with the requirements of this subparagraph 3.2.1.


Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.4, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. Dimensions given at full-size or large-scale details shall take precedence over smaller scaled measurements. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor, as well as for discovering errors, omissions, and inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; as such, discrepancies shall be referred to the Architect in writing for adjustments before any work affected thereby has been performed.

3.2.2.1 Where compliance with two or more industry standards or sets of requirements is indicated

within Contract Documents, and overlapping of those different standards or requirements establishes different or conflicting minimums or levels of quality, the most stringent requirement (which is generally recognized to be the most costly) is intended and will be enforced. Refer apparently-equal-but-different requirements, and uncertainties as to which level of quality is more stringent, to Architect/Engineer in writing for a decision before proceeding. These may be shown on any plan, partial plan, in the Project Manual or in any Addenda.

3.2.2.2 The general character of the detail work is indicated on drawings and in specifications. The

term “similar” shall be used on the drawings in its general sense and not as meaning identical, and all details shall be worked out in relation to their location and their connection to other parts of the work. Where on any drawings a portion of the work is drawn out and the remainder is indicated in outline, the parts drawn out shall apply also to other like portions of the work. When a detail is indicated by starting only, such detail shall be continued throughout the courses or parts in which it occurs and shall also apply to all other similar parts in the work unless otherwise indicated. In case of differences between small and large scale drawings, the larger scale drawings shall take precedence. Any discrepancies shall be referred to the Architect for adjustment before any work affected thereby has been performed.

3.2.2.3 Since the Contractor, as Bidder, was afforded the opportunity to visit the Project Site,

Contractor shall be held responsible for cognizance and knowledge of existing features and conditions ascertainable by such site visit, and costs of the Work associated therewith.

3.2.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or

omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. If any errors, inconsistencies or omissions appear in the Drawings, Specifications, or other Contract Documents, which should reasonably have been discovered and concerning which interpretation had not been



obtained during the Bidding or Proposal Period, the Contractor shall within ten (10) days after receiving written "Notice to Proceed" notify the Architect in writing of such error, inconsistency or omission. In the event the Contractor fails to give such notice, he will be responsible for the results of any such errors, inconsistencies or omissions and the cost of rectifying same. At the end of the ten (10) day period, Interpretations of this procedure shall be made by the Architect and its decision will be final.


If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall submit Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, including a failure to recognize or should have reasonably recognized any error, inconsistency, omission or difference in the Contract Documents, then the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities. U The Contractor shall be liable to the Owner and/or Architect for any and all damage resulting from any error, inconsistency, omission or difference which he knew or reasonably should have known but failed to report to the Architect. If the Contractor performs any work when he knows or should have known that it involves any error, inconsistency, omission or difference, without notice to the Architect and the Owner, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such work and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributable costs for correction.

3.2.5 The Contractor shall forward to the Architect a written request for supplementary drawings

and data needed by him to carry on his work. Such request shall be timed so as to enable the Architect to properly act well in advance of need at the site.

3.2.6 If the Architect must prepare “responses to Contractor’s Requests for Information” (RFI’s)

where such information is available to the Contractor from a careful study and comparison of the Contract Documents, field conditions, other Owner-provided information, Contractor-prepared coordination drawings, or Project correspondence or documentation the Owner will back-charge the Contractor for all costs associated with the additional Contract Administration Services provided by the Architect.

3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES add the following:

3.3.1.1 At the preconstruction meeting, Contractors shall identify those individuals who shall

supervise and direct the Work including both office and field supervisors. The on-site supervisor shall be present at all times that the Contractor’s forces are present to perform work, shall attend all progress meetings, shall attend all coordination and scheduling meetings and such other meetings as may be reasonably requested and scheduled by the Architect. Upon the Architect’s request, where there is a concern as to the progress of



quality of the Contractor’s work, the Contractor shall cause the President or other similarly authorized representative of the Contractor with the power to make decisions of financial consequence to the Contractor, to attend meetings scheduled by the Architect.

3.3.1.2 The attendance at all meetings set forth above by a qualified representative of the

Contractor is mandatory. Any Contractor who is not represented at these meetings without previously being excused by the Architect, or who is not present at the appointed starting time of the meeting, will be assessed a late fee in the amount of $250.00 per occurrence. The amount of this fee will be deducted from the Contractor’s account through the issuance of a Change Order.

3.3.2.1 All personnel or agents of the Contractor shall observe all rules and regulations in effect at

the Owner’s premises. Employees, agents and Subcontractors of the Contractor, while on the Owner’s property, shall be subject to the control of the Owner, but under no circumstances shall such persons be deemed to be employees or agents of the Owner. The Contractor’s personnel are required on a daily basis to report and sign in, at a location to be determined by the Owner, each time they report for service and sign out when leaving the premises. Nothing herein shall limit the Contractor’s duty to provide onsite safety and to secure the site.

3.3.2.2 Contractor’s personnel and agents are not to engage in any activities with the building

occupants, owner’s personnel or agents of the Owner unless duly authorized to do so in a prior writing by the Owner’s authorized representative. All contractor’s personnel and agents are required to wear identification badges identifying the individual and the firm for which they are employed. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the actions of all personnel and agents in its employ. The Contractor shall maintain proper supervision of the work in progress at all times.

3.3.2.3 Contractor is required to provide background checks with fingerprinting performed within

the last six (6) months on all personnel who will be working on site on the project, for Owners review and acceptance. The Contractor is responsible to pay all costs associated with this process. Background and Fingerprint checks can be provided through Sagem Morpho, Inc. (877) 503-5981, or other agency acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall not assign any employee to work at this project site who has a record or conviction for any offenses of the first or second degree.

3.3.2.4 All personnel and agents used by the Contractor for the performance of its work shall be

properly trained and qualified for the type of work being performed and shall have the minimum ability and experience for its classification. The Owner reserves the right to reasonably refuse to accept services from any personnel. The Contractor shall provide evidence of qualifications for any personnel performing work under its contract upon request.

3.3.2.5 The Owner (and/or the Owner’s Representatives) reserves the right to direct the removal

from the site of any person, equipment and or entity which displays inappropriate behavior, including but not limited to, smoking, alcohol consumption, drugs, fighting, intimidating behavior, vandalism, theft, improper storage, improper or illegal acts, unfit persons etc.



3.3.2.6 Owner has the sole right to modify any and all security requirements at the Project Site.

3.3.4 The Contractor shall locate benchmarks and establish primary lines, level and plumb. The Contractor shall be responsible for layout, and elevations specifically relating to its work. It will verify all dimensions, elevations, levels, and plumb shown on the Drawings, and report any discrepancies or inconsistencies in the above in writing to the Architect before commencing work. The Contractor shall carefully protect benchmarks, from displacement or removal.

3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS add the following:

3.4.4 Insofar as practical or required to obtain a full warranty, except as otherwise specified or

shown, the material or product of one Manufacturer shall be used throughout the work for each specified purpose.

3.4.5 All manufactured articles, materials, and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected,

erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's directions. Should such directions conflict with the Specifications, the Contractor shall request (in writing) clarification from the Architect before proceeding.

3.4.6 All workmanship, equipment, materials, and articles incorporated in the work are to be of

the best grade of their respective kinds for the purpose. Where equipment, materials or articles are referred to in the Specification as "equal to" any particular standard, the Architect shall decide the question of equality. Contractor shall immediately furnish to the Architect for its approval the name of the Manufacturer of material, machinery, mechanical and other equipment which he contemplates installing, together with their respective performance capacities and other pertinent information to avoid delays. When required, Contractor shall furnish, for the Architect's approval, full information concerning materials, or articles which he contemplates incorporating in the work. Samples of materials shall be submitted for approval when and as directed. Material, machinery, equipment, and articles installed or used without such written approval shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection.

3.4.7 No previous inspection or certificate of payment shall be held as an acceptance of defective

work or materials or to relieve Contractor from the obligation to furnish sound materials and to perform good satisfactory work. The Architect shall be the sole judge of the materials and work furnished.

3.4.8 If the Architect deems it inexpedient to correct defective work not otherwise performed or

completed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, the difference in value between such work and that of the work, materials and conditions as specified, together with a fair allowance for damage shall be deducted from the Contract price.

3.4.9 Materials and equipment stored on the site shall not be placed directly on the ground and

shall be completely covered and suitably protected to the Architect’s and Owner’s satisfaction.

3.4.10 Only manufactured products of the United States, wherever available, shall be used on the

Project.



3.4.11 No later than seven (7) days from the date of this Agreement, the Contractor shall provide a list showing the name(s) of the manufacturer(s) proposed to be used for the Project. The Architect will promptly reply in writing to the Contractor stating whether the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposal. If adequate data on any proposed manufacturer is not available, the Architect may state that action will be deferred until the Contractor provides further data. The Owner’s or Architect’s failure to reply within fourteen (14) days shall constitute acceptance of the proposal. Failure to object to a manufacturer shall not constitute a waiver of any of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and all products furnished by the listed manufacturer must conform to such requirements.

3.4.12 Any request by the Contractor which is made after the completion of bidding, to substitute

any labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, or other facilities or services which is contrary to the provisions of the Drawings, Specifications, or Schedules, shall be reviewed and approved or rejected by the Architect. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any delay caused by the request, and for the costs and expenses of the Architect’s review of the request. The Architect shall be entitled to reject the request for any reason, including the Architect’s or the Owner’s subjective determination of the relative quality, compatibility or desirability of the substitution.

3.5 WARRANTY Delete the text of the paragraphs 3.5.1 and 3.5.2 and substitute the following:

3.5.1 In addition to the warranties set forth in the Contract Documents, the Contractor warrants

that:

3.5.2 All materials and equipment furnished under this contract shall be of good quality and new unless otherwise authorized by the Owner. Any applicable manufacturer’s warranties shall be transferred to the Owner.

3.5.3 Title to all work, materials, and equipment will pass to the Owner free and clear of all liens,

claims, security interests, or encumbrances.

3.5.4 The Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality of the Work in the Contract Documents required or permitted, and that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. A two (2) year warranty of the materials, equipment, and work shall commence from the date established by the Owner as of the date of substantial completion for the entire project. This will apply to all materials and equipment (including but not limited to HVAC equipment) that the Owner may begin to use prior to the established date of substantial completion.

3.5.5 During the twenty-third month after the date of substantial completion of the work, the

Owner, Architect, and the Contractor shall review the work to confirm the requirements



of the Contract have been satisfied. Any corrective work necessary will be addressed at that time, prior to expiration of the warranty. The requirement will not modify any of the Contractor’s obligations relative to warranties that are in effect for a period greater than one year.

3.5.6 If within the warranty period, any portion of the materials, equipment, and work is found

to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, the Contractor shall correct the problem at his own cost and expense. The payment of the contract sum shall not constitute an acceptance of the work not performed in conformance with the contract documents.

3.5.7 Any applicable warranties shall be transferred to the Owner by the Contractor at no

additional cost or expense to the Owner.

3.6 TAXES renumber first paragraph to 3.6.1 and add the following:

3.6.2 The Owner is exempt under the provisions of the New Jersey Sales and Use Tax Act. Bidders are expected to comply with the provisions of the Act and rules and regulations promulgated pursuant thereto to qualify for exemptions with reference to any and all labor, service and materials supplied to or furnished in connection with the work to be performed. New Jersey State Sales and Use Tax on labor, service and materials provided by the Contractor, its Subcontractors, and suppliers used in this Project shall not be included in its Bid.

3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES, AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS add the following:

3.7.1.1 Contractor shall secure and pay for those items and it shall be included in his base bid.

3.7.1.2 The General Contractor will be responsible to take out and pay for any Bonds and insurance

certificates required by the local Building Official, the County, the Municipality and all governmental authorities with jurisdiction over this project. Each Prime Contractor shall be responsible for filling out permits for its work under contract.

3.7.1.3 The code reviews and costs associated with code reviews have been paid or will be paid by

the Owner to the New Jersey Department of Community Affairs or to the Local Code Official. Approved sets will be provided to the Contractor to file with the Local Officials and fill out permit information. Permits will be issued based upon the previously reviewed and approved drawings.

3.7.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for the scheduling and coordination of any inspections

covered by local Code enforcement officials or agencies. The Architect is to be notified of all scheduled inspections when they are ordered. The Contractor must further ensure that the work to be inspected is properly completed and ready for inspection and that all equipment necessary to conduct the inspection (i.e. gauges, meters, etc.) is in place and in proper working order.

3.7.3.2 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the coordination and scheduling of the

Utility Company. The Contractor must plan to allow a minimum of 60 days notice when the Utility Company is to furnish new poles or equipment. In the event the Owner is



required to enter into a formal agreement with the Utility Company, the Contractor agrees to be bound by the terms thereof and to assume full responsibility for all requirements and obligations imposed upon the Owner by the Utility Company, including but not limited to any indemnification provisions.

3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions: renumber the first paragraph to 3.7.4.1 and add the

following

In condition (1) add the words “elevational, dimensional,” before the words at the beginning of the sentence.

3.7.4.2 No adjustment in Contract Time or Contract Sum shall be permitted, however, in connection

with a concealed or unknown condition that does not differ materially from those conditions disclosed or that reasonably should have been disclosed by the Contractor’s (i) prior inspections, tests, reviews, and pre-construction services for the Project, or (ii) inspections, tests, reviews, and pre-construction services that the Contractor had the opportunity to make or should have performed in connection with the Project.

3.9 SUPERINTENDENT add the following:

3.9.1.1 The superintendent shall have a minimum of 15 years of experience in construction. The

Contractor’s superintendent shall perform only supervisory work and shall not be an active tradesman or be assigned to do manual work on the Project. Communications which the Contractor intends to rely upon shall be confirmed in writing.

3.9.1.2 When the project involves multiple project sites the Contractor is to assign a separate

superintendent to each site who will be responsible for that particular site only.

3.9.1.3 The number of necessary assistants to the superintendent shall be such that work in progress shall be adequately supervised by each Contractor’s superintendent or one of his assistants. If, in the Architect’s opinion, the quality or progress of work is adversely affected by lack of adequate supervision, the Contractor shall increase the number of supervisory personnel at no increase to the Contract sum.

3.9.2. Delete the text of the paragraph and substitute the following:

The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall submit the name and qualifications of the Superintendent to the Owner for its approval. The Owner may conduct an interview of the Superintendent. Once approved, the Superintendent shall not be changed without the prior written approval of the Owner.


The Superintendent shall not be removed from the work until all corrective and punch list items are completed to the Owner’s satisfaction.

3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION AND SUBMITTAL SCHEDULES add the following:



3.10.1.1 Contractor shall, within fourteen (14) calendar days after issuance of a Notice of Award, submit a draft Construction Schedule detailing logic, tasks and durations along with a detailed submittal schedule to the Architect and Owner, for the Architect’s and Owner's information prepared in accordance with Section 013200 Construction Progress Documentation or approved equal along with a coordinated, detailed submittal schedule in accordance with Article 3.12.12, for work of the entire Project.

3.10.1.2 Seven (7) calendar days after the Architect and Owner receive the Contractor’s

coordinated, detailed draft Construction Schedule, the President of the Company or Corporation shall meet to review, and sign off on the coordinated detailed Contractor’s Construction Schedule in the presence of the Architect and Owner’s designee. Failure of the Contractor to sign off on the Contractor’s Construction Schedule shall result in the assessment of liquidated damages as outlined in article 8.4. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents for substantial completion of any phases and that of the entire Project. The Contractor’s Construction Schedule shall be updated by the Contractor to reflect the status of its work in relation to the Contractor’s Construction Schedule, and any recommended changes in the sequencing and scheduling. The Contractor’s Construction Schedule shall be updated at least every 30 calendar days or updated as often as deemed necessary by the Architect. Upon 4 working days of such request by the Architect, the Contractor shall submit a revised draft Construction Schedule update to the Architect. The updated Contractor’s Construction Schedule will be reviewed at each Job Meeting and the Contractor is required to have a representative present at the Job Meeting with written authorization from the President of the Company or Corporation to review, agree upon, and sign-off on any approved and agreed upon changes to the updated Contractor’s Construction Schedule. Failure by Contractor to correct the scheduled update in the time required shall result in a reduction in the Contractor’s Contract Amount of FIVE HUNDRED ($500.00) per each occurrence as liquidated damages. In addition, payment to the Contractor may result in the withholding of payments to the Contractor, and in the liability of the Contractor for liquidated damages for the failure of the Project to be completed within the designated time. Any acceleration of the Contractor’s Construction Schedule shall be agreed upon and approved by the Architect and Owner’s designee.

3.10.1.3 Reference to procedures concerning Submittals shall be construed to incorporate all

submittals including Contractor’s Submittal Schedule of all products (to be received by the Architect within the time designated form the Notice to Proceed as indicated in article 3.10.1), Submittal Matrix (for substitute products and materials and included in Section 009000 Project Forms), Manufacturer's published literature, shop drawings, samples, design and other data. Each submittal is required to be accompanied by a fully completed submittal cover sheet, Section 009000 – Project Forms, Form 009310 – Submittal Cover Sheet, included in the Project Manual, or alternate form that includes the equivalent information approved by the Owner and Architect.

3.10.1.4 Submittal Schedules shall be prepared and incorporated into the Contractor’s Construction

Schedule as indicated in Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures. Contractor shall include the following considerations when preparing the submittal schedule so that approved products are at the project site ready for installation in accordance with the time established in the Contractors’ Construction Schedule to avoid delays.



3.10.1.5 In the absence of a signed change order approving an extension of time, the Contractor Construction Schedule updates must show substantial completion date consistent with the date required in paragraph 8.1.5 of these Supplementary Conditions. Changes in logistics or duration shall not be made, except for good cause, and shall not result in an extension of the time for substantial completion. In the event certain aspects of the work fall behind the Contractor’s Construction Schedule, the Contractor shall develop a recovery plan to revise logistics, add manpower resources to reduce durations, expedite procurement or advance start of activities, to get the project back on a schedule that will assure completion in accordance with the substantial completion date, which shall be agreed upon and approved by the Architect and Owner’s designee.

3.10.1.6 When the schedule is complete and in compliance with 3.10.1.2, the schedule will become

part of the construction documents, and shall be altered only in accordance with duly authorized change orders for extension of time in accordance with Article 8.3.

3.10.1.7 All work that may, as determined by the owner and/or Architect, be disruptive or interfere

with sanitary conditions, plumbing, mechanical, electrical or the safety or activities of the building’s occupants and/or may include noisy work, shall be performed after business hours, on weekends, and/or holidays so as not to interfere with scheduled activities and public safety, at no additional cost to the owner. In the event the Contractor does not meet the substantial completion date, the Contractor shall be responsible for fully cleaning all areas utilized by the owner’s operations and where work is being performed at the end of each Contractors work session, to the owner’s satisfaction so the area can be used for scheduled activities the following day. In the event the areas are not cleaned to the owner’s satisfaction, the owner will clean the said areas as deemed necessary prior to the next regularly scheduled opening of operations for the next business day and deduct all associated costs of cleaning from the contract amount.

3.10.2.1 The Contractor shall deliver written evidence to the Architect that materials and equipment

necessary for the timely installation and completion of the Work will be available, provided that failure to deliver such written evidence shall not excuse Contractor’s obligation to timely furnish and install materials and equipment and to complete the Work.

3.10.3 Delete this paragraph and replace with the following:

The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner in providing schedules updates and notification notices which may impact the Owner’s operations. The Contractor will coordinate with the Owner to provide school bus companies, trash hauling companies, and others with the proposed construction schedules, anticipated detours and duration.

3.10.4 The Contractor shall work his forces overtime, at his expense, if required to maintain the

Progress Schedule established.

3.10.5 The Contractor shall make proper assignments of employees in order to preclude labor, jurisdiction or like dispute, and if such disputes arise, do all things necessary to effect a prompt settlement thereof, including reference of such disputes to labor representatives or other established construction industry agencies for resolution, and be bound by their decisions.



3.10.6 The Contractor shall, within 24 hours after rejection of Work pursuant to Subparagraph 4.2.6 of the General Conditions, remove all materials and equipment so rejected and immediately replace said Work, at his cost, to the satisfaction of the Architect. Should the Work of the Owner or other contractors be damaged by such removal or replacement, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner and other contractors and subcontractors for all costs incurred by them for correcting said damage.

3.10.7 The Contractor shall perform the work in accordance with the most recent schedule submitted

to the Architect. In the event the Contractor fails to perform work in accordance with the schedule, at the Architect’s request, the Contractor shall provide a recovery schedule, reflecting the Contractor’s commitment to complete the work in accordance with the contract documents, including but not limited to double shifts, overtime, evening, and weekend work; at the Contractor’s expense. Nothing contained herein shall be construed so as to prevent the Owner from resorting to its contractual remedies, including but not limited to liquidated damages, withholding of certification of payment, and termination due to Contractor’s failure to perform work in accordance with the schedule.

3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES add the following:

3.12.1.1 Should Contractor wish to substitute a specified item, Contractor will submit a complete

Submittal Matrix For Substitution Evaluation as Approved Equal form as provided in Section 009000 – PROJECT FORMS prior to the Architect/Engineer's consideration of a substitution.

3.12.4.1 Architect's review is for general conformance with the Design Concept and Contract

Documents. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with all requirements of the Project Manual, Drawings, and Addenda. No departures there from, are to be considered as authorizing extra work or relieving the Contractor of work required within the contract. The Contractor remains responsible for materials, dimensions, details and accuracy for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, and warranty/guarantee requirements and other conditions of the contract, etc. for selecting fabrication process and techniques of assembly, for performing this work in a safe and satisfactory manner, and of coordinating this work with that of all other trades.


The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve, and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents or otherwise required by the Owner or Architect in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. Submittals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action. The following submittal scheduled will be mandatory; time is from the date of the



notice to proceed in consecutive calendar days: All contracts and trades - thirty (30) days.

3.12.7.1 Submittals that require coordination with other products, installation of other products, or

owner operations, etc. shall be submitted together as a coordinated package or they will not be reviewed by the Architect. Coordination of all items is the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor will replace non-compatible components to the Architect’s satisfaction at no additional cost.

3.12.8.1 Work performed contrary to the procedures set forth in this Article 3.12 shall be at the risk

and expense of the Contractor. All shop drawings used for fabrication and erection shall be those reviewed by the Architect, without change. If change is found to be necessary on any reviewed shop drawing, product data or sample, it shall be resubmitted for further review.

3.12.10 & 3.12.10.1 &3.12.10.2 Delete these paragraphs and replace with the following:

3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the

practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will review, approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall bear full responsibility for any and all costs incurred by the Owner, including architectural fees and reasonable attorneys’ fees in connection with any and all deviations to the Contractor’s submittals which were not approved by the Architect.

3.12.11 Submittals shall indicate materials, dimensions, seismic bracing in accordance with IBC

International Building Code 2015, New Jersey Edition for Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical Component Seismic Design Requirements, and job conditions, including clearances required in relationship with the work of their trades. Contractor shall be responsible for verification of existing conditions and coordinating with the work of other



trades. Drawings shall be of sufficient size and drawn to sufficient scale to clearly show all details.

3.12.12 Submittals shall indicate compliance with seismic design requirements in accordance with

IBC International Building Code 2015, New Jersey Edition for Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical Component Seismic Design Requirements. Provide seismic calculations signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the state where the Project is located as required.

3.12.13 Submittals of Shop Drawings and other data, where possible, shall be submitted

electronically in PDF Format.

3.12.14 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): Submit Material Safety Data Sheets directly to the Owner; do not submit to the Architect/Engineer unless otherwise indicated. Architect/Engineer will not review submittals that include MSDS and will return entire submittal for resubmission.

3.12.15 American goods and products are to be used where possible.

3.12.16 Submittals shall contain a Contractor’s stamp of approval, signed and dated by the

submitting Contractor, prior to submission to the Architect. Such stamp of approval by the Contractor shall be confirmation that he has determined and verified materials, field measurements, and field construction criteria related thereto, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals. The Contractor shall also note in writing to the Architect, all deviations to the Contract Documents. Submittals will not be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer unless they contain such a stamp containing the words “Reviewed and Approved” accompanied by the Contractor’s signature and date.

3.12.17 When brand, make, quality, etc., is not specified definitely, Contractor shall submit written

documentation to the Architect for the particular kind of brand which he desires to use, altering or substituting others if not satisfactory.

3.12.18 If a substitution submittal differs from the design intent of the Contract documents, and all

associated modifications to the design intent are not identified and included with the submission, all consequential additional costs associated with the substitution including, but not limited to, modifications to existing and new construction, building structure, plumbing, HVAC, electrical systems and all other modifications to not yet constructed work shall be borne by the contractor responsible for the submittal.

3.12.19 Consequential Substitution Impact Fees: If the Contractor makes, or causes to be made,

due to impact from approval of substitutions of other than specified equipment and components, any substantial change in the form, type, system, and details of construction from those indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be responsible for payment of all impact costs arising from such changes. Impact costs include, but are not limited to, any additional costs to the Owner inclusive of Architectural, Engineering, and Attorney fees, Code Review and Permit fees as well as all documented impact costs borne by other Contractors resulting from such substitutions. Impact cost shall also



include associated re-design, demolition and re-construction work, additional new construction work as may be required, and compliance with and maintenance of existing warranties, etc.

3.13 USE OF SITE add the following:

3.13.1 Add 3.13.1 prior to first paragraph.

3.13.2 Contractors shall use the site in a manner that will cause minimum interference and

maximum safety to the occupants of the building and the general public. Contractor must have prior approval of the Architect and Owner for locations of stored materials, access, trailer locations, etc.

3.13.3 In addition to site utilization limitations and requirements shown on Drawings and

indicated by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall administer allocation of available space within Construction area so as to produce best overall efficiency in performance of total work of Project. The Contractor shall schedule deliveries so as to minimize time and space requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site.

3.13.4 Contractors may seek approval from the Owner to work weekdays, evenings, nights,

weekends, and may be subject to reimburse/pay for all costs, i.e., custodial fees/OT, etc. Refer to the summary section 011000 for additional work restrictions. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that his work is performed at times permitted by local ordinances and within such noise levels as may be mandated by the Township. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any violations committed in whole or in part by the Contractor or its subcontractors which may be charged to or assessed against the Owner and shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner for any and all fines, costs and expenses of any kind, including reasonable attorney’s fees, which may be charged to, assessed against, or incurred by the Owner in connection with such violations.

3.15 CLEANING UP add the following:

3.15.1.1 The Contractor shall maintain the Project construction area, streets, sidewalks and adjacent

property clean, free of debris, dirt, unusable materials, garbage, etc. at all times until the Project is accepted by the Owner. The Contractor shall clean and provide maintenance on completed construction included in their scope of work, after installation, and as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. The Contractor shall be held responsible for removal of all their debris and excess material from the work area to dumpsters furnished by the Contractor.

3.15.1.2 The Contractor shall supervise its construction operations to assure that no part of the

construction completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.


The Contractor will be given 24 hours’ notice to clean up as directed by the Architect and required by the contract, and if he does not comply, the Architect will arrange for other means to achieve the daily clean up and the Contractor will be back charged.



3.18 INDEMNIFICATION add the following:


To the fullest extent permitted by law the Contractor shall defend and indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting directly or indirectly from performance of the Work, including but not limited to:

(1) the acts or omissions of the Contractor, its agents, servants, officers, employees,

subcontractors, subconsultants or any other person working at the Contractor’s request, subject to its direction, or on its behalf;

(2) the loss of life or property, or injury or damage to the person, body or property of any

person or persons whatsoever, that arises or results directly or indirectly from performance of the work or delivery of deliverables by the Contractor, its agents, servants, officers, employees, subcontractors, subconsultants, or any other person acting at the Contractor’s request, subject to its direction, or on its behalf;

(3) any negligence, default, breach, or errors or omissions of the Contractor, its agents,

servants, officers, employees, subcontractors, subconsultants, or any other person acting at the Contractor’s request, subject to its direction, or on its behalf;

(4) violation or non-compliance with federal, state, local, municipal laws and regulations,

ordinances, building codes (including without limitation the Americans with Disabilities Act, OSHA, Environmental Protection Act) arising from the performance or non-performance of; or arising out of conditions created or caused to be created by, the Contractor, its agent, servants, officers, employees, subcontractors, subconsultants, or any other person acting at the Contractor’s request, subject to its direction, or on its behalf; and

(5) the use of copyrighted or uncopyrighted composition, secret process, patented or

unpatented invention, article or appliance furnished or used in the performance of the work;

provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), or willful acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, including whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18.

3.18.2.1 The Contractor’s defense and indemnification obligation is not limited by, but is in

addition to the insurance obligations contained in the contractual documents.



3.18.3 The Contractor agrees that any approval by the Owner of the work performed, and/or reports, plans, or specifications provided by the Contractor shall not operate to limit the obligations of the Contractor under the Contract Documents; and that the Owner assumes no obligations to indemnify or save harmless the Contractor, its agents, servants, officers, employees, subcontractors, subconsultant, against all claims that may arise out of its performance or nonperformance under the Contract Documents; and that the provisions of this defense and indemnification clause shall in no way limit the Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents, nor shall they be construed to relieve the Contractor from any liability, nor preclude the Owner from taking any other actions available to it under any other provisions of the Contract Documents or otherwise at law or equity.

3.18.4 The provision of this section shall survive the termination of the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 4 – ARCHITECT

4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT Add the following:

4.2.4.1 Any correspondence received after 4:00 PM prevailing time (the end of the business day) will

be recognized as being received on the beginning of the next business day, Saturdays, Sundays, or holidays excepted and correspondence received on Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays will be recognized as received on the beginning of the next business day.

4.2.7.1 Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment is identified on the Plans or in the

Specifications by reference to Manufacturers' or Vendors' names, trade names, catalogue numbers, etc., it is intended merely to establish a standard, and any material article, or equipment of other manufacturers and vendors which will perform adequately equal to or better than, the duties imposed by the general design, will be considered equally acceptable provided the material, article, or equipment so proposed is, in the opinion of the Architect of equal or better substance and function. The material, article or equipment so proposed shall not be purchased or installed by the Contractor without the Architect's written approval.

4.2.7.2 The acceptance of any material or method shall be understood as an acceptance only insofar

as conforming to Specification requirements, and not as an absolute acceptance without respect to the requirements of the Specifications.

4.2.7.3 The typical time frame is three weeks for the Architect to review, and four weeks for the

Architect and Engineer to review when an Engineer is also involved in the review.


If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in the Agreement between the Owner and Architect.




The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limit agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness, but in no event more than fifteen (15) days after receipt of the request by the Architect.

4.2.14.1 All requests for information shall be submitted by the Contractor, in the Architect’s

discretion, on the Request for Information form provided by the Architect The Contractor shall clearly and concisely set forth the issue for which the clarification or interpretation is sought and why a response is needed from the Architect. In the Request for Interpretation, the contractor shall set forth an interpretation or understanding of the requirement along with reasons why such an understanding was reached.

4.2.14.2 The Contractor shall bear all costs associated with the Request for Information including

but not limited to architectural fees where such information is available to the Contractor from a careful study and comparison of the Contract Documents, field conditions, other Owner-provided information, Contractor prepared coordination drawings, or prior Project correspondence or documentation.

4.2.14.3 The Architect will review all Requests for Information to determine whether they are

Requests for Information with the meaning of this term. If the Architect determines that the document is not a Request for Information, it will be returned to the Contractor, un- reviewed as to content, for resubmittal on the proper form and in the proper manner.

4.2.14.4 Responses to Requests for Information shall be issued within five (5) working days of

receipt of the request from the Contractor unless the Architect determines that a longer time is necessary to provide an adequate response. If a longer time is determined necessary by the Owner, the Architect will within five (5) working days of the receipt of the request, notify the Contractor of the anticipated response time. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any time extension due to the time it takes the Architect to respond to the Request for Information provided that the Architect responds within reasonable promptness.

4.2.14.5 Responses from the Architect will not change any requirement in the Contract Documents.

In the event the Contractor believes that a response to a Request for Information will cause a change to the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately give written notice to the Owner stating that the Contractor considers the response to be a Change Order. Failure to give such written notice immediately shall waive the contractor’s right to seek additional time or cost under these General Conditions.



ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS

5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK add the following:


Within twenty (20) days after the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall furnish to the Architect in writing, for review by the Owner and the Architect, a list of the names of all subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, fabricators, manufacturers, sources of supply, articles, devices, fixtures, pieces of equipment, materials and processes proposed for each item of work on List of Subcontractors, AIA Document G805. The Architect will promptly notify the Contractor, in writing, if either the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has any objection to any names on such list. Failure of the Owner or Architect to make objection promptly to any name on the list shall constitute acceptance of such name. In no event shall the Contractor substitute a subcontractor who is named by the Contractor in the bid documents. A Business Registration Certificate and a Public Works Contactor Registration Act Certificate must be furnished for each subcontractor as required by applicable law.

5.2.2.1 In submitting the names of subcontractors, the Contractor shall list 1) the extent of

limitations of the trades or work included by specifications paragraph number, 2) the name and address of the subcontractor; 3) the name and address of all sub-subcontractors for each significant subdivision of the trade or work, and if required by the Architect, 4) reference in the form of a list of at least three (3) jobs similar in size and quality to this Project performed in the last five (5) years, with name and location of work, dollar value and names of the Owner and Architect.

5.2.2.2 In submitting sources in supply of materials, articles and pieces of equipment including

those under subcontracts and sub-subcontracts, the Contractor shall list 1) the extent or limitations of the trades or work included by Specifications, paragraph number 2) the name and address of the source of supply 3) the name of the manufacturer of the items.


If the Owner or Architect has objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no objection.


The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected without the consent of the Owner.

5.2.5 Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold the Owner harmless against any claims

brought by a subcontractor, supplier or any other entity, claiming a violation of N.J.S.A. 18A:18A-18 or the improper or illegal substitution of a subcontractor, supplier or other entity.



5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS delete the following:

5.4.2 Delete this paragraph in its entirety.

5.4.3 Renumber paragraph to 5.4.2.

ARTICLE 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

6.1 OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND AWARD SEPARATE

CONTRACTS add the following:


Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights that apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12, provisions relating to Construction Schedules, and Supplemental Project Requirements relating to coordination and cooperation among Prime Contractors.

6.1.4.1 The Contractor shall coordinate all phases of the Work with the Architect and the Owner’s

representatives and own forces.

6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY add the following:


The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a separate contractor because of the Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities, or defective construction of the contracts, or any other cause or reason within the Contractor’s contract.


The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor or any of the Contractor’s Subcontractors wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5.

6.2.4.1 Should a Contractor cause damage to the work or property of any other Contractor or

Vendor on the project, the Contractor shall, upon due notice, promptly settle with such other Contractor or Vendor by agreement or otherwise resolve the dispute. If such other Contractor or Vendor sues or institutes arbitration proceedings against the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and Architect and defend them in such proceeding at its own expense, and if any judgment against the Owner or Architect arises therefrom, the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it, and shall also reimburse the Owner or Architect for any



Architect’s, Engineer’s, and Attorney's fees and Court costs which the Owner or Architect has incurred.

6.2.6 The Contractor shall be responsible for proceeding with work in a manner that will not

void any and all guarantees and warranties held by the Owner on the existing systems and facility. Contractors shall include in their Bid sufficient cost to hire a representative of the Manufacturer or Contractor covering a warranty or guaranty on existing materials to advise on, and oversee work being done that affects the warranties and guaranties so as not to void existing warranties and/or guaranties. Contractor shall comply with the Manufacturer’s/Contractor’s representative’s requirements to maintain guaranties and warranties intact.

6.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP add the following:

Add 6.3.1 before the first paragraph.

6.3.2 This obligation shall apply to clean-ups required not only during the course of construction, but also as of completion of work. In the event that the Owner is required to incur extra costs, by way of overtime charges or otherwise in the execution of its rights under this provision, those costs shall be chargeable to the Contractor.

ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK

7.1 GENERAL add the following:

7.1.4 Wherever the estimated quantities of work to be done and materials to be furnished on a

unit price basis under this Contract are shown in any of the Documents including the Proposal, they are given for use in comparing Bids, and the right is expressly reserved except as herein otherwise specifically limited, to increase or diminish them as may be deemed reasonably necessary or desirable by the Owner to complete the work contemplated by this Contract and such increase or diminution shall in no way invalidate this Contract, nor shall any such increase or diminution give cause for claims or liability for damages.

7.1.5 The allowance for overhead and profit combined may vary according to the nature, extent

and complexity of the work, but shall in no event exceed the following schedule:

.1 For the Contractor, for Work performed by his own forces 10% of cost

.2 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by his own forces 10% of cost

.3 For the Contractor, for Work performed by a Subcontractor 5% of cost

In no event shall the total allowance for overhead and profit exceed 15% of the net cost of the work, including all lower tiered sub-subcontractors.

7.1.6 If the net value of a change results in a credit from the Contractor or Subcontractor, the

credit given shall be the net cost without overhead or profit. The cost as used herein shall include all items of labor, materials, and equipment together with the cost of all insurance, bonds, use of small tools, incidental job burdens, general office expenses, engineering, cleaning, transportation and all other conditions referenced in the Contract



Documents. No percentages for overhead and profit will be allowed on employment taxes under FICA and FUTA that will be based on the Contractor’s last quarterly 941 form. When both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any.

7.1.7 Where they apply, unit prices for additions or deductions as stated in the Contract

Documents shall always be used as the basis for determining the cost or credit to the Owner for any changes made no matter what overall method is used for such determination.

7.1.8 Lump sum quotations for changes in the Work will not be accepted. Proposals shall be

completely itemized and broken down. They shall be accompanied by such supporting data as the Architect may require such as copies of Subcontractors or Vendor’s quotations quantity take-off sheets or other similar information. The Owner has the right to audit all changes and claims.

7.5 RIGHT TO AUDIT THE CONTRACTOR’S BOOKS AND RECORDS New Article:

7.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to appoint an auditor to audit and review the Contractor’s

financial books and records of account in connection with any claim by the Contractor, Change Order, or Construction Change Directive.

ARTICLE 8 - TIME

8.1 DEFINITIONS add the following:

8.1.5 All time limits set forth in the Agreement are of the essence. By executing the Agreement,

the Contractor confirms that the contract time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. Work will commence within TEN (10) CALENDAR DAYS after issuance of written “Notice to Proceed” and be substantially completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and Contractors’ Coordinated Construction Schedule for substantial completion of the entire Project in accordance with Section 011000 – Summary, Article 1.5 Work Phases. All time limits stated in the contract are of the essence.

8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION add the following:

8.2.4 The Contractor shall furnish such manpower, materials, facilities, and equipment and shall

work such hours, including night shifts, overtime operations and Sundays and holidays, as may be necessary to insure the performance and completion of the Work in accordance with the approved and currently updated and approved Schedule. Should it become apparent from the current Schedule that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, the Contractor agrees that he will, as necessary, take some or all of the following actions at no additional cost to the Owner or Architect and reimburse/pay for all costs, i.e., custodial fees/OT, etc. (Refer to the summary section 011000 for additional work restrictions) to improve the progress of the Project..

8.2.4.1 Increase manpower in such quantities and crafts as will substantially eliminate, in the

judgment of the Architect, the backlog of Work;



8.2.4.2 Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per working day, working days per week, the amount of equipment, or any combination of the foregoing, sufficiently to substantially eliminate, in the judgment of the Architect, the backlog of Work; and,

8.2.4.3 Reschedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrence of accomplishment of

activities.

8.2.5 The Architect may require the Contractor to suggest revisions to the Schedule in writing demonstrating its program and proposed plan to make up the delay to ensure completion of the Work within the Contract Time. If the Architect finds the proposed plan not acceptable, the Architect may require the Contractor to take any of the actions set forth in this Article without additional cost to the Owner to make up the lag in scheduled progress.

8.2.6 Should the Contractor fail to achieve Substantial Completion in accordance with the date

established in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all professional fees plus expenses incurred by the Owner for additional services required of the Architect, Engineer, and Owner’s Attorney resulting from the failed performance by the Contractor to meet the Contract Substantial Completion Date.

8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME


If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by (1) an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner; or (2) by changes ordered in the Work; or (3) by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties, adverse weather conditions documented in accordance with section 15.1.6.2, or other causes beyond the Contractor’s control; or (4) by delay authorized by the Owner pending litigation or mediation; or (5) by other causes that the Contractor asserts, and the Architect determines justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine and the Owner approve.

8.3.3 Delete this paragraph and substitute the following:

In accordance with N.J.S.A. 18A:18A-41, in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to collect damages from the Owner or Architect as a result of any Project delay not solely caused by the Owner’s negligence, bad faith, active interference, tortuous conduct, or unforeseen circumstances uncontemplated by the parties, which were not otherwise foreseeable, as more particularly described in Article 8.4.4. The Contractor is aware that its ability to complete its portion of the Project could be hindered or delayed by the actions or inactions of other Contractors on the Project or other causes not attributable to the Owner’s negligence, bad faith, active interference or tortuous conduct or unforeseen circumstances uncontemplated by the parties, which were not otherwise foreseeable, as more particularly described in Article 8.4.4. The Contractor’s sole remedy for delays by the Owner’s negligence, bad faith, active interference, tortuous conduct or unforeseen circumstances uncontemplated by the parties, which were not otherwise foreseeable, as more particularly described in Article 8.4.4 shall be the actual out of pocket expenses



incurred by the Contractor directly attributable to the delays caused solely by the Owner or unforeseen circumstances uncontemplated by the parties, which were not otherwise foreseeable, as more particularly described in Article 8.4.4. The Contractor’s sole remedy for delays caused by any reason other than the Owner’s negligence, bad faith, active interference, tortuous conduct or unforeseen circumstances uncontemplated by the parties, which were not otherwise foreseeable, as more particularly described in Article 8.4.4 shall be an extension of time to complete the Project.

8.3.4 To the fullest extent permitted by law, no payment, compensation or adjustment of any

kind (other than the extensions of time provided for in Paragraph 8.3.1) shall be made to the Contractor by the Owner or Architect for direct, indirect, or impact damages, including but not limited to costs of acceleration or loss of revenue, overhead or profit, arising because of hindrances or delays being avoidable or unavoidable, reasonable or unreasonable, other than delays adjudicated as attributable to solely the Owner’s negligence, bad faith, active interference, or tortuous conduct or unforeseen circumstances uncontemplated by the parties, which were not otherwise foreseeable, as more particularly described in Article 8.4.4. The Contractor agrees that he will make no claim against the Owner or Architect for payment, compensation, damages, mitigation of liquidated damages, or adjustment of any kind for such hindrances or delays, and will accept such extensions of time in full satisfaction for any and all alleged claims against the Owner and Architect for any and all such hindrances or delays in all cases where the Owner’s negligence, bad faith, active interference, or tortuous conduct or unforeseen circumstances uncontemplated by the parties, which were not otherwise foreseeable, as more particularly described in Article 8.4.4, is not the sole cause of the delay. No additional payment will be made for reason of extension of time to any contractor in the completion of work. No claims for extra cost by any contractor will be granted by reason of the construction not being completed within the contract time.

8.3.5 The provisions of this Article shall not be so interpreted or construed as to preclude or

prevent the Contractor from making and prosecuting any claim against any separate Contractor engaged by the Owner for damages alleged to have been caused or occasioned by any such separate Contractor. Any delay attributable to another contractor shall be brought by the contractor as a direct action against the delaying contractor.

8.3.6 Any delay attributable to lack of coordination or cooperation by and between the

Contractor or his Subcontractors, if any, will not be recognized by the Owner as the basis for any claim for increase in any Contract Sum, but shall be settled as provided in the General and Supplementary Conditions.

8.3.7 An extension of time shall be allowed equal to the total period of any delay caused by

injunction or other legal proceedings, insofar as such proceedings prevent the Contractor from proceeding with the work, but no extension shall be allowed unless such legal proceedings shall be diligently prosecuted by the Contractor and, provided further that, in no case shall such delay be deemed to begin until the Contractor shall have given written notice to the Owner of the injunction or other action of delay and shall have delivered to the Owner a copy of the injunction or other orders and the papers upon which the time shall have been granted.



8.3.8 The Owner may suspend the whole or any part of the work, if it shall deem it for the best interest of the Owner to do so, without compensation to the Contractor for such suspension other than extending the time for completion of the work as much as it may have been delayed by such suspension. During such suspension, all materials delivered upon but not placed in the work, shall be neatly piled by the Contractor so as not to obstruct public travel or shall be removed from the line of work at the direction of the Owner and, unless the materials be moved by the Contractor upon such direction, the materials shall be removed by the Owner and expense thereof will be charged to the Contractor.

8.3.9 Nothing contained herein shall preclude the Owner from recovering damages for delays

pursuant to the terms of the Contract Documents, except as specifically provided herein.

8.4 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES new article add the following:

8.4.1 The Contractor shall substantially complete all of his Work included in the Contract

Documents ready for the Owner’s occupancy as defined in the General Conditions, in accordance with the allotted time indicated in the Contract Documents, subject to extensions of contract time as provided in the General Conditions.

8.4.2 In the event of the failure of the Contractor to complete the said work within the time stated

in its proposal, and in accordance with article 8.1.5, the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner in the sum of FIVE HUNDRED ($500.00) DOLLARS per day for each and every calendar day that the work remains incomplete in accordance with designated phased completions. This sum shall be treated as liquidated damages (and not a penalty) for the loss to the Owner of the use of premises in a completed state of construction, alteration or repair, and for added administration and inspection costs to the Owner on account of the delay; provided, however, that the said liquidated damages shall be in addition to other consequential losses or damages that the Owner may incur by reason of such delay, such as, but not limited to, reasonable attorney’s fees, all additional consequential Architectural and Engineering fees incurred including, but not necessarily limited to, additional design work, submittal reviews, correspondence, inspections, job meetings, reviewing applications for payment, punchlists, and similar services, etc. by the Owner after the scheduled date of substantial completion as indicated in article 8.1.5, other added costs of the project and the cost of furnishing temporary services, if any. Any such sums for which the Contractor is liable may be deducted by the Owner from any monies due or to become due to the Contractor.

8.4.2.1 The Contractor agrees that said work shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently, and

uninterruptedly at such rate of progress as will ensure full completion thereof within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the work herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. If the said Contractor shall neglect, fail or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree, as a part consideration of the awarding of its contract, to pay the Owner the amount specified in the contract, not as a penalty but as liquidated damages for breach of contract as hereinafter set forth, for each and every



calendar day that the contractor may be held in default after the stipulated date in the contract for completing the work.

8.4.2.2 The said amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner

because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain, and said amount is agreed to be the amount of damages which the Owner would sustain, and said amounts shall be retained by the Owner as necessary to cover projected untimely completion of the contract work due to Contractor-caused delays.

8.4.2.3 It is further agreed that time is of the essence of each and every portion of this contract and

of the specifications wherein a definite and certain length of time if fixed for the performance of any act whatsoever; and where under the contract an additional time is allowed for the completion of any work, the new time limit fixed by such extension shall be of the essence of this contract.

8.4.3 Inasmuch as certain of the expenses, inconvenience, and other damages the Owner will

sustain in the event that the Contractor does not achieve Substantial Completion, within the Contract Time or extensions thereof approved by Change Order, will include all elements of loss attributable to the delay, including but not limited to amounts actually paid by the Owner for attorneys’ fees, the Architect’s additional services and expenses, and for other Contractor’s claims for additional costs incurred as a result of the Contractor’s failure to achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. It will also include all other damages to the Owner for delay in completion of the Work by the Contractor, which shall be liquidated in the sum as stipulated above for each calendar day by which the Contractor shall fail to complete the Work within the Contract Time and any extensions thereof approved by Change Order. Such liquidated damages shall not be considered as a penalty. The Owner shall deduct and retain out of any money due, or become due hereunder, the amount of the liquidated damages.

8.4.4 The Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages, or any excess cost when the

Owner determines that the contractor is without fault and the Contractor’s reasons for the time extension are acceptable to the Owner; provided further, that the Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages or any excess cost when the delay in the completion of the work is due:

(a) To any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the government;

(b) To unforeseen cause(s) beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the

Contractor including, but not restricted to, acts of God or of the public enemy, acts of the Owner, acts of another Contractor in the performance of a contract with the Owner which acts are contrary to the terms of such contract, fires, flood, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and severe weather; and

(c) To any delays of Subcontractors or Suppliers occasioned by any of the causes specified

in the immediately preceding subsection (a) and (b).



(d) Unforeseen circumstances shall not include situations which are reasonably foreseeable in construction projects of similar scope and type, such as delays in connection with responses to RFI’s and change orders, delays in payment to the Contractor, withholding of payment to the contractor, emergency and scheduled tests, inspections and/or abatement activities, the discovery of hazardous materials and such other circumstances which are addressed in the Project Manual, the Project Specifications or this Agreement. To the extent provided in this Agreement, such circumstances, including but not limited to those specified in this Article 8.4.4, may entitle the Contractor to an extension of time, provided said delay is beyond the control of and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, but in no event will such circumstances entitle Contractor to pursue a claim for delay as against the Owner as they are not considered "reasons not contemplated by the parties" as referenced in N.J.S.A. 18A:18A-41.

8.4.5 The Contractor shall, within five calendar days from the beginning of such delay, unless

the Owner shall grant a further period of time prior to the date of final settlement of the contract, notify the Owner in writing of the causes of the delay. The Owner shall first ascertain the facts and the extent of the delay and shall notify the Contractor within a reasonable time that good cause has been shown to warrant the granting of such extension. The Owner’s determination shall be final and binding upon all parties, providing that said discretion is done in good faith and consistent with all of the terms herein.

8.4.6 Estimated liquidated damages may, at the Owner’s option, be withheld from any payments

otherwise due the contractor if the Contractor has failed to timely complete a critical activity, which failure has a substantial likelihood of delaying substantial completion of the project beyond the date set forth in the Contract Documents. Estimated liquidated damages shall be based on a reasonable projection, in light of the Construction Schedule, of the number of days substantial completion will be delayed beyond the scheduled substantial completion date set forth in the Contract Documents. Failure of the Owner to withhold estimated liquidated damages from payments due the Contractor shall not be deemed a waiver of liquidated or estimated liquidated damages.

ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

9.1 CONTRACT SUM append the following to section 9.1.1:

The Contract sum shall include the cost of all work, labor, materials, equipment, transportation and all other things necessary to perform and complete the Project in a manner acceptable to the Owner and within the required time; all incidental expenses in connection therewith; all costs on account of loss by damage of destruction of the Work, to the extent that the Owner and Contractor do not recover the cost of such loss from insurance carrier; and any additional expenses for unforeseen difficulties encountered, settlement of damages and replacement of defective work and materials.

9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES add the following:



Delete the paragraph and substitute the following:

9.2.1 Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect, before the first Application for Payment, a schedule of values allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work and showing a complete breakdown of labor and materials of all components of Work, including that of all Subcontractors named on the Contractor’s bid form with signed affidavits from each of the said Subcontractors, and prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. The Contractor shall amend the schedule of values as requested by the Architect. Any changes to the schedule of values and shall be submitted to the Architect and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require, and unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s subsequent Applications for Payment. The Architect’s decision shall be final.

9.2.2 Claims for escalation from prices submitted at the time of bid for work included in the

original scope of work at the time of bid, including alternate bid and unit prices, will be prohibited.

9.3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT add the following:

9.3.1.3 Applications for payment shall be made monthly based upon labor and materials completed

and materials suitably stored on site. Two-Percent (2%) of the amount due on each partial payment shall be withheld by the Owner when the outstanding balance of the Contract exceeds $500,000.00, and Five percent (5%) of the amount due on each partial payment shall be held by the Owner when the outstanding balance of the contract is $500,000.00 or less in accordance with N.J.S.A.18A:18A-40.3. Requisitions for all payments will be made on AIA Document G702 Application and Certificate for Payment, in addition to the Owner’s Invoice Forms as required. Contractor will be required to submit an itemized, detailed cost breakdown showing quantities, unit costs, and totals to the Architect within twenty (20) days after Notice to Proceed. Form to be in conformance with Architect’s requirements.

9.3.2 Delete this paragraph and substitute the following:

Payments on account of materials or equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the site, or at some other location agreed upon in writing, may be made electively and purely upon the discretion of the Owner with the advice of the Architect and subject to the following conditions:

.1 Such materials or equipment shall have been fabricated or assembled specifically for the Project and delivered to storage no earlier than needed for the orderly progress of the Work as demonstrated by the Progress Schedule.

.2 Title to such materials or equipment shall pass to the Owner pursuant to the Contractor’s bill of sale which shall contain guarantee of replacement thereof in the event of damage thereto or disappearance thereof due to any cause. The Contractor



shall also affirm that he will pay for such materials or equipment immediately upon receipt of payment therefor from the Owner.

.3 If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site.

.4 Raw materials or other materials or equipment readily duplicated or usable on other projects will be paid only after the materials are incorporated in the construction.

.5 The Owner reserves the right to deny a request, without explanation, for payment for stored materials or equipment. The failure of the Owner to respond to a request by a Contractor for payment for stored materials shall be deemed as a denial of that request.

.6 Payments which are made for stored materials or equipment shall include only the net cost of the materials or equipment plus cost of delivery, if applicable to the point of storage. Payments for overhead, profit and other job costs shall be made only in accordance with Section 9.3.1.

.7 Affidavits, in form acceptable to the Architect, shall be furnished with each application for payment in which payment is being requested for stored materials. Separate affidavits shall be furnished for each location where items are being stored.

.8 With each affidavit the Contractor shall submit sufficient documentation to demonstrate that the stored materials have been received by the Contractor. The Architect shall be the sole judge as to the adequacy of this documentation and shall, at his option, be permitted access to all areas where these materials are to be stored to perform any inspections he deems necessary.

.9 Payment will NOT be made for materials stored off-site.

9.3.4 Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment, all Subcontractors and Sub-Subcontractors who performed work for which certificates of payment have been previously issued and payments received from the owner have in fact been paid for such work.

.1 Contractor hereby waives any right which it may have to assert a mechanics' or

other lien against the work, the project site, and any improvements thereon. Further, the Contractor shall cause a similar waiver to be included in all of its Subcontract and Sub-Subcontracts. Contractor shall also execute a separate waiver of liens if so requested by the Owner.

.2 Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold Owner and Architect harmless from and against any and all claims, actions and proceedings arising out of or related to any liens asserted against the work, the project site and any improvements thereon, or the payments due the Contractor under this agreement. As complete indemnification is intended, all costs and expenses, including reasonable



attorney's fees, incurred by the Owner, and Architect in enforcing this provision shall be reimbursed by the Contractor to the Owner.

9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT

9.4.1 Delete the entire paragraph and substitute the following:

Provided the Prime Contractor has performed work in accordance with the provisions of its Contract with the Owner, the Architect will, after receipt of the Contractor’s Certified Application for Payment (not the preliminary pencil copy), either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Owner and Contractor in writing of the Architects reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in paragraph 9.5.1 of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. Provided the Contractor’s Certified Application for Payment (not the preliminary pencil copy) is received no less than 20 days prior to the next scheduled meeting of the entity’s governing body the amount due may be approved and certified at the scheduled meeting of the entity to be paid during the entity’s subsequent payment cycle, not to exceed 30 days. If an Application for Payment is received by the Owner and Architect after the 20 day period prior to the scheduled meeting of the entity’s governing body, the amount due may be approved and certified at the next subsequent scheduled meeting of the entity’s governing body and subsequent payment cycle.

9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION add the following:

9.5.1.7 Delete the entire paragraph and substitute the following:

repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or

9.5.1.8 failure to maintain the site in a safe and satisfactory manner in accordance with the Contract

Documents and/or law as determined by the Architect.

9.5.2.1 If the Owner is entitled to any reimbursement or payment from the Contractor under or pursuant to the Contract Documents, such payment shall be made promptly upon demand by the Owner. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, if the Contractor fails to promptly make any payment due the Owner, or the Owner incurs any expenses due to the Contractor’s acts and omissions, the Contractor, including but not limited to additional services of the Architect and reasonable attorney’s fees, the Owner shall have an absolute right to offset such amount against the Contract Sum and may, in the Owner’s sole discretion, elect either to: (1) deduct an amount equal to that which the Owner is entitled from any payment due the Contractor, or (2) issue a written notice to the Contractor reducing the Contract Sum by an amount equal to that which the Owner is entitled.

9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT Delete the entire paragraph and substitute the following::

9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor,

within the time specified in 9.4.1, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor by the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect



or awarded by binding dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven (7) additional days’ written notice to the Owner and Architect, suspend performance of the Construction Contract until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shut-down, delay and start-up which shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7.

9.7.1.1 This provision is a permissible exception to the requirements set forth in N.J.S.A. 2A:30A-

2. All disputes regarding whether a party has failed to make payments pursuant to N.J.S.A. 2A:30A-1 et seq. may be submitted to a process of alternative dispute resolution.

9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION add the following:

9.8.1.1 When the work, or designated portion thereof is determined by the Architect in conjunction

with the Owner to be substantially complete and has received a temporary or permanent Certificate of Occupancy or Certificate of Approval, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the day of the Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such certificate.


When the Contractor considers that the work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of all items to be completed or corrected. Failure to include any item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Together with this list, the Contractor shall provide a written request to the Architect to perform an inspection of the Work.


Upon receipt of the Contractor’s request, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect’s inspection discloses additional items, whether or not included on the Contractor’s list, which are not sufficiently completed or corrected in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, promptly complete or correct such items. All items must be corrected by the Contractor within fourteen (14) days after receipt of the list from the Architect or within an acceptable time frame established by the Contractor and Architect and approved by the Architect. Upon completion of those items the Contractor shall request, in writing, a re-inspection of the Work. This re-inspection shall commence



within fourteen (14) days after receipt of notice. If upon the re-inspection, the Architect finds that the previous items, or new items, do not conform to the Construction Documents, a revised list shall be provided to the Contractor within seven (7) days. This sequence of actions shall take place until all items conform to the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be liable to reimburse the Owner, by means of a Change Order, for all costs and fees of the Architect, Engineers, and all professionals associated with re- inspections of Work beyond one (1) initial inspection and one (1) re-inspection of the Work.

9.8.3.1 If during the sequences of inspection and correction of Work, the Contractor defaults or

neglects to carry out the correction of Work in accordance with the time frames established in 9.8.2 or in accordance the approved schedule of correction, the Contractor shall be considered in default and the Owner may exercise all rights under these Contract Documents. This shall also include Article 2.4 – Owner’s Right To Carry Out The Work.

9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE add the following:


Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents, nor does it waive the Owner’s right to liquidated and actual damages described in Article 8.4.5 because Final Acceptance of the Work shall be for the entire work only and not in part.

9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT add the following:

9.10.4 Delete these sub paragraphs and substitute the following:

.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;

.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents; or

.4 insufficiency of or failure to provide requisite close-out documents.

9.10.6 Prior to final payment, Contractor will submit, but not limited to the following:

.1 Supplemental Attachment for Accord Certificate of Insurance - AIA Document G715.

.2 Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims - AIA Document G706.

.3 Affidavit of Release of Liens - AIA Document G706A.

.4 Consent of Surety to Final Payment - AIA Document G707.

.5 Certification of Paid Wages in accordance with New Jersey Prevailing Wage Act.

.6 Maintenance Bond in form as bound herein.

.7 Contractor’s “As-Built” drawings on CD.

.8 Maintenance Manuals and Instructions.



.9 Special written guarantees and warranties in addition to the guarantee covered by Maintenance Bond. Guarantee shall be signed and sealed by Officer of the Contracting Firm and shall be notarized.

.10 Fully Executed AIA Substantial Completion Form G-704.

9.10.7 Upon completion of the punchlist and all other required scope of work have been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall submit a written request certifying that the project is ready for final inspection by the Architect. A copy of the “Ready For Closeout” form is included in 009000 – Project Forms.

ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS add the following:

10.1.1 The Contractor is required to establish, maintain, and implement effective programs to

ensure compliance with all OSHA regulations, in addition to the Hazard Communication Standard, and advise the Architect regarding the location, on site, where the Contractor’s MSDS sheets are kept. The Contractor will provide the Architect (for informational purposes only) with all information regarding any precautionary measures that the relative Contractor must employ to protect employees, any foreseeable emergency situations, and the relative Contractor’s labeling system used at the work site. The Contractor is also required to provide this information to the Owner and other entities operating at the site, and to secure similar information from the other entities operating at the site, for the protection of all employees.

10.1.2 Neither the Owner, nor the Architect will be responsible for providing, maintaining or

enforcing a safe working place for the Contractors, their Subcontractors or their employees, or any individual responsible to them for the work.

10.1.3 Neither the professional activities of the Architect, nor the presence of the Architect or the

Architect’s employees and sub-consultants at a construction site, shall relieve the Contractor and any other entity of their obligations, duties, and responsibilities including, but not limited to, construction means, methods, sequences, techniques, or procedures necessary for performing, superintending, or coordinating all portions of the work of construction in accordance with the contract documents and any health or safety precautions required by any regulatory agencies. The Architect and Architect’s personnel have no authority to exercise any control over any construction contractor or other entity or their employees in connection with their work or any health or safety precautions. The Contractor is solely responsible for job site safety, and warrants that this intent shall be made evident in the Owner’s agreement with the Contractor. The Owner, the Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be defendant and indemnified and shall be made additional insured under the Contractor’s general liability insurance policy.

10.1.4 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order at all times among

Contractor’s employees and all subcontractors. Contractor’s employees and subcontractors shall dress in clothing appropriate to the work they perform. Contractor shall not engage any employee not skilled in a task assigned. All employees assigned to the Work by Contractor shall perform in the best manner and shall cooperate fully with the Owner and all other representatives of the Owner.



10.1.5 Smoking on the Owner’s Property/Project Limits shall be prohibited. Contractor’s employees shall avoid communications with students or teachers except to the extent necessary to implement safety measures.

10.1.6 At no time will the Contractor be permitted to work in any manner above occupied areas.

10.1.7 Contractor understands that the Project is an educational facility which may be fully or

partially occupied and utilized by teachers and students. The Contractor shall take into consideration that the students utilizing or attending the educational facility are susceptible to the hazards of attractive nuisance or other hazards present on construction sites and shall take any and all necessary precautions.

10.1.8 It is absolutely prohibited for any worker to act in any manner which would be deemed

injurious to the students or faculty or inappropriate within the school facility or setting. At the request of the Owner, which shall only be made for cause, the Contractor shall remove any employee from the Work, Project and site. No alcoholic beverages or other prohibited substances shall be permitted or consumed on school property.

10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY add the following:


The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities, including, but not limited to, the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and amendments thereto, bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. The Contractor shall conform to requirements of the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act, and the Construction Safety Code. The requirements of the State, Local and Association Codes shall apply where they are equal to or more restrictive than the requirements of the Federal Act.

10.2.2.1 The Contractor will be responsible for providing general safeguarding as well as gaining

compliance with the requirements of safety codes and ordinances and coordinating with all Contractors on the Project in accordance with N.J.S.A. 34:5-166 et seq. the State of New Jersey Construction Safety Code.

10.2.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the Manual of

Accident Prevention in Construction, published by the Associated General Contractors of America, Inc., provided that if any such provisions disagrees with that of an applicable law, regulation or code, the Contractor shall comply with the safer or more stringent provisions.

10.2.2.3 The Contractor shall submit with its bid an OSHA Safety Certification on the form included

in these specifications, certifying evidence that a full time representative shall be on site who shall have completed or be currently enrolled in an OSHA safety training program (30 hour OSHA certified program or equivalent program) which shall be acceptable to the Owner.



10.2.2.4 The Contractor shall obtain Material Safety Data Sheets (M.S.D.S.) for all material to be used on site and prior to material being brought on site. The Contractor shall maintain Material Safety Data Sheets and make them available for inspection to everyone as required by law.

10.2.2.5 The Contractor shall hold weekly safety meetings with its subcontractors to provide for the

safeguarding of persons and property. The Contractor shall record minutes of the meetings and submit copies to the owner on a weekly basis for the record.

10.2.2.6 The Contractor shall provide the Owner, at the initial project meeting, a written safety

program and hazard communication program as required by OSHA.

10.2.3.1 The General Contractor is responsible for maintaining the fenced construction area for the duration of the project including general trash removal and maintaining the grass if applicable.

10.2.4.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to

persons resulting from a material or substance encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. The work shall not be resumed except by written directive by the Owner.

10.2.5.1 The Contractor shall protect all materials and equipment for which he is responsible, which

is stored at the Project Site for incorporation in the work, or which has been incorporated into the work. He shall replace all such materials and equipment which may be lost, stolen, or damaged at his expense, whether or not such materials or equipment have been entirely or partially paid for by the Owner.

10.2.6.1 In an effort to promote a safe and drug free workplace, contractor and its subcontractors shall

be required to have a drug and alcohol testing program whereby employees will be required to submit to random drug and alcohol testing to the extent permitted by law. The contractor shall provide signs (12" x 24") at all pedestrian points of entry into the construction site which states, "All workers entering this site acknowledge that this is a drug and alcohol free environment and may be subject to random drug and alcohol testing". Drug and alcohol testing shall also be conducted by contractor or subcontractor at the Owner’s request, where the Owner or its representative has a reasonable suspicion to believe that an employee of the contractor or subcontractor is under the influence of drugs or alcohol. All testing shall be done at the contractor or subcontractor’s sole expense.


The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition. Prior to bringing any fill material onto the Project, the Contractor shall have the material tested and provide certification that the material is clean and free from environmental contamination.

10.2.7.1 The Contractor shall conduct daily comprehensive safety inspections of the work site and

submit to the Architect weekly reports indicating the results conclusions and actions



taken as a result of the inspections and any findings of non-conformance with current O.S.H.A. standards.

10.2.7.2 The Contractor shall stop work and immediately remedy any and all safety infractions

brought to their attention by the Owner or Architect or governing authorities having jurisdiction over the project. Any time lost as a result of safety violations shall not be grounds for delay or time extensions to the contract.

10.2.7.3 The Contractor shall remove snow or ice from the site, as required to provide safe access

to the work.

10.2.7.4 It is a requirement of this Contract that there is an absence of mold in the final product, and that best practices for prevention be followed. Actual remediation, if required, shall be performed by mold remediation experts hired by the responsible Contractor.

10.2.7.5 The General Contractor is responsible for maintaining the fenced construction area for the

duration of the project including general trash removal and maintaining the grass if applicable.

10.2.8 Substitute “48 hours” in place of “21 days”.

10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Add the following:

10.3.1.1 Add the following:

The Contractor will report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written directive of the Owner.


Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately.


To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect’s consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party



seeking indemnity, including, but not limited to, the Contractor, Architect, Architect’s consultants and/or agents and employees of any of them.

10.3.4 Delete the last sentence of the paragraph.

10.3.6 Append the following:

Nothing contained herein shall be construed to require the Owner to indemnify the Contractor where the Contractor performs the work out of sequence or at a time other than that indicated in the Construction Schedule.

10.3.7 ASBESTOS

10.3.7.1 Any Contractor performing any type of renovation or construction in or around existing

buildings must contact the environmental services department of the Owner to be informed of the district’s asbestos procedures.

10.3.7.2 Each Contractor shall anticipate in his bid, extra time required to coordinate with the Owner

for removal of any asbestos encountered during demolition work associated with this project.

10.3.7.3 Any Contractor disturbing or damaging any asbestos identified will be totally responsible

for its repair and/or removal in accordance with applicable laws and regulations at no additional cost to the Owner and in conformance with N.J.A.C. 5:23-8.1 et seq. Asbestos Hazard Abatement Subcode. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the payment of any and all fines and penalties which may be assessed against the Owner in connection with the disturbance or damaging of any asbestos containing materials.

10.3.8 VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS (VOC)

10.3.8.1 All materials used on this Project shall comply with all applicable governmental and local

VOC requirements.

10.4 EMERGENCIES add the following:

Prior to first paragraph add 10.4.1

10.4.2 The Contractor must provide, with their executed Contract Agreement, a list of home or mobile telephone numbers for those personnel who would be contacted in the event of any emergency at the project during non-business working hours.

ARTICLE 11 – INSURANCE AND BONDS delete the entire contents of the Article and replace with the

following paragraphs:

11.1 CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE AND BONDS add the following:

11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located and rated "A" or better by A.M. Best Company such insurance as will protect the Contractor from



claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s operations and completed operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, including acts of joint negligence between the Owner and/or Architect and those entities previously mentioned:

.1 Claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee

benefit acts that are applicable to the Work to be performed, including private entities performing Work at the site and exempt from the coverage on account of number of employees or occupation, which entities shall maintain voluntary compensation coverage at the same limits specified for mandatory coverage for the duration of the Project;

.2 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or

death of the Contractor’s employees;

.3 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Contractor’s employees, or persons or entities excluded by statute from the requirements of Clause 11.1.1.1 but required by the Contract Documents to provide the insurance required by the Clause;

.4 Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;

.5 Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom;

.6 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle;

.7 Claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations;

.8 Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18; and

.9 claims for damage because of hazardous operations including but not limited to, explosion, collapse and underground property damage.

11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability

specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment and, with respect to the Contractor’s completed operations coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract Documents. The policy shall be written on an occurrence basis, not on a claims made basis.

11.1.3 Certificates of insurance and endorsements indicating that the coverage is primary,

noncontributory (meaning the insurance provides primary coverage in connection with personal injury, death and/or property damage caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, its employees, agents, officers and/or subcontractors in connection with the project), which are acceptable to the Owner within seven (7) days of the Agreement and



shall be filed with the Owner (with copies to the Architect) prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire and the limits will not be reduced until at least thirty (30) days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner via certified mail, return receipt requested. Additionally, these certificates and policies shall name the Owner, the Architect and the Engineer and their consultants, as additional named insureds and the certificate(s) of insurance or policy endorsements, as appropriate, shall indicate that coverage provided to the additional insureds is primary, non-contributory coverage. In the event of cancellation, the Contractor shall obtain insurance in the same amount and for the same coverage from another carrier prior to the date of cancellation. An additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations, shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by Section 11.1.2. Information concerning change in coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor no later than the effective date of the change in coverage.

11.1.4 The Contractor shall ensure that each of his subcontractors, procures and maintains during

the life of his subcontract the insurance coverages of the type and in the same amounts as specified in this Article or shall insure the activities of his subcontractors in his own policy. Proof of insurance by way of certificates to be supplied to the Owner and copies to the Architect as required by section 11.1.3.

11.1.4.1 The Contractor shall defend and indemnify the Owner, the Architect, and the Engineers and

their consultants and respective officers, agents and employees as provided in Article 3.18. The indemnified parties may defend themselves, at the Contractor’s expense, from any claim or lawsuit which may arise out of the Contractor’s performance or lack of performance under the terms of this contract or they may elect to have the Contractor provide them with legal representation at the Contractor’s own expense.

11.1.5 The insurance required pursuant to this Article shall be written in the following minimum

limits of liability and shall be in the names of the Contractor, the Owner, the Architect and the Engineers, as their interest may appear. The amounts set forth in this section may be increased, in which case a Supplementary Schedule of Minimum Insurance Limits of Liability shall be included in the Contract Documents setting forth such increased limits.

The minimum insurance coverage required by the Board to be maintained by the successful bidder through either insurance policies from insurance companies licensed to do business in the State and rated A or better by A.M. Best Company, or through formal fully funded self-insurance programs authorized by law as follows:

.1 Workers Compensation: (in accordance with the laws of New Jersey and any other

jurisdiction required to protect employees of the Board and any and all Contracted Parties who will be engaged in the performance of the work on this project)

Applicable Federal, State: Statutory



Employers’ Liability $1,000,000.00 (each accident)

Disease - Each Employee $1,000,000.00

Disease – Policy Limit $1,000,000.00

.2 Contractor’s Liability Insurance: covering any and all bodily injury and property damage arising out of or in connection with the work performed hereunder (including coverage for premises, operations, explosions, collapse and underground operations, independent contractor protection, sublet work, elevators, contractual liability, broad form property damage, products liability and completed operations) and personal injury (with employment exclusion deleted):

a. Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability:

General Liability - Combined single limit as follows:

Each Occurrence $1,000,000.00

Aggregate $2,000,000.00

Automobile Liability (Owned, Non-Owned and Hired/ Combined Single Limit):


Each Person $1,000,000.00

.3 Excess Umbrella Liability: $5,000,000.00

Excess liability shall have a drop down provision to cover over $1,000,000 of Employers’ Liability section of Workers’ Compensation listed above.

.4 Contractual Liability Endorsement (Bodily Injury and Property Damage Combined):


.5 Completed Operations & Products Liability*:

Aggregate $2,000,000.00

*Maintain until one year after issuance of Final Certificate of Payment.

.6 Asbestos Abatement Liability Insurance:

In addition to the insurance requirements in the General Conditions, the Contractor licensed to perform Asbestos Abatement work shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project site is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by anyone directly employed by any of them, or



by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. Provide Contractor’s Asbestos Abatement Liability in the occurrence form as follows:


Aggregate $1,000,000.00

Excess Umbrella Liability: $5,000,000.00

All insurance required by this Section or any other insurance required by the Contract Documents shall identify the Owner, the Owner’s Architect, and the Asbestos Abatement Consultant each as an “additional insured”.

11.1.6 The above insurance policies shall:

(a) include an indemnification provision as specified in Article 3.18,

(b) include completed operation coverage, and

(c) Not be subject to any of the special property damage liability exclusions: explosion, collapse, damage to underground wires, piping and conduits which are commonly referred to as the XCU exclusions, and Certificates of Insurance furnished by the Contractor shall show by specific reference that each of the foregoing items has been provided for.

11.1.7 The insurance required by paragraph 11.1 is not intended to cover machinery, tools or

equipment owned or rented by the Contractor which are utilized in the performance of the Work but not incorporated into the permanent improvements. The Contractor shall, at the Contractor’s expense, provide insurance coverage for owned or rented machinery, tools or equipment.

11.1.8 The above policies for Comprehensive General Liability must be so written as to include

Contingent Contractor’s Insurance to protect the Contractor against claims arising from the operations of Subcontractors.

11.1.9 The Certificates of Insurance furnished by the Contractor and Subcontractor shall include

a clause obligating the insurer to give the Owner and each additional insured thirty (30) days prior to written notice of the cancellation of or any material change in the insurance coverage and endorsements to the policies. Policies expiring on a fixed date before Final Acceptance shall be renewed and filed with the Owner before the expiration date.

11.1.10 Nothing contained herein shall be interpreted to relieve the Contractor of his obligation to

complete the work without additional cost to the Owner beyond the Contract Amount. Any loss or cost of repair not covered or not fully covered by insurance shall be borne by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner beyond the Contract Amount. The Contractor will be responsible to cover all theft or vandalism costs to repair or replace materials including labor.

11.1.11 Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for any and all injuries to any

person and any and all damages to any property resulting from or in connection with the



project which are caused by any error, omission, or negligent act of the Contractor, its agents and employees, and any Subcontractor which he may employ.

11.1.12 To the extent that any of the foregoing provisions are inconsistent with the insurance

requirements set forth in the Project Manual, the foregoing provisions shall govern. The insurance provided by the Contractor and its subcontractors shall comply with all requirements which may be imposed by the State of New Jersey or any of its agencies with jurisdiction over this Project. In the event the contractor is required by the Owner or the State of New Jersey or its agencies to provide additional insurance, said insurance shall be provided by contractor at contractor’s expense.

11.1.13 Builders Risk Insurance: The Contractor shall obtain and maintain Builder’s Risk

Insurance, providing coverage for (all risk) of physical loss or damage to the property described hereunder in an amount equal to 100% of the completed value of the work contracted herein; excepting excavations, foundations and other structures customarily excluded by such insurance. The policy shall name the Owner as additional insured and loss payee as their interests may appear.

11.2 OWNER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE

11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner’s usual

liability insurance.

11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE

11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder’s risk “all-risk” or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract Modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.3 to be covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors in the Project.

11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an “all-risk” or equivalent policy form and shall include,

without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect’s and Contractor’s services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss.



11.3.1.1.1 The term "extended coverage" shall be deemed to include coverage against lightning, wind, hail, riots and civil commotion, vehicle damage, aircraft damage and smoke, exclusive of theft and vandalism. The "All Risk" Insurance coverage shall also include the interests of the Architect.

11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract

and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing, then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.

11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered

because of such deductibles.

11.3.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also portions of the Work in transit.

11.3.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the

insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance.

11.3.1.6 The fact that the Owner is furnishing All Risk Insurance shall not be interpreted to relieve

the Contractor of its obligation to complete the work without additional cost to the Owner beyond the Contract Amount. Any loss or cost of repair not covered or not fully covered by insurance shall be borne by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner beyond the Contract Amount. The Contractor will be responsible to cover all theft or vandalism costs to repair or replace materials including labor.

11.3.1.7 The Contractor may carry whatever additional insurance he deems necessary to protect

himself against hazards [not covered by the Owner's All Risk Insurance] and against loss of owned or rented capital equipment and tools owned by mechanics or any tools, equipment, scaffolding, staging, towers, and forms owned or rented by the Contractor, the capital value of which is not included in the cost of work.

11.3.3 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE

The Owner, at the Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner’s property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner’s property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused.



11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order.

11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or

both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.

11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of

each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.3. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Contractor.

11.3.7 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION

The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Section 11.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Project, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged.

11.3.7.1 If during the Project construction. The Owner insures properties, real or personal or both,

at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project three policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, the Owner waives all rights in accordance with the terms of section 11.3.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance.



11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND

11.4.1 The Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Payment Bond each in the full amount of the Contract sum for faithful performance and payment obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in the bidding requirements, in a form satisfactory to the Owner and consistent with New Jersey Statutes.

11.4.2 upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds

covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished.

The Contractor shall require the attorney in fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of his Power of Attorney.

11.4.2.1 Each Contractor will be required to furnish the Owner with a two (2) year maintenance bond

in the amount of 100% of the final adjusted Contract Sum commencing upon the date the Final Application for Payment is accepted by the Owner.

11.4.3 Additional or Substitute Bond

11.4.3.1 If at any given time the Owner, for justifiable cause, shall be or become dissatisfied with the

Surety or Sureties for the Performance and/or Payment Bonds, the Contractor shall within five (5) days after notice from the Owner to do so, substitute an acceptable Bond (or Bonds) in such form and sum and signed by such other Surety or Sureties as may be satisfactory to the Owner. The premiums on such Bond shall be paid by the Contractor. No further sums shall be deemed due nor shall be made until the new Surety or Sureties shall have furnished such an acceptable Bond to the Owner.

ARTICLE 12 – UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK

12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK add the following:


If any portion of the Work should be covered contrary to the request of the Architect or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it shall, if required by public authority or the Architect, be uncovered for observation, inspection, testing or approval and the work shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the contract time.

12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK add the following:

12.2.1 Append the following to the end of the paragraph;

Nothing contained herein shall be construed so as to prohibit the Owner from withholding payment to the extent as may be necessary to protect against loss on account of defective work not remedied or any form of payment claims against the Contractor that may subsequently have accrued




In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within two-year after the date of the Final Application for Payment is accepted by the Owner or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the two-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4.


The two-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after the date the Final Application for Payment is accepted by the Owner by the period of time between the date the Final Application for Payment is accepted by the Owner and the actual completion of that portion of the Work.

12.2.4.1 The Contractor shall protect all material and equipment for which he is responsible, stored

at the site for incorporation or which has been incorporated in the work. The Contractor shall replace all material and equipment, which may be lost or stolen at his expense whether or not it has been entirely or partially paid for by the Owner.

ARTICLE 13 – MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

13.1 GOVERNING LAW delete the text of the paragraph 13.1 and substitute and add the following:

13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of New Jersey.

13.1.2 The Contractor shall comply with all applicable federal, state and local laws, statutes,

regulations and ordinances and any order issued by every governmental entity with jurisdiction over the Project.

13.1.3 Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in this Contract

shall be deemed to be inserted herein and, if through mistake or otherwise, and any provisions is not inserted, or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party the Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction.

13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS




The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project or to the State of New Jersey or any subsidiary Department or Agency without consent of the Contractor. In such event, the assignee shall assume the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment.

13.5 INTEREST

Delete the text of the paragraph and substitute the following:

13.5.1 No interest shall be paid on unpaid balances except to the extent required by and, in that event, in such amounts as specified in P.L. 2006, Ch. 96, codified as N.J.S.A. 2A:30A-1 to -2.

ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT.

14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR

14.1.1.3 Delete the entire paragraph.

14.1.1.4 Delete the entire paragraph.

14.1.2 Delete the entire paragraph.


If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days’ written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, but under no circumstances shall the Contractor entitled to recover any overhead and profit on Work not executed or costs incurred by reason of such termination.

14.1.4 Delete the entire paragraph.

14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE

14.2.1 Add the following:

.5 If Contractor is adjudged bankrupt or insolvent, subject to the provision of the National Bankruptcy Act, specifically 11 U.S.C. 101 et seq.

.6 If Contractor makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors.

.7 If a trustee or receiver is appointed for Contractor or for any of Contractor's property.

.8 If Contractor files a petition to take advantage of any debtor's act, or to reorganize under the bankruptcy or similar laws.

.9 If Contractor disregards the authority of the Architect or directives of the Architect.



.10 If the Contractor interferes with the work of, or otherwise fails to cooperate with, any other contractor on the Project or the Owner’s own forces.

.11 If the Contractor fails to comply with the directives of the Owner or otherwise fails to perform its obligations in accordance with the Owner’s concept of the Project.

.12 If the Contractor fails to adhere to the Contract Schedule or otherwise disregards any provision of the Contract Documents which makes time of the essence.


When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. In addition to the Owner’s other legal remedies, in the event the Contractor otherwise violates any provisions of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after giving Contractor and his Surety seven (7) days’ written notice, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor’s tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work, all materials and equipment stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as Owner may deem expedient. In such case the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the direct and indirect costs of completing the Work, including compensation for additional professional services, such excess shall be paid to Contractor. If such costs exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such costs incurred by Owner shall be verified by Architect and incorporated in a Change Order, but in finishing the Work, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest figure for the Work performed.

Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination shall not affect any rights of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability.

14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE add the following:

14.3.3 Should the Owner be prevented or enjoined from proceeding with work or from authorizing

its performance either before or after its performance, by reason of any litigation, labor dispute, etc., the Contractor shall not be entitled to make or assert claim for damage by reason of said delay, but Time for completion of the Work will be extended to such reasonable time as the Architect may determine will compensate for time lost by such delay with such determination to be set forth in writing.

14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE

14.4.3 Append the following:

No other payment of any kind shall be due from Contractor.



ARTICLE 15 – CLAIMS AND DISPUTES.

15.1 CLAIMS add the following subparagraphs:

15.1.6.3 Any claim for an extension, or extensions, of time must be fully substantiated by incorporation of the impact from the changed condition into an update of the Contractor’s project schedule. This update must also reflect any other impacts to the schedule resulting from delays, concurrent or non-concurrent, for which any Contractor is responsible. No claims will be evaluated or accepted without inclusion of the substantiation requirements set forth in this section.

15.1.7 Delete Waiver of Claims for Consequential Damages in its entirety and substitute the following:

The Contractor waives claims against Owner, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract or Agreement. This waiver includes damages incurred by the Contractor including but not limited to principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit. This waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages claims due to any termination of the Contractor in accordance with Article 14.

Nothing contained in this section shall be deemed to preclude assessment of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

15.2 INITIAL DECISION add the following subparagraphs:


Claims, excluding those arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, and 11.5, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise expressly indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim. If and initial decision is not been rendered within 30 days after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker, the party asserting the Claim may demand mediation without a decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner (and its consultants).


The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the reasons therefor; and (3) , notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be



final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction.

15.2.9 If the initial decision of the Architect is not satisfactory to the Contractor making the claim,

the Contractor shall diligently perform the work as directed and shall keep an accurate accounting of all time and materials required to perform the contract.

15.3 MEDIATION add the following:

Substitute “litigation” for “finding dispute resolution” throughout

15.4 ARBITRATION

Delete this Article titled “Arbitration” and all references to Arbitration as set forth in A.I.A. Document A201, as this article is hereby deleted from the said document and this Agreement.

After the parties have complied with the previous sections of the agreement and they still have not resolved the issue, the exclusive and sole jurisdiction for all disputes shall be in the Superior Court of New Jersey and will not be subject to arbitration. Unless otherwise agreed in writing, the Contractor shall carry on the Work and maintain its progress during any mediation or legal proceedings. The prevailing party will be entailed to receive attorney fees and all costs associated with such dispute.

END SECTION 006230.

SUMMARY 011000 - 1


SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2

SUMMARY

A. The project includes work at the Mays Landing Campus of the Atlantic Cape Community College. The Contractor will be required to secure permits from the Township of Hamilton Building Department.

B. The project includes renovations and improvements at Buildings D and K at the Mays Landing Campus. Work shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Interior Renovations in Building K:

a. Interior demolition and office fit-out including but not limited to associated mechanical, electrical, and fire protection improvements

2. Renovations to Building D:

a. Roof replacement

b. Interior demolition and interior fit-out C. This Section includes the following:

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 3. Work phases. 4. Work under other contracts. 5. Use of premises. 6. Owner's occupancy requirements. 7. Work restrictions. 8. Specification formats and conventions.

1.3

WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification:

BUILDINGS D AND K RENOVATIONS MAYS LANDING CAMPUS

SUMMARY 011000 - 2


B. Owner:

ATLANTIC CAPE COMMUNITY COLLEGE 5100 BLACK HORSE PIKE MAYS LANDING, NEW JERSEY 08330

1. Owner's Representative:

Mr. Ed Perkins, Director of Facilities Planning & Capital Projects ATLANTIC CAPE COMMUNITY COLLEGE 5100 BLACK HORSE PIKE MAYS LANDING, NEW JERSEY 08330

C. Architect:

CLARKE CATON HINTZ 100 Barrack Street Trenton, NJ 08608

1.4

TYPE OF CONTRACT

A. Project will be constructed under a single prime Contract.

1.5

WORK PHASES

A. Project Substantial Completion: Work will commence within Ten (10) Calendar Days after receipt of written "Notice to Proceed" and be substantially completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and Contractor’s Construction Schedule for Substantial Completion of the entire project by end of business, May 11, 2021. All time limits stated in the Contract are of the essence. Building K is to be renovated first and it is to be substantially completed by November 11, 2020. Building D will commence renovations once the Building K renovations are completed. Note that the abatement of plaster ceilings at Building D must take place between December 26th and December 31st, 2020. Liquidated damages for the abatement work not being completed by December 31st will be $5,000 per day.

B. The Project Area will be available to the Contractor to begin work immediately upon award of the Contract.

C. The campus, site and buildings will be open and operational throughout the duration of this contract. Contractor shall have access to the work area during normal working hours, but will be responsible to coordinate with the College’s operations. Noisy or potentially disruptive work shall be coordinated with class schedule and events. The Work area must remain protected and safe.

D. Note: the Contractor is strongly encouraged to expedite submittals and ordering of products and long-lead items well in advance of mobilizing to the project site.

E. The Contractor is encouraged to perform disruptive work while classes are not in session, during breaks, etc.

SUMMARY 011000 - 3


F. The Contractor must notify the Owner seven (7) days in advance of any crane/lifting activities, and no lifting activities can occur while the building is occupied.

1.6 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACT

A. All work indicated on the drawings and within the specifications, unless noted otherwise, shall be performed under this contract.

1.7 USE OF PREMISES

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to designated work areas within the Contract limits indicated

with least amount of disturbance. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine construction operations on site to areas where work is required to complete

scope of work defined in the Project Manual and Drawings. 2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of the areas adjacent to the Project site. 3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, parking areas, loading areas and entrances

serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, the public and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials

and equipment on-site. c. The Contractor is not permitted to use any parking spaces designated for the

Owner’s staff or visitors without Owner’s written permission. Contractor shall review available on-site parking locations prior to submitting its bid.

C. Maintain existing electrical service throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by

construction operations. Protect property and persons in the project area during construction period.

D. Removal of non-fixed, movable items will be completed by the Owner prior to the start of

construction. Fixed or built-in items shall be removed and/or salvaged, and relocated, by the General Contractor and disconnects by appropriate trades as indicated and/or directed and as required to perform the work.

E. All Personnel shall dress in clothing appropriate to the work they perform. All personnel are to

wear shirts, hardhats, safety shoes, glasses, gloves, masks or respirators, noise protection devices, and other protective clothing and equipment as required by OSHA standards.

SUMMARY 011000 - 4


1.8 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy and use the buildings during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do

not close or obstruct walkways, driveways or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide not less than seven (7) days’ notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. Owner reserves the right to stop the work if it interferes with owner’s scheduled occupied activities critical to the owner’s operations.

1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. On-Site Work Hours: Work may be generally performed inside the existing building during the hours of 7:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, except otherwise indicated. Care should be taken not to interrupt utilities and be aware of sensitivity to noise that may be disruptive.

1. Special Owner Activities: Special activities may be conducted on site during and after

regular owner operation hours and on weekends during the duration of the project. At these times the Contractor may have limited access to the facility. The Owner will provide these dates to the Contractor as soon as they are known.

2. Weekend Hours: Saturday from Subject to approval by the Owner and further subject to ordinances and regulations by local and governing authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Evening Hours: Subject to approval by the Owner and further subject to ordinances and regulations by local and governing authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Provide minimum of seven (7) days advance notice to Owner if shutdown of service is necessary during change-over in writing, including anticipated hours for utility shutdown.

5. Hours for core drilling and other noisy activities, demolition, etc. shall be planned for the least distracting hours of the day and coordinated with the Owner through the Architect. The Owner reserves the right to stop those activities to be deemed excessive until a more appropriate time or day at their discretion.

6. The Contractor is responsible for maintaining all temporary emergency egress routes. The Contractor shall obtain approval from the Building, Police, Rescue and Fire Departments for all temporary emergency egress routes.

7. The Owner has the right to require disruptive work to be discontinued if affecting the students and employee staff.

B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than seven (7) days in advance of proposed utility

interruptions.

SUMMARY 011000 - 5


2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's and Owner's written permission.

C. Smoking: Smoking is prohibited on campus.

1.10 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 50-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.

1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-

referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.

2. Divisions 00 and 01: Sections in Divisions 00 and 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents

is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context,

are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



ALLOWANCES 01 21 00 - 1

SECTION 01 21 00 ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, apply to this Section.

B. Refer to Document 00 21 13, Instructions to Bidders, for substitution of materials and

products.

C. Addenda issued during the bidding period that affect this section of the specifications. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances and supplements paragraph 3.8, Allowances, in Document 00 72 00, General Conditions, and Document 00 73 00, Supplementary Conditions.

1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances.

Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to Contractor.

2. Unless indicated otherwise in Section 01 23 00, Alternates, the Contractor shall

include the entire amount of each allowance stated herein in the Base Bid.

3. Allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts.

4. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs,

overhead, profit, bonds, insurance and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances.

5. Contract contingency is not an entitlement to the GC. Unused portions shall be

removed from the contract via a final Change Order during contract closure. The goal is to not use contingency, it is not included to allow for upgrades or expansion of scope, but to cover unforeseen issues and design omissions within the approved scope.

6. A CO is only used when no other funding sources are available within the

contract and contract value must be added.

7. A CO is the only method for adding funding or to change the contract work (when funding from Owner’s Contingency Allowance included in the Contract is depleted) or time.

B. Types of allowances include the following:

1. Owner Controlled Contingency allowances



1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, Contractor shall advise Architect and Program Manager of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.

B. At Architect's or Program Manager’s request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use

in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.

C. Once the proposal is approved by the Owner, purchase products and systems selected

by Architect from the designated supplier. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Contingency Allowance Expenditure Authorization (CAEA), or as an Allowance Expenditure Authorization (AEA).

B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the

site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. C. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation

of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.

D. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation.

1.6 ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include freight, insurance, and delivery to Project site.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site,

labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.

1.7 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance.

1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the

allowance.

2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed.



3. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count.

2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES – DEFINITIONS

A. Contingency Allowance Expenditure Authorization (CAEA) is a request for utilization of a specified portion of the contingency allowance included in the GC contract.

B. An Allowance Expenditure Authorization (AEA) is a request for utilization of a specified

portion of an allowance included in the GC contract.

C. Each CAEA, AEA and CO must be listed separately in the pay application under the appropriate funding category.

D. Change Orders (CO) is a request for utilization of a specific portion of contingency dollars

outside the GC contract and it is used when no other funding sources are available within the contract.

3.4 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

A. Owner Controlled Contingency allowance: $250,000.00.



ALTERNATES 01 23 00 - 1

SECTION 01 23 00 ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Contractor shall indicate Alternate Prices related to the items below. Alternate prices shall include adjustments for Contractor’s overhead, profit, bonds, taxes, and other General Conditions, as well as the direct cost of the work.

1.3 LIST AND DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES

ALTERNATE 1: Provide new exterior windows at Building D and K. Refer to the demolition plans and demolition elevations for areas where the existing façade is to be removed and where lintels are to be installed at the head of the windows. Refer to the proposed floor plans and exterior elevations for the proposed window types. Refer to the window schedule for the window type profile, glazing type, and associated details. Note that roller shades are to be included with each proposed window and should be included in the Alternate #1 price proposal.

ALTERNATE 2: Provide new ceilings and lighting in the main entry lobby (room D-101) of Building D. Remove the existing ceiling and all mechanical, electrical, fire alarm, and fire protection devices mounted in the ceiling plane. Replace all diffusers, registers, grilles, sprinkler heads, fire alarms, exit lights, and lighting. Refer to the demolition plans and the proposed reflected ceiling plans for more detail.

ALTERNATE #3: Provide new exterior storefront window system and entry systems at the north and south facades of Building D’s main entry lobby (room D-101). Remove the existing window system and replace with the new system. Refer to the demolition plans and elevations and the proposed floor plans and elevations. Refer to the window elevations for the glazing types and associated details. Refer to the door schedule and door hardware schedule for door information.

PRODUCTS (Not Used)


END OF SECTION


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 1

SECTION 01 25 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions", or other approved form.

1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Contractor will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal Requests issued by Contractor are for information only. Do not consider

them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs,

with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the

effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the

Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect and Owner.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on

the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total

amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 2

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the

proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests, or other approved

form. 1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, the Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701, or other approved form.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Contractor may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714, or other approved form. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the

Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by

the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Coordination Drawings. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Project meetings. 4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).

B. Each subcontractor shall participate in the coordination requirements; and answer/respond to the coordination directives of the General Contractor. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor, or subcontractor.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results

where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure

maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components

to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures

required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of

their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative



procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually

incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base

Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,

structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. b. Indicate required installation sequences.

b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.



3. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key

personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each

temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL

A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.

1. Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other

contractors. 1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence

is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the

meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting

construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the

following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. c. Designation of key personnel and their duties.



d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. e. Procedures for RFIs. f. Procedures for testing and inspecting. g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. h. Distribution of the Contract Documents. i. Submittal procedures. j. Preparation of Record Documents. k. Use of the premises and existing building. l. Work restrictions. m. Owner's occupancy requirements. n. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. o. Construction waste management and recycling. p. Parking availability. q. Office, work, and storage areas. r. Equipment deliveries and priorities. s. First aid. t. Security. u. Progress cleaning. v. Working hours. 3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements,

including required corrective measures and actions.

2. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. 3. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.

Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at Bi-weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of



meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting.

Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last

meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the

following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) RFIs.



16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who

should have been present. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each

progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at weekly intervals. Project

coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination

meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the

last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

b. Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule

after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the

following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations.



3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders. 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance

and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. 1.7 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract

Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor

will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in

Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and

the following: 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.



8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract

Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data,

Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions,

thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments.

C. RFIs: Approved RFI form. 1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it.

Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case

Architect's time for response will start again. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the

Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract

Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI

response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.



Submit log weekly. Use approved Log form. 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive,

and Proposal Request, as appropriate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1

SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect’s responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. Submit prior to the first payment requisition. First payment requisition is to be contingent on the receipt of the initial submittal schedule.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication.



h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number.

1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form acceptable to Owner and Architect.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 10 business days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 business days for review of each resubmittal.

D. If two review/ revision/ delivery periods have been completed without an approval of the submittal, the Contractor and the Architect will hold a coordination meeting/ conference call after the Contractor has reviewed the Architect’s latest comments. This meeting shall take place during the Contractor’s allotted review period and in no way suspends the time allotted for the submittal process.

E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:



1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06 10 00.001). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06 10 00.001.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner and Architect, containing the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description. i. Specification Section number and title. j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each

of multiple items. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Related physical samples submitted directly. n. Indication of full or partial submittal. o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. q. Other necessary identification. r. Remarks.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect’s action

stamp.

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.



J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect’s action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Email electronic submittals as PDF type files directly to Architect and Owner’s distribution list established at the Project kick-off meeting.

a. Architect will return annotated file digitally.

B. Where paper submittals are required or permitted by the Architect, provide the following:

1. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies.

2. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.

3. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated.

b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated.

C. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams.



d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

D. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:


E. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.



a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. Paper or printed literature is not acceptable for finish selection.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit four sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned to Owner and to the Contractor.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

F. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format:


G. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

H. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

I. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

J. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.



K. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

L. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

M. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

N. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

O. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

P. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

R. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

S. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.



B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows:

1. "No Exception Taken": "No Exception Taken" means the submission is in general conformance with design concept. Construction, fabrication and/ or manufacture can proceed subject to the provision that the work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Final acceptance of the work shall be contingent upon such compliance.

2. "Furnish as Corrected": "Furnish as Corrected" means the submission is in general conformance with the design concept subject to notations on the returned submittal. Construction, fabrication and/ or manufacturer can proceed subject to the provision that the work shall be carried out in compliance with all annotations and/ or corrections indicated on the returned submittals and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Final acceptance of the work shall be contingent upon such compliance.

3. "Revise and Resubmit": "Revise and Resubmit" means that the Contractor shall revise and resubmit the submittal in accordance with all annotations and/ or corrections indicated therein. If construction, fabrication and/ or manufacture proceeds it is at the Contractor's risk. Submittals bearing "Revise and Resubmit" stamp shall not be permitted on the Project Site.



4. "Rejected and Resubmit": "Rejected and Resubmit" means that the submission is rejected for nonconformance with the Contract Documents and the Contractor shall make a new submittal which shall comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. If construction, fabrication and/ or manufacture proceeds it is at the Contractor's risk. Submittals bearing "Rejected and Resubmit" stamp shall not be permitted on the Project Site.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed ONLY when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1

SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, Construction Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction

disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager.

C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.



D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics.

E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.

G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.

K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project in the past five calendar years; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.



D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. 1. Where the services are required for a registered professional for delegated design,

testing and or observation, the profession shall be registered in the state of New Jersey.

F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. 1. Provide confirmation of same on the manufacturers’ letterhead along with other required

documentation.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.

e. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with



copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Notify Architect and Owner seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's and Owner's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or

construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. a. Where specifically allowed by the Architect, mock ups may become part of the

finished work if left undisturbed through the course of construction and if final approval for inclusion is sought and provided by the Design Professional.

7. Mock-Up Schedule; Refer to division 3.3 of this section for a schedule of mocked up architectural items only. This list is not to be regarded as total. The contractor shall review each specification section and provide the mocked up items as noted therein.

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.

B. Contractors Responsibilities:

B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are the Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.



3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."

D. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. 1. Retesting and re-inspection of failed work will be done at the cost of the contractor.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Owner, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect, Owner, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by

testing agency. 6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at

Project site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.



H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 45 calendar days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Owner, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's Owner's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



ROOF SYSTEM QUALITY CONTROL 01 40 10 - 1

SECTION 01 40 01 ROOF SYSTEM QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Special Condi-tions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports per-formed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not in-clude contract enforcement activities performed by the Architect, or Owner.

B. Quality-control services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicat-ed, or to verify that portions of the work are functioning as intended.

C. Quality-control services specified in this section do not limit the Contractor's responsibility to provide quality-control services specified in other sections or portions of the Contract Docu-ments. Specified quality-control services do not limit the Contractor's quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.

D. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality-control services not specified in other sections, including the following:

1. Infrared Roof Moisture Survey 2. Alternative Roof Moisture Survey 3. Roof Drain Testing

1.3 INFRARED ROOF MOISTURE SURVEY

A. Not sooner than three (3) months and not longer than six (6) months after completion of the roof system, the Contractor shall have an infrared roof moisture survey performed, by an independ-ent testing firm, on all roof areas in the scope of this Contract.

B. Qualifications of testing firm:

1. The survey shall be performed by a firm specializing in infrared thermography services for a period of at least ten (10) consecutive years.

2. The survey shall be performed by an NDT test technician certified to at least Level 2 in the Thermal/Infrared test method, in accordance with American Society for Non-destructive Testing Recommended Practice SNT-TC-1A, and having at least five (5) years experience in providing infrared inspection services on commercial roofing sys-tems.

3. The Owner has the right to reject any testing firm which does not meet, or does not pro-vide satisfactory evidence of meeting, the above requirements.



1) In the event the Owner rejects the Contractor's testing firm, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide another firm acceptable to the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Survey format:

1. The roof moisture survey shall be ground-based, walk-over type, performed and reported in accordance with ASTM C-1153; "Standard Practice for the Location of Wet Insulation in Roofing Systems Using Infrared Imaging", with the following additional requirements:

a. The entire survey shall be recorded on a digital format CD/DVD with audio descrip-tions of roof area designations and observations. A copy of the CD/DVD shall be submitted with each required copy of the report.

b. The report shall include thermograms of all moisture suspect anomalies, with cor-responding daylight photographs of the same areas, taken from the same perspec-tive.

D. Submittals:

1. At least thirty (30) days prior to anticipated performance of the survey, the Contractor shall provide written certification that the proposed testing firm meets the requirements specified in 1.3.B above.

a. Certification shall be accompanied by documentation from the testing firm indicat-ing the firm's experience and qualifications, including a list of projects and refer-ences for similar testing performed over the last ten (10) years.

b. Certification shall be accompanied by documentation of the technician's qualifica-tions, including training, certification and list of similar testing projects performed over the last five (5) years.

E. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections, tests, re-ports or other quality-control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with Contract Document requirements.

F. Final payment to the Contractor will not be made until the roof moisture survey is complete, in-cluding submission of acceptable documentation, and all necessary corrective work is per-formed to the satisfaction of, and at no additional cost to, the Owner. The Owner will retain the scheduled value of the roof moisture survey and any incomplete work, plus five percent (5%) of all completed work, until final payment. Said retainage shall not limit the costs associated with the roof moisture survey or the extent of corrective work that may be required to remedy any and all subsurface moisture.

1.4 ALTERNATIVE ROOF MOISTURE SURVEY

A. If it is the Owner's opinion that an infrared roof moisture survey may not be appropriate or effec-tive in detecting suspected subsurface moisture, the Owner may request a supplemental or al-ternative method of moisture survey.

B. The Owner will compensate the Contractor for all moisture survey costs in excess of the infra-red roof moisture survey cost. Any subsurface moisture encountered by the supplemental or al-ternative moisture survey shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner.



1.5 ROOF DRAIN TESTING

A. Post-Construction Testing: When all work reaches substantial completion, the Contractor shall water-flow test all roof drains, in the presence of the Owner or Owner’s representative, to de-termine if any full or partial drain clogs exist in the drainage system.

1. Report the results of testing to the Owner in writing prior to preparation of the final punch-list.

2. Any drains, piping or other components, whether exposed, concealed, below grade, etc., found to be clogged shall be cleared, repaired or replaced as required to restore full drainage capacity. All work shall be performed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner, including patching, repair or replacement of any materials, finishes, landscap-ing, etc., disturbed in gaining access to drainage components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INFRARED ROOF MOISTURE SURVEY

A. Notify the Architect and Owner at least seventy-two (72) hours before the anticipated perfor-mance of the infrared roof moisture survey.

B. Confirm that environmental conditions are appropriate for proper performance of the survey and notify the Architect and Owner no later than 1:00pm on the day of the survey to confirm that the survey will or will not proceed as scheduled.

1. If the survey cannot proceed as anticipated, due to environmental conditions, re-schedule and repeat the above notification requirements as necessary.

3.2 ROOF DRAIN TESTING

A. Notify the Architect and Owner at least twenty-four (24) hours before the anticipated testing.

B. Provide 3/4" diameter (min.) hose in sufficient length as required to utilize water source desig-nated by the Owner.

C. Run water at full volume, for a period not less than twenty (20) minutes, into each drain.

D. Report any leaking drainage components observed during testing to the Owner.

E. Re-test after any corrective work and repeat all procedures as necessary until achieving full drainage capacity.

3.3 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.



B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and protect repaired construction.

C. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibil-ity for inspection, testing, or similar services.



REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 1

SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.



B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960 www.aluminum.org AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials (202) 624-5800

www.transportation.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888 www.airbarrier.org www.abma-dc.org ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700 (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org



AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA) AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA EWS APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood

Systems

(See APA - The Engineered Wood Association) ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300



ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute

(See ASCE) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning

Engineers (800) 527-4723

www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org AWCI AWCI International (703) 534-8300 (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry International) www.awci.org AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) 323-3636 www.awinet.org AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (205) 733-4077 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association

International)

www.bifma.com CCC Carpet Cushion Council (610) 527-3880 www.carpetcushion.org CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462



CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465-2523 www.coolroofs.org (510) 485-7175 CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSA CSA International (866) 797-4272 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 www.csa-international.org CSI Cast Stone Institute (717) 272-3744 www.caststone.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org FM Approvals FM Approvals (781) 762-4300 www.fmglobal.com FM Global FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) www.fmglobal.com FMRC Factory Mutual Research (Now FM Global) FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0



www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700 HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org IAS International Approval Services (Now CSA International) ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561 www.iest.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732



www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings

Industry Inc. (703) 281-6613

www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550 www.ncta.com



NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441 NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) www.nofma.com NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA)



PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522 (Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of

America) (703) 736-9666

www.landcarenetwork.org PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 www.post-tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580 www.rfci.com SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 www.siaonline.org SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 www.smacentral.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154



(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)

www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries

Alliance (703) 907-7700

www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422 www.usgbc.org WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers (212) 297-2109



Association) www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door

Association) (847) 299-5200

www.wdma.com WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of

California) (916) 372-9943

www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-

4100 www.iapmo.org ICC International Code Council (888) 422-

7233 www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-

4533 ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-

6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-

0543

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. The list shall include all New Jersey Agencies that are applicable. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov



EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 http://gulliver.trb.org USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to



change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-

1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-

1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-

2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-

2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-

0080 www.access-board.gov

F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.





TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1

SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS

A. Specific administrative and procedural minimum actions are specified in this section, as extensions of provisions in General Conditions and other Contract Documents. Nothing in this section is intended to limit types and amounts of temporary work required, and no omission from this section will be recognized as an indication that such temporary activity is not required for successful completion of the work and compliance with requirements of Contract Documents.

B. The General Contractor is responsible for all temporary facilities to be used by all Contractors, other

entities at the site, the Owner's work forces and other personnel including occupants of the project, the Construction Manager, the Architect, test agencies, personnel of governing authorities, and similar entities and personnel authorized to be at the project site during construction. The General Contractor is assigned the responsibilities for installation, operation and removal of each temporary facility. The General Contractor is responsible for all costs and use charges associated with Temporary Facilities, including fuel, power usage, water usage and similar usage costs. The General Contractor is responsible for all temporary facilities referenced in this section.

C. No costs or usage charges for temporary facilities are chargeable to the Owner, nor can any

Contractor's cost or usage charges for temporary facilities be accepted as the basis for a change order extra. The total costs and usage charges for temporary facilities are included, collectively, in the Contract Amounts.

1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The General Contractor shall provide and operate all hoists, cranes, helicopters and furnish and erect all ladders and scaffolding required by him and his subcontractors, constructed to afford proper protection to craftsmen, their Work and other Work in progress and previously executed. The Owner’s New Elevator will not be permitted for use by the General Contractor or their Subcontractors for material or personnel lifting or access to any levels of the new building. If a Temporary Elevator is needed by the GC it will be installed and removed by the GC at his cost, including all rentals, Elevator Operator and Building Closure at the perimeter of the Temporary Elevator. If the GC requires a Temporary Elevator or lift, it will be provided by the GC until Substantial Completion.

1.03 JOB CONDITIONS

A. The General Contractor shall establish and initiate use of each temporary facility at time first

reasonably required for proper performance of the total work of project. Terminate use and remove facilities at earliest reasonable time, when no longer needed or when permanent facilities have, with authorized use, replaced the need.

B. The General Contractor shall install, operate, maintain and protect temporary facilities in a manner

and at locations that will be safe, nonhazardous, sanitary, protective of persons and property, and free of deleterious effects.

1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. The General Contractor shall provide facilities, establish procedures, and conduct construction activities in a manner that will ensure compliance with environmental and other regulations controlling construction activities at project site. The General Contractor shall designate one



person, the Construction Superintendent or other, to enforce strict discipline on activities related to generation of wastes, pollution of air/water/soil, generation of noise, and similar harmful or deleterious effects which might violate regulations or reasonably irritate persons at or in vicinity of project site. Anti-pollution measures required by N.J.D.E.P., as applicable are to be followed.

1.05 FIELD OFFICES

The General Contractor shall establish a construction office on the site where directed by the

Owner.

B. Provide adequate office space for field office personnel of General Contractor plus work station for incidental use by Subcontractors' personnel; suitably finished, furnished, equipped and heated/air conditioned. Include separate space for project meetings, with tables not less than 4' x 8', and seating for not less than 12 persons; cover main walls with tackboard material for posting of notices, progress schedule and similar information. Provide shelf space adequate for storage of approved samples.

C. The General Contractor shall provide electrical service to the General Contractor’s field

Offices. Field offices shall be fully equipped and operational within 21 days of NTP. 1.06 SHEDS

A. Each Contractor shall provide his own temporary sheds or trailers for storage, fabrication and similar purposes, which shall be located in accordance with the General Contractor's coordinated plan for site utilization.

1.07 WATER CONTROL / DEWATER A. Surface water drainage provisions shall be provided by the General Contractor. The General

Contractor is to comply with Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan on the Drawings and adjust as directed by the Owner to eliminate any interference with other trades work and access to areas of the site.

B. The contractor shall make themselves familiar with the geotechnical conditions of the project. The

GC shall provide, operate and maintain satisfactory facilities and equipment including temporary pumps, well points, coffer-dams, and any other means necessary with which to contain, collect, and pump all water entering excavations or other parts of the work to suitable place for disposal. All excavations shall be kept free of water until the work or structures to be built are complete. Maintain a dry building and provide temporary pumps and well points until the time of Substantial Completion.

1.08 SECURITY

A. The General Contractor shall maintain complete security on the site at all times outside of normal

working hours to protect the Work and all field offices, and to secure the area of construction by restricting all trespassers. All fences and gates shall be maintained by the GC at all times.

1.09 SITE ENCLOSURE FENCE

The entire site is enclosed by an 8' high security fence under a current lease agreement with Federal Fence. The GC will add full height fabric to the fence and maintain it for the Duration of the Project. The GC will assume the rental of the Temporary Fence along with the Maintenance and upkeep of same. The fencing shall be the sole responsibility of the General Contractor beginning from the issuance of NTP until Final Completion. The General contractor is responsible for securing



and locking the gates at the end of each work day. Keys must be provided to the Owner. Any relocation and reinstallation of Temporary Fence for Utility Work, Utility Connections, Road Closures, Sitework and New Building Construction will be by the GC.

1.10 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

A. Provide temporary plywood walkways, scaffold and railings as needed for public areas to protect against overhead work.

B. Where mud, snow, ice or other hazardous conditions exist in the purview (Scope of Work) of any

Contractor, the General Contractor shall remove the hazards immediately and replace with suitable material for the other contractors use. If the Owner is compelled to remove the hazards with their own forces due to inaction by the General Contractor, then the General Contractor will be back-charged for the work performed by the Owner

C. No welding, cutting by torch, or Work utilizing or causing flammable waste shall be done unless

adequate fire protection is provided and maintained for the duration of the Work in the area of operations.

1.11 DEBRIS CONTROL

A. The General Contractor shall be responsible for daily cleaning up of spillages and debris resulting from his operations and from those of his Subcontractors; and shall be responsible for complete removal and disposition of hazardous and toxic waste materials. The General Contractor shall provide containers at grade, sufficient for the depositing of nonhazardous/nontoxic waste materials, and shall remove such waste materials from project site at least weekly during cold weather (daily high temperatures below 50oF) and at least twice weekly during mild and warm weather.

General Contractor is responsible to provide all dumpsters. Ongoing cleaning and site maintenance is required, but at least once per week, The General

Contractor is to provide enough laborers to thoroughly clean the site/building. The GC will provide tools (i.e., brooms, etc.) to accomplish this task.

If the building/site is not cleaned to the satisfaction of the CM or the Owner, the CM reserves the right to hire additional labor to accomplish this task and back charge the general contractor for ALL costs incurred.

B. The General Contractor shall daily clean all mud, dirt and debris resulting from all trades operations

from the adjacent streets, sidewalks, drives and parking areas and shall repair all damage caused by the cleaning to the satisfaction of the Owner.

C. The General Contractor is to provide and maintain appropriate means of trash disposal (i.e., chutes)

to grade/dumpster. Multiple units may be required and shall be figured for in the GC bid.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION

A. Construction Sign: One (1) sign shall be constructed by the General Contractor on a 4’ x 8’ painted 3/4" exterior grade plywood securely fastened to 4" x 4" wood posts and painted with one coat exterior grade wood primer followed with two coats exterior finish paint in colors indicated. Sign shall be printed on an exterior grade vinyl or equivalent waterproof material (using graphics provided by the Architect) installed on the site as directed by the Architect, plumb and level in all directions. Posts shall be backfilled and compacted. The Owner reserves the right to change the text prior to installation of sign. The signs shall remain in place for the duration of the project as per Architect direction.



B. General Contractor shall provide wind bracing per FM Research approved criteria. C. Temporary partitions within the building as required for construction shall be constructed of 2x4

studs 16” o.c. with 5/8” paperless type X drywall floor to bottom side of structure above at the inside face. At the exterior face of temporary exterior partitions, utilize 3/4” FRT plywood on the 2x4 framing. Drywall shall be attached to occupied face of studs and nailed/screwed 8” o.c. maximum spacing. Joints in plywood shall occur over studs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ENCLOSURES

A. At earliest possible date, the General Contractor shall secure building against unauthorized entrance at times when personnel are not working. Provide secure temporary enclosure at ground floor and other locations of possible entry, with locked entrances.

B. At each story of construction, as soon as the structural floor decking work is principally completed

provide Plastic Tenting Enclosure so that the Concrete Slab on Deck work, and temperature sensitive work can proceed unimpeded. Provide Temporary Heaters and Fuel as noted in the latter portion of this section. In addition, when the Substrate - wall work is principally completed, the General Contractor shall provide temporary enclosure of all remaining openings. Arrange enclosure work to accommodate access, temporary heating, and natural ventilation as required for construction work by all entities on the project. All removal and reinstallation of the Temporary Enclosures is by the GC.

C. Where any form of demolition will expose the interior of the building to weather, demolition shall

follow the erection of weatherproof walls by the General Contractor installed inside the demolition line, sealed and flashed, as required, to keep all water from the building interior. Keep temporary weatherproofing in place until new construction has been completed to the stage where water will not enter the building.

D. The General Contractor shall provide constant protection against rain, wind, storms, frost or heat to

maintain the work, materials, apparatus and fixtures free from damage. At the end of each day's work, cover work likely to be damaged. During cold weather, protect work from damage by freezing and provide such enclosures and heating apparatus as may be necessary diligently to prosecute the Work without stoppage for reason of unfavorable weather.

E. Wherever a Contractor provides openings through walls or slabs, each location shall be adequately

protected at the end of each working day with temporary enclosures to make these areas tight. Openings through exterior walls shall be watertight.

3.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Within 21 calendar days of NTP, the General Contractor shall provide a temporary electrical power

distribution system, sufficient to accommodate temporary lighting and construction operations including the use of power tools, including heavy duty electrical welding units, electrical power for fan driven heating units, and start-up of specified building equipment which must be tested, started or placed into use prior to completion of its permanent power connections. Provide weatherproof, grounded wiring with overload protection; with direct wired connections, where feasible, and for voltages over 220/208 volts. Locate multiple outlets, not less than 4 gang, at each story of construction, spaced so the entire area of construction can be reached by power tools on a single extension cord of 100' maximum length.



1. General Contractor shall pay for cost of all electric energy used on distribution lines installed by him for the duration of the project, either by means of temporary power or permanent power until the time of substantial completion issuance for the entire project.

2. General Contractor shall provide and pay for all maintenance, servicing, operation and supervision of lines installed. He shall also maintain and service electrical equipment installed by the Heating Contractor and necessary for maintenance of temporary heat after same is required in the building.

3. Provide service with ground fault circuit interrupter feature, activated from each circuit of 20 amp or less rating.

4. Supply power for electric welding, if any, from either temporary power distribution system or by engine driven power generator sets, at Contractor's option.

5. Where a service of a type other than herein mentioned is required, the Contractor requiring same shall install and pay all costs for such special service.

6. As permanent power distribution system is accepted as substantially complete, either entire system or usable portions thereof, make suitable provisions for temporary use thereof, and remove unused portions of temporary system. Maintain and operate permanent electrical supply and distribution system until time of final acceptance and transfer of operation to Owner's personnel.

7. Provide meters, if required, for electrical power. 8. When temporary electrical lines are no longer required, they shall be removed by the

Contractor and any part, or parts, of the grounds or buildings disturbed or damaged shall be brought back to their original condition.

9. The General Contractor shall pay for all power up to Substantial Completion. At that time, the Owner will commence payment for all electric power usage.

10. The GC’s Electrical Subcontractor shall make power and lighting available to all contractors on a 24-hour basis at his own expense. Temporary power and lighting is to be maintained at all times unless directed otherwise by the Construction Manager.

B. General Contractor shall provide sufficient temporary lighting to ensure proper workmanship

everywhere; by combined use of daylight, general lighting, and portable plug in task lighting. 1. Provide uniformly spaced general lighting equivalent to not less than one 200 watt

incandescent lamp per 1,000 sq. ft. of floor area, and one 100 watt lamp per 50' of corridor or per flight of stairs.

2. Limit lighting installations to intensities, which will accommodate normal access and workmanship requirements, recognizing that each entity performing work requiring higher intensity lighting will provide supplementary plug in temporary lighting at localized areas where such work is in progress.

3. As permanent lighting system is substantially complete, for each story or usable portion thereof, make suitable provisions for temporary use thereof, and remove unused portions of temporary lighting system. Maintain and operate permanent lighting system until time of final acceptance and transfer of operation to Owner's personnel.

4. Replace all bulbs in permanent light fixtures that have been utilized for temporary lighting. 5. Maintain temporary lighting on a daily basis and change or adjust as new wall configurations

go up. 3.03 TEMPORARY HEATING AND COOLING

A. Prior to enclosure of building, buildings, or portions thereof, and when weather conditions indicate the necessity for temporary heat, cooling, and/or humidity control, the General Contractor shall provide, maintain, operate and pay all costs, including fuel, for a sufficient number of approved port-able units that will maintain a minimum temperature of 50 degrees Fahrenheit in all working areas of the building and site, and humidity levels per the material manufacturers recommendations so that the progress of the work is not impeded. General Contractor shall provide plastic tent protection



during the Steel Skeletal and Concrete Slab on Deck work and again for the temporary window and door opening closures, and any other protection required so that any work can continue in cold and inclement weather. The General Contractor shall include the cost of temporary heat, cooling and humidity control in their contract price and shall calculate the need for these based on historical precedent and the stage of completion of the work. The General Contractor shall have temporary heat, cooling, and humidity control available throughout the building for daily 24 hour use. Temporary enclosures shall begin one month prior to the start of temporary heat.

B. As soon as temporary, or permanent, enclosure is completed for any area or story of construction,

and temporary heat is required for scheduled work, or required to facilitate proper workmanship, and permanent heating system is not yet operable or authorized for use, the General Contractor shall provide temporary heat service for every entity authorized to do work at project site. Maintain temperatures as indicated by other Specification Sections for each type of work to be performed.

C. The General Contractor shall enclose the building with temporary or permanent enclosures (doors,

windows, etc.) to maintain a working temperature and to secure the building from trespassers. D. The building shall be considered enclosed when the roof is on and substantially weather tight; the

exterior walls have been completed to the point that they are weather tight (but not necessarily with final exterior finish such as brick); and when openings, doors and windows are closed with either temporary or permanent closures. Final decision of when the building is considered enclosed shall be solely the decision of the Owner.

E. As permanent heating/cooling system is complete prior to Substantial Completion, for each story or

usable portion thereof, the GC’s HVAC subcontractor shall make suitable provisions for use thereof in temporary heating and cooling, and notify the General Contractor to remove unused portions of temporary heating service. The GC’s HVAC Subcontractor shall maintain and operate permanent system for temporary heating/cooling purposes, including service to occupied areas if any, until time of final acceptance and transfer of operation to Owner's personnel, for major parts of system if not for entire heating system.

F. After the permanent heating system is generally ready for use and the conditions of construction

requires continuous 24 hour heat in the building, the GC’s HVAC Subcontractor shall provide, operate and maintain temporary radiation or unit heaters to provide required temperatures for the conduct of the work. This service shall be continued until the permanent heating system has been completely installed and in operation and the buildings of the project completed. The GC’s HVAC Contractor is to provide all warrantees from date of Substantial completion, not the date of temporary heat. The General Contractor shall furnish and pay for all fuel as required for providing temporary heat via the permanent heating system until Substantial Completion.

G. All permanent heating equipment used to supply temporary heat shall be completely cleaned and

reconditioned by the HVAC Subcontractor prior to final acceptance. Install new disposable filters and clean non-disposable filters prior to final acceptance. All belts and serviceable parts shall be serviced upon substantial completion. The contractor is required to maintain this equipment until Final Completion of achieved.

H. The General Contractor shall remove all soot, smudges, and other deposits from walls, ceilings, and

all exposed surfaces which are the result of the use of any temporary heating equipment including the use of the permanent heating system for temporary heat purposes. He shall not do any finish work until all such surfaces are properly cleaned.



3.04 TEMPORARY VENTILATION and DEHUMIDIFICATION

A. Any trade requiring ventilation or dehumidification for work or for materials shall provide fans, dehumidifiers or whatever means necessary to induce circulation of air and to maintain humidity at acceptable levels.

3.05 TEMPORARY WATER

A. As soon as practical after start of work at project site, the General Contractor shall provide temporary water distribution piping system, with 3/4" hose bib terminations at each story of construction work, located so that any area of building construction can be reached with a 100' length of hose. Provide hose units and protect system from freezing. Maintain system in operation at all locations until either the need for water has ended or the permanent system is placed in use for temporary water service. Maintain minimum water pressure of 30 psig at each hose bib, with 5 gpm flow rate.

B. Where potable water is available, either for total temporary requirements or as a separate service

for drinking water and sanitation, extend piping system through construction areas and to temporary offices and hand wash facilities.

C. As permanent water distribution system is accepted as substantially completed, either entire system

or usable portions thereof, make suitable provisions for temporary use thereof and remove unused portions of temporary system. Maintain and operate permanent water distribution system until time of final acceptance and transfer of operation to Owner's personnel.

D. General Contractor shall pay all monthly use charges for water.

D. Provide meters for water services, if required. Read meters and record readings weekly, and

include in progress report to Architect at monthly intervals.

3.06 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Starting at time of start of work at project site, the General Contractor shall provide and maintain self-contained toilet units of type acceptable to governing authorities, adequate, at all stages of construction, for use of personnel at project site. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel when both sexes are working, in any capacity, at project site. Facilities shall remain in use until completion of project. Use of permanent facilities will not be permitted.

3.07 REMOVAL AND RESTORATION

A. Prior to acceptance of the Project, each contractor shall remove temporary work for which he has been responsible.

3.08 OWNER'S RIGHTS

A. If any Contractor fails to carry out his responsibilities in providing temporary facilities, as set forth above, the Owner shall have the right to take such action as he deems proper for the protection and conduct of the Work, and to deduct the cost thereof from the amount due the Contractor at fault.

A. Extended work days, hours, shifts, weekend work, etc. may be allowed upon coordination and

approval by Owner or Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. Should the schedule begin to slip, for any reason, each contractor will be required to work

additional shifts or weekends to recover the lost time. Recovery time for schedule slippage shall be at no additional cost to the owner.



3.9 TEMPORARY STAIRS

A. The General Contractor will supply temporary stairs per floor suitable for other trades to access the work on upper levels including the roof. The stairs shall meet the code in effect at the time of construction with handrails and guardrails of the appropriate structural capacity and dimensions. The General Contractor shall submit to the local code official (if required) two sets design drawings of the stairs that have been prepared, signed and sealed by an Architect licensed in the State of New Jersey. The General Contractor shall maintain these stairs until such time that the permanent stairs are available for use. At that time, the General Contractor shall remove the temporary stairs.



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1

SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 00 and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products

specified.

2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout.

3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on

products and installations specified to be warranted. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including

make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another

project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials may be allowed / requested, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. “Recycled” materials requested in various specification sections refers to recycled content in new materials, not procured “used” finished products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through

submittal process, or where denoted as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction

from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions must be made prior to the bid due date in strict compliance with Section 2.2 below.



C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named

and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

D. Comparable Products: Where a minimum of three (3) products are denoted, including a

Basis of Design product, no substitutions shall be allowed.

1. When three or more manufacturers are named, provide products from those manufacturers meeting specified requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product.

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the

Submittals Schedule.

2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:

a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled

delivery date.

3. Initial Submittal: Within 21 calendar days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit 3 copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements.

4. Architect's Action: If warranted, Architect will respond in writing to Contractor

within 15 calendar days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents.

B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify

product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitutions shall be governed by the same requirements as Bid Phase RFIs

including the final date for submittal as noted in item # 4 below. No substitutions shall be accepted at the time of the bid. a. Post bid substitutions shall be permitted only if the listed items are not available or if the manufacturer cannot provide them in a timeframe that is



consistent with the construction schedule established by the Construction Manager. All substitution requirements listed in this section shall still apply.

2. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A “Substitution Request During

the Bidding Phase” and include all requested information listed in item # 3a through l below.

3. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the

following, as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.

f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.

g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.

h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.

k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.

l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

4. Limitations to Substitution Timeframe: requests for substitutions must be made

within the first fourteen (14) calendar days of the start of the bidding period. No requests for substitutions shall be allowed after 60 days past Notice to Proceed..

5. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or



documentation for evaluation within five (5) days of receipt of a request for substitution. Pre-bid the Architect will notify Contractor in the form of a bid addendum issued within the timeframe defined in Division”0” issued to all bidding General Contractors. a. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. Noted products will still represent the level of quality required.

6. Cost modifications generated in any material / work / product used in conjunction

with a contractor proposed substituted item / assembly will be the contractor’s responsibility to bear. Assessments of such costs will be the contractor’s responsibility. This includes items impacted by the substitution but not covered by the specific contractor’s scope.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01

Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Options: If the Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods

compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. No additional costs will be considered by the Owner based upon such a determination.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's

original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents

and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:



1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.

3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a

weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.

5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for

period of installation and concealment.

6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials

and equipment by Owner's construction forces, as well as for Owner provided contractor installed items. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual

manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract

Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and

identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications,

prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES



A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other

items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. All products/systems are required to include all appurtenances needed to provide a completely finished final product / system.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard

options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in

conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be

matched is Architect's.

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products.

7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term

"or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide

the named product that complies with requirements.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and

manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names only,

provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products

and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers

only, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed. that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.



7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and

dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.

8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list

of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.

9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an

established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product.

10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as

selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements.

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution as dictated by this section only. Substitutions shall only be considered pre-bid for items where three (3) selections are not listed for the product / item under consideration. In all cases the substituted item must conform to the level of quality set forth in the specification as a Basis of Design or as described by the specifications where the specification sets forth

1. Requests for substitutions made after the bid is received and the contract is

awarded shall be for items that become unavailable or cannot be procured in keeping with the owner’s schedule. Acceptance of these substitutions shall still be governed by all of the requirements of this section.

B. In any instance (pre or post bid) the contractor shall be responsible to confirm that the

substituted item:

1. Works in conjunction with all other elements or assemblies that it is part of or comes in contact with.



2. Results in no additional costs to the owner or results in a cost reduction to the owner

C. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following

conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time,

energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract

Documents. Costs for any required modifications to documentation will be borne by the requesting contractor.

3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will

produce indicated results.

4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted in the format indicated herein.

5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction

Schedule.

6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction and do not cause modification of, or substitutions to work required in conjunction with the requested substituted material/item. Additional reviews required by the authority having jurisdiction shall be the responsibility of the requesting contractor. Such approvals must precede submission of the substitution request.

7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.

9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

10. Requested substitution meets or exceeds the performance requirements of the

specified item.

11. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

D. Time Extensions for Substituted Products

1. The Contractor shall account for the time required to make such submittals for Substituted Products in their scheduling of all such items as part of their Shop Drawing submittal requirements. Time extensions will not be considered for issues related to Substitutions and requests for use of comparable products.

2. In cases where the Substitution is required due to issues beyond the Contractors

control such as non-availability of a product or a products discontinuance the CM will render any decisions related to the extension of time in the overall schedule.



a. In no case will an increase in contract sums be considered related to Substitutions except when deemed appropriate by the CM.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the

Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. Costs for any required modifications to documentation will be borne by the requesting contractor.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those

named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

a. In order to utilize a “comparable product” the Contractor must submit a fully executed CSI Form 13.1A modified for use post bid and fully approved by the Design Professional prior to making any submittal. All conditions as noted in section 2.2 Product Substitutions above must be met. All required back up materials shall be attached to the required CSI Form 13.1A. A time frame of 15 working days shall be allowed for the Design Professional to respond. The Design Professional may request additional back up information during that period which shall extend the time period by the time required to provide that information. Time shall be measured from the date of receipt of such information. b. The Contractor shall account for the time required to make such submittals for Comparable Products in their scheduling of all such items as part of their Shop Drawing submittal requirements. Time extensions will not be considered for issues related to Substitutions and requests for use of comparable products.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.

5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 1

SECTION 01 70 00 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.

2. Field engineering.

3. General installation of products.

4. Coordination of Owner-installed products.

5. Progress cleaning.

6. Starting and adjusting.

7. Protection of installed construction.

8. Correction of the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.

B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or

Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to

performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

a. Description of the Work.

b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.



c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.

d. Recommended corrections.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual

locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner’s Representative that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly.

Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation" or other approved form.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures,

column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.



3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for

maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing

products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging

operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each

component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components

at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not

indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not

considered hazardous. 3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS



A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction

schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation

conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste

materials and debris.

2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other

waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary

for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written

instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary

to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing

waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.



H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary

through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for

proper operation.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces,

touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating

components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.



CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 10 - 1

SECTION 01 73 10 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. 1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after

installation of other Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

1. Insert list of elements that might otherwise be overlooked as structural elements

and that require Architect's approval of a cutting and patching proposal.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Primary operational systems and equipment.

2. Air or smoke barriers.

3. Fire-suppression systems.

4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.

5. Control systems.

6. Communication systems.

7. Conveying systems.

8. Electrical wiring systems.

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related

components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.

2. Membranes and flashings.



3. Exterior curtain-wall construction.

4. Equipment supports.

5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual

evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when

installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of

substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free

passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.



3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or

performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and

similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed

surfaces.

3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2

Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are

complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to

demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other

finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space.



Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and

intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an

even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather-tight condition.

D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely

remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.



CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 74 19 - 1

SECTION 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for recycling of 75 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials, including the following:

1. Renovation and Construction Waste: Store in separate containers for each item listed on the Drawings.


A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report.



B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.

C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

1. Written proof of construction waste recycling must be submitted to the University through

the Project Manager, within 30 days of removal of materials from site The Project Manager shall provide the Director of Environmental Services and Grounds with copies of said documentation.

2. At a minimum, documentation of construction waste recycling shall include the following: a. Name and location of recycler. b. Total units (length, area, volume, etc., as applicable) of each material recycled. c. Date of transaction. d. Document shall include legible signature of recipient of recycled materials.

F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste management coordinator.

2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition.

3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays.

4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities.

5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.

1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate



quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition, site-clearing and construction waste generated by the Work. Use Form CWM-1 for construction waste and Form CWM-2 for demolition waste. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work.

C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.

2. Comply with Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor.

C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.

D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan.



1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or

processor. 6. New Construction: The General Contractor shall require all employees and

subcontractors to recycle the items listed below, in accordance with all local, county and state laws, regulations and guidelines. It shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor to ensure compliance with this standard. a. Provide separate covered, labeled roll-off containers for each material listed:

1) Concrete; 2) Steel/metals; 3) Asphalt; 4) Cardboard; 5) Wood/lumber; 6) Vegetation; 7) Cans/glass/plastics.

7. Renovations: The following materials shall be recycled in accordance with all local,

county and state laws, regulations and guidelines, and shall be stored on site and transported in containers as listed. Do not mix materials in any container, except as indicated: a. Fluorescent Lamps – properly boxed and labeled. b. Electronic Ballasts – in 55 gallon drums, labeled. c. Acoustical Ceiling Panels not containing asbestos, not faced with fiberglass, and

without attached insulation – stacked on pallets. d. Aluminum Siding – stacked and bound. e. Cardboard Packing Boxes – broken down and in an appropriate covered, labeled

"dumpster". f. Steel/metals – in covered, labeled "dumpster". g. Wood/lumber – in covered labeled "dumpster". h. Soils/vegetation – in covered, labeled "dumpster". i. Carpet (all types) and padding – in covered, labeled "dumpster" from carpet

recycler. j. Concrete/CMU – in covered, labeled "dumpster". k. Asphalt – in covered, labeled "dumpster". l. Cans/glass/plastics – in covered, labeled "dumpster".

8. Soils: Topsoil shall not be removed from University property. Refer to Division 2 of these

standards for requirements for topsoil. Subsoils to be removed from the site shall be properly and legally disposed of, and records shall be maintained of soil quantities and location of disposal sites.



9. Transport: All items are to be properly transported to appropriate recycling centers or retrieved by recycling companies.

10. Solid Waste: All other waste must be captured in covered (dog house style) waste "dumpsters", which must be removed from site when full. Overloaded containers will not be tolerated.

11. Although not required, the University's waste hauler can be used. Waste Management is familiar with our requirements and will provide the University Division of Environmental Services with appropriate documentation of recycled materials for the project, on a monthly basis.

3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Asphalt Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility.

B. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.

C. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals.

D. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.

E. Metals: Separate metals by type.

1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length. 2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.

F. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners.

G. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.

H. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals from acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals.

I. Carpet and Pad: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and tack strips.

1. Store clean, dry carpet and pad in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler.

J. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.

K. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.

3.4 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.



2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from

Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1

SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures.

2. Final cleaning.

1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of

items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and

access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location

designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

6. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise

Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

7. Complete startup testing of systems.

8. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

9. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.

10. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.

11. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation,

and maintenance.

12. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

13. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.



B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt

of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous

inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.

1.3 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment per Division 01 Section "Payment

Procedures."

2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance

requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.

5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of

request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous

inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first.



2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name of Architect.

d. Name of Contractor.

e. Page number.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean

each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for

certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-

textured surface.

c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

d. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free

condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.



e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

f. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.

g. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess

nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.

h. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

i. Remove labels that are not permanent.

j. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and

surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical

and electrical nameplates.

k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

l. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.

m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including

stains resulting from water exposure.

n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters

during construction.

p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury

debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 20 - 1

SECTION 01 78 20 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Emergency manuals.

2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.

3. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials,

finishes, systems and equipment. 1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return one copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

B. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final

inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page.

2. Table of contents.



3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name,

indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to

accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically

by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness

necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system,

organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION

AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark

each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose

diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.

5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.



b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings

in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency.

2. Emergency instructions.

3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire.

2. Flood.

3. Gas leak.

4. Water leak.

5. Power failure.

6. Water outage.

7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.

8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error

messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping.

2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.

4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.3 OPERATION MANUALS



A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.

3. Operating standards.

4. Operating procedures.

5. Operating logs.

6. Wiring diagrams.

7. Control diagrams.

8. Piped system diagrams.

9. Precautions against improper use.

10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.

4. Equipment function.

5. Operating characteristics.

6. Limiting conditions.

7. Performance curves.

8. Engineering data and tests.

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures.

2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

3. Routine and normal operating instructions.

4. Regulation and control procedures.

5. Instructions on stopping.



6. Normal shutdown instructions.

7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram

controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and

arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Color, pattern, and texture.

4. Material and chemical composition.

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the

following:

1. Inspection procedures.

2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.

5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.



F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in

manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation

including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential

maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions.

2. Troubleshooting guide.

3. Precautions against improper maintenance.

4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.

5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of

required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,

quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.



F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances

and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating

care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare

information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an

instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not

available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and

maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents."



F. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.



WARRANTIES 01 78 36 - 1

SECTION 01 78 36 - WARRANTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Guarantees and Warranties A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification,

ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly

executed. 2. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular

requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

D. Period for all guarantees and warranties shall commence at date of substantial completion for the entire project, as determined by the Architect and Construction Manager.

E. Each contractor's guarantee on all work, covered by Maintenance Bond: One (1) year F. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Owner for designated portions of the Work

where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. G. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of

designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

H. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the

Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness

as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2 by 11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab

to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed title, "Warranties," Project Name, and name of Contractor.

I. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.02 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to the Technical Specifications for the warranties pertaining to each division.


WARRANTIES 01 78 36 - 2

1.03 STANDARD MANUFACTURER WARRANTIES/GUARANTEES

A. Unless otherwise noted in specifications, contractor shall provide standard of the industry and acceptable warranties/guarantees provided by all manufacturers of products used on this project. Warranties/guarantees shall commence at date of substantial completion for entire project as determined by Architect. Review each Technical Section for other warranty requirements.



PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1

SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project record documents consisting of: a. Record drawings. b. Record project manual (specifications). 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit after substantial completion, but prior to final completion. 1. Record drawings: Submit in form of clearly legible pdf type files. a. Sets shall include all drawings, whether changed or not. 2. Other record documents: Submit clearly scanned or printed pdf type files. 3. The General Contractor is responsible for all record documents and record drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MAINTENANCE OF PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Do not use record documents of any type for construction purposes. B. Maintain record documents in a secure location at the site while providing for access by the

contractor and the architect during normal working hours; store in a fire-resistive room or container outside of normal working hours.

C. Record information as soon as possible after it is obtained. D. Assign a person or persons responsible for maintaining record documents. E. Record the following types of information on all applicable record documents: 1. Dimensional changes. 2. New and revised details. 3. Revisions to electrical circuits. 4. Locations of utilities concealed in construction. 5. Particulars on concealed products which will not be easy to identify later. 6. Changes made by modifications to the contract; note identification numbers if applicable. 7. New information which may be useful to the owner, but which was not shown in either the

contract documents or submittals. 3.02 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Maintain a complete set of opaque prints of the contract drawings, marked to show changes. (Transfer to CADD/disk, submit to Owner at job completion.)



B. Where the actual work differs from that shown on the drawings, mark this set to show the actual

work. 1. Mark location of concealed items before they are covered by other work. 2. Mark either record contract drawings or shop drawings, whichever are best suited to show the

change. C. When the contractor is required by a provision of a modification to prepare a new drawing, rather

than to revise existing drawings, obtain instructions from the architect as to the drawing scale and information required.

D. Keep drawings in labeled, bound sets. 1. Mark with red pencil. 2. Mark work of separate contracts with different colors of pencils. 3. Incorporate new drawings into existing sets, as they are issued. E. Where record drawings are also required as part of operation and maintenance data submittals,

copy marks to another opaque print obtained from the architect. F. Provide Owner with CADD drawings of most recent auto CADD as the final record set.

3.03 RECORD PROJECT MANUAL A. Maintain a complete copy of the project manual, marked to show changes. B. Where the actual work differs from that shown in the project manual, mark the record copy to show

the actual work. 1. Include a copy of each addendum and modification to the contract. 2. In addition to the types of information required on all record documents, record the following

types of information: a. Product options taken, when the specification allows more than one. b. Proprietary name and model number of actual products furnished, for each product,

material, and item of equipment specified. c. Name of the supplier and installer, for each product for which neither a product data

submittal nor a maintenance data submittal was specified. 3.04 TRANSMITTAL TO OWNER (through the Architect)

A. Collect, organize, label, and package ready for reference. 1. Bind print sets with durable paper covers. 2. Label each document (and each sheet of drawings) with "PROJECT RECORD

DOCUMENTS - This document has been prepared using information furnished by _____" [insert the contractor's name], and the date of preparation.

B. Submit to the Architect, unless otherwise indicated.



C. Submit to the Architect four (4) sets of Operation and Maintenance Manuals in three-ring binders to be transmitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval:

Include all inspection/approvals/certifications All approved cut sheets as well as manufacturer's operation and maintenance manuals.



DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 1

SECTION 01 79 00 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

3. Demonstration and training video recordings.


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration

and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.

B. Qualification Data: For facilitator, instructor and videographer.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of

instruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module.

1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following

information:

a. Name of Project.

b. Name and address of videographer.

c. Name of Architect.

d. Name of Contractor.

e. Date of video recording.

f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction.



2. Transcript: Prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance

manuals. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

3. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same

label information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

4. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use

prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals and in PDF electronic file format on compact disc.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with

requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced

photographing demonstration and training events similar to those required.

D. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.

2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational

materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.

3. Review required content of instruction.

4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather

conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable. 1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction

time, and course content.



C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

1. Equipment, including projection screens, equipment, residential appliances and

laboratory fume hoods.

2. Fire-protection systems, including fire alarm, fire pumps and fire-extinguishing systems.

3. Conveying systems, including elevator.

4. Laboratory equipment.

5. Heat generation, including boilers, pumps, and water distribution piping.

6. Refrigeration systems, including chillers, condensers, pumps and distribution

piping.

7. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment, air distribution systems and terminal equipment and devices.

8. HVAC instrumentation and controls.

9. Electrical service and distribution, including transformers, switchboards,

panelboards, uninterruptible power supplies and motor controls.

10. Lighting equipment and controls.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the

following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.

b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.

c. Operating standards.

d. Regulatory requirements.



e. Equipment function.

f. Operating characteristics.

g. Limiting conditions.

h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals.

b. Operations manuals.

c. Maintenance manuals.

d. Project record documents.

e. Identification systems.

f. Warranties and bonds.

g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.

b. Instructions on stopping.

c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.

e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.

f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures.

b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

c. Routine and normal operating instructions.

d. Regulation and control procedures.

e. Control sequences.

f. Safety procedures.

g. Instructions on stopping.



h. Normal shutdown instructions.

i. Operating procedures for emergencies.

j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.

k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments.

b. Checking adjustments.

c. Noise and vibration adjustments.

d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions.

b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures.

b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

d. Procedures for routine cleaning

e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.

f. Procedures for routine maintenance.

g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions.

b. Repair instructions.

c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.

d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.



e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain

systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.

2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.

3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires

seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.

D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and

fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.

E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each

participant's mastery of module by use of an oral, a written or a demonstration performance-based test.

F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove

instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.



1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline.

B. Video: Provide minimum 640 x 480 video resolution converted to format file type

acceptable to Owner, on electronic media.

1. Electronic Media: Read-only format compact disc acceptable to Owner, with commercial-grade graphic label.

2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to project

manual table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu.

3. File Names: Utilize file names based upon name of equipment generally described in video segment, as identified in Project specifications.

4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for

inclusion on the Equipment Demonstration and Training DVD that describes the following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project table of contents:

a. Name of Contractor/Installer.

b. Business address.

c. Business phone number.

d. Point of contact.

e. E-mail address.

C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary

to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.

1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.

a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment.

b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project Manual table of contents.

c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes, stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon commencement of new filming segment.

D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment

markings are clearly visible prior to recording.

1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.

E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by dubbing audio narration off-site after video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed.



F. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.

G. Pre-produced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of

training modules in same format as recordings of live training.



SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1

SECTION 02 41 19

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.


1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for use of premises, phasing, and Owner-occupancy requirements.

2. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered during selective demolition remain Owner's



property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and means of

egress. 5. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from

building.

B. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

C. Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Comply with Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins.

D. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.


A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.

D. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so owner’s operations will not be disrupted.



B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the work.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

B. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged.

C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs.

E. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Site Access: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.



2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches, until work area is cleared of flammable materials, 5. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials

and promptly dispose of off-site. 6. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to

avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 7. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not

to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.

B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. Comply with Maintenance of Unit Masonry Section for removing veneer masonry.



C. Concrete Sidewalks and Asphalt Paving: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent

surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device

that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste

Management and Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.



CONCRETE TOPPINGS 03 53 00 - 1

SECTION 03 53 00 – CONCRETE TOPPINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: The Work of this Section shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Self- leveling flooring underlayment.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Plans indicating substrates, locations, and average depths of cement-based underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions.


A. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of both underlayment and floor covering system certifying that products are compatible.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer.

C. Submit meeting minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project.

B. Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of both underlayment and floor covering system

certify in writing that products are compatible.

1. Include certification that selected underlayment system is compatible with aluminum shielding required for this project.

C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with other components, and application.

B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration

from moisture or other detrimental effects.




A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance.

B. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application

recommended in writing by manufacturer.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate cement-based underlayment with requirements of finish flooring products, including adhesives, specified in Division 9 Sections.

1. Before installing sealers recommended by underlayment manufacturer, if any, verify

compatibility with finish flooring installation adhesives. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SELF- LEVELING FLOORING UNDERLAYMENT

A. Self-Leveling Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product, including primer recommended by mixture manufacturer, that can be applied in uniform thicknesses from 1/8 to 1 1/2 inch in one pour, and up to 5 inch with the addition of aggregate, and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or equal

as approved by the Architect:

a. Basis of Design: Ardex, Inc.: Ardex K 15.

2. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5500 psi at 28 days when tested per ASTM C 109.

B. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate,

conditions, and application indicated.

C. Aggregate shall be well-graded, washed gravel for use when installing greater than 1 1/2 inch thick as per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Water shall be clean, potable, and sufficiently cool (not warmer than 70°F).

2.2 CONCRETE UNDERLAYMENT PATCH

A. Flush Patching Cement: For floor repairs requiring spot flush patching use portland cement-based, self-drying, fast-setting, trowelable underlayment that can be applied in uniform thicknesses from a true featheredge to 1/2 thick over large areas and to any thickness in well-defined areas such as filling holes or gouges.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or

approved equal:



a. Ardex, Inc.: Ardex SD-F.

2. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4200 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate,

conditions, and application indicated.

C. Water shall be clean, potable, and sufficiently cool (not warmer than 70°F). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of underlayment including substrate moisture content. Begin underlayment application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare and clean substrate per manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, neutral-pH substrate for underlayment application.

1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting)

through underlayment per manufacturer's written recommendations.

2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.

B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.

1. Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869.

Proceed with installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

C. Metal Substrates: Mechanically remove rust, foreign matter, and other contaminants that

might impair underlayment bond per manufacturer's written instructions. Apply corrosion-resistant coating compatible with underlayment if recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.

D. Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove

waxes, sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond per manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment

per manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components per manufacturer's written instructions.



1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and intercoat adhesion.

2. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment.

B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.

1. Apply a final layer without aggregate if required to produce smooth surface.

2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations and as required to maintain

designed ramp slopes.

D. Cure underlayment per manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.

E. Do not install finish flooring over underlayment until after time recommended by

underlayment manufacturer.

F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field Samples: Take at least three molded-cube samples from each underlayment batch. Test samples per ASTM C 109/C 109M for compliance with compressive-strength requirements. When requested, provide test results to Architect.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.



METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following. Requirements for materials, hot-dip galvanizing, and shop-applied primers are included with each item as applicable.

a. Miscellaneous metal framing and supports not furnished as structural steel components.

b. Galvanized steel lintels for exterior application. c. Primed steel lintels for interior application. d. Framing and supports for exterior wall assemblies. e. Counter support brackets for built-in counters. f. Miscellaneous metal framing and supports for mechanical and electrical

equipment. g. Other metal items indicated on the drawings but not specified elsewhere, and

those metal items not indicated but required to complete the work.


A. Delegated Design: Design ladders and miscellaneous framing and supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer licensed in the state where the project is located, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes. 2. Paint products. 3. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their

connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 3. Where fabrications are to receive sprayed-on fireproofing, include statement that primer

is compatible with fireproofing proposed for use.



C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation and licensed in the state where the project is located.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.


A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of metal fabrications that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

D. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying

the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications, such as steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete, that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site to not delay their installation.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. 1. Provide Schedule 80 pipe for bollards.

D. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot complying with MFMA-4.

E. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, in exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

C. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M

malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.

D. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Kwik-Bolt 3 by Hilti, Inc., TruBolt Wedge Anchor by ITW Red

Head or Power-Stud by Powers Fasteners.

E. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.



B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

C. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

E. Isolation Coating: ASTM D 1187, cold-applied asphalt emulsion, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.



2.5 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.

B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction.

2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.9 STEEL PRIMERS AND FINISHES

A. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Urethane Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 7, "Brush Off Blast Cleaning." 3. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with

galvanized finishes and those to be field welded, or embedded in concrete or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches.



4. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

5. Comply with SSPC-PA 2, "Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with magnetic Gages.”

B. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

C. Zinc-Rich Primer: Urethane zinc rich primer compatible with topcoat Specified in Section 09 90 00 - PAINTS AND COATINGS. Provide primer with a VOC content of 340 g/L (2.8 lb/gal.) or less per OTC and HAPS COMPLIANT STANDARDS PER 2007 standards when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Provide Tnemec Series 394 Perimerprime at 3.0 mils DFT or approved equal by DuPont or Carboline.

D. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items indicated to be galvanized, to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. 3. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain

as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.



F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of steel that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of isolation coating.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Touch-Up and Repair for Galvanized Surfaces: For damaged and field-welded metal coated surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas. 1. For galvanized surfaces, apply organic zinc repair paint complying with requirements of

ASTM A 780, modified to 95 percent zinc in dry film. Galvanizing repair paint shall have 95 percent zinc by weight, ZiRP by Duncan Galvanizing. Thickness of applied galvanizing repair paint shall be not less than coating thickness required by ASTM A 123 or A 153 as applicable. Touch-up of galvanized surfaces with silver paint, brite paint, or aluminum paints is not acceptable.

2. For factory-applied finish coatings, field-touch-up shall be performed by factory approved personnel. Touch-up shall be such that repair is not visible from a distance of 6 feet.

3. A touch-up repair kit or touchup instructions shall be provided to the Owner for each type of factory-applied finish.



ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1

SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide rough carpentry work as specified and as shown on the Drawings, including the following: 1. Wood grounds, nailers, blocking and furring.

2. Plywood construction panels.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for manufactured materials, including plywood construction panels and related materials.

B. Wood Treatment Data: Submit chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, and using treated material.

1. Submit certification by treating plant stating type of treatment, preservative retained

and conformance with applicable standards.

2. Submit a statement that moisture content of treated materials complied with levels indicated before delivery.


A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood

product through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Stack wood to provide air circulation within and around stacks.


A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work accurately. Correlate location of rough carpentry for attachment of other work.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL

A. Certified Wood: Materials shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship”.

B. Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee.

C. Grade Stamps: Furnish lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency to show compliance with grading rules, and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content and mill.

D. Provide lumber sizes as required by PS 20, unless otherwise shown.

1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S. 2. Provide seasoned lumber with 15% maximum moisture content.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members of sizes and shapes shown.

B. Grade: Construction Grade lumber of western or southern species. 2.3 PLYWOOD PANELS

A. Plywood Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood construction panels and, for products not made under PS 1 provisions, with APA PRP-108.

1. Composite wood manufacturer's product data for each composite wood product used

indicating that the bonding agent contains no urea formaldehyde.

2. Adhesive manufacturer's product data for each adhesive used indicating that the adhesive contains no urea formaldehyde.

a. Low VOC: All adhesives shall comply with South Coast Air Quality

Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168.

B. Trademark: Factory-mark each construction panel with APA trademark to show compliance with grade requirements.

C. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical, telephone, or other equipment, provide fire-retardant-treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED



EXPOSURE 1, in thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 1/2 inch or as required.


A. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers, anchors and connectors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use indicated including recommended nails.

1. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, or in area of high relative

humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153).

2. Provide galvanized steel connectors, minimum 16 gage, of type and size as recommended by manufacturer for uses indicated.

B. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type I; asphalt saturated organic felt, non-perforated, 15-lb.

type. 2.5 WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS

A. Preservative Treatment: Comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark.

1. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives to comply with

AWPB LB-2. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to 15% maximum moisture content. Treat the following:

a. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, blocking and stripping in connection with exterior

wall construction roofing, flashing and waterproofing.

b. Wood sills, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

2. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. Coat field cut

surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment and to comply with AWPA M4.

B. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Treat all wood and wood products indicated or required by Code

to be fire-retardant, using methods accepted by the New Jersey Building Code. Identify treated lumber with appropriate marking.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Discard defective materials. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted.

B. Securely attach carpentry work as required by specified standards. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.



C. Use fasteners of size to not penetrate members to exposed side or into finish materials. Make tight connections; install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required.

D. Provide concealed blocking, sheet metal grounds and additional items as necessary and as indicated on the Drawings.

3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, SLEEPERS, AND BLOCKING

A. Provide where shown for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.

B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Where possible, anchor to concrete and masonry during their installation.

C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-beveled lumber not less

than 1-1/2 inch wide and of thickness to match finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD PANELS

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E 30, "APA Design/Construction Guide - Residential & Commercial," for types of plywood panels and applications indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: Anchor to wall construction. Using anchors and fasteners appropriate to the substrate construction. At gypsum board construction fasten to studs. At masonry construction use masonry anchors.



INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 23 - 1

SECTION 06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Plastic laminate casework and millwork. 3. Plastic laminate plumbing enclosure skirts below solid surface countertops. 4. Plastic laminate adjustable wall shelving. 5. Shop finishing of interior woodwork.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with Section 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS for steel countertop support requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product specified, including casework hardware and accessories, and finishing materials and processes. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. a. Provide schedule or shop drawings of blocking required to support the Work of this

Section. 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, electrical

components and other items installed in architectural woodwork. 3. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification

numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.

C. Samples for Verification: 1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long for

each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge. 2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent-

finished woodwork. a. Submit step-type range sample sets of factory finished plywood and factory

finished solid wood in size illustrating wood grain and specified finish, including edge banding detail and any veneer or solid edge glue joints.

b. Submit one leaf for every 1000 gross square foot of veneer required. 3. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1

sample applied to core material, and specified edge material applied to 1 edge. 4. Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches square for each color, including each type of edge

treatment.

D. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: Submit registration number for AWI Quality Certification Program.



E. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with blueprint-matched wood veneers and components.

C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards," latest edition, including errata, for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated, provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01.


A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1. The HVAC systems as specified elsewhere will not provide for humidity controls. The

building will be air conditioned in summer months. The ranges of relative humidity are expected to be as high as 70% to an uncontrolled low during the heating season. Comply with AWS Section 2, Care and Storage.

2. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for fabricating interior architectural woodwork to not deteriorate in the interior environment expected during occupancy, which is standard for the majority of new buildings designed and constructed . a. Submission of bid shall represent acceptance of these terms. b. Contrary manufacturer’s and AWI disclaimers shall not apply if more restrictive

than the conditions stated herein, as more stringent conditions are not typically provided in academic buildings.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate



measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field

measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying

the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming and scribing at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated, and can accommodate plumbing and electrical provisions.

B. Coordinate stain color of transparent wood finish so that casework finish matches wood door finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Recycled Content of Medium-Density Fiberboard and Particleboard: Provide products with an average recycled content so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

C. Wood Veneers and Lumber: Provide AWI Custom Grade materials and workmanship. For species not listed in the AWS comply with the following: 1. Provide AWI Lumber Grade 1 and AWI Grade A Veneer, book-matched, minimum 6 inch

face veneer width. Kiln dry to 6-8 percent moisture content. Components shall be free of defects and sapwood. Match adjacent pieces for color and grain pattern.

2. Single-Source Requirement for Wood Veneers and Solids: Intent is to provide wood which matches as closely as possible throughout the project. Provide wood veneers and solids from the same distributor, and from the same flitches and solids sources to the greatest extent possible.

D. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: 1. Select white Birch, plain sawn. 2. Veneer Grade: A. 3. Matching Between Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Book match and architectural end match. 4. Matching Within Individual Panel Faces: Balance and Center Match. 5. Method of Matching Panels: Blueprint-matched panels and components.

E. Wood Core Products: Comply with the following: 1. Recycled Content of Medium-Density Fiberboard: Provide products with recycled

content. 2. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 3. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder

containing no added urea formaldehyde.



4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay (MDO). 5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive

containing no added urea formaldehyde. a. Resin impregnated paper backs are not permitted. Backs shall be of compatible

hardwood species and cut. Contact adhesive is not permitted. b. Provide finished back and side panels where exposed to view in the final assembly c. Provide removable back panels in cabinets receiving plumbing or electrical utilities.

F. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Abet Laminati, Inc. b. Arborite; Division of ITW Canada, Inc. c. Formica Corporation. d. Lamin-Art, Inc. e. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

2. Basis of Design Materials:

a. As per drawings

G. Quartz Countertops: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Wilsonart b. Vetrazzo c. Cosentino USA d. LG Hausys America, inc.

2. Basis of Design Materials:

a. As per drawings

3. Qualifications:

a. Manufacturing Facility Qualifications: Quartz surfacing materials produced in an ISO 9001 certified facility.

4. QUARTZ SURFACING SHEET MATERIAL

a. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of up to 93 percent quartz aggregate combined with polyester resin binders and proprietary pigments that are fabricated using vacuum vibrocompaction technology.

b. Flexural Strength: Greater than 4,500 psi; ASTM D 790. c. Flexural Strain: Less than 0.375 percent; ASTM D 790. d. Flexural Modulus: Greater than 3.75 MPsi; ASTM D 790. e. Stain resistance (24 Hour): No effect to moderate effect; NEMA LD-3. f. Abrasion Resistance: Greater than 100 in. lbs.; ASTM C 501.



g. Density: Greater than 2.1 g/.cu. m per ASTM C 97. h. Compressive Strength (One Axis - Div.): Greater than 20,000 psi per ASTM C 170.

2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this Article, which are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified. 1. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced

woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise

adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials.

3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment type: 1. Exterior Type: Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying. 2. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and

drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork.

3. Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials.

C. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 1. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard and Particleboard: Provide five ply construction with

crossbands to prevent any ammonia fuming from the core to the face veneers.

2.3 CASEWORK HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide casework hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural casework as selected by architect, except for items specified in Section 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE.

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 160 degrees of opening, self-closing.

C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.

D. Catches: Push-in magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03131.

E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: 1. Casework: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. 2. Wall Shelving: KV 87 Series, heavy-duty, with heavy-duty brackets, or comparable

product as approved by Architect.



F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091; side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer; full-extension type; epoxy-coated-steel with steel ball-bearings; of the following grades: 1. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1. 2. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100. 3. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 2. 4. Keyboard Slides: Grade 1. 5. Trash Bin Slides: Grade 1HD-100.

G. Concealed Undermount Drawer Slide: Hafele 421.23.840, or comparable product, as approved by Architect. 1. Provide in locations where indicated; 2 per drawer. 2. Size: As required by installed condition.

H. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

I. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

J. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: Molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

K. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. 2. Satin Aluminum, Clear Anodized: BHMA 628.

L. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

D. VOC Content: Provide interior, field applied adhesives and sealants that comply with the VOC limits outlined in Section 01 81 13 – Sustainable Design Requirements.


A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements specified herein and supplemented by referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

B. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.



C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of Casework and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Member: 1/16 inch.

D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

2.6 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH

A. Grade: Custom.

B. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.

C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.

D. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly.

2.7 WOOD CASEWORK FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Grade: Custom.

B. AWI Type of Casework Construction: Flush overlay.

C. Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: As specified hereinabove. 1. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. 2. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match. 3. Vertical Matching of Veneer Leaves: End match. 4. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Running match. 5. Veneer Matching within Room: Provide casework veneers in each room or other space

from a single flitch with doors, drawer fronts, and other surfaces matched in a sequenced set with continuous match where veneers are interrupted perpendicular to the grain.

D. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Compatible species to that indicated for exposed

surfaces, stained to match. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber, stained to match species indicated for

exposed surfaces. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.

2.8 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CASEWORK

A. Grade: Custom.



B. AWI Type of Casework Construction: Flush overlay.

C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 3. Edges: Grade HGS.

D. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.

a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC tape, 0.018-inch minimum thickness, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish high-pressure laminated.

b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber unless otherwise noted. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood unless otherwise noted.

E. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL.

F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated in the drawings or approached equal.

2.9 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

A. Grade: Custom.

B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.

C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

D. Edge Treatment: As indicated.

E. Core Material: Exterior-grade plywood.

F. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate.

2.10 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS AND WINDOW STOOLS

A. Grade: Custom.

B. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid-surfacing material complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated on drawings or approved equal.

C. Fabricate in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Fabricate with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated. 2. Fabricate countertops with loose backsplashes for field application.



D. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in shop.

2.11 WOOD SHELVING

A. Grade: Custom.

B. Shelf Material: Hardwood plywood. Size and finish as noted in drawings.

C. Standards for Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04102; powder-coat-finished steel.

D. Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04112; powder-coat-finished steel.

2.12 SHOP FINISHING

A. General: Comply with AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for factory finishing. 1. Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only

final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to

concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate or thermoset decorative panels.

C. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, and sheen with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523: 1. Grade: Same as item to be finished. 2. AWS Finish System 5: Water white conversion varnish. 3. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 4. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-

grain wood before staining and finishing. 5. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. 6. Sheen: Satin, 30-50 gloss units. 7. Effect: Partially filled pore.

D. Opaque Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, color, effect, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. 1. Grade: Same as item to be finished. 2. AWS Finish System 5: Conversion varnish. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Sheen: Satin, 30-50 gloss units.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.



B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork.

F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 60 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and

finish same as wood base if finished. 2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. 3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch

in 96 inches.

H. Casework: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install casework with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a

straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of casework with transparent finish.

I. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base casework or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with

manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches and to walls with adhesive.



4. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Section 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS.

J. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.


A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.


Atlantic Cape Community College Clarke Caton Hintz

Building D and K Renovations March 25, 2020 ACCC Bid #1859

FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 06 82 00 - 1

SECTION 06 82 00 – FIBER- REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: The Work of this Section shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Glass-fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall paneling and trim.

2. Installation accessories. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Include joint layout and details of head, base, corner, wall base, and edge.

C. Color samples for initial selection: Provide a full set of manufacturer’s available standard

color chips for plastic panels.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. 12-inch square of each type and of each color of panels.

2. 12-inch-long sample of each type of trim and accessories. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products per ASTM E

84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Development of 450 or less


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING

A. Materials: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319.




B. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.125 inch. C. Surface Finish: Premium Gel Coat, Smooth.

D. Color: As selected by the Architect.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide manufacturer’s standard product, by Crane Composites or equal as approved by the Architect.

B. Color: As indicated or selected by the Architect.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels, at top, bottom and corners of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges. Intermediate joints between panels shall be silicone- type adhesive only

1. Color: To match the panels unless otherwise indicated.

B. Exposed Fasteners: Nylon drive rivets recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer.

D. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant

recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Interior Joint Sealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove any material that might interfere with adhesive bond.

B. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat,

even surface for panel installation.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust.

D. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation

according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at panel joint locations for accurate installation.




3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic paneling per manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.

C. Install trim accessories with adhesive.

D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant.

E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed.

B. Clean with panels with solution as recommended by manufacturer and wipe with clean dry cloth.



ROOF INSULATION 07 21 11 - 1

SECTION 07 21 11 ROOF INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof insulation and overlay boards. 2. Insulation fasteners and adhesives.


1. Section 07 53 00; EPDM Membrane Roofing: contains requirements for roof membrane system to be installed over roof insulation.


A. FM Global Approval: It is a requirement of this project that the roof insulation system, including base insulation, overlay boards, fasteners, fastener plates and adhesive be part of a tested and approved FM Global roof assembly which is listed in the current FM Global “RoofNav” system, unless otherwise accepted in writing by FM Global.

1. All products shall be specifically listed by product name within the appropriate “Construction” number(s), for the appropriate “Roof Cover” and for the appropriate roofing material manufacturer specified in Section 07 53 00, or otherwise approved by the Owner.

2. All products shall be approved for the wind uplift categories specified on drawing A-152 for field, perimeter and corner areas.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following products:

1. Insulation board. 2. Overlay board. 3. Insulation and Overlay board adhesive. 4. Insulation board fasteners and plates.

B. Material Safety Data Sheets: For the following products:



1. Insulation and Overlay board adhesive.

C. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.

1. Tapered insulation, including dimensions, slopes and sections.


A. Deliver insulation materials to Project site in original manufacturer’s wrapping with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storage.

B. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation, including but not limited to the following:

1. Place insulation on pallets or platforms that are raised off the ground or roof deck at least four inches.

2. Fully cover all insulation bundles, including top and full height of sides, with “breathable” waterproof canvas tarpaulins, tied daily to prevent blow-off or exposure of insulation to sunlight or precipitation. Manufacturer's polyethylene wrapping and polyethylene or other non-breathable plastic tarps or coverings are not acceptable. Any materials that are improperly covered overnight or during inclement weather will be marked by the Owner's representative and must be removed from the jobsite by the Contractor and replaced with new material at no additional cost to the Owner.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit insulation to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION BOARD

A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation (Flat boards): ASTM C 1289, Type II facer on both major surfaces, 25 psi. minimum compressive strength. Flat boards shall be 2” thick, 4’-0” by 4’-0” (max.).

1. Dimensional stability shall be 2% maximum linear change when conditioned at 158 degrees F and 97% relative humidity for seven days.

2. Curing time shall be 24 hours per each inch of thickness, at a minimum of 60 degrees F before shipment from the manufacturer.



3. Acceptable Manufacturer(s)/Product(s): Subject to compliance with specified requirements, utilize the following or approved equal: a. Acceptable insulation for use with Carlisle roof membrane system:

1) “Poly-Iso HP-H” by Carlisle Syntec, Inc.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation (Tapered boards): ASTM C 1289, Type II facer on both major surfaces, 25 psi. minimum compressive strength. Tapered boards shall be 4’-0” by 4’-0” (max.). Slope of tapered boards shall be ¼” per foot as indicated on the drawings.

1. Board thickness: a. Minimum thickness at low edge of thinnest allowable board shall be 2”.

1) For ¼” per foot tapered system, thinnest allowable board shall be “H” panel.

2. Dimensional stability shall be 2% maximum linear change when conditioned at 158 degrees F and 97% relative humidity for seven days.

3. Curing time shall be 24 hours per each inch of thickness, at a minimum of 60 degrees F before shipment from the manufacturer.

4. Acceptable Manufacturer(s)/Product(s): Subject to compliance with specified requirements, utilize the following or approved equal: a. Acceptable insulation for use with Carlisle roof membrane system:

1) “Tapered Poly-Iso HP-H” by Carlisle Syntec, Inc.

2.2 COVER BOARD

A. Gypsum Roof Board: Manufactured to conform to ASTM C1278, “Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel”. Boards shall be as indicated on the drawings by roof area, 4’-0” by 4’-0” (min.).

1. Acceptable Manufacturer(s)/Product(s): Subject to compliance with specified requirements, utilize the following or approved equal: a. Acceptable cover board for use with Carlisle roof membrane system:

1) “SECUROCK Gypsum-Fiber Roof Board”, by United States Gypsum Co. and distributed by Carlisle Syntec, Inc.

2.3 INSULATION BOARD FASTENERS

A. Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FM 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to metal roof deck substrate.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer(s)/Product(s): Subject to compliance with specified requirements, utilize one of the following: a. Acceptable insulation fastener for use with Carlisle roof membrane system:

1) “Sure-Seal HP Fastener” with metal “Sure-Seal Insulation Fastening Plate” by Carlisle SynTec, Inc.

2.4 INSULATION AND COVER BOARD ADHESIVE

A. A two-component, polyurethane, low-rising expanding adhesive used to bond insulation to various substrates.



1. Acceptable Manufacturer(s)/Product(s): Subject to compliance with specified requirements, utilize one of the following: a. Acceptable adhesive fastener for use with Carlisle roof membrane system

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of insulation system:

1. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are installed and securely anchored at perimeters, penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation or as otherwise indicated on the drawings.

2. Verify that metal roof deck is securely fastened with no projecting fasteners and with no adjacent units in excess of 1/16 inch out of plane relative to adjoining deck.

3. Verify that all debris has been removed from metal deck flutes. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to insulation installation according insulation manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

B. Lay insulation over deck. Board edges that are parallel to the deck flanges are to be in continuous straight lines, centered on the top deck flanges. Board edges that are perpendicular to the deck flanges are to be staggered 24” from board edges in the adjacent row of insulation boards. NOTE: Plan layout of base layer insulation boards to have all board joints offset 8” min. from all joints in subsequently installed tapered insulation and/or fill boards.

C. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, curbs, projections, and penetrations.

D. Fasten insulation into metal roof deck with screws and plates, in accordance with the fastening requirements and patterns indicated on drawing A-152. When installing insulation in multiple layers, fasten top layer through lower layer(s) into roof deck.

3.4 COVER BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Stagger joints from joints in insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Install boards in accordance with all manufacturer’s requirements and recommendations.

B. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, curbs, projections, and penetrations.



C. Install boards with straight, smooth and uniform joints along lines of slope changes and transitions in insulation below.

D. Clean and prepare the insulation substrate as required by the manufacturer, prior to attachment of the overlay board.

E. Adhere cover boards to the insulation substrate with adhesive “ribbons”.

1. Apply adhesive in ¾” to 1” diameter ribbons and install boards in accordance with all manufacturer’s requirements and recommendations, including “walking in” of boards until firmly fastened to insulation substrate.

2. Refer to drawing A-152 for fastening requirements and ribbon patterns for each roof zone (i.e. field, perimeter, corner).

3. When fastening boards that fall within two different fastening zones (i.e. part corner/part perimeter, part perimeter/part field) the entire board shall be fastened using the pattern for the more restrictive area.

4. Use water-filled, foam covered lawn roller, or other methods acceptable to Architect, to repeatedly and uniformly press overlay board into adhesive layer until adhesive has securely set and overlay board is permanently fastened in place.

5. Trim all excess adhesive that squeezes through board joints flush with top surface of overlay boards. Remove any loose and/or adhered adhesive from the top surface of overlay boards.



STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 07 42 16 - 1

SECTION 07 42 16 – STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: The Work of this Section shall include:

1. Standing-seam metal roof panels.

2. Metal soffit panels. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect metal panel Installer, metal panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal panels, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's per-

sonnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between

and attachment to structural members.

5. Review structural loading limitations of deck during and after roofing.

6. Review flashings, special details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect metal panels.

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and in-

spections if applicable.

8. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel systems during and after installa-tion.

9. Review procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation.

10. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy

of record to each participant. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings:



1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof and soffit panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, snow guards and accessories; and special details.

2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not

less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Metal Roof and Soffit Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include clips, fasteners,

closures, and other metal panel accessories. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

E. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and ap-proved by manufacturer.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical roof area and eave as shown on Drawings, including, underlayment, snow guards, attachments, and accessories.

a. Size: as determined by Architect.

b. Include each type of exposed seam and seam termination, fascia, soffit, and gable end

and rake.

2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Sub-stantial Completion.


A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or de-formed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and sur-

face damage.

C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of wa-



ter. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather condi-tions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed per manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with ac-tual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits,

and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

C. Coordinate metal gutter installation with heat trace system included Division 26 - Electrical sec-tion

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or re-place components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees

to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied fin-ishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested per ASTM D 2244.

b. Chalking more than a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special Weathertightness Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees

to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Energy Performance: Provide roof panels per one of the following when tested per CRRC-1; as required by project application:

1. Three-year, aged solar reflectance of not less than 0.55 and emissivity of not less than 0.75.

2. Three-year, aged Solar Reflectance Index of not less than 64 when calculated per ASTM E

1980.

B. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing per ASTM E 1592:

1. Wind Loads: As per Building Code.

2. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/240 of the span.

C. Panels not mounted on solid substrates shall comply with following:

1. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested per ASTM E 1680 at

the following test-pressure difference:

a. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

2. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested per ASTM E 1646 at the following test-pressure difference:

a. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

D. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-

uplift-resistance class indicated.

1. Uplift Rating: UL 90, unless otherwise required by project application.

E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface tem-peratures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material surfaces.

2.2 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and inter-connecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically at-taching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation.

a. Seam height. 2-inch nominal. b. Panel width: 12 inches.



1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1514.

B. Vertical-Rib, Seamed-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel

edges and a flat pan between ribs unless intermediate stiffening ribs are required by project ap-plication; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels, engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and mechanically seaming panels together.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Berridge Manufacturing Company; Berridge Zee- lock, Double lock or approved equal.

2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A

653/A 653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 0.034 inch (22 gage).

b. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer, unless selected color requires three- coat finish.

c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Other Manufacturers:

1. ATAS International, Inc. 2. Firestone Metal Products, LLC. 3. McElroy Metal, Inc. 4. Morin - A Kingspan Group Company. 5. Or approved equal.

D. Clips: One-piece fixed to accommodate thermal movement.

1. Material: 0.062-inch- thick, stainless-steel sheet.

2.3 METAL SOFFIT PANELS

A. Match roof panels for material and finish.

B. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Underlayment: Provide self-adhering, cold-applied, sheet un-derlayment, a minimum of 30 mils thick, consisting of slip-resistant, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing. Pro-vide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 degrees F; ASTM D 1970.

2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 degrees F; ASTM D 1970.



a. Carlisle Residential; a division of Carlisle Construction Materials; WIP 300HT.

b. GCP Applied Technologies Inc. (formerly Grace Construction Products); Grace Ice and Water Shield HT or Ultra.

c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT.

d. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment.

e. Or approved equal.

B. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.


A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645; cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coat-ing designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system in-

cluding trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fill-ers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal panels.

2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material

recommended by manufacturer.

3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch-thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as re-

quired to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flash-ing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads.

E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with

panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound seal-ant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, non-staining tape 1/2-inch-wide and 1/8 inch thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade,

class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.



2.7 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Provide panel profile for full length of panel.

C. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide

a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.

D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's rec-ommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that ap-ply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and

tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and

seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not al-

lowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.

5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal panel

manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.9 FINISHES

A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strip-pable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are ac-

ceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize con-trast.

C. Steel Panels and Accessories:

1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 per-

cent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 per-

cent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply



coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written in-structions.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with require-ments for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting perfor-mance of the Work.

1. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels,

and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.

2. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or block-

ing and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufactur-er.

a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing

substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support mem-bers and anchorages per ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.3 UNDERLAYMENT

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with tem-perature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

1. Apply over the entire roof surface unless otherwise indicated.

B. Slip Sheet: Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels.

C. Flashings: Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Sec-

tion 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3.5 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal panels per manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and lo-cations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels.



2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal panels are installed.

3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.

4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.

5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds.

6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and

end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.

7. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. Fas-ten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws.

8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.

B. Fasteners:

1. Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use galva-

nized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

C. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, us ing manufacturer's approved fasteners per manufacturers' written instructions.

D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect

against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

E. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with con-cealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended in writing by manufacturer.

1. Watertight Installation:

a. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal joints of metal panels, using sealant

or tape as recommend in writing by manufacturer as needed to make panels watertight.

b. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accesso-ries.

c. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant and fas-

tened together by interlocking clamping plates.

F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, copings, cor-

ners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Pro-vide types indicated by metal roof panel manufacturers; or, if not indicated, types recom-mended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation in-

structions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners



where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true to

line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space

movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: In accordance with one of the following to suit project application, as ap-proved by the Architect:

1. Shim and align metal panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and

location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

2. Comply with MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and in-spect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing.

B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where tests and inspections indicate that

they do not comply with specified requirements.

C. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal

panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



Building D and K Renovations March 25, 2020

ACCC Bid #1859

EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 53 00 - 1

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. EPDM thermoset single-ply roofing.

B. Membrane flashings.

C. Metal flashings.

D. Roof insulation.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05 31 23 - Steel Roof Decking.

B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.

C. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) - ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, Current Revision.

B. ANSI/SPRI WD-1 "Wind Design Standard for Roofing Assemblies".

C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 208 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board. 2. ASTM C 578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal

Insulation. 3. ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate

Thermal Insulation Board. 4. ASTM D 41 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,

Dampproofing, and Waterproofing. 5. ASTM D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic

Elastomers-Tension. 6. ASTM D 624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized

Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers. 7. ASTM D 816 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Cements. 8. ASTM D 4263 - Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the

Plastic Sheet Method. 9. ASTM D 4637 - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used In Single-Ply Roof

Membrane. 10. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

D. Factory Mutual (FM Global): 1. Approval Guide.

a. Factory Mutual Standard 4470 - Approval Standard for Class 1 Roof Covers. b. Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1-28, 1-29.

E. International Code Council (ICC): 1. International Building Code (IBC).



ACCC Bid #1859


F. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) - Low Slope Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, Current Edition.

G. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. TGFU R1306 - "Roofing Systems and Materials Guide". 2. UL-790 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.

I. ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1 (2007): Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings

1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Wind Uplift Performance: 1. Roof system is designed to withstand wind uplift forces as calculated using the current

revision of ASCE-7. 2. Roof system is designed to achieve a FM 1-90 wind uplift rating. (Reference ROOF

NAV # 345885-0-0) 3. Roof System is designed to achieve 90-psf of uplift testing.

B. Fire Resistance Performance: 1. Roof system will achieve a UL Class A rating when tested in accordance with UL-790.

C. Thermal Performance: Roof system will achieve a minimum R value not less than 30.

D. Drainage: Provide a roof system with positive drainage where all standing water dissipates within 48 hours after precipitation ends.

E. Building Codes: 1. Roof system will meet the requirements of all federal, state and local code bodies

having jurisdiction.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

C. Detail Drawings: 1. Submit approved plan, section, elevation or isometric drawings which detail the

appropriate methods for all flashing conditions found on the project. 2. Coordinate approved drawings with locations found on the Contract Drawings.

D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors, membranes, and thicknesses.

E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 4 inches (100 mm) square representing actual product, color, and patterns.



ACCC Bid #1859



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All products specified in this section will be supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty (20) years experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: 1. All products listed in this section are to be installed by a single installer with a

minimum of five (5) years demonstrated experience in installing products of the same type and scope as specified.

2. Installer must be capable of extending the Manufacturer's Labor and Materials guarantee.

3. Installer must be capable of extending the Manufacturer's No Dollar Limit guarantee.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store and dispose of hazardous materials, and materials contaminated by hazardous materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

B. Refer to Carlisle's Roofing System specification, Part II - Application, for General Job Site Considerations.

C. Safety Data Sheets (SDS) must be on location at all times during the transportation, storage and application of materials.

D. When positioning membrane sheets, exercise care to locate all field splices away from low spots and out of drain sumps. All field splices should be shingled to prevent bucking of water.

E. When loading materials onto the roof, the Carlisle Authorized Roofing Applicator must comply with the requirements of the building owner to prevent overloading and possible disturbance to the building structure.

F. Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance with the manufacturer's recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit the work to proceed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.

G. Proceed with work so new roofing materials are not subject to construction traffic. When necessary, new roof sections shall be protected and inspected upon completion for possible damage.

H. Provide protection, such as 3/4 inch thick plywood, for all roof areas exposed to traffic during construction. Plywood must be smooth and free of fasteners and splinters.

I. The surface on which the insulation or roofing membrane is to be applied shall be clean, smooth, dry, and free of projections or contaminants that would prevent proper application of or be incompatible with the new installation, such as fins, sharp edges, foreign materials, oil



ACCC Bid #1859


and grease.

J. New roofing shall be complete and weathertight at the end of the work day.

K. Contaminants such as grease, fats and oils shall not be allowed to come in direct contact with the roofing membrane.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. At project closeout, provide to Owner or Owners Representative an executed copy of the manufacturer's Total-System warranty, outlining its terms, conditions, and exclusions from coverage. 1. 25 years,120 MPH Wind Speed Warranty 2. Coverage to be extended to include accidental punctures in accordance with terms

stated in the Warranty document. 3. Coverage to be extended to include roof edge metal water tightness in accordance

with terms stated in the Warranty document.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Carlisle SynTec Systems, which is located at: P. O. Box 7000; Carlisle, PA 17013; Toll Free Tel: 800-4-SYNTEC; Tel: 717-245-7000; Fax: 717-245-7053; Email:request info ([email protected]); Web:https://www.carlislesyntec.com

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00.

2.2 SCOPE / APPLICATION

A. Roof System: Provide a waterproof roof system, capable of withstanding uplift forces as specified in Design Criteria.

B. Base Flashing: Provide a waterproof, fully adhered base flashing system at all penetrations, plane transitions and terminations.

C. Insulation: Provide a roof insulation system beneath the finish membrane.

2.3 INSULATION

A. INSULATION: Polyisocyanurate InsulBase: Carlisle InsulBase. Rigid board with glass fiber reinforced facers (GRF) on both sides, meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1. 1. Compressive Strength: Grade 2 (20 psi) (138 kPa). 2. Density: 2 lb per cubic foot (24 kg/cu m) minimum.

B. COVERBOARD : Moisture-, mold- and impact-resistant, nonstructural fiber-reinforced gypsum panel made from 95 percent recycled materials. Securock, distributed by Carlisle. 1. Board Thickness: 5/8 inch (15 mm).

2.4 INSULATION ADHESIVE

A. Flexible FAST Adhesive: A spray or extruded applied, two-component polyurethane, low-rise



ACCC Bid #1859


expanding foam adhesive used for attaching approved insulations to compatible substrates (concrete, cellular lightweight insulating concrete, gypsum, cementitious wood fiber, wood or steel) or existing smooth or gravel surfaced BUR, modified bitumen or cap sheets.

B. Flexible FAST Dual Tank Adhesive: A two-component, polyurethane construction grade, low-rise expanding adhesive designed for bonding insulation to various substrates using a portable applicator.

C. Flexible FAST 5 gallon Jug Adhesive: A two-component, polyurethane construction grade, low-rise expanding adhesive designed for bonding insulation to various substrates, packaged for use with spray application rigs.

2.5 ETHYLENE, PROPYLENE, DIENE TERPOLYMER (EPDM) MEMBRANE

A. Sure-White FleeceBACK Membrane: Cured, non-reinforced EPDM membrane with a 55 mil fleece bonded to the underside. Meets the requirements of ASTM D 4637 Type I. 1. Attachment Method: Fully adhered with Flexible FAST. 2. Color: White on Black. 3. Membrane Thickness: 115 mil nominal / 60 mil over fleece. 4. 6” Factory Applied Seam Tape 5. Sheet Dimensions:

a. Width: 10 feet (3.05 m) maximum. b. Length: 100 feet (30.5 m) maximum.

6. Performance: a. Breaking Strength: 200 lbf (890 N) minimum. b. Tear Strength: 45 lbf (200 N) minimum. c. Elongation: 500 percent.

2.6 FLASHING ACCESSORlES

A. Sure-White (white) Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Seals with Factory-Applied TAPE on the deck flange are available for use with Sure-Seal/Sure-White Roofing systems.

B. Sure-White Pressure-Sensitive Pourable Sealer Pocket: Pre-fabricated Pourable Sealer Pocket consisting of a 2 inch (51 mm) wide plastic support strip with Pressure-Sensitive, Factory-Applied, adhesive backed uncured Elastoform Flashing.

C. Sure-White Pressure-Sensitive (PS) Inside/Outside Corner: A 7 inch by 9 inch precut 60-mil thick Elastoform Flashing with a 30-mil Factory-Applied TAPE.

D. Sure-White Pressure-Sensitive (PS) Curb Flashing - A 60-mil thick, 20 inch (508 mm) wide cured EPDM membrane with 5 inch (126 mm) wide Factory-Applied Pressure-Sensitive TAPE along one edge to be used to flash curbs/skylights, etc.

E. Sure-White Pressure-Sensitive Cured Cover Strip: Sure-Seal or Sure-White 60-mil cured EPDM membrane laminated to a nominal 35-mil cured Factory-Applied TAPE.

F. Sure-White Pressure-Sensitive "T" Joint Covers: A factory cut uncured 60-mil thick EPDM flashing laminated to a nominal 35-mil Factory-Applied TAPE, used to overlay field splice intersections and to cover field splices at angle changes. Available in 6 inch by 6 inch and 12 inch by 12 inch for Sure-Seal applications, and 6 inch by 6 inch for Sure-White applications.



ACCC Bid #1859


G. Sure-White Pressure-Sensitive Elastoform Flashing: 60-mil thick uncured EPDM Flashing laminated to a 30-mil Factory-Applied Pressure-Sensitive TAPE used in conjunction with Sure-Seal Primer.

H. Sure-White Pressure-Sensitive RUSS (Reinforced Universal Securement Strip): 6 inch (152 mm) RUSS: A nominal 6 inch (152 mm) wide, 45-mil thick reinforced EPDM membrane with a nominal 3 inch (76 mm) wide 30-mil thick cured synthetic rubber pressure-sensitive adhesive laminated to one edge. This product provides perimeter securement, and additional membrane securement at angle changes for Adhered, and Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems.

2.7 CLEANERS, PRIMERS, ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS

A. Carlisle Weathered Membrane Cleaner: Clear, solvent-based cleaner used to loosen and remove contaminants from the surface of exposed EPDM membrane prior to applying EPDM Primer.

B. Low VOC EPDM and TPO Primer - A low VOC (volatile organic compound) primer (less than 250 grams/liter) for use with SecurTAPE or Pressure-Sensitive products.

C. Sure-Seal/Sure-White Lap Sealant: A heavy-bodied material (trowel or gun-consistency) used to seal the exposed edges of a membrane splice. 1. Sure-Seal Lap Sealant: Black sealant for use with Sure-Seal (black) Roofing Systems. 2. Sure-White Lap Sealant: White sealant for use with Sure-White (white-on-black)

Roofing Systems.

D. Flexible FAST Adhesive: A spray or extruded applied, two-component, polyurethane, low-rise expanding foam adhesive used to securely bond FleeceBACK membranes to a variety of substrates.

E. Water Cut-Off Mastic: A one-component, low viscosity, self wetting, Butyl blend mastic used as a compression sealing agent between EPDM membranes and applicable substrates.

F. Two-Part Pourable Sealer: A black, two-component, solvent-free, polyurethane based product used for tie-ins and as a sealant around hard-to-flash membrane penetrating objects such as clusters of pipes and for a daily seal when the completion of flashings and terminations cannot be completed by the end of each work day. Can also be used for attaching lightning rod bases and ground cable clips to the membrane surface.

G. Universal Single-Ply Sealant: A 100 percent solids, solvent free, one-part, polyether sealant that provides a weather tight sealant to a variety of building substrates; used as a termination bar sealant. Available in white only.

H. CAV-GRIP III Low-VOC Aerosol Contact Adhesive/Primer: a low-VOC, methylene chloride-free adhesive that can be used for a variety of applications including: Priming unexposed asphalt prior to applying Flexible FAST Adhesive, adhering Sure-Seal EPDM, horizontally, for the field of the roof, and for adhering Sure-Seal FleeceBACK and Sure-Seal EPDM membrane to vertical walls. Coverage rate is approximately 2,000-2,500 sq. ft. per 40 lb cylinder and 4,000-5,000 sq. ft. per 85 lb cylinder as a primer, in a single-sided application and 750 sq. ft. per 40 lb cylinder and 1,500 sq. ft. per 85 lb cylinder as an adhesive for vertical walls, in a double-sided application; 1,000 sq. ft. per 40 lb cylinder and 2,000 sq. ft. per 85 lb cylinder as an adhesive, horizontally, for the field of the roof, in a double-sided application.



ACCC Bid #1859


2.8 FASTENING COMPONENTS

A. HP Fastener: Threaded, black epoxy electro-deposition coated (E-Coat) fastener for use with steel, wood plank or oriented strand board (OSB).

B. Insulation Fastening Plate: Nominal 3 inch (76 mm) diameter FM approved metal plate used for insulation attachment.

2.9 EDGINGS AND TERMINATIONS

A. SecurEdge 200: A snap-on edge system consisting of a 24 gauge galvanized metal water dam. Finish as noted on the Finish Schedule of the Contract Drawings.

B. SecurEdge 200 Coping: An anchor cleat with pre-slotted holes, a concealed joint cover, and 10 or 12 foot sections of coping cap. Kynar 500 finish as noted on the Finish Schedule of the Contract Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Do not commence work until all other work trades have completed jobs that require them to traverse the deck on foot or with equipment.

D. A vapor retarder / temporary roof (Carlisle VapAir Seal 725TR Air & Vapor Barrier/Temporary Roof or Carlisle VapAir Seal MD Air & Vapor Barrier) may be applied to protect the inside of the structure prior to the roof system installation.

3.3 MEMBRANE UNDERLAYMENT - SYSTEM DESIGN

A. Base Layer: 1. Type: _Insulbase _. 2. Thickness: __2__ inches 3. Attachment Method: __M/A with Carlisle HP Fasteners & Insulation Plates__.

B. Tapered System: 1. Type: _Insulbase_. 2. Field Slope: __1/4__ inch per foot. 3. Cricket Slope: __1/2”__ inch per foot. 4. Attachment Method: _Flexible FAST Adhesive_.

C. Coverboard:



ACCC Bid #1859


1. Type: _Securock_. 2. Thickness: __5/8__ inch 3. Attachment Method: __Flexible FAST Adhesive__.

D.

3.4 INSULATION PLACEMENT

A. Install insulation or membrane underlayment in multiple layers over the substrate with boards butted tightly together with no joints or gaps greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Stagger joints both horizontally and vertically.

B. Secure insulation to the substrate with the required mechanical fasteners or insulation adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer's current application guidelines.

C. Do not install wet, damaged or warped insulation boards.

D. Stagger joints in one direction unless joints are to be taped. Install insulation boards snug. Gaps between board joints shall not exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm). Fill all gaps in excess of 1/4 inch (6 mm) with same insulation material.

E. Wood nailers must be at least 3 1/2 inches (89 mm) wide or 1 inch (25 mm) wider than adjacent metal flange. Thickness must equal that of insulation but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thickness.

F. Miter and fill the edges of the insulation boards at ridges, valleys and other changes in plane to prevent open joints or irregular surfaces. Avoid breaking or crushing of the insulation at the corners.

G. Do not install any more insulation than will be completely waterproofed each day.

3.5 INSULATION ATTACHMENT

A. Install insulation layers, maximum 4 feet by 4 feet (1220 mm by 1220 mm), applied with adhesive, coverage rate as necessary to achieve the specified attachment and uplift rating. Press each board firmly into place after adhesive develops strings when touched, typically 1-1/2 to 2 minutes after adhesive was applied, and roll with a weighted roller. Add temporary weight and use relief cuts to ensure boards are well adhered. Stagger the joints of additional layers by a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm).

3.6 MEMBRANE PLACEMENT AND ATTACHMENT (FleeceBACK Fully Adhered)

A. Position and unroll successive sheets and align to provide for a minimum 6 inch (76 mm) wide splice. (6” Seam Tape to Satisfy the 25 year Warranty Requirement)

B. Fold adjacent sheets in half lengthwise to expose an approximate 10 foot (3046 mm) wide substrate area.

C. Membrane which will have the adjacent sheet spliced over it should be adhered to the substrate first. In this fashion, selvage edge splice area will not be contaminated by setting splice edge into the FAST or Flexible FAST Adhesive.

D. Spray or extrude FAST or Flexible FAST Adhesive onto the substrate and allow to foam up approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm). Wait for the adhesive to achieve "string" when a small object



ACCC Bid #1859


is lifted out if the adhesive.

E. Place the membrane into adhesive after adhesive develops strings when touched, typically 1-1/2 to 2 minutes after adhesive was applied, and roll with a 150 lb (68 kg) segmented weighted roller.

F. Apply FAST Adhesive to the substrate and continue process described above until all sheets are fully bonded, allowing for necessary splice overlaps at selvage edges. At end laps (along the width of the sheet) membrane shall be butted together which will be overlaid with 6 inch wide Pressure-Sensitive Cured Cover Strip or Pressure-Sensitive Overlayment Strip.

3.7 MEMBRANE SPLICING (Adhesive Splice)

A. Fold the top sheet back and clean the dry splice area (minimum 3 inches wide) of both membrane sheets by scrubbing with clean natural fiber rags saturated with Splice Cleaner or HP-250 Primer. When using Sure-Seal (black) PRE-KLEENED membrane, cleaning the splice area is not required unless contaminated with field dirt or other residue.

B. Apply Splicing Cement in accordance with the manufacturer's current application guidelines, and roll the top sheet onto the mating surface.

C. Roll the splice with a 2 inch wide steel roller and wait at least 2 hours before applying Lap Sealant to the splice edge following the manufacturer's requirements.

D. Field splices without In-Seam Sealant must be overlaid with uncured flashing.

3.8 MEMBRANE SPLICING (Tape Splice)

A. Overlap adjacent sheets and mark a line 1/2 inch out from the top sheet.

B. Fold the top sheet back and clean the dry splice area (minimum 2 1/2 inches (64 mm wide) of both membrane sheets with Sure-Seal Primer as required by the membrane manufacturer.

C. Where Splice Tape is not Factory-Applied, apply Splice Tape to bottom sheet with the edge of the release film along the marked line. Press tape onto the sheet using hand pressure. Overlap tape roll ends a minimum of 1 inch (13 mm).

D. Remove the release film and press the top sheet onto the tape using hand pressure.

E. Roll the seam toward the splice edge with a 2 inch (51 mm) wide steel roller.

F. Install Pressure-Sensitive "T" Joint Cover, a 6 inch wide (152 mm) section of Pressure-Sensitive Elastoform Flashing over all field splice intersections.

G. When using non-Pressure-Sensitive Elastoform Flashing or Elastoform Flashing, seal edges of flashing with Lap Sealant.

H. The use of Lap Sealant with tape splices is optional except at tape overlaps and cut edges of reinforced membrane where Lap Sealant is required.

3.9 FLASHING

A. Wall and curb flashing shall be cured EPDM membrane. Continue the deck membrane as



ACCC Bid #1859


wall flashing where practicable.

B. Follow manufacturer's typical flashing procedures for all wall, curb, and penetration flashing including metal edging/coping and roof drain applications.

3.10 WALKWAYS

A. Install walkways at all traffic concentration points (such as roof hatches, access doors, rooftop ladders, etc.) and all locations as identified on the Contract Drawings.

B. Adhere walkways pads to the EPDM membrane in accordance with the manufacturer's current application guidelines.

3.11 DAILY SEALS

A. On phased roofing, when the completion of flashings and terminations is not achieved by the end of the work day, a daily seal must be performed to temporarily close the membrane to prevent water infiltration.

B. Use Sure-Seal Pourable Sealer or other acceptable membrane seal in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

3.12 CLEAN UP

A. Perform daily clean-up to collect all wrappings, empty containers, paper, and other debris from the project site. Upon completion, all debris must be disposed of in a legally acceptable manner.

B. Prior to the manufacturer's inspection for warranty, the applicator must perform a pre-inspection to review all work and to verify all flashing has been completed as well as the application of all caulking.

3.13 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 1

SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Manufactured Products:

a. Manufactured reglets.

2. Formed Products:

a. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. b. Formed equipment support flashing.


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:

1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.

2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.

3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.

4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 5. Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of

expansion and contraction. 6. Details of edge conditions. 7. Details of special conditions. 8. Details of connections to adjoining work. 9. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.



C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners and attachments.

2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.

3. Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample. 4. Anodized Aluminum Samples: Samples to show full range to be expected for each color

required.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator.

E. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals.

F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. As-Milled Finish: Mill finish. 2. Clear Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or

thicker. 3. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or

polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed.

1. Finish: 2D (dull, cold rolled). a. Finish to match stainless steel wall tiles at locations where sheet metal flashing is

visible on or adjacent to the stainless steel wall tiles. Refer to section 07 42 15 Stainless Steel Wall Tiles for finish requirements.

2. Surface: Smooth, flat.

D. Copper Laminate Flashing sealed to a stainless steel drip edge. 1. 7 oz. copper laminated on both sides with an asphaltic compound coating. 2. Basis of design is the C-Coat as manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397.

B. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.



c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Solder:

1. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with an acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

I. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.4 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory-mitered and -welded corners and junctions.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Fry Reglet Corporation. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; STF Sawtooth Flashing. c. National Sheet Metal Systems, Inc. d. Approved equal.

2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.019 inch thick. 3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with

neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge.

4. Concrete Type: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete forms, and guides to ensure alignment of reglet section ends.

5. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint.



6. Accessories:

a. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing.

b. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.

7. Finish: Mill.


A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.

D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.

G. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer.

H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.6 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 12-foot- long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated.



Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2-inch- high, end dams where flashing is discontinuous. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.

B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored.

B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.



B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.

1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.

E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.

1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.

1. Do not solder aluminum sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into

joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 3. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for

stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. Make provisions for expansion and contraction in flashing that is soldered.

3.3 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated.

B. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.



3.4 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member.

3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials.

C. Clean off excess solder.

D. Clean off excess sealants.

E. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturers written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

F. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-1

SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Urethane joint sealants.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" 2. Division 08 Section "Glazing"

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Qualification Data complying with requirements specified in Quality Assurance article. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified.

E. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer, attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Engage an experienced installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for project that have resulted in construction with record of successful in-service performance.




A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. BASF Building Systems. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk. c. May National Associates, Inc. d. Pacific Polymers International, Inc. e. Pecora Corporation. f. Polymeric Systems, Inc.. g. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.. h. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division. i. Tremco Incorporated.



2.3 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin)] [Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.



2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Exterior insulation and finish systems.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.



3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 10 - 1

SECTION 08 11 10 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Standard hollow-metal steel doors. 2. Standard hollow-metal steel frames.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label compliance, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes for each type of steel door and frame specified.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive fire tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of standard steel door and frame.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain standard steel doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Fire-Rated Door, Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and

labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.



D. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies (Including Sidelights and Transoms): Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.



A. Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ceco Door Products; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company. 2. CURRIES Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company. 3. de LaFontaine 4. Mesker Door Inc. 5. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 6. Philipp Manufacturing Company. 7. Republic Builders Products Company. 8. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.



C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 metallic coating.

E. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M

or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

G. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.

H. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

I. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

J. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 - GLAZING.

K. Isolation Coating: ASTM D 1187, cold-applied asphalt emulsion, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.3 STANDARD STEEL DOORS

A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI A250.8.

1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,

polyurethane, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core that produces doors complying with ANSI A250.8. a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings

indicated. b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Exterior Doors: Where indicated, provide doors

fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 4.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

3. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch-thick end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.

4. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."



B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: 1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless), 1-

3/4 inches thick. 2. Exterior doors shall be not less than 16 gauge steel. 3. The top channel of each metal door shall be solid without pockets which collect dirt and

water. 4. All exterior doors and frames shall be galvanized.

C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated to comply with exterior door requirements. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless), 1-3/4

inches thick. 2. Interior doors shall be not less than 18 gauge steel.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

2.4 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. All door frames shall be 16 gauge. Knock-down frames are prohibited unless specifically approved in writing by Office of Facilities Design.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with full profile welded joints. 2. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch-thick steel sheet.

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated to comply with exterior frame requirements. 1. Fabricate frames with full profile welded joints. 2. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not

less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.

3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-

diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.



B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,

allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

2.6 HOLLOW METAL PANELS

A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for adjoining hollow metal work.

2.7 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch-wide steel.

C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit

moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by

NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.

D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Full Profile Welded Frames: Weld joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make

smooth, flush, and not visible.



2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as doorframe. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of

frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

or fraction thereof above 120 inches high. b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of

frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in

metal-stud partitions. c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top

and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.

7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE. 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8 and ADA

standards. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted

door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series

specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division

26 - ELECTRICAL.

G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow

metal work.



2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings, so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type

of installation indicated.

2.10 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard epoxy primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer

complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

2. Refer to Section 09 90 00 – PAINTING for field-applied coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees

from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to

plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel

lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from

head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.



B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent

anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed.

Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply isolation coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled

expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between

frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take

precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces.

6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

7. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

8. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members.

9. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90

degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line

parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on

parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch . c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4

inch.



2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.

D. Glazing: Comply with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not

more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.



FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 00 - 1

SECTION 08 14 00 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer and medium-density overlay faces. 2. Factory finishing for wood doors. 3. Factory glazing for wood doors. 4. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish specifications. 5. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work.

2. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."

C. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.

D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies

provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.



2. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

E. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or

replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty shall include hardware installation and replacement of glass and glazing. 3. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial

Completion: a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.




2. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for fabricating interior architectural woodwork to not deteriorate in the interior environment expected during occupancy, which is standard for the majority of new buildings designed and constructed. a. Submission of bid shall represent acceptance of these terms. b. Contrary manufacturer’s and AWI disclaimers shall not apply if more restrictive




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Flush Wood Doors:

a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. b. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. c. Lambton Doors. d. Marshfield Door Systems.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that contain no added urea formaldehyde.

B. Doors for Transparent Finish: 1. Grade for Appearance: AWI Premium, with AWI Grade A faces. 2. Species and Cut: Clear Ash, plain sawn. 3. Match between Veneer Leaves: book match. 4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center balanced. 5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by

mullions. 6. Stiles: Same species as faces. 7. Cross-Banding: 1/8 in. high density fiberboard, urea formaldehyde free. 8. Adhesives: Type I per WDMA T.M.-6.

2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS A. Cores: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Particle Core: ANSI A 208.1, Grade 1-LD-2 2. Stave Lumber Core: FSC Certified 3. Structural Composite Lumber Core: Timberstrand LSL, 4. Provide doors with structural composite lumber cores instead of particleboard cores at

locations where exit devices are indicated or where light cutouts exceed 40% of the door area.

B. Interior Veneer-Faced Doors: 1. Construction: Five plies, hot-pressed, with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit

abrasive planed before veneering.

C. Fire-Rated Doors: 1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or

manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as needed to provide fire rating indicated. a. Fire Retardant Mineral Core, with no added urea formaldehyde cross-banding,

contributes to IEQ 4.4. 2. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw-

holding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with outer stile matching face veneer. a. Screw-Holding Capability: 550 lbf per WDMA T.M.-10.



4. Pairs: Provide fire-rated pairs with fire-retardant stiles matching face veneer that are labeled and listed for kinds of applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals.

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: Provide factory installed glass products in accordance with requirements in Section 08 80 00 - GLAZING.

2.5 LIGHT FRAMES

A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: 1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard shape. 3. At 20-minute, fire-rated, wood-core doors, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips

approved for such use.

B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire rating indicated.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply

with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and

alignment before factory machining. Drill pilot holes for screws for butt hinges and lock fronts at the factory.

2. Metal Astragals: Premachine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors to receive concealed vertical rod exit devices.

C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. 1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber meeting rails. Provide

factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal doorframes.

D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.

2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces and edges of doors, including cutouts, with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 09 90 00 - PAINTING.



2.8 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated" for factory finishing.

B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Factory prime and prepare for field finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish.

C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: Custom stain. 4. Effect: Semifilled finish. 5. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing

characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE.

B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.

C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Protection: Provide temporary protection to ensure work being without damage or deterioration at time of final acceptance. Remove protections and reclean as necessary immediately before final acceptance.

C. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.

END OF SECTION


ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 43 13-1

SECTION 08 43 13

ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the aluminum entrances and storefronts as indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein including the following:

1. Exterior entrance systems.

2. Interior entrance systems.

3. Exterior storefront systems.

4. Interior storefront systems.

5. Doors.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Sealants - Section 07 92 00.

B. Finish hardware - Section 08 71 00.

C. Glass and glazing - Section 08 80 00.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data, specifications, standard details, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each material used. Provide certifications that materials and systems comply with specified requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide large scale shop drawings for fabrication, installation and erection of all parts of work. Provide plans, elevations, and details of anchorages, connections and accessory items. Provide installation templates for work installed by others. Show interfaces and relationships to work of other trades.

C. Field Measurements: Take necessary field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Do not delay progress of job. If field measurements are not possible prior to fabrication, allow for field cutting and fitting.

D. Initial Selection Samples: Submit samples showing complete range of colors, textures, and finishes available for each material used.



E. Verification Samples: Submit representative samples of each material that is to be exposed in completed work. Show full color ranges and finish variations expected. Provide samples having minimum size of 144 sq. in.

F. Calculations: Provide professionally prepared calculations and certification of performance of this work. Indicate how design requirements for loading and other performance criteria have been satisfied; refer to Article 1.5, para. D for further description.

G. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports for specified tests.


A. Source: For each material type required for work of this Section, provide primary materials which are products of one manufacturer. Provide secondary or accessory materials which are acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials.

B. Installer: A firm with a minimum of three years experience in type of work required by this Section and which is acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials.

C. Design Criteria: Drawings indicate sizes, member spacings, profiles, and dimensional requirements of work of this Section. Minor deviations will be accepted in order to utilize manufacturer's standard products when, in the Architect's sole judgment, such deviations do not materially detract from the design concept or intended performances.

D. Engineering: Provide services of a Professional Engineer, registered in the jurisdiction in which the Project will be built, to design and certify that work of this Section meets or exceeds performance requirements specified.

1.6 TESTS AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Manufacturer's Standard Tests: Provide manufacturer's standard test data showing compliance with specified requirements.

B. Testing and performance data applies to exterior assemblies.

C. Test Sequence: Test sequence is optional, except that air infiltration tests shall precede water resistance tests.

D. Air Infiltration Test: Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 283, as follows:

1. Static Air Pressure Difference: 6.24 psf for fixed storefront units, and 1.567 psf for doors.

2. Performance: Maximum air leakage shall not exceed the following:

a. Fixed Storefront Units: 0.06 cfm per sq. ft. of window area. b. Door Units: 0.50 cfm per sq. ft. of single doors, 1.00 cfm per sq. ft. for doors

hinged in pairs.

E. Water Leakage Test: Test fixed framing system in accordance with ASTM E 331.

1. Test Pressure: 6.24 psf.

2. Performance: No leakage as defined in test method at specified test pressure.



F. Uniform Load Deflection Test: Test units in accordance with ASTM E 330, at following static air pressure difference (Design Wind Pressure), or loads prescribed by code for this project site, whichever is greater. Apply pressure first to exterior side (positive) and then interior side (negative).

1. Design Wind Pressure: 30 pounds per square foot minimum.

2. Test Procedure: Procedure A as specified in ASTM E 330.

3. Performance: Deflection in each member measured at locations of greatest deflection shall not exceed L/175 at specified Design Wind Pressure.

G. Uniform Load Structural Test: Test units in accordance with ASTM E 330 at following static air pressure difference. Apply high pressure load first on one side and then on other side. At conclusion of test there shall be no glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support arms or activating mechanisms.

1. Static Air Pressure: Minimum 1.5 times the Design Wind Pressure.

2. Permanent Deformation in Any Member: Not to exceed 0.2% of member span.

H. Condensation Resistant Factor: Not less than 45 for fixed storefront units, and not less than 48 for doors; per AAMA 1502.7.

I. Thermal Movement: Provide storefront systems that allow for expansion and

contraction of members throughout an ambient temperature range of 120oF.

J. Seismic Loads: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions calculated according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or ASCE 7, “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures”, Section 9, “Earthquake Loads”, whichever are more stringent.


A. Deliver materials and products in unopened, factory labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Store under cover and protect from weather damage.

B. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage.

1.8 WARRANTIES

A. Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace work that exhibits defects in materials or workmanship. "Defects" is defined to include, but not limited to, leakage of water, abnormal aging or deterioration, abnormal deterioration or fading of finishes, and failure to perform as required. Include requirement for removal and replacement of covering and connected adjacent work.

1. Warranty Period: Three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion; except finish shall be warranted for a period of fifteen (15) years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS/PRODUCTS

A. Provide storefronts and entrance systems of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed requirements of these specifications:

1. Kawneer Company, Inc.

2. Wausau Metals Corporation.

3. EFCO.

4. Vistawall.

B. Products:

1. Exterior frame system shall be equal to Series 451T, manufactured by Kawneer Company, Inc.; or approved equal manufacturer listed above.

2. Doors shall be “Wide Stile 500” manufactured by the Kawneer Co. Inc. or approved equal manufacturer listed above.

2.2 MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Aluminum Members: Provide 6063-T5 alloy and temper as recommended by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish. Comply with ASTM B 221 for extrusions, and ASTM B 209 for sheet/plate. Provide 0.125 in. thick extrusions for door stiles and storefront framing. Provide 0.050 in. thick aluminum for glazing moldings.

1. Structural aluminum shapes shall conform to ASTM B 308.

B. Fasteners: Provide non-magnetic stainless steel fasteners, warranted by manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum components.

C. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft stainless steel, 26 gage minimum, or extruded aluminum 0.062 in. minimum, of an alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other components.

D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Non-magnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 386.

E. Concrete/Masonry Inserts: Cast-iron, malleable iron, or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 386.

F. Bituminous Coatings: Cold-applied asphalt mastic compounded for 30-mil thickness per coat.

G. Compression Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable stripping of molded neoprene or PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287.

H. Sliding Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile, with nylon fabric or aluminum strip backing.



2.3 HARDWARE

A. Provide hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for operation of each door. Refer to Section 087100, Finish Hardware for hardware description.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for door and frame units, including profile requirements, are indicated on Drawings. Any variable dimensions are indicated, together with maximum and minimum dimensions required to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work.

B. Prefabrication: To greatest extent possible, complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.

1. Preglaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible, in coordination with installation and hardware requirements.

2. Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site.

3. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work in manner which prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces. For hardware, perform these operations prior to application of finishes.

C. Welding: Comply with recommendations of American Welding Society to avoid discoloration; grind exposed welds smooth and restore mechanical finish.

D. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as necessary for performance requirements; separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or other separator to prevent corrosion.

E. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members.

F. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners.

G. Provide EPDM/vinyl blade gasket weatherstripping in bottom exterior door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold.

H. At interior doors and other locations without weatherstripping, provide neoprene silencers on stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact.

I. Provisions shall be made in the framing for minimum edge clearance, nominal edge cover, and nominal pocket width for the thickness and type of glazing installed, and shall be in accordance with the FGMA Glazing Manual.

J. Pocket glazed framing shall provide:

Single Glass Ins. Glass

1. Nominal edge cover (or bite) framing only 5/16” 1/2”

2. Min. nominal edge clearance 1/8” 1/4”

3. Min. face clearance 1/8” 5/32”



2.5 STOREFRONT FRAMING

A. General: Provide inside-outside matched resilient flush glazed system with provisions for glass replacement. Shop fabricate and preassemble frame components where possible.

B. Thermal-Break Construction: Fabricate exterior aluminum storefront framing system with integrally concealed, low conductance thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and exposed interior members, in manner which eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact. Provide manufacturer's standard construction which has been in use for similar projects for at least three years.

C. For glass and glazing, refer to Section 088000.

2.6 ALUMINUM DOORS

A. Aluminum entrance doors shall be wide stile factory-glazed aluminum doors, manufactured by same manufacturer as storefront framing.

B. Aluminum entrance doors shall be stile and rail type swing doors. Aluminum shall be extruded aluminum conforming to ASTM B 221, 0.125 in. thick for door stiles and 0.050 in. thick for glazing molding.

1. Sections shall be of sizes and profiles indicated; shall present straight, sharply defined lines and arrises; and shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability, and appearance.

2. Fasteners where exposed shall be aluminum stainless steel or plated steel conforming to ASTM A 164.

C. Each door shall be factory glazed set in neoprene glazing gasket, refer to Section 088000 for glass.

D. Doors shall meet the following resistance to corner racking when tested by the Dual Moment Load Test.

1. Test section shall consist of a standard top door corner assembly. Side rail section shall be 24” long and top rail section shall be 12” long.

2. Anchor “top rail” positively to test bench so that corner protrudes 3” beyond bench edge.

3. Anchor a lever arm positively to “side rail” at a point 19” from inside edge of “top rail”. Attach weight support pad at a point 19” from inner edge of “side rail”.

4. Test section shall withstand a load of 245 lbs. On the lever arm before reaching the point of failure, which shall be considered a rotation of the lever arm in excess of 45 deg.

E. Air Infiltration: (Applies only to single acting offset pivot or butt hung entrances).

1. Air infiltration shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283, at a pressure differential of 1.567 psf. A single 3’-0” x 7’-0” entrance door and frame shall not exceed .50 cfm per linear foot of perimeter crack. A pair of 6’-0” x 7’-0” entrance doors and frame shall not exceed 1.0 cfm per linear foot of perimeter crack.



F. For door hardware, refer to Section 087100.

G. Door bottom rail of exterior doors shall have an EPDM blade gasket sweep strip applied with concealed fasteners.

H. Corner construction shall consist of mechanical clip fastening, SIGMA deep penetration and fillet welds. Glazing stops shall be hook-in type with EPDM glazing gaskets.

I. The door weatherstripping on a single acting offset pivot or butt hung exterior door and frame (single or pairs) shall be thermoplastic elastomer weathering on a tubular shape with a semi-rigid polymeric backing.

J. The door weatherstripping on a double acting, center pivoted door and frame (single or pairs) shall be pile cloth. The door bottom rail shall be weathered with an EPDM blade gasket sweep strip applied with concealed fasteners.

K. The meeting stiles on pairs of doors shall be equipped with an adjustable astragal.

2.7 FINISH

A. Permanodic anodized finish; exterior type in color selected by Architect.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine the areas and conditions where aluminum entrances and storefronts are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install aluminum entrance doors and storefront framing in openings prepared under other Sections plumb, square, level, in exact alignment with surrounding work, with proper clearances, and securely and positively anchored to building structure, to meet performance requirements specified herein, in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions and approved submittals.

B. Use only skilled mechanics for erection, under supervision of manufacturer’s representative.

C. Provide protection against galvanic action. Isolate dissimilar materials with bituminous coating or non-absorptive dielectric tape.

D. Install aluminum entrance doors, storefront frame, and finish hardware. Carefully fit and adjust doors and hardware to frames and weatherstripping. After erection check and adjust operating hardware for smooth and proper operation.

E. Set continuous sill members and flashing in a full sealant bed to provide weathertight construction, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of Section 079200.

F. Erection Tolerances: Install entrance and storefront systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances.



1. Variation from Plane: Limit variation from plane or location shown to 1/8” in 12’; 1/4” over total length.

2. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16”. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32”.

3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8”.

3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING OF ALUMINUM

A. Protect finished metal surfaces from damage during fabrication, shipping, storage, and erection, and from then until acceptance by Owner.

B. Clean metal surfaces promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage. Remove excess sealant, dirt, and other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING OF GLASS

A. Replace glass that is broken, cracked or chipped prior to time of final acceptance of Project by Owner.

B. Clean glass surfaces promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to same.


Atlantic Cape Community College Building D & K Renovations

DOOR HARDWARE 087100-1 CLARKE CATON HINTZ ARCHITECTS 3/25/2020

SECTION 08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Mechanical and electrified door hardware for:

a. Swinging doors. b. Sliding doors.

2. Electronic access control system components, including:

a. Biometric access control reader. b. Electronic access control devices.

3. Field verification, preparation and modification of existing doors and frames to receive new door hardware.

4. The intent of the hardware specification is to specify the hardware for interior and exterior doors, and to establish a type, continuity, and standard of quality. However, it is the door hardware supplier’s responsibility to thoroughly review existing conditions, schedules, specifications, drawings, and other Contract Documents to verify the suitability of the hardware specified.

B. Exclusions: Unless specifically listed in hardware sets, hardware is not specified in this section for:

1. Windows 2. Cabinets (casework), including locks in cabinets 3. Signage 4. Toilet accessories 5. Overhead doors

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section “Alternates” for alternates affecting this section. 2. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealant requirements applicable to threshold

installation specified in this section. 3. Division 09 sections for touchup, finishing or refinishing of existing openings modified by

this section. 4. Division 26 sections for connections to electrical power system and for low-voltage wiring. 5. Division 28 sections for coordination with other components of electronic access control

system.



1.03 REFERENCES

A. UL - Underwriters Laboratories

1. UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies 2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies 3. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies 4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware

B. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute

1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule 2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware 3. Key Systems and Nomenclature

C. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI/BHMA A156.31 - Standards for Hardware and Specialties

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. Submit in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 requirements. 2. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify on submittals deviations from

Contract Documents, issues of incompatibility or other issues which may detrimentally affect the Work.

3. Prior to forwarding submittal, comply with procedures for verifying existing door and frame compatibility for new hardware, as specified in PART 3, “EXAMINATION” article, herein.

B. Action Submittals:

1. Product Data: Technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

2. Riser and Wiring Diagrams: After final approval of hardware schedule, submit details of electrified door hardware, indicating:

a. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring and including: 1) Details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security

systems. 2) Schematic diagram of systems that interface with electrified door hardware. 3) Point-to-point wiring. 4) Risers.

3. Samples for Verification: If requested by Architect, submit production sample of requested door hardware unit in finish indicated, and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule.

a. Samples will be returned to supplier. Units that are acceptable to Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into Work, within limitations of key coordination requirements.



4. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as illustrated by Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each door or opening, include:

a. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects hardware set number.

b. Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet: List locking device and function for each opening.

c. Quantity, type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. d. Name and manufacturer of each item. e. Fastenings and other pertinent information. f. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings. g. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. h. Mounting locations for hardware. i. Door and frame sizes and materials. j. Name and phone number for local manufacturer's representative for each product. k. Operational Description of openings with any electrified hardware (locks, exits,

electromagnetic locks, electric strikes, automatic operators, door position switches, magnetic holders or closer/holder units, and access control components). Operational description should include operational descriptions for: egress, ingress (access), and fire/smoke alarm connections. 1) Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with

submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.

5. Key Schedule:

a. After Keying Conference, provide keying schedule listing levels of keying as well as explanation of key system's function, key symbols used and door numbers controlled.

b. Use ANSI/BHMA A156.28 “Recommended Practices for Keying Systems” as guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting optimal keying system.

c. Provide 3 copies of keying schedule for review prepared and detailed in accordance with referenced DHI publication. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key to unique door designations.

d. Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, hardware heading number, cross keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions.

e. Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts and one key system schematic illustrating system usage and expansion. 1) Forward bitting list, key cuts and key system schematic directly to Owner, by

means as directed by Owner.

f. Prepare key schedule by or under supervision of supplier, detailing Owner’s final keying instructions for locks.

6. Templates: After final approval of hardware schedule, provide templates for doors, frames and other work specified to be factory or shop prepared for door hardware installation.

C. Informational Submittals:

1. Qualification Data: For Supplier, Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. 2. Product data for electrified door hardware:



a. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.

3. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

D. Closeout Submittals:

1. Operations and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Division 01 and include:

a. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes.

b. Catalog pages for each product. c. Factory order acknowledgement numbers (for warranty and service) d. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer. e. Parts list for each product. f. Final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect conditions as-installed. g. Final keying schedule h. Copies of floor plans with keying nomenclature i. As-installed wiring diagrams for each opening connected to power, both low voltage

and 110 volts. j. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to

identify project.


A. Supplier Qualifications and Responsibilities: Recognized architectural hardware supplier with record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that provides certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) or Door Hardware Consultant (DHC) available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the Work for consultation.

1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including

Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

4. Coordination Responsibility: Assist in coordinating installation of electronic security hardware with Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors.

a. Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation, inspect and verify that all components are working properly.

B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: Person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and meets these requirements:

1. For door hardware, DHI-certified, Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) or Door Hardware Consultant (DHC).

2. Can provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors. 3. Can inspect and verify components are in working order upon completion of installation. 4. Capable of producing wiring diagrams. 5. Capable of coordinating installation of electrified hardware with Architect and electrical

engineers.



C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer.

D. Fire-Rated Door Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed products tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Intertek Testing Services, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, based on testing at positive pressure and according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C and in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.

E. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with governing accessibility regulations cited in “REFERENCES” article, herein.

G. Keying Conference

1. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including:

a. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion.

b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c. Requirements for key control system. d. Requirements for access control. e. Address for delivery of keys.

H. Pre-installation Conference

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for electrified door hardware. 4. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.

I. Coordination Conferences:

1. Installation Coordination Conference: Prior to hardware installation, schedule and hold meeting to review questions or concerns related to proper installation and adjustment of door hardware.

2. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference: Prior to ordering electrified hardware, schedule and hold meeting to coordinate door hardware with security, electrical, doors and frames, and other related suppliers.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.



1. Deliver each article of hardware in manufacturer’s original packaging.

C. Project Conditions:

1. Maintain manufacturer-recommended environmental conditions throughout storage and installation periods.

2. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project. Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.

D. Protection and Damage:

1. Promptly replace products damaged during shipping. 2. Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Correct, replace or

repair products damaged during Work. 3. Protect products against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical

agent.

E. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete.

B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory or shop prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant.

D. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.

E. Existing Openings: Where existing doors, frames and/or hardware are to remain, field verify existing functions, conditions and preparations and coordinate to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Beginning from date of Substantial Completion, for durations indicated.

a. Closers: 25 years.

b. Automatic Operators: 2 years.

c. Exit Devices: 1) Mechanical: 3 years. 2) Electrified: 1 year.



d. Locksets: 1) Mechanical: 10 years. 2) Electrified: 1 year.

e. Continuous Hinges: Lifetime warranty.

f. Key Blanks: Lifetime

2. Warranty does not cover damage or faulty operation due to improper installation, improper use or abuse.

1.09 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Tools: Furnish complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approval of manufacturers and/or products other than those listed as “Scheduled Manufacturer” or “Acceptable Manufacturers” in the individual article for the product category shall be in accordance with QUALITY ASSURANCE article, herein.

B. Approval of products from manufacturers indicated in “Acceptable Manufacturers” is contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all requirements of scheduled manufacturer’s product.

C. Where specified hardware is not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect's approval.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Fasteners

1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation.

2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work including prepared for paint surfaces to receive painted finish.

3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units exposed when door is closed except when no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless thru-bolts are required to fasten hardware securely. Review door specification and advise Architect if thru-bolts are required.

4. Install hardware with fasteners provided by hardware manufacturer.

B. Modification and Preparation of Existing Doors: Where existing door hardware is indicated to be removed and reinstalled.



1. Provide necessary fillers, Dutchmen, reinforcements, and fasteners, compatible with existing materials, as required for mounting new opening hardware and to cover existing door and frame preparations.

2. Use materials which match materials of adjacent modified areas. 3. When modifying existing fire-rated openings, provide materials permitted by NFPA 80 as

required to maintain fire-rating.

C. Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates and other devices necessary for hardware installation.

1. Where fasteners are exposed to view: Finish to match adjacent door hardware material.

D. Cable and Connectors: Hardwired Electronic Access Control Lockset and Exit Device Trim:

1. Data: 24AWG, 4 conductor shielded, Belden 9843, 9841 or comparable. 2. DC Power: 18 AWG, 2 conductor, Belden 8760 or comparable. 3. Provide type of data and DC power cabling required by access control device

manufacturer for this installation. 4. Where scheduled in the hardware sets, provide each item of electrified hardware and

wire harnesses with sufficient number and wire gauge with standardized Molex plug connectors to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide Molex connectors that plug directly into connectors from harnesses, electric locking and power transfer devices. Provide through-door wire harness for each electrified locking device installed in a door and wire harness for each electrified hinge, electrified continuous hinge, electrified pivot, and electric power transfer for connection to power supplies.

2.03 HINGES

A. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Ives 5BB series. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Hager BB series, McKinney TA/T4A series,

Stanley FBB Series.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.1. 2. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, up to and including 36 inches (914 mm) wide:

a. Exterior: Standard weight, bronze or stainless steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high b. Interior: Standard weight, steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high

3. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors over 36 inches (914 mm) wide:

a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high

4. 2 inches or thicker doors:

a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze or stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high

5. Provide three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height, and one additional hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height.

6. Where new hinges are specified for existing doors or existing frames, provide new hinges of identical size to hinge preparation present in existing door or existing frame.



7. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:

a. Steel Hinges: Steel pins b. Non-Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins c. Out-Swinging Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins d. Out-Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non-removable pins e. Interior Non-lockable Doors: Non-rising pins

8. Width of hinges: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) at 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, and 5 inches (127 mm) at 2 inches (51 mm) or thicker doors. Adjust hinge width as required for door, frame, and wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening.

2.04 CONTINUOUS HINGES

A. Aluminum Geared

1. Manufacturers:

a. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. b. Acceptable Manufacturers: Select, Stanley.

2. Requirements:

a. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.26, Grade 1.

b. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges, where specified in the hardware sets, fabricated from 6063-T6 aluminum.

c. Provide split nylon bearings at each hinge knuckle for quiet, smooth, self-lubricating operation.

d. Provide hinges capable of supporting door weights up to 450 pounds, and successfully tested for 1,500,000 cycles.

e. On fire-rated doors, provide aluminum geared continuous hinges that are classified for use on rated doors by testing agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.

f. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges with electrified option scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate electric function of specified hardware.

g. Install hinges with fasteners supplied by manufacturer. h. Provide hinges 1 inch (25 mm) shorter in length than nominal height of door, unless

otherwise noted or door details require shorter length and with symmetrical hole pattern.

2.05 ELECTRIC POWER TRANSFER

A. Manufacturers:

a. Scheduled Manufacturer: Von Duprin EPT-10. b. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABH PT1000, Securitron CEPT-10.

B. Provide power transfer with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with number and gage of wires sufficient to accommodate electric function of specified hardware.

C. Locate electric power transfer per manufacturer’s template and UL requirements, unless interference with operation of door or other hardware items.



2.06 CYLINDRICAL LOCKS – GRADE 1


1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Schlage ND series. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Corbin-Russwin CL3100 series.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide cylindrical locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1, and UL Listed for 3 hour fire doors.

2. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 3. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset, unless noted otherwise, with

1/2 inch latch throw. Provide proper latch throw for UL listing at pairs. 4. Provide locksets with separate anti-rotation thru-bolts, and no exposed screws. 5. Provide independently operating levers with two external return spring cassettes mounted

under roses to prevent lever sag. 6. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 7. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. 8. Lever Trim: Solid cast levers without plastic inserts and wrought roses on both sides.

a. Lever Design: Schlage RHO.

2.07 EXIT DEVICES


1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Von Duprin 98/35A series.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 and UL listed for Panic Exit or Fire Exit Hardware.

2. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 3. Provide touchpad type exit devices, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or

aluminum, plated to standard architectural finishes to match balance of door hardware. 4. Touchpad must extend a minimum of one half of door width. No plastic inserts are

allowed in touchpads. 5. Provide exit devices with deadlatching feature for security and for future addition of alarm

kits and/or other electrified requirements. 6. Provide flush end caps for exit devices. 7. Provide exit devices with manufacturer’s approved strikes. 8. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Install exit devices at height

recommended by exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and approved by Architect.

9. Mount mechanism case flush on face of doors, or provide spacers to fill gaps behind devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off face of door, provide glass bead kits.

10. Provide cylinder or hex-key dogging as specified at non fire-rated openings. 11. Removable Mullions: 2 inches (51 mm) x 3 inches (76 mm) steel tube. Where scheduled

as keyed removable mullion, provide type that can be removed by use of a keyed cylinder, which is self-locking when re-installed.

12. Provide factory drilled weep holes for exit devices used in full exterior application, highly corrosive areas, and where noted in hardware sets.

13. Provide electrified options as scheduled.



14. Top latch mounting: double or single tab mount for steel doors, face mount for aluminum doors eliminating requirement of tabs, and double tab mount for wood doors.

15. Provide exit devices with optional trim designs to match other lever and pull designs used on the project.

2.08 POWER SUPPLIES


1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Schlage/Von Duprin PS900 series.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide power supplies approved by manufacturer of supplied electrified hardware. 2. Provide appropriate quantity of power supplies necessary for proper operation of

electrified locking components as recommended by manufacturer of electrified locking components with consideration for each electrified component using power supply, location of power supply, and approved wiring diagrams. Locate power supplies as directed by Architect.

3. Provide regulated and filtered 24 VDC power supply, and UL class 2 listed. 4. Provide power supplies with the following features:

a. 12/24 VDC Output, field selectable. b. Class 2 Rated power limited output. c. Universal 120-240 VAC input. d. Low voltage DC, regulated and filtered. e. Polarized connector for distribution boards. f. Fused primary input. g. AC input and DC output monitoring circuit w/LED indicators. h. Cover mounted AC Input indication. i. Tested and certified to meet UL294. j. NEMA 1 enclosure. k. Hinged cover w/lock down screws. l. High voltage protective cover.

2.09 CYLINDERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Corbin FSIC

B. Requirements:

1. Provide interchangeable cylinders/cores to match Owner’s existing key system, compliant with ANSI/BHMA A156.5; latest revision; cylinder face finished to match lockset, manufacturer’s series as indicated. Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

2. Replaceable Construction Cores.

a. Provide temporary construction cores replaceable by permanent cores, furnished in accordance with the following requirements. 1) 3 construction control keys 2) 12 construction change (day) keys.



b. Owner or Owner’s Representative will replace temporary construction cores with permanent cores.

2.10 KEYING

A. Provide cylinders/cores keyed into Owner’s existing factory registered keying system.

1. Comply with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide permanent cylinders/cores keyed by the manufacturer according to the following key system.

a. Master Keying system as directed by the Owner.

2. Forward bitting list and keys separately from cylinders, by means as directed by Owner. Failure to comply with forwarding requirements will be cause for replacement of cylinders/cores involved at no additional cost to Owner.

3. Provide keys with the following features:

a. Material: Nickel silver; minimum thickness of .107-inch (2.3mm) b. Patent Protection: Keys and blanks protected by one or more utility patent(s) c. .

4. Identification:

a. Mark permanent cylinders/cores and keys with applicable blind code per DHI publication “Keying Systems and Nomenclature” for identification. Do not provide blind code marks with actual key cuts.

b. Identification stamping provisions must be approved by the Architect and Owner. c. Stamp cylinders/cores and keys with Owner’s unique key system facility code as

established by the manufacturer; key symbol and embossed or stamped with “DO NOT DUPLICATE” along with the “PATENTED” or patent number to enforce the patent protection.

d. Failure to comply with stamping requirements will be cause for replacement of keys involved at no additional cost to Owner.

e. Forward permanent cylinders/cores to Owner, separately from keys, by means as directed by Owner.

5. Quantity: Furnish in the following quantities.

a. Change (Day) Keys: 3 per cylinder/core. b. Permanent Control Keys: 3. c. Master Keys: 6.

2.11 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Telkee. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: HPC, Lund.

B. Requirements:



1. Provide key control system, including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150% of number of locks required for Project.

a. Provide complete cross index system set up by hardware supplier, and place keys on markers and hooks in cabinet as determined by final key schedule.

b. Provide hinged-panel type cabinet for wall mounting.

2.12 DOOR CLOSERS


1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: LCN 4050 series. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Falcon SC70A series, Norton 7500 series

B. Requirements:

1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. ISO 9000 certify closers. Stamp units with date of manufacture code.

2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with cast aluminum cylinder.

3. Closer Body: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter with 11/16 inch (17 mm) diameter heat-treated pinion journal and full complement bearings.

4. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and all weather requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F.

5. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards.

6. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves, with separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and back check.

7. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted. 8. Provide stick on templates, special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or

adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting.

2.13 DOOR TRIM

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide push plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick and beveled 4 edges. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches (102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit.

2. Provide push bars of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Provide push bars of sufficient length to span from center to center of each stile. Where required, mount back to back with pull.

3. Provide offset pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with push bar.



4. Provide flush pulls as scheduled. Where required, provide back-to-back mounted model. 5. Provide pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required,

mount back to back with push bar. 6. Provide pull plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch (1

mm) thick, beveled 4 edges, and prepped for pull. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches (102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit.

7. Provide wire pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. 8. Provide decorative pulls as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with pull.

2.14 PROTECTION PLATES

A. Manufacturers:


B. Requirements:

1. Provide kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates minimum of 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick, beveled four edges as scheduled. Furnish with sheet metal or wood screws, finished to match plates.

2. Sizes of plates:

a. Kick Plates: 8 inches (254 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs

2.15 OVERHEAD STOPS AND OVERHEAD STOP/HOLDERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturers: Glynn-Johnson.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide heavy duty concealed mounted overhead stop or holder as specified for exterior and interior vestibule single acting doors.

2. Provide heavy duty concealed mounted overhead stop or holder as specified for double acting doors.

3. Provide heavy or medium duty and concealed or surface mounted overhead stop or holder for interior doors as specified. Provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop for interior doors and at any door that swings more than 140 degrees before striking wall, open against equipment, casework, sidelights, and where conditions do not allow wall stop or floor stop presents tripping hazard.

4. Where overhead holders are specified provide friction type at doors without closer and positive type at doors with closer.

2.16 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Manufacturers:




B. Provide door stops at each door leaf:

1. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type locks are used and concave type where cylindrical type locks are used.

2. Where a wall stop cannot be used, provide universal floor stops for low or high rise options.

3. Where wall or floor stop cannot be used, provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop.

2.17 THRESHOLDS, SEALS, DOOR SWEEPS, AUTOMATIC DOOR BOTTOMS, AND GASKETING

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Zero International. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: National Guard, Reese.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide thresholds, weather-stripping (including door sweeps, seals, and astragals) and gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural details. Match finish of other items.

2. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

3. Size of thresholds:

a. Saddle Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by jamb width by door width b. Bumper Seal Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by 5 inches (127 mm) wide by door

width

4. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available.

2.18 SILENCERS

A. Manufacturers:


B. Requirements:

1. Provide "push-in" type silencers for hollow metal or wood frames. 2. Provide one silencer per 30 inches (762 mm) of height on each single frame, and two for

each pair frame. 3. Omit where gasketing is specified.

2.19 DOOR POSITION SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Schlage.



B. Requirements:

1. Provide recessed or surface mounted type door position switches as specified. 2. Coordinate door and frame preparations with door and frame suppliers. If switches are

being used with magnetic locking device, provide minimum of 4 inches (102 mm) between switch and magnetic locking device.

2.20 FINISHES

A. Finish: BHMA 626/652 (US26D); except:

1. Hinges at Exterior Doors: BHMA 630 (US32D) 2. Continuous Hinges: BHMA 628 (US28) 3. Push Plates, Pulls, and Push Bars: BHMA 630 (US32D) 4. Protection Plates: BHMA 630 (US32D) 5. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA 630 (US32D) 6. Door Closers: Powder Coat to Match 7. Wall Stops: BHMA 630 (US32D) 8. Latch Protectors: BHMA 630 (US32D) 9. Weatherstripping: Clear Anodized Aluminum 10. Thresholds: Mill Finish Aluminum

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to installation of hardware, examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Field verify existing doors and frames receiving new hardware and existing conditions receiving new openings. Verify that new hardware is compatible with existing door and frame preparation and existing conditions.

C. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following, unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for

Wood Flush Doors."

B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, using only fasteners provided by manufacturer.



C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Protect all installed hardware during painting.

D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

F. Install operating parts so they move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance.

G. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than quantity recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

H. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period.

1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying section. 2. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.

I. Wiring: Coordinate with Division 26, ELECTRICAL sections for:

1. Conduit, junction boxes and wire pulls. 2. Connections to and from power supplies to electrified hardware. 3. Connections to fire/smoke alarm system and smoke evacuation system. 4. Connection of wire to door position switches and wire runs to central room or area, as

directed by Architect. 5. Testing and labeling wires with Architect’s opening number.

J. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

K. Door Closers: Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors from corridors. Mount closers so they are not visible in corridors, lobbies and other public spaces unless approved by Architect.

L. Closer/Holders: Mount closer/holders on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors.

M. Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings or in equipment room, or alternate location as directed by Architect.

N. Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

O. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they may impede traffic or present tripping hazard.

P. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

Q. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.



R. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.


A. Engage qualified manufacturer trained representative to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.

1. Representative will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three to six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant must examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors and door hardware.


A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.06 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. Hardware items are referenced in the following hardware. Refer to the above-specifications for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements.

B. Hardware Sets:



Hardware Group No. 01 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA REMOVABLE MULLION KR4954 STAB 689 VON 2 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98-EO 626 VON 1 EA ELEC EXIT DEVICE TRIM CO-100-993R-70-KP-RHO-J 4B

BATTERY OPERATED 626 SCE

1 EA FSIC AS REQUIRED 626 C-R 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 EDA 689 LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 2 EA FLOOR STOP FS436 626 IVE 2 EA SILENCER SR64/65 GRY IVE

Hardware Group No. 02 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 2 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD EPT 628 IVE 2 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON 689 VON 1 EA REMOVABLE MULLION KR4954 STAB 689 VON 1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-LC-QEL-98-EO-CON 24 VDC 626 VON 1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-LC-QEL-98-NL-OP-110MD-

CON 24 VDC 626 VON

2 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 C-R 2 EA FSIC AS REQUIRED 626 C-R 2 EA LONG DOOR PULL 9264 72" A 630-

316 IVE

1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 9563 STD2 HL/D MS AS REQ (120/240 VAC) (PUSH SIDE MOUNT)

ANCLR LCN

2 EA ACTUATOR, WALL MOUNT

8310-853T 630 LCN

2 EA FLUSH MOUNT BOX 8310-867F 689 LCN 1 EA SEALS BY DOOR SUPPLIER BYO 1 EA MULLION SEAL 8780NBK PSA BK ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL A ZER 2 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-LENGTH TO SUIT SCH 2 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-6W SCH 1 EA KEY SWITCH 650 SERIES AS REQUIRED 630 SCE 2 EA DOOR CONTACT 7764 24 VDC 628 SCE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-2RS 120/240 VAC LGR SCE

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION: IMMEDIATE EGRESS ALWAYS ALLOWED. EXIT DEVICES CAN BE ELECTRICALLY DOGGED DOWN FOR DOOR TO OPERATE AS PUSH/PULL. DOOR CAN BE MANUALLY PULLED OPEN OR AUTOMATICALLY OPERATED BY PUSHING ACTUATOR WHICH SIGNALS AUTOMATIC OPERATOR TO OPEN DOOR. INTERIOR ACTUATOR TO SIGNAL EXIT DEVICE TO RETRACT LATCHBOLT AND AUTOMATIC OPERATOR TO OPEN DOOR. LOCATE ACTUATORS AS DIRECTED BY ARCHITECT. REQUEST TO EXIT AND DOOR CONTACT CONNECTED TO BUILDING'S SECURITY SYSTEM. KEY SWITCH ENABLES/DISABLES EXTERIOR ACTUATOR.



Hardware Group No. 03 Provide each PD door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA POCKET DOOR KIT CC-810 COMPLETE KIT 630 KNC 1 EA POCKET DOOR LOCK 2002CPDL-3 S2002T X S2002C 626 ACC 1 EA CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 626 C-R 1 EA FSIC AS REQUIRED 626 C-R

Hardware Group No. 04 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA ELEC OFFICE LOCK CO-100-CY-50-KP-RHO-J 4B


1 EA FSIC AS REQUIRED 626 C-R 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 REG 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 770AA-S AA ZER 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 360AA AA ZER

COORDINATE STC REQUIREMENTS WITH DOOR MANUFACTURER. Hardware Group No. 04A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA ELEC OFFICE LOCK CO-100-CY-50-KP-RHO-J 4B


1 EA FSIC AS REQUIRED 626 C-R 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 770AA-S AA ZER 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 360AA AA ZER 1 EA MOUNTING BRACKET 770SPB ZER

COORDINATE STC REQUIREMENTS WITH DOOR MANUFACTURER. Hardware Group No. 05 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA ELEC OFFICE LOCK CO-100-CY-50-KP-RHO-J 4B


1 EA FSIC AS REQUIRED 626 C-R 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64/65 GRY IVE



Hardware Group No. 05A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA ELEC OFFICE LOCK CO-100-CY-50-KP-RHO-J 4B


1 EA FSIC AS REQUIRED 626 C-R 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 EDA 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64/65 GRY IVE

Hardware Group No. 05B Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA ELEC OFFICE LOCK CO-100-CY-50-KP-RHO-J 4B


1 EA FSIC AS REQUIRED 626 C-R 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 REG 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA FLOOR STOP FS436 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64/65 GRY IVE

Hardware Group No. 06 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA ELEC OFFICE LOCK CO-100-CY-50-KP-RHO-J 4B


1 EA FSIC AS REQUIRED 626 C-R 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64/65 GRY IVE

Hardware Group No. 06A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA ELEC OFFICE LOCK CO-100-CY-50-KP-RHO-J 4B


1 EA FSIC AS REQUIRED 626 C-R 1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY 3 EA SILENCER SR64/65 GRY IVE



Hardware Group No. 07 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA ELEC CLASSROOM LOCK CO-100-CY-70-KP-RHO-J 4B


1 EA FSIC AS REQUIRED 626 C-R 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64/65 GRY IVE

Hardware Group No. 07A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA ELEC CLASSROOM LOCK CO-100-CY-70-KP-RHO-J 4B



Hardware Group No. 07B Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA ELEC CLASSROOM LOCK CO-100-CY-70-KP-RHO-J 4B



Hardware Group No. 07C Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA ELEC CLASSROOM LOCK CO-100-CY-70-KP-RHO-J 4B


1 EA FSIC AS REQUIRED 626 C-R 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL A ZER 3 EA SILENCER SR64/65 GRY IVE



Hardware Group No. 08 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70TD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC AS REQUIRED 626 C-R 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64/65 GRY IVE

Hardware Group No. 08A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70TD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC AS REQUIRED 626 C-R 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 REG 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64/65 GRY IVE

Hardware Group No. 09 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK ND40S RHO 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 REG 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 1" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 360AA AA ZER 1 EA COAT AND HAT HOOK 582 626 IVE

Hardware Group No. 10 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80TD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC AS REQUIRED 626 C-R 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64/65 GRY IVE



Hardware Group No. 10A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80TD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC AS REQUIRED 626 C-R 1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 REG 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64/65 GRY IVE

Hardware Group No. 10B Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80TD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC AS REQUIRED 626 C-R 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA AA ZER 1 EA GASKETING 328AA AA ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8198AA AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL A ZER 1 EA MOUNTING BRACKET 328SPB ZER

END OF SECTION


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1

SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: The Work of this Section includes, but is not limited to the following:

1. Clear tempered glass for typical interior doors, partitions, storefronts, and windows. 2. Insulated, low-e glass for exterior windows and exterior doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to

ASTM C 1036.

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas.

D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust,

moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process. Failure excludes glass breakage and maintenance and cleaning of insulating glass contrary to manufacturer’s written instructions.


A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing

only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,

according to the following requirements: a. Design Loads: As required by the State of New Jersey Building Code. b. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all 4

edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or, whichever is less.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2

1) For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads. 2) For insulating glass.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the

following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

D. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according

to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated, submit manufacturers technical information, installation instructions and performance criteria.

B. Samples: For each glass type, in the form of 12 inch square Samples for glass. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that

products furnished comply with requirements. D. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer

indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials.

E. Product Test Reports: For each of the following types of glazing products:

1. Insulating glass. 2. Glazing sealants.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the referenced standards Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated.

C. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals"

Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products.

1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3

D. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period. 1. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified

according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

2. Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.

F. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant

manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric glazing sealants:

1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation

techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.

2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the

Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions for

corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers.

5. Testing will not be required if elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers submit data based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, glazing materials matching those submitted.

G. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.

1. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2 articles for glazing lites:

a. More than in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that

comply with Category II materials, for lites

b. Less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product

manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual."


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 4

2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units."

3. Authorities having jurisdiction.

I. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least

one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and inspecting agency:

1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.

2. Associated Laboratories, Inc.

J. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups in the location as directed by Architect.

2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

K. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to

prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions

are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below. 1.9 WARRANTY

A. General: Submit warranties to repair or replace defective glass and glazing materials or workmanship for a period of not less than 5 years after date of Substantial Completion, or longer where specified.

B. Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by insulating

glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article. Submit a written warranty agreeing to replace defective insulating glass for a period of 10 years after date of Substantial Completion. Defects include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Failure of insulating glass edge seal as shown by frost, moisture, dust or corrosion

within sealed air space

2. Insulating glass spacer migration.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 5

3. Failure to meet specified performance requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Glass, General: All glass of the same type shall be the manufactured product of one

company. Provide glass types for each application according to the glazing schedule found in part three of this section.

1. Glass Types: Refer to the Drawings for glass products, descriptions, sizes, locations,

patterns, and frames/trim (where applicable).

B. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process. Glass heat treatment should run in one direction as installed in the building. Direction is subject to Architect’s approval.

1. Resulting heat treated glass shall minimize the “roller distortion” or “ripples” resulting

from fabrication. Where noticeable distortions exist, and are acceptable to the Architect, install glass with such distortions running horizontally.

2. Glass within one type of opening shall be produced by the same heat treating

process.

C. Primary Glass Requirements:

1. Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036; Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select).

D. Uncoated Clear Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Condition A (uncoated surfaces),

Type 1 (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), Kind FT (fully tempered).

1. Thickness: 1/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Flat Glass Mirrors: Clear glass, complying with ASTM C 1503; Mirror Select Quality, with

beveled and polished edges.

1. Nominal Thickness: 1/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Hardware: Steel clips, angles supports and fasteners as required for mirror wall units.

F. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Section.

1. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites where safety glass is indicated.

2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for

insulating glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.

3. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 6

4. Insulating glass shall be altitude adjusted with capillary tubes for higher elevations.

5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction complying with the following requirements:

a. Spacer Material: Mill finish. b. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.

c. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction.

6. Thickness: 1 inch, or as indicated on the Drawings. 7. Minimum Insulated Glazing Unit Performance Requirements: SHGC VT U-Factor GL-01: 0.27 0.64 0.24 GL-03: 0.36 0.31 0.28

G. Low-E Coated Glass Products: Clear monolithic glass with a high performance low-

emissivity (low-E) coating for use in an insulating unit:

1. Low-E coating(s) shall be neutral in transmitted and otherwise exhibit the visual and performance characteristics of the products specified herein.

2. Visual quality control acceptance criteria of the coating shall be consistent with

industry guidelines, subject to approval by the Contractor.

3. Basis of Design: 6mm Solarban 70XL (2) on Clear + 6mm Pilkington energy advantage (4) on clear as manufactured by PPG or equivalent. Tested minimum performance requirements are as follows:

2.2 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:

1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864.

2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.

3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.

4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS AND SEALANT BACKING MATERIAL

A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with

other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as

demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 7

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

B. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids

content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800.

C. Silicone Compounds, General: Where indicated provide silicone sealants complying with ASTM C 1193 which are specifically designed and tested for use as structural silicone sealant Secondary seal or weatherseal silicone sealants shall be compatible with the neutral cure structural silicone sealant. Weatherseal shall accommodate a 50 percent increase or decrease of joint width as measured at time of application in accordance with ASTM C 719.

D. Sealant Backing Materials: Preformed foam plastics and synthetic rubbers, compressible,

nongassing, non staining, and compatible with sealants and as recommended by sealant manufacturers. Backing shall be of the sizes and shapes to suit the various conditions and shall be a color different than the sealant color. Backer rods shall be 25 percent wider than the joint width.

1. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of

size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

E. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated

for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or

minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side

walking).

F. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 8

G. Film Backing for Safety Mirrors: Film backing and pressure-sensitive adhesive; both compatible with mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer.

2.5 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that

produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

D. Mirror Edge Treatment: Beveled and polished, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating.

2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes.

E. Film-Backed Safety Mirrors: Apply film backing with adhesive coating over mirror backing

paint as recommended in writing by film-backing manufacturer to produce a surface free of bubbles, blisters, and other imperfections.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep system.

3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.

4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 9

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Provide glazing channel dimensions, to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and

face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing

publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than as follows:

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width.

With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or

gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in

place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression

gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 10

faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.5 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or

bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.6 MIRROR INSTALLATION

A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.

B. Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic, angles, Z-clips, and/or mirror hardware.

Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors.

1. Fasten Clips directly to wall substrate or back-up framing. Locate clips where

indicated and locate so that they are symmetrically placed and evenly spaced.

2. Where required, install mastic as follows:

a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of mirrors and backing material.

b. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a

minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface.

C. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.

D. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.

E. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture

from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface unless required for certification purposes. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 11

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction

operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged

from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.



GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 10 - 1

SECTION 09 21 10 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Abuse-resistant gypsum board; at corridors and common areas. 4. Acoustic insulation in gypsum wallboard assemblies. 5. Non-load-bearing steel framing. 6. Marking and identification for fire- and smoke-partitions.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with Section 07 21 00 – THERMAL INSULATION for installation of metal furring at mineral-board insulation at interior face of building perimeter.


A. Structural Performance: Provide fire stop tracks capable of withstanding deflection within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction

tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure.

B. Marking and Identification for Fire- and Smoke-Partitions: Fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions, smoke barriers, smoke partitions and other walls required to have protected openings or penetrations shall be effectively and permanently identified with signs or stenciling above ceilings. Such identification shall: 1. Be located in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling or attic spaces; and 2. Be repeated at intervals not exceeding 30 feet measured horizontally along the wall or

partition; and 3. Include lettering not less than 0.5 inch in height, incorporating the suggested wording:

"FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," or other wording. 4. Exception: Walls that do not have a removable decorative ceiling allowing access to the

concealed space.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.



C. Drywall Recycling: All new paper-faced gypsum wallboard scrap (cuts from construction but not demolition waste) shall be recycled by Gypsum Recycling America LLC or approved equal.

D. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following:

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each texture finish indicated.

2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.

3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.

1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Regional Materials: Products, including raw materials, to be regionally sourced, extracted, and manufactured within 500 miles of Project Site.

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

C. Recycled Content of Gypsum Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 20 percent.

2.2 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.



1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch-diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching

wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. a. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter.

D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges with depth as required for span and loading and indicated on Drawings.

E. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.

F. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Furring System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.

2.4 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Stud Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0346 inch (20 gage).

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Provide one of the following: 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in

thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip Series. 2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).



C. Fire Stop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness compatible with studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System. 2. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak attached to studs with Fire Trak Slip Clip. 3. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.

D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch.

E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel.

F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch. 2. Depth: 1-1/2 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

H. Resilient Sound Isolation Clips: Provide galvanized steel and resilient material sound-isolation clips, equal to the following: 1. Kinetics Noise Control Co.; IsoMax. 2. PAC International, Inc.; RSIC-1. 3. Pliteq, Inc.; GenieClip.

I. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

J. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

K. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

2.5 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. USG Corporation. 2. Georgia-Pacific (G-P) Gypsum LLC. 3. National Gypsum Company.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch, or as otherwise indicated. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Fire-Resistant Type X: ASTM C 1396. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.



2. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Flexible Type: ASTM C 1396. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness. 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

E. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

F. Abuse-Resistant Type: ASTM C 1629. Manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface indentation and through-penetration (impact resistance) than standard, regular-type and Type X gypsum board. 1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

G. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.6 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. b. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. c. National Gypsum Company; Permabase Cement Board. d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.7 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. Expansion (control) joint. e. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fry Reglet Corp. (Basis-of-Design) b. Gordon, Inc.



c. Pittcon Industries.

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.

3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.

4. Basis-of-Design Shapes: a. Drywall Molding End Closure; Fry Reglet; size as required by partition depth. b. Reveal Base Molding; Fry Reglet; reveal depth and height as indicated. c. Additional shapes as indicated on Drawings.

2.8 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,

use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 2. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-

type, sandable topping compound.

2.9 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate, and compliant with VOC requirements per Section 01 81 13 – SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from

0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by

panel manufacturer.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 2. Thickness: Full thickness of stud cavity.



E. Acoustical Sealant: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. USG Corporation.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. Ohio Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corp.; BA-98. c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.

2.10 IDENTIFICATION LABELS for Fire- and Smoke-Partitions

A. Identification Labels: Vinyl adhesive signs, to comply with applicable local Code. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fire Wall Signs, Inc. b. Safety Supply Warehouse.

2. Text: "FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS"

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in

advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling

runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c.

2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.




A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies, where indicated, and were otherwise required to complete the work. Do not install bracing to bridge double rows of studs forming acoustical separation assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling

plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting

horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger

spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads

within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,

eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts

that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.



F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

3.5 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install studs at a maximum of 16-inch centers.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to

produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on doorframes; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-

rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 6. Curved Partitions:

a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along

arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c.

E. Direct Furring: Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

F. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with

concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.



3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.

3.6 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke

ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

3.7 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest

extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels to minimize end joints. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end

joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

B. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on

walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum,



from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

C. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

D. Curved Surfaces: 1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible,

across curved surface plus 12-inch-long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.

2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches o.c.

3.8 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1, at locations indicated to receive tile, with joints treated to comply with ANSI A108.11.

B. Water-Resistant Backing Board: Install at areas not subject to wetting and elsewhere as indicated with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.9 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.



3.10 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas not exposed to view. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 4: Typical finish unless noted otherwise. 4. Level 5: In occupied areas where markerboard paint is applied to the walls.

a. Apply product in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, to achieve a smooth surface.

b. Per GA 214 with spray-applied skim coat. c. Spray-Applied Skim Coat/Primer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for application

in lieu of joint compound skim coat. d. Basis-of-Design: USG Sheetrock Brand “Tuff-Hide” or comparable product.

E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.11 INSTALLING Identification for Fire- and Smoke-Partitions

A. Marking and Identification for Fire- and Smoke-Partitions: Permanently install as required by Code.

3.12 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or exhibit mold growth. Repair of damaged panels in place is not acceptable. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 1

SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Included: The Work of this Section includes, but is not limited to the following:

1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board wall and shaft wall assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each framing and accessory unit required.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated per ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

1. STC Ratings: As indicated within the Partition Types on the Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Requirements: Provide gypsum board assemblies capable of withstanding following lateral design loadings for maximum heights of partitions without failing. Evidence of failure includes deflections exceeding limits indicated, bending stresses causing studs to break or to distort, and end-reaction shear causing track (runners) to bend or to shear and studs to become crippled. Comply with requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction and recommendations of SA923 of United States Gypsum Company for loading performance criteria.

1. Lateral Loading:

a. Typical Conditions: 5 psf.

2. Deflection Limits, Painted Assemblies: 1/240 of partition height.

3. Deflection Limits for framed Tile and Other Hard Finish Surfaces: 1/360 of partition height.

2.2 STEEL FRAMING FOR GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal.



2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G40, hot-dip galvanized.

B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Minimum 0.0336 inch (22 gauge) thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Depth: As indicated on the Drawings.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Provide one of the following:

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

4. Unless otherwise required by project requirements, allow for a minimum of 1 inch movement.

D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate (for fixture attachments): Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0359 inch (20 gauge) thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, unless otherwise indicated, with minimum 1/2-inch wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on the Drawings.

2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch thick, galvanized steel.

F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0359 inch (20 gauge) thickness, unless otherwise indicated..

2. Depth: As indicated.

G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.

1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

H. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, unless otherwise indicated, with minimum 1/2-inch wide flanges.



1. Depth: As required to comply with project performance requirements.

2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel thickness of 0.0312 inch.

3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch diameter wire.

I. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.030 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.3 SHAFT WALL FRAMING

A. As per Section 092116.23 - Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies. 2.4 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Anchors: Capable of sustaining a load equal to 5 times that imposed as determined by ASTM E 488.

a. Type: Cast-in-place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete forms.

2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Capable of sustaining, a load equal to 10 times that imposed as determined by ASTM E 1190.

C. Hangers: Provide one of the following as indicated and required by Building Code, to suit project application:

1. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.

2. Hanger Rods: 1/4-inch diameter; mild steel, zinc coated.

3. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated; or as shown on the Drawings.

D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.035 inch and minimum 1/2-inch wide flanges, with ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.

1. Depth: As required to comply with project performance requirements.

2. Clips for attachment of hangers to carrying channels shall comply with seismic design requirements.

E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0209 inch (25 gauge) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide heavier gauge metal.



2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0359-inch (20 gauge) thickness. b. Depth: As indicated.

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0359-inch (20 gauge) thickness.

4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.

a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

F. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following to suit project application, as approved by the Architect:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Drywall Grid Systems.

b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640/660 Drywall Ceiling Suspension, 650/670 Fire Rated Drywall Ceiling Suspension, Radius Drywall Ceiling Suspension, and SpanFast Drywall Ceiling Suspension for Corridors.

c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System and Wall-to-Wall Drywall Suspension System.

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

1. Provide additional bracing and support for railings, pocket doors and hardware, and other items to be supported by framing assemblies.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. Provide cross bracing at every stud vertically, as shown on the Drawings.



D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

1. Stud Spacing: 16 o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

D. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to wood blocking and framing.

2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

E. Z-Furring Members:

1. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

2. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.



F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.3 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacing indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck or permanent metal. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms.

4. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.

5. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.



TILING 09 30 00 - 1

SECTION 09 30 00 TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following:

1. Floor tile. 2. Wall tile. 3. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations. 4. Waterproofing and crack-suppression membrane for thin-set tile installations. 5. Elastomeric sealants for expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile

surfaces. 6. Surface preparation for tile and accessories, inclusive of self-leveling underlayment.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

B. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.


A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. 2. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6. 3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

C. Samples for Verification: 1. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type and composition of tile and for each

color and finish required, at least 12 inches square and mounted on rigid panel. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed work.

2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths. 4. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product.


TILING 09 30 00 - 2


A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type and color or finish from one source or producer. 1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and

physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product: 1. Stone thresholds. 2. Waterproofing. 3. Joint sealants. 4. Metal edge strips.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01.

E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Conduct in-place layout meeting with Owner and Architect for each type of floor installation.

2. Build mockup of each type of wall and floor tile installation. Minimum Size; 4 by 8 feet.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Store liquid additives in unopened containers and protected from freezing.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.


TILING 09 30 00 - 3

2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in Part 1 "Definitions" Article.

3. Tile Dimensional Tolerance: 1/64 inch for variation in plane or in squareness. 4. Large Format Tiles are defined as more than 8 inches in any nominal dimension.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Tile Trim Units: Matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. Provide shapes selected from manufacturer's standard shapes.

F. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; extruded aluminum exposed-edge material, with clear anodized satin finish. 1. Available Manufacturer: Schluter Systems.

G. Slate Thresholds: complying with ASTM C 629, Classification II, Interior. Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Varieties and Cut: As selected by Architect. 2. Finish: Honed, gauged back. 3. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit

height of bevel to 1/2 inch or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold. 4. Threshold to meet minimum project accessibility guidelines.

H. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Waterproofing and Crack Suppression Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber. 1. Custom Building Products; 9240 Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane with fabric

reinforcing. 2. LATICRETE International Inc.; Laticrete Hydroban Waterproof Membrane with fabric

reinforcing. 3. MAPEI Corporation; Aqua Defense with fabric reinforcing. 4. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; S-9000 with fabric reinforcing.

I. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

J. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Custom Building Products. d. Laticrete International, Inc. e. MAPEI Corporation. f. Summitville Tiles, Inc.


TILING 09 30 00 - 4

g. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic

additive to which only water must be added at Project site. 3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging

mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

K. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7. 1. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition

to prepackaged dry-grout mix. a. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and narrower. b. Sanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and wider.

L. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

M. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout.

2.2 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS.

B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints, unless otherwise indicated.

C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 1. Available Products:

a. Custom Building Products; 100 Silicone Caulk. b. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. c. GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700. d. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. e. Tremco, Inc.; Tremsil 600 White.

D. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 1. Available Products:

a. Bostik; Chem-Calk 550. b. Tremco, Inc.; Vulkem 245. c. Pecora Corporation; NR-200 Urexpan. d. Tremco, Inc.; THC-900.

2.3 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.


TILING 09 30 00 - 5

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. The Owner’s Testing Agent will examine substrates and perform substrate alkalinity and adhesion testing; moisture testing; and relative humidity testing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing

compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by flooring manufacturer.

Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within a range on pH scale not less than 5 or more than 9 pH, or as otherwise required in writing by manufacturer of flooring system.

3. Moisture Vapor Emission Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation

only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours, or as otherwise required in writing by manufacturer of flooring.

4. Relative Humidity Testing: a. Perform relative humidity test, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after

substrates have a maximum relative humidity level of 75 percent, or as otherwise required in writing by manufacturer of flooring.

5. Perform tests indicated above and as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

B. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.

C. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. 1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound

according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.

D. Level concrete substrate with self-leveling concrete floor topping, installed in accordance with requirements of Section 03 53 00 - CONCRETE TOPPINGS.


TILING 09 30 00 - 6

E. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.


A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in pattern indicated by Architect. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area to avoid tiles cut to less than half-size. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within

tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 - JOINT

SEALANTS.

H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards: 1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland cement; and

latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.

3.4 WATERPROOFING AND CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.

B. Install crack-suppression membrane to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.

C. Do not install tile over waterproofing until membrane has cured and been inspected to determine that it is watertight.


TILING 09 30 00 - 7

3.5 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. 1. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation

standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.

B. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated; lap waterproofing membrane and provide continuous sealant bead. . 1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would

otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.

C. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.

3.6 WALL TILE INSTALLATION

A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting-bed standards. 1. Large Format Wall Tile Installation: Comply with tile manufacturer’s recommendations for

setting beds and grouts. a. Substrate Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/8 in. in 10 ft. and 1/16 in. in 2 ft.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains.

B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.

C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. After seven days, cover areas subject to construction traffic with heavy cardboard.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.

3.8 TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. This schedule refers to Tile Installation Methods specified in the TCNA Manual. Refer to Finish Schedule for Tile Product Types.

END OF SECTION


ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 00 - 1

SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Acoustical ceiling tiles and panels. 2. Suspension systems, grid systems and ceiling hangers. 3. Acoustical sealant at edge moldings at acoustical ceilings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Ceiling suspension members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place

anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.

3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot.

C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Tile and Panel: Set of 6 inch square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and

texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12 inch long

Samples of each type, finish, and color.

D. Asbestos Certification: Manufacturer's written certification that acoustical ceiling products contain no asbestos (0.0000%). Product labels indicating that it is the user's responsibility to test the products for asbestos are unacceptable and sufficient cause for rejection of the product on site.

E. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Tiles and Panels: Obtain each type through one source from a single

manufacturer. 2. Suspension Systems: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Seismic Performance: 1. Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according

to ASCE/SEI 7.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical tile and panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements:



1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical tile and panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire

Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting

agency. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical tiles and panels complying with

ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:

D. Mockups: Build mockups of each ceiling type (25 sf each) to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.



A. Deliver acoustical tiles and panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.




2. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for fabricating interior architectural woodwork to not deteriorate in the interior environment expected during occupancy, which is standard for the majority of new buildings designed and constructed . a. Submission of bid shall represent acceptance of these terms. b. Contrary manufacturer’s and AWI disclaimers shall not apply if more restrictive


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, provide one of the following products for each type indicated.

B. ACT-1: Ceiling Tile 1. Manufacturer and Series:

a. Certainteed Ceilings, Sand Narrow reveal 2. Panel Sizes: 24 inches by 24 inches, and 3/4 inches deep. 3. Panel Mounting: Flat T edge for 9/16 inch wide grid. 4. Light Reflectance Value: Not less than 0.90. 5. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.70. 6. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 35. 7. Color: White. 8. Grid Material: Painted steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. 1. Manufacturer: USG, Armstrong, Certainteed Ceilings, or Chicago Metallic. 2. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system unless otherwise indicated. 3. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type. 4. Face Design: Flat, flush. 5. Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet. 6. Color: White, prefinished. 7. Grid Face Width: As specified with ACT type.

B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated

and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency; zinc-plated for Class SC1 service unless otherwise required.

2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,

Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 diameter wire.

D. Hold-Down Clips: At vestibules and areas subject to wind uplift, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches on all cross tees.



3.2 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms

reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. Extend reveal edge all around room where edge is indicated or required to accommodate tile layout indicated.

2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.

3. For narrow-face suspension systems, provide suspension system and manufacturer's standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners.

B. Suspension Trim: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Axiom. 2. CertainTeed Ceilings; Approved equal. 3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Compasso.

3.3 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant.

3.4 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.


3.5 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.6 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling

plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces

by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger

spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in



form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by the most restrictive requirements of referenced standards and publications and as specified herein.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 7. Space hangers not more than 48 o.c. along each member supported directly from

hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.

C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of

moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not

more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. Paint cut edges of tiles remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed

panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical tiles and panels manufacturer.

2. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION


RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19 - 1

SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: The Work of this Section includes:

1. Luxury vinyl tile (LVT).

2. Resilient bases and edge strips.

3. Installation accessories... 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include material descriptions, dimensions of in-dividual components and profiles, installation instructions, and finish requirements for resilient flooring.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location and extent of resilient flooring, clearly

indicating directions, locations, and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in cabinets and locations where cut-outs are required in resilient tile. Show instal-lation details, starting points, transitions, and other special conditions.

C. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following samples of each type, color, and pattern

of resilient flooring required, showing full-range of color and pattern variations.

1. Full size vinyl composition floor tiles.

2. 12" long sections of resilient base. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s certificates showing compliance with performance requirements for each type of resilient flooring from manufacturer.

B. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s maintenance instructions or recommendations for re-

silient flooring to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are compe-tent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation indicated.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to

ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.




A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.

3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by

manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation, and for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

D. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective cover-ing for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pat-

tern of floor tile installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Luxury Vinyl Tile Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as sched-uled on the drawings Finish Schedule, from the following manufacturer:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc, or approved equal.

B. Base Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the follow-

ing:

1. Johnsonite (Tarkett Group).

2. Roppe Corporation. 3. Or approved equal.

2.2 LUXURY VINYL TILE FLOORING



A. Commercial Luxury Flooring: Luxury vinyl tile, complying with ASTM F 1066, Class 1 (solid-color tile) or Class 2 (through-pattern tile) or ASTM F 1303, Class 3 (printed film vinyl tile); as indicated by selected product designation.

2.3 BASE

A. Base Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). 1. Group: I (solid, homogene-ous).

a. Style A, Straight in areas with carpet. b. Style B, Cove in areas with resilient flooring and concrete flooring.

B. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.

C. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise as indicated on Drawings.

D. Length: 50-foot roll length.

E. Colors: As indicated on drawings Finish Schedule.

2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based or blend-ed hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications in-dicated.

B. Primer/ Sealer, where required by project application: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide product as recommended by tile manufacturer, or equal as approved by the Architect:

C. Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant type recommended by each product manufacturer to suit resilient flooring systems and substrate conditions indicated.

D. Adhesive for Luxury Vinyl Tile (LVT): Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the follow-

ing or equal as approved by the Architect:

1. Product as recommended by tile manufacturer.

E. Reducer Strips: 1/8-inch-thick, homogeneous rubber composition.

F. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by flooring manufac-turer.


A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum mois ture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other

Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates per manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient prod-ucts.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare per ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manu-facturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with

installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only af-ter substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound

and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before in-

stallation. 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles in pattern, as indicated on the drawings.

C. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures

including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by

repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between piec-



es of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to

produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, tele-graphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

3.4 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of ad-

jacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continu-ous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recom-

mended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

H. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.

3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before

applying liquid floor polish. Apply one or two coats, as recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.



TILE CARPETING 09 68 10 - 1

SECTION 09 68 10 TILE CARPETING

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1 Modular carpet tile. 2 Carpet accessories. 3 Substrate preparation for carpet and accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate required.

C. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are

required in carpet. 2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 6. Pile direction. 7. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 8. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 9. Transition details to other flooring materials.

D. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample

with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch-long Samples.

E. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

F. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1 Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2 Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and



inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Mockups: Before installing carpet tile, build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of Substantial

Completion.


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7, "Site Conditions."

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Where equipment or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design (CPT): as per finish plans

2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Use as needed to meet floor levelness and flatness



criteria as prescribed by the carpet manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.

1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives with VOC content not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24).

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. The Owner’s testing agent will examine substrates and perform substrate alkalinity and adhesion testing; moisture testing; and relative humidity testing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

C. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1 Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that

may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2 Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by flooring manufacturers. Proceed with

installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within a range on pH scale not less than 5 or more than 9 pH, or as otherwise required in writing by manufacturer of flooring system.

3. Moisture Vapor Emission Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after

substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours, or as otherwise required in writing by manufacturer of flooring.

4. Relative Humidity Testing: a. Perform relative humidity test, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have

a maximum relative humidity level of 75 percent, or as otherwise required in writing by manufacturer of flooring.

5. Perform tests indicated above and as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.



C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.

D. Provide concrete substrates for sheet carpet floors that comply with referenced standards. 1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-

setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by sheet carpet manufacturer.

2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.

E. Level concrete substrate with self-leveling concrete floor topping, installed in accordance with requirements of Section 03 53 00 - CONCRETE TOPPINGS.

G. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill

cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates.

H. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction, lay of pile, and tile staggering pattern.

C. Installation Method: Partial glue down; install periodic tiles with releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive. D. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1 Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by

carpet tile manufacturer. 2 Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3 Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations."



C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.


WALL COVERINGS 09 72 00 - 1


SECTION 09 72 00 WALL COVERINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Work of this Section includes:

1. Digitally Printed Protective wall covering


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated including adhesives to be used. Include data

on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics. Include manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type.

1. Provide panel maps showing field verified dimensions with layout of panel widths and locations. Indicate pattern placement, seams and termination points.

C. Samples: Full width by 36-inch- long section of wall covering.

1. Sample from same print run or dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified treatments

paint applied. Show complete pattern repeat. Mark top and face of fabric. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Schedule: For wall coverings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for wall covering.

D. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals.

E. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Wall-Covering Materials: For each type, full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount

installed but not less than 25 linear feet. Of each color and pattern.

2. Package and label each roll by manufacturer, color and pattern, and destination room number




A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied with identical adhesives to substrates per test method indicated below by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Class A, per ASTM E 84:

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2. Fire-Growth Contribution: Textile wall coverings tested per NFPA 265 corner test or

NFPA 286 corner test and complying with test protocol and criteria in the 2015 IBC or UL 723 and be protected by automatic sprinkler system.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this

section with minimum 5 years of documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least 5 years of documented experience.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and

weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and the HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels for a period of 24 hours before installation and maintained for the remainder of the construction period.

B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a permanent level of lighting is provided on the

surfaces to receive wall covering.

C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing.

D. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature

ranges required by the adhesive covering product manufacturer. 1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace wall covering that fails in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period:

1. Wear Lifetime Limited 2. Stain Lifetime Limited 3. Colorfastness Lifetime Limited



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL COVERING

A. General Requirements:

1. Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from same print run or dye lot.

2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: No visible staining or discoloration and no damage to

surface texture when tested in accordance with ASTM D1308

B. Digital Printed Protective Wall Covering (WC1):

1. Basis-of-Design, Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. As per finish schedule

2. Product Characteristics: a. Description: High Impact Thermoplastic. b. Panel Size: up to 48” x 120” c. Thickness: .060” d. Texture: Mesa-S e. Abrasion Resistance: Hoffman Scratch Test 500 grams <=0.01% f. Impact resistance: ASTM D-5420 >=150 g. Stain Resistance: ASTM D-1308: No permeant effect h. Chemical Resistance: ASTM D-1308 No Effect i. Fire Resistance: Class A

1) Flame Spread: 25 2) Smoke Developed: 400

3. Adhesive and primer: Trowel on type recommended in writing by wall covering

manufacturer to suit application to substrate a. Basis of Design Formulated Solutions XT-2000+ Adhesive and primer or approved

equal

4. Termination Trim: Manufacturer standard extruded Aluminum accessory moldings or approved equal a. clear anodized satin finish b. Supply in maximum lengths to minimize joints c. Provide inside corner and out corner moldings d. Provide J-Molding at all exposed edges

5. Caulk: furnish caulk by wall covering manufacturer in clear color

2.2 ACCESSORIES, GENERAL

A. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.




A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with each manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil,

grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers.

C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.

1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete

masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity. Prime with primer

as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.

3. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.

4. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding with primer recommended by wall covering manufacturer.

D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finish with

fine sandpaper.

E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items.

F. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas

not less than 24 hours before installation.

G. Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall-covering manufacturer. Form smooth wrinkle-free surface for finished installation. Do not begin wall-covering installation until wall liner has dried.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to

products and applications indicated except where more stringent requirements apply.



B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and corners.

C. Install strips in same order as cut from roll.

D. Install reversing every other strip.

E. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible

shrinkage.

F. Match pattern 72 inches above the finish floor.

G. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 3 inches from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. No horizontal seams are permitted.

H. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.

I. Overlap seams dimension as recommended by wall covering manufacturer and double cut to

provide final finish without any overlay or spacing between strips. J. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure, apply seam

seal as recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING

A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.

B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.

C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned.

D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims,

and similar items.



PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 - 1

SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following:

1. Field painting of exposed interior items and surfaces. 2. Field painting of exposed exterior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation for painting.

1.2 DEFINITIONS AND EXTENT

A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at

an 85-degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when

measured at a 60-degree meter. 3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when

measured at a 60-degree meter. 4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at

a 60-degree meter.

B. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to

shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

C. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will provide custom colors and finishes to be matched. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed surfaces in other than utility spaces, including

but not limited to mechanical and electrical equipment that does not have a factory-applied final finish.

2. In existing building, paint surfaces where work has occurred, matching existing color and sheen unless otherwise indicated. Paint entire room, with surface preparation so that patching is not discernable.

D. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:

a. Architectural woodwork. b. Acoustical wall panels. c. Toilet enclosures. d. Lockers. e. Elevator entrance doors and frames. f. Elevator equipment. g. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. h. Light fixtures.

2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces:



a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Ceiling plenums. d. Pipe spaces. e. Duct shafts. f. Elevator shafts.

3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper and copper alloys. e. Bronze and brass.

4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts.

5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.

1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. a. Disclose material ingredients by name and Chemical Abstract Service (CAS)

Registry Number. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis

and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.

B. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and

primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.

2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application.

3. Submit two eight inch by 12 inch Samples for each type of finish coating for Architect's review of color and texture only.

C. Qualification Data: For Applicator.


A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.



C. Mockups: Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals. 1. Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for

application of each type of coating and substrate. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. b. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. a. After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate

coating systems of a similar nature. 3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste

daily.


A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F.

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F.

C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are

enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: Furnish four unopened gallons of each type of paint and coating work, in color and

gloss as used for the Project.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work are listed in the Finish Schedule.

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors

or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

C. Paint Color Types: as per finish schedule

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected

and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions

within a particular area.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over

substrates primed by others. Provide sealers or barrier coats and other means recommended by manufacturer, and conduct field testing.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using

workers skilled in the trades involved, and remove protection.

B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.



1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions and technical bulletins for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and

mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate

tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.

3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and remove dust. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white

shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler in multiple coats to overcome shrinkage. Sand smooth when dried.

b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including doors, and cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling not having a factory-applied finish.

c. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall

construction occurs on back side. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of

varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop

coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.

a. Exterior Exposed Steel: Clean steel surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning. Abrasive blast cleaned surfaces shall exhibit a uniform, angular profile of 1.5-3.0 mils. Prime cleaned surfaces within 8 hours and prior to surface rusting.

b. Interior Exposed Steel, in Humid Environments: Clean steel surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning. Abrasive blast cleaned surfaces shall exhibit a uniform, angular profile of 1.5-3.0 mils. Prime cleaned surfaces within 8 hours and prior to surface rusting.

c. Interior Exposed Steel, in Dry Environments: Clean steel surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP2 or SP3 Hand or Power Tool Cleaning.

5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP16 Brush off Blast Cleaning of Galvanized Steel and NonFerrous Metals, to achieve a minimum 1 mil anchor profile.



D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign

materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required

during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions

detrimental to formation of a durable and consistent paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,

grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.

5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture, and non-solid or glazed components, the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles.

7. Paint backsides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

8. Finish exterior doors and doors in wet areas on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.

9. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.

2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional

coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.



C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate

size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by

manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by

manufacturer for material and texture required.

D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in occupied spaces.

F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Uninsulated metal piping. 2. Uninsulated plastic piping. 3. Pipe hangers and supports. 4. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 5. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and

outlets. 6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket

material. 7. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.

G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Panelboards. 2. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.

H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.

I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats.

L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.




A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. The Owner may engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample paint material

being used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Architect.

3. The Architect may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered

paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted

surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

3.7 PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Schedule: Provide products and number of coats specified. Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors, materials, generic class, standard of quality and performance criteria and is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent performing products of other manufacturers.

B. Exterior Paint Schedule:

1. Exterior Ferrous Metal, Fluoropolymer System: Hi-Performance System. Finish: Metallic. a. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6. b. One Coat:

1) Tnemec 90G-1K97 at 3.0 mils DFT; use for touch up. 2) Dupont Ganicin Urethane Zinc Rich at 3.0 mils DFT. 3) PPG Coraflon ADS570 Zinc Rich Epoxy Primer at 3.0 mils DFT.

c. And One Coat: 1) Tnemec 73 Endura-Shield at 3.0 mils DFT. 2) Dupont Imron HS at 3.0 mils DFT. 3) PPG Pitthane HB Urethane 95-8800 at 3.0 mils DFT.

d. And One Coat: 1) Tnemec 1070 Fluoronar at 2.0 mils DFT.



a) Finish: 1078 metallic, 1071 satin, or 1072 semi-gloss. 2) Dupont Fluoropolymer at 3.0 mils DFT. 3) PPG Coraflon ADS Fluoropolymer at 1.5-2.0 mils DFT.

2. Exterior Galvanized Metal, Fluoropolymer System: Hi-Performance System. Finish: Metallic. a. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP16, Brush-Off Blast Cleaning for Non-Ferrous

Metal. b. One Coat:

1) Tnemec 73 Endura-Shield at 3.0 mils DFT. 2) Dupont Imron HS at 3.0 mils DFT. 3) PPG Pitthane HB Urethane 95-8800 at 3.0 mils DFT.

c. And One Coat: 1) Tnemec 1070 Fluoronar at 2.0 mils DFT.

a) Finish: 1078 metallic, 1071 satin, or 1072 semi-gloss. 2) Dupont Fluoropolymer at 3.0 mils DFT. 3) PPG Coraflon ADS Fluoropolymer at 1.5-2.0 mils DFT.

3. Exterior Galvanized Metal Repair of AESS prior to Field-Finishing a. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP15, Commercial Power Tool Cleaning. b. Coating: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying

with SSPC-Paint 20; as approved by manufacturer of finish-coat system. 1) Apply to thickness matching adjacent galvanizing; applying in multiple coats

if required. c. Lightly sand intersection of galvanizing repair paint and shop-applied galvanizing

to provide smooth transition between coatings.

4. Exterior Existing Prepainted Painted Steel, for Overcoat Painted Finish in Metallic: a. Surface Preparation: Water Blast 5000 psi and SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Clean. b. One Coat:

1) Tnemec 394 Omnithane at 3.0 to 3.5 mils DFT. 2) PPG PMC Amerlock 400 Hi-Build Epoxy at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT. 3) RD Coatings Elasto Metal at 3.0 mils DFT. 4) International Interplus 356 at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.

c. And One Coat: 1) Tnemec 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT. 2) PPG PMC Amerlock 400 at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT. 3) RD Coatings Elasto Metal at 7.0 mils DFT. 4) International Intergard 475 HS at 5.0 to 10.0 mils DFT.

d. And One Coat: 1) Tnemec 73 Endura-Shield at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT. 2) PPG PMC Amercoat 450H at 3.0 mils DFT. 3) RD Coatings MurCryl at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT. 4) International Interthane 990 HS at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.

C. Interior Paint Schedule:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard and Plaster, Latex Paint Finish: a. Two Coat, Primer: Tuff-Hide spray-applied primer/sealer provided under Section

092110 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES. b. And Two Coats, Flat Finish: At ceilings, and elsewhere as indicated.

1) Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Flat 373. 2) Duron Genesis Latex Flat. 3) S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Flat. 4) PPG Pure Performance Latex Eggshell. 5) Glidden Professional Lifemaster No VOC Flat 9100. 6) California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Flat 633.



or c. And Two Coats, Eggshell Finish: At walls, and elsewhere as indicated.

1) Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Eggshell 374. 2) Duron Genesis Latex Eggshell. 3) S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Eggshell. 4) PPG Pure Performance Latex Eggshell. 5) Glidden Professional Lifemaster No VOC Eggshell 9300. 6) California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Eggshell 631.

or d. And Two Coats, Semi-Gloss Finish: At toilet rooms, other wet areas, and

elsewhere as indicated. 1) Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 376. 2) Duron Genesis Latex Semi-Gloss. 3) S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Semi-Gloss. 4) PPG Pure Performance Latex Semi-Gloss. 5) Glidden Professional Lifemaster No VOC Semi-Gloss 9200. 6) California Paint Envorotech Zero VOC Semi-Gloss 663.

2. Interior Gypsum Wallboard and Plaster at Laboratories, Toilet Rooms, and Other Wet Areas, Urethane Coating: a. Surface Preparation: Cured, clean and dry, free of surface contaminants. b. One Coat:

1) Tnemec 201 Epoxoprime at 3.0- 4.0 mils DFT. 2) PPG PMC Amerlock Sealer at 3.0 to 4.5 mils DFT. 3) Dupont Hi-Solids Colar primer at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT. 4) International Interseal 670 HS at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.

c. And One Coat: 1) Tnemec 280 Tneme-glaze at 6.0 to 8.0 mils DFT. 2) PPG PMC Amercoat 351 Epoxy at 6.0 to 8.0 mils DFT. 3) Dupont 100 % Solids Epoxy at 8.0-10.0 mils. 4) International Interseal 670 HS at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.

d. And One Coat: 1) Tnemec 1080 or 1081 Endurashield WB at 3.0 to 3.5 mils DFT. 2) PPG PMC AmerShield VOC at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT. 3) Dupont WB Urethane at 3.5 to 4.0 mils DFT. 4) International Water Borne Urethane at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.

3. Interior Metals (Not specified to receive other coating systems/not shop finished), Epoxy Painted Finish: a. One Coat: Approved primer, in shop under other Sections (where specified). If

not shop primed, provide primer recommended by finish coating manufacturer. b. And One Coat:

1) Tnemec 1029 Enduratone at 2.0 mils DFT. 2) PPG PMC Amerlock 400 at 2.0 to 4.0 mils DFT. 3) Dupont 25P at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT. 4) International Interseal 670 HS at 3.0 mils DFT.

c. And One Coat: 1) Tnemec 1029 Enduratone at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT. 2) PPG PMC Amerlock 400 at 2.0 to 4.0 mils DFT. 3) Dupont High Solids Acrylic Coating 3.0 mils DFT. 4) International Intercryl 530 at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.

4. Interior Exposed Steel, Joists, Ductwork, Conduit and Similar Items (where indicated), Dry-Fall or Dry-Fog Painted System: a. One Coat:

1) Tnemec 115 WB Unibond at 2.5 to 3.0 mils DFT.



2) PPG PMC Amercoat 220 Acrylic at 3.0 mils DFT. 3) International Intercryl 530 at 2.5 to 3.0 mils DFT. 4) RD Coatings Muracryl at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT.

5. Epoxy Floor Paint System: Where indicated in Finish Schedule. a. One Coat:

1) Tnemec 201 Epoxoprime at 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT. 2) Dex-O-Tex C Bond Coat at 6.0-7.0 mils DFT. 3) RD Coatings Unifix at 2.0 mils DFT.

b. And One Coat: 1) Tnemec 206 Flexible Epoxy Underlayment at 30 to 50 mils DFT. 2) Dex-O-Tex Cheminert SC Membrane at 70-80 mils DFT. 3) RD Coatings Elasto Deck at 50-80 mils DFT.

c. And One Coat: 1) Tnemec 297 at 3.0 mils DFT. 2) Dex-O-Tex Quik-Glaze at 7.0-8.0 mils DFT. 3) RD Coatings Muracryl at 3.0 mils DFT.

6. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint all exposed items throughout the project except factory finished items with factory-applied baked enamel finishes which occur in mechanical rooms or areas, and excepting chrome or nickel plating, stainless steel, and aluminum other than mill finished. Paint all exposed ductwork and inner portion of all ductwork same as specified for other interior metals, hereinabove.



SIGNAGE 10 14 00 - 1

SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Interior panel signage other than illuminated exit signs, including but not limited to,

accessibility signage, toilet room signage, way-finding signage and room signage.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with Owner’s Campus Architect for campus requirements for code-required signage and Owner-provided wayfinding signage.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 1. Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, lettering,

artwork, and braille layout.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign, include the following Samples to verify color selected: 1. Panel Signs: Full-size Samples of each type of sign required. 2. Approved samples will not be returned for installation into Project.

D. Mounting: product data for attachment of interior signs, and details with templates for anchoring of exterior signs.

E. Maintenance Data: For signage cleaning and maintenance requirements to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions of applicable codes and regulations, including but not limited to ICC A117.1 and the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), NJ UCC, ANSI 117.1 2009 NJ Edition.


A. Field Measurements: Where sizes of signs are determined by dimensions of surfaces on which they are installed, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication and indicate measurements with sign locations on Shop Drawings.


SIGNAGE 10 14 00 - 2

1.6 COORDINATION

A. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, advise installers of anchorage devices about specific requirements for placement of anchorage devices and similar items to be used for attaching signs.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANEL SIGNS

A. General: Provide signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction as indicated. Produce smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally. Provide the following: 1. Code-Required Signs for Certificate of Occupancy:

a. Type: Photopolymer on acrylic or printed acrylic / aluminum as applicable. b. Color: Custom color as selected. c. Type Size: As selected. d. Typeface: As selected.

B. Tactile and Braille Copy: Manufacturer's standard process for producing copy complying with ADA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks. 1. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch and as otherwise required.

C. Symbols of Accessibility: Provide 6-inch-high symbol fabricated from opaque nonreflective vinyl film, 0.0035-inch nominal thickness, with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing suitable for both exterior and interior applications.

2.2 EXTERIOR WALL SIGNAGE

A. General: Fabricated or cast aluminum painted letters and non-illuminated.

B. Materials: 1. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy and temper recommended by sign

manufacturer for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated. 2. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper

recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. 3. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by

aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. 4. Fasteners: Concealed, stainless steel. 5. Sign Mounting Fasteners - Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded

or brazed to back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated.

6. Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

7. Finish: custom color as determined by Architect.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Mounting Methods: Use double-sided vinyl tape fabricated from materials that are not corrosive to sign material and mounting surface.


SIGNAGE 10 14 00 - 3

B. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed stainless steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. Coordinate appropriate anchorage methods with provider of other wall materials, and furnish appropriate anchorage devices.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that items installed under other sections of Work are sized and located to accurately accommodate signs.

C. Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or required to comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other deleterious matter.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion

and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable.

Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.

B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using methods indicated below: 1. Vinyl-Tape Mounting: Use double-sided foam tape to mount signs to smooth, nonporous

surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.


A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by the Architect.



TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 13 - 1

SECTION 10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide toilet and sink accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction.


A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Mount in accordance with ADA standards. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers, which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. - PRODUCTS

a. MATERIALS

i. Refer to schedule listed on the drawings.

3. - EXECUTION

a. INSTALLATION

i. Coordinate with toilet compartment provider.

ii. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections.

iii. Restore damaged finishes and test for proper operation. Clean and protect work from damage until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 - 1

SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers. 3. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each item.

1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting

methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.

B. Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets to be include in maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of ASTM E 814 to maintain fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate fire-rating of fire extinguisher cabinets with fire-rated partitions to ensure partition fire-rating is maintained.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

2.2 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated multi-purpose, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

2.3 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET

A. Basis-of-Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Potter Roemer “Alta”, fire-rated where required, or comparable product from one of the following: 1. City Fire Equipment Company

733 Ridgedale Avenue, East Hanover, NJ 07936 973 560 1600 www.cityfire.com

B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher size and type.

C. Cabinet Material: Stainless steel door and frame with #4 brushed finish; 22 ga. steel box.

D. Semi-Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box semi-recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated.

E. Door Material: 304 stainless steel with brushed finish.

F. Door Style: Duo vertical panel with lock and break-glass handle; tempered safety glass complying with ANSI Z97-1-1984..

G. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, ADA-compliant, door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

H. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

2.4 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 1. Provide at service area and mechanical spaces.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.



2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch-thick, cold-

rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-thick, fire-barrier material. a. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick.

2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.

2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets will be installed.

B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Contractor shall be responsible for fire extinguisher tagging by a certified service technician located within 75 miles of the project. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated on the Drawings and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is

not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets. 2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.

C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.

D. Identification: Apply required signage at locations indicated.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF FIRE-RATED CABINETS

A. Seal through penetrations with firestopping sealant as specified in Section 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, as fire-protection specialties are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking and break-glass devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-protection cabinet manufacturer.



ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13 - 1

SECTION 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Roller shades for manual shade operators. Finished fascia where housing is exposed to

view from interior or exterior.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with Section 06 10 00 – ROUGH CARPENTRY for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of roller shades. Include elevations, sections, details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings, attachments to other work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension system members and attachment to building structure. 2. Ceiling-mounted or penetrating items including light fixtures, air outlets and inlets, radiant

panels, chilled beams, speakers, sprinklers, recessed shades, and special moldings at walls, column penetrations and enclosures, and other junctures of acoustical ceilings with adjoining construction.

3. Shade mounting assembly and attachment. 4. Size and location of access to shade operator and adjustable components. 5. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each finished component of each type of shade indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.

E. Samples for Verification:

1. For the following products: a. Shade Material: Not less than 12-inch- square section of fabric, from dye lot used

for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat. Mark top and face of material.

b. Valance: Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches long.

F. Window Treatment Schedule For roller shades: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

G. Product Certificates: For each type of roller shade, signed by product manufacturer.

H. Qualification Data: For Installer.



I. Product Test Reports: For each type of roller shade.

J. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining roller shades and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to fabrics,

finishes, and performance. 3. Operating hardware. 4. Motorized shade operator.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roller shade band materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701.


A. Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Rollers Shades: Before installation begins, for each size, color, texture, and pattern

indicated, full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Draper Inc. 2. Hunter Douglas Contract; Nysan Shading Systems.



3. Lutron 4. MechoShade Systems, Inc.

2.2 ROLLER SHADES

A. Configurations 1. Single-roller: Typical installation.

B. Light-Reducing Shade Band Material: Thermoplastic Olefin (TPO) coating on a TPO Core. 1. Fabric Width: As indicated.

a. Style: Basis-of-Design: MechoShade EcoVeil Basket Weave Shade Cloth, 3% Open-ness.

2. Colors: 1569 Silver Birch. 3. Material Openness Factor: As selected by Architect. 4. Bottom Hem: Straight.

C. Rollers: Electrogalvanized or epoxy primed steel or extruded-aluminum tube of diameter and wall thickness required to support and fit internal components of operating system and the weight and width of shade band material without sagging; designed to be easily removable from support brackets; with removable spline fitting integral channel in tube for attaching shade material. 1. Direction of Roll: Regular, from back of roller

D. Mounting Brackets: Galvanized or zinc-plated steel.

E. Fascia: L-shaped, formed-steel sheet or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; continuous panel concealing front and bottom of shade roller, brackets, and operating hardware and operators; length as indicated on Drawings removable design for access.

F. Top/Back Cover: L-shaped; material and finish to match fascia; combining with fascia and end caps to form a six-sided headbox enclosure sized to fit shade roller and operating hardware inside.

G. Pocket-Style Headbox: U-shaped, formed-steel sheet or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; with a bottom cover consisting of slot opening of minimum dimension to allow lowering and raising of shade and a removable or an openable, continuous metal access panel concealing shade roller, brackets, and operating hardware and operators within. 1. Provide ventilated pockets where adjacent to radiant heat panels. Pocket will also

provide support for radiant heat panels.

H. Bottom Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. Provide concealed, by pocket of shade material, internal-type bottom bar with concealed weight bar as required for smooth, properly balanced shade operation.

I. Mounting: As indicated on Drawings, mounting permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging roller shade or adjacent surfaces and finishes.

J. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard for anchoring roller shade bottom in place and keeping shade band material taut.



2.3 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION

A. Product Description: Roller shade consisting of a roller, a means of supporting the roller, a flexible sheet or band of material carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to the roller, a bottom bar, and an operating mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade.

B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 1. Lifting Mechanism: With permanently lubricated moving parts.

C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F: 1. Shade Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Edge of shade not more than 1/4 inch

from face of jamb. Length equal to head to sill dimension of opening in which each shade is installed.

2. Shade Units Installed Outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings.

D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting fascia, roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated.

E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use.

F. Color-Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. Provide custom color as selected by the architect.

2.4 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES

A. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated. 1. Bead Chains: Manufacturer's standard.

a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION

A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.



B. Connections: Connect motorized operators to building electrical system.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.


A. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, which ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.


Atlantic Cape Community College CLARKE CATON HINTZ ARCHITECTSBuilding D and K Renovations March 25, 2020ACCC Bid #1859

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-1

SECTION 21 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSIONPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Pipe, fittings, sleeves, escutcheons, seals, and connections for sprinkler systems.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.B. Section 21 05 23 - General-Duty Valves for Water-Based Fire-Suppression Piping.C. Section 21 13 00 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler systems design.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250; 2015.B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; 2016.C. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 125 and 250; 2016.D. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch

Standard; 2017.E. ASME B16.11 - Forged Fittings, Socket-welding and Threaded; 2016 (Errata 2017).F. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless; 2018.G. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings; 1984 (Reapproved 2014).H. ASTM A795/A795M - Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use; 2013.I. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015, with Errata (2016).J. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; 2010.K. AWWA C110/A21.10 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings; 2012.L. AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; 2017.M. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2015.N. FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide; current edition.O. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; Most Recent Edition Adopted by

Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.P. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See General Conditions 4.7.B. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.D. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, and floor and wall

penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, andpiping connections.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering.F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts lists.G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.



1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this

section.1. Minimum three years experience.2. Approved by manufacturer.

B. Comply with UL (DIR) requirements.C. Valves: Bear UL (DIR) product listing label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and

pressure rating marked on valve body.D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated.E. Clean equipment, pipes, valves, and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge that may have

accumulated from the installation and testing of the system.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place.B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until

installation.1.07 WARRANTY

A. See General Conditions 8.1 Closeout for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

A. Sprinkler Systems: Comply with NFPA 13.B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Comply with ASME BPVC-IX.

2.02 BURIED PIPINGA. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, ASTM A135/A135M Schedule 10, ASTM

A795/A795M Standard Weight, or ASME B36.10M Schedule 40, black, with AWWAC105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket, or double layer, half-lapped polyethylene tape.1. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings; with double layer, half-lapped

polyethylene tape.2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings.3. Joints: Welded in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

B. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51.1. Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, standard thickness.2. Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11, styrene-butadiene rubber (SBR) or vulcanized SBR gasket.3. Mechanical Couplings: Shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and

washers.2.03 ABOVE GROUND PIPING

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A795 Schedule 10, ASTM A53 Schedule 40, ASTM A135/A135M Schedule10, or ASTM A795 Schedule 40, black.1. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings or ASME B16.11, forged steel

socket welded and threaded.2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings and ASME B16.4, threaded

fittings.3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings and ASTM A47/A47M.



4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C"shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized forgalvanized pipe.

5. Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon steel housing with integral pipe stop and O-ringpocked and O-ring, uniformly compressed into permanent mechanical engagement ontopipe.

2.04 PIPE SLEEVESA. Vertical Piping:

1. Sleeve Length: 1 inch above finished floor.2. Provide sealant for watertight joint.

B. Plastic, Sheet Metal, or Moisture-Resistant Fiber: Pipe passing through interior walls, partitions,and floors, unless steel or brass sleeves are specified below.

C. Pipe Passing Through Below Grade Exterior Walls:1. Zinc-coated or cast-iron pipe.2. Provide watertight space with link rubber or modular seal between sleeve and pipe on both

pipe ends.D. Clearances:

1. Wall, Floor, Floor, Partitions, and Beam Flanges: 1 inch greater than external; pipediameter.

2. Rated Openings: Caulked tight with firestopping material complying with ASTM E814 inaccordance with Section 07 84 00 to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and gases.

2.05 ESCUTCHEONSA. Manufacturers:

2.06 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTSA. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 4 inch (15 to 40 mm): Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.

1. Manufacturers:a. Hilti USA. www.hilti.comb. nVnt Caddy. www.erico.com/caddyc. Tolco. www.cooperindustries.comd. And/or approved equal

B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Over: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel.1. Manufacturers:

a. Hilti USA. www.hilti.comb. nVnt Caddy. www.erico.com/caddyc. Tolco. www.cooperindustries.comd. And/or approved equal

C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.D. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

1. Manufacturers:a. Hilti USA. www.hilti.comb. nVnt Caddy. www.erico.com/caddyc. Tolco. www.cooperindustries.comd. And/or approved equal

2.07 MECHANICAL COUPLINGSA. Manufacturers:

1. Shurjoint Piping Products, Inc: www.shurjoint.com/#sle.2. Tyco Fire Protection Products; ____: www.tyco-fire.com/#sle.3. Victaulic Company; FireLock Style 009H: www.victaulic.com/#sle.



4. And/or approved equalB. Rigid Mechanical Couplings for Grooved Joints:

1. Dimensions and Testing: Comply with AWWA C606.2. Minimum Working Pressure: 300 psig.3. Housing Material: Fabricate of ductile iron complying with ASTM A536.4. Housing Coating: Factory applied orange enamel.5. Gasket Material: EPDM suitable for operating temperature range from minus 30 degrees

F to 230 degrees F.6. Bolts and Nuts: Hot-dipped-galvanized or zinc-electroplated steel.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install sprinkler system and service main piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with

NFPA 13.B. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient.C. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work.D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected

equipment.F. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacentwork.

2. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.3. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or

trapeze hangers.G. Structural Considerations:

1. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated.H. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors, and walls. Seal pipe including sleeve

penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required.1. Underground Piping: Caulk pipe sleeve watertight with lead and oakum or mechanically

expandable chloroprene inserts with bitumen sealed metal components.2. Aboveground Piping:

a. Pack solid using mineral fiber complying with ASTM C592.b. Fill space with an elastomer caulk to a depth of 0.50 inch where penetrations occur

between conditioned and unconditioned spaces.3. All Rated Openings: Caulk tight with firestopping material complying with ASTM E814 in

accordance with Section 07 84 00 to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and gases.4. Caulk exterior wall sleeves watertight with lead and oakum or mechanically expandable

chloroprene inserts with mastic-sealed components.I. Manufactured Sleeve-Seal Systems:

1. Install manufactured sleeve-seal systems in sleeves located in grade slabs and exteriorconcrete walls at piping entrances into building.

2. Provide sealing elements of the size, quantity, and type required for the piping and sleeveinner diameter or penetration diameter.

3. Locate piping in center of sleeve or penetration.

https://www.nfpa.org/codes-and-standards/all-codes-and-standards/list-of-codes-and-standards/detail?code=13


































4. Install field assembled sleeve-seal system components in annular space between sleeveand piping.

5. Tighten bolting for a watertight seal.6. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

J. Escutcheons:1. Install and firmly attach escutcheons at piping penetrations into finished spaces.2. Use chrome plated escutcheons in occupied spaces and to conceal openings in

construction.K. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are

compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, unions, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.

L. Die-cut threaded joints with full-cut, standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil orother non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.

3.03 CLEANINGA. Upon completion of work, clean all parts of the installation.B. Clean equipment, pipes, valves, and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge that may have

accumulated from the installation and testing of the system.END OF SECTION

























FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 21 11 00-1

SECTION 21 11 00 - FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPINGPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Water pipe.B. Valves.C. Fire department connections.D. Bedding and cover materials.E. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.B. Section 21 05 00 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression.C. Section 31 23 16 - Excavation.D. Section 31 23 16.13 - Trenching.E. Section 31 23 23 - Fill.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the

work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See General Conditions 4.7.B. Welders Certificate: Include welders certification of compliance with ASME BPVC-IX.C. Product Data:

1. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.2. Provide manufacturer's catalog information.3. Indicate valve data and ratings.4. Show grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties on drawings and product

submittals, specifically identified with the manufacturer's style or series designation.D. Field Quality Control Submittals: Testing activities.E. Project Record Documents:

1. Record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, fire hydrants, free-standingfire department connections, underground manholes and vaults, valve boxes, thrustrestraints, and invert elevations.

2. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of unchartedutilities.

F. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, and exploded assemblyviews.

G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for additional provisions.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with

at least five years documented experience.



C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as aNationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

D. Products:1. Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.2. Refer to FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide and UL (DIR).

E. Perform Work in accordance with local authorities having jurisdiction, municipality, and waterutility requirements.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until

installation.C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections

of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.1.07 WARRANTY

A. See General Conditions 8.1 Closeout submittals for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 WATER PIPE

A. Steel Pipe and Fittings:1. Pipe: Standard weight, zinc-coated, listed, ASTM A53/A53M.2. Fittings: Comply with ASME B16.3, Class 150, zinc coated, threaded or ASME B16.4,

Class 125, zinc-coated.3. Mechanically Factory Applied Protective Materials:

a. Clean by wire brushing and solvent cleaning.b. Apply one coat of coal-tar primer and two coats of coal-tar enamel complying with

AWWA C203.c. Protect threaded pipe ends and fittings prior to coating.

B. Ductile Iron Pipe: Listed, AWWA C104/A21.4:1. Fittings: Ductile iron, standard thickness.2. Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11, styrene-butadiene rubber (SBR) or vulcanized SBR gasket

with rods.3. Jackets: AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket.

2.02 VALVESA. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.B. Curb (Service) Stop:

1. Manufacturers:a. A.Y. McDonald Mfg Company: www.aymcdonald.com/#sle.b. James Jones Company: www.joneswaterproducts.com/#sle.c. Mueller Water Products, Inc: www.muellercompany.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Up to and Including 1-1/2 NPS:a. Ground key, round way, inverted key type, bronze body, ASTM B61 or ASTM B62,

suitable for the working pressure of the system.b. Ends: Appropriate for connection to the service piping.c. Arrow cast into body of the curb (service) stop indicating flow direction.d. Service Box:

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=AWWA%20C203























1) Cast-iron extension box with slide- or screw-type adjustment, including flaredbase.

2) Adapted, without full extension, to depth of cover required over pipe at location ofstop.

3) Cast the word "WATER" in cover and position cover flush with finished grade.4) Shut-off rod to extend 2 feet above top of deepest stop box.

2.03 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS:A. Free-Standing Inlet:

1. Manufacturers:a. Elkhart Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.elkhartbrass.com/#sle.b. Fire End & Croker Corporation: www.croker.com/#sle.c. kochek, LLC.com; kochek.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Construction:a. Listed .b. Type: 5X4 Storz.c. Rated Working Pressure: 175 psi.d. Finish: Polished chrome.e. Label: BASEMENT SPRINKLER SYSTEM - FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION

2.04 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALSA. Bedding: As specified in Section 31 23 16.13.B. Cover: As specified in Section 31 23 16.13.

2.05 ACCESSORIESA. Concrete for Thrust Restraints: Concrete type specified in Section 03 30 00.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that building service connection and municipal utility water main size, location, and invertare as indicated.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs.B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.C. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.03 TRENCHINGA. Earthwork: Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Sections 31 23 16, 31 23 16.13,

and 31 23 23.B. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.C. Form and place concrete for pipe thrust restraints at each change of pipe direction. Place

concrete to permit full access to pipe and pipe accessories. Provide thrust restraint bearing onsubsoil as per drawings.

D. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, thencomplete backfilling.

3.04 INSTALLATIONA. General Requirements:

1. Location of Water Lines:2. Sleeving:





















































a. Sleeve water piping where piping is required to be installed within 3 feet of existingstructures.

b. Provide ductile iron or Schedule 40 steel sleeves.c. Fill annular space between pipe and sleeves with mastic.d. Install water pipe and sleeve without damaging structures or causing settlement or

movement of foundations or footings.3. Pipe Laying and Jointing:

a. Remove fins and burrs from pipe and fittings.b. Prior to placing in position, clean pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories, and maintain

in clean condition.c. Provide proper facilities for lowering pipe sections into trenches.d. Dropping or dumping of piping, fittings, valves, or any other water line material into

trenches is not permitted.e. Cut pipe in a neat, workmanlike manner accurately to length established at the site

and work into place without forcing or springing.f. Replace by one of the proper length any pipe or fitting that does not allow sufficient

space for proper installation of jointing material.g. Wedging or blocking between bells and spigots will not be permitted.h. Install bell-and-spigot pipe with the bell end pointing in the direction of laying.i. Grade the pipeline in straight lines avoiding the formation of dips and low points.j. Support piping at proper elevation and grade.k. Secure firm, uniform support.l. Wood support blocking will not be permitted.m. Install pipe so that the full length of each pipe section and each fitting will rest solidly

on the pipe bedding; excavate recesses to accommodate bells, joints, and couplings.n. Provide anchors and supports where indicated, necessary, and ________ for

fastening work into place.o. Provide proper provisions for expansion and contraction of pipelines.p. Keep trenches free of water until joints have been properly made.q. Close open ends of piping temporarily with wood blocks or bulkheads at the end of

each workday.r. Do not install pipe during unacceptable trench conditions or inclement weather.s. Minimum Depth of Pipe Cover: Not less than 2-1/2 feet.

4. Connections to Existing Water Lines:a. Make connections to existing water lines only after receiving approval from the

Architect.b. Ensure minimal interruption of service on the existing line.c. Make connections to existing lines under pressure in accordance with the

recommended procedures of the manufacturer of the pipe being tapped.5. Penetrations:

a. Provide ductile-iron or Schedule 40 steel for pipes passing through walls of valve pitsand structures.

b. Fill annular space between sleeves and walls with rich cement mortar.c. Fill annular space between pipe and sleeves with mastic.

B. Special Requirements:1. Ductile Iron Piping:

a. Unless otherwise specified, install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph"General Requirements".

b. Jointing:1) Make mechanical joints with the gaskets, glands, bolts, and nuts specified for

this type joint; assemble in accordance with the applicable requirements of



























































AWWA C600 for joint assembly and the recommendations of Appendix A toAWWA C111/A21.11.

2) Make flanged joints with the gaskets, bolts, and nuts specified for this type joint.(a) Make flanged joints up tight; avoid undue strain on flanges, fittings, valves,

and other accessories and equipment.(b) Align bolt holes for each flanged joint.(c) Use full size bolts for the bolt holes; use of undersized bolts to make up for

misalignment of bolt holes or for any other purpose will not be permitted.(d) Do not allow adjoining flange faces to be out of parallel to such a degree

that the flanged joint cannot be made watertight without over-straining theflange.

(e) When flanged pipe or fitting has dimensions that do not allow the making ofa proper flanged joint as specified, replace it by one of proper dimensions.

(f) Use set-screwed flanges to make flanged joints where conditions preventthe use of full length, flanged pipe and assemble in accordance with therecommendations of the set-screwed flange manufacturer.

3) Assemble joints made with sleeve-type mechanical couplings in accordance withthe recommendations of the coupling manufacturer.

4) Make grooved and shouldered type joints with the couplings previously specifiedfor this type joint connecting pipe with the grooved or shouldered ends specifiedfor this type joint; assemble in accordance with the recommendations of thecoupling manufacturer.(a) Groove pipe in the field only with approved grooved cutting equipment

designed especially for the purpose and produced by a manufacturer ofgrooved joint couplings; secure approval for field-cut grooves beforeassembling the joint.

c. Allowable Deflection:1) Maximum Allowable Deflection: As stated in AWWA C600.2) If the alignment requires deflection in excess of the above limitations, furnish

special blends or a sufficient number of shorter pipe lengths to provide angulardeflections within the limit set forth.

d. Pipe Anchorage:1) Provide concrete thrust blocks (reaction backing), for pipe anchorage except

where metal harness is indicated.2) Thrust blocks to comply with the requirements of AWWA C600 for thrust

restraint, except that size and positioning of thrust blocks to be as indicated.3) Use concrete, ASTM C94/C94M, having a minimum compressive strength of

2,500 psi at 28 days; or use concrete of a mix not leaner than one part cement,2-1/2 parts sand, and 5 parts gravel, having the same minimum compressivestrength.

4) Provide metal harness in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 forthrust restraint, using tie rods and clamps as indicated in NFPA 13, except asotherwise indicated.

e. Exterior Protection: Completely encase buried ductile iron pipelines with polyethylenetube or sheet, using Class A polyethylene film, in accordance with AWWAC105/A21.5.

2. Steel Piping:a. Jointing:

1) Bell-and-Spigot: Make rubber-gasketed, bell-and-spigot joints with the gasketspreviously specified for this type of joint, using an approved lubricant, all inaccordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations.

2) Flanged:






https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=AWWA%20C600

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=AWWA%20C111/A21.11





















































(a) Make flanged joints up tight; avoid undue strain on flanges, fittings, valves,and other equipment and accessories.

(b) Align bolt holes for each flanged joint.(c) Use full-size bolts for the bolt holes; use of undersized bolts due to

misalignment of bolt holes or for any other purpose will not be allowed.(d) Do not allow adjoining flange faces to be out of parallel to such a degree

that the flanged joint cannot be made water-tight without straining theflange.

(e) When flanged pipe or fitting has dimensions that do not allow the making ofa proper flanged joint as specified, replace it with one of correct dimensions.

3) Grooved:(a) Make grooved type joints with the couplings specified for this type joint

connecting pipe with roll-grooved ends or pipe with welded-on cut-groovedadapters, each with dimensions as previously specified for this type of joint.

(b) Groove pipe ends in the field only with approved groove rolling equipmentand groove adapters in the field only with approved groove cuttingequipment; use only groove rolling and groove cutting equipment designedespecially for the purpose and produced by a manufacturer of grooved jointcouplings.

(c) Obtain approval for field-cut grooves prior to assembling the joint.b. Allowable Offsets:

1) For pipe with bell-and-spigot rubber-gasket joints, 5 degrees maximum allowabledeflections from a straight line or grade, as required by vertical curves, horizontalcurves, or offsets; unless a lesser amount is recommended by the manufacturer.

c. Pipe Anchorage:1) Provide concrete thrust blocks (reaction backing) for pipe anchorage, except

where metal harness is indicated.2) Thrust blocks to be in accordance with the recommendations for thrust restraint

in AWWA M11, except that size and positioning of thrust blocks are to be asindicated.

3) Use ASTM C94/C94M concrete having a minimum compressive strength of2500 psi at 28 days; or use concrete of a mix not leaner than one part cement,2-1/2 parts sand, and 5 parts gravel, having the same minimum compressivestrength.

4) Metal Harness:(a) Provide in accordance with the recommendations for joint harnesses in

AWWA M11, except as otherwise indicated.(b) Fabricated by the pipe manufacturer and furnished with the pipe.

C. Valves:1. Set valves on solid bearing.2. Center and plumb valve box over valve.3. Set box cover flush with finished grade.

3.05 SERVICE CONNECTIONSA. Provide fire water service to Local Authority Having Jurisdiction requirements with reduced

pressure backflow preventer and water meter with by-pass valves and sand strainer.3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field Tests and Inspections:1. See General Conditions 4.10 for additional requirements.2. Provide all labor, equipment, and incidentals required for field testing, except that water

and electric power needed for field tests will be furnished as set forth in GeneralConditions 4.14.










































http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=AWWA%20M11

















3. Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks havehardened sufficiently and at least 5 days after placing of concrete after concrete thrustblocks have hardened sufficiently and at least 5 days after placing of concrete.

4. The Architect will conduct field inspections and witness field tests as specified in thisSection.

5. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system, using onlypotable water.

6. Before final acceptance, provide a video record of all piping from the building to themunicipal connection to show the lines are free from obstructions and properly joined andsloped.

7. Test water piping in accordance with NFPA 13, where the additional water added to thesystem must not exceed the limits given in NFPA 13.

8. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace andretest at no cost to Owner.

9. Prepare reports of testing activities.3.07 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of the installation of water lines and appurtenances, remove and haul away allsurplus material, including debris resulting from the work.

3.08 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIESA. See General Conditions for closeout submittals.B. Demonstrate proper operation of equipment to Owner's designated representative.C. Demonstration: Demonstrate operation of system to Owner's personnel.

1. Use operation and maintenance data as reference during demonstration.2. Conduct walking tour of project.3. Briefly describe function, operation, and maintenance of each component.

END OF SECTION

































FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 00-1

SECTION 21 13 00 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wet-pipe sprinkler system.B. System design, installation, and certification.C. Fire department connections.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.B. Section 21 05 00 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Pipe and fittings.C. Section 21 05 23 - General-Duty Valves for Water-Based Fire-Suppression Piping.D. Section 28 46 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2015.B. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; Most Recent Edition Adopted by

Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.C. NFPA 1963 - Standard for Fire Hose Connections; 2014.D. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition.E. UL 405 - Fire Department Connection Devices; Current Edition; Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See General Conditions 4.7.B. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.C. Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers

catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, supportrequirements, and piping connections.

D. Shop Drawings:1. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers,

components, and accessories. Indicate system controls.2. Submit shop drawings to Authorities Having Jurisdiction for approval. Submit proof of

approval to Architect.E. Samples: Submit two of each style of sprinkler specified.F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements,

record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location andnumbers of service depot.

G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Sprinklers: Type and size matching those installed in quantity required by

referenced NFPA design and installation standard.3. Sprinkler Wrenches: For each sprinkler type.

H. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping fromdrawings. Indicate drain and test locations.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Maintain one copy of referenced design and installation standard on site.



B. Comply with UL (DIR) requirements.C. Designer Qualifications: Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer

experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project islocated.

D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section andapproved by manufacturer.

E. Equipment and Components: Provide products that bear UL (DIR) label or marking.F. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL (DIR) as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporaryinlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SPRINKLER SYSTEM

A. Sprinkler System: Provide coverage for Basement(s) Only.B. Occupancy: Light hazard; comply with NFPA 13. Ordinary Hazard Group 1; comply with NFPA

13C. Water Supply: Determine volume and pressure from water flow test data. D. Provide fire department connections where indicated.E. Storage Cabinet for Spare Sprinklers and Tools: Steel, located adjacent to alarm valve.F. Pipe Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:

1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.2. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.3. Other Types: As required.

2.02 SPRINKLERSA. Suspended Ceiling Type: Institutional Recessed pendant type with matching push on

escutcheon plate.1. Response Type: Quick.2. Coverage Type: Standard.3. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard.4. Manufacturers:

a. Tyco Fire Protection Products; _______: www.tyco-fire.com/#sle.b. The Viking Corporation; www.vikinggroupinc.com.c. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc; www.reliablesprinkler.com.

B. Exposed Area Type: Upright type with guard.1. Response Type: Quick.2. Coverage Type: Standard.3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.4. Manufacturers:

a. Tyco Fire & Building Products.b. Globe Sprinkler.c. Viking .d. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Companye. And/or approved equalf. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

C. Sidewall Type: Institutional Semi-recessed horizontal sidewall type with matching push onescutcheon plate.



1. Response Type: Quick.2. Coverage Type: Standard.3. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard.4. Manufacturers:

a. Tyco Fire & Building Products.b. Globe Sprinkler.c. Viking .d. And/or approved equale. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

D. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler finish.2.03 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Backflow Preventer: Double check valve assembly backflow preventer with drain and OS & Ygate valve on each end.

B. Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical, with two contacts;rated 10 amp at 125 volt AC and 2.5 amp at 24 volt DC.

C. Fire Department Connections:1. Type: Free standing made of corrosion resistant metal complying with UL 405.

a. Inlets: Storz , 5". Thread size and inlets according to NFPA 1963 or Authority HavingJurisdiction.

b. Rated Working Pressure: 175 psi.c. Finish: Chrome.d. Signage: Raised or engraved lettering 1 inch minimum indicating system type.e. Manufacturers:

1) Elkhart Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.elkhartbrass.com/#sle.2) Fire End & Croker Corporation: www.croker.com/#sle.3) Kochek.LLC; www.kochek.com.4) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

D. Supervisory Switches:1. Manufacturers:

a. Potter Electric.b. System Sensor.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with referenced NFPA design and installation standard.B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Provide approved double check valve assembly at sprinkler system water source connection.D. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent

siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle.E. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.F. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings.G. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.H. Install guards on sprinklers where indicated.I. Hydrostatically test entire system.J. Require test be witnessed by Fire Marshal and Authority Having Jurisdiction.



3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTSA. Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system.

END OF SECTION


PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19-1

SECTION 22 07 19 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATIONPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Piping insulation.B. Jackets and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.B. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2013.B. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2017.C. ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Thermal Insulation for

Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing; 2010 (Reapproved 2016).D. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic

Stainless Steel; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2019b.F. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2016.G. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and

thickness for each service, and locations.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, andthickness.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50,maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.

2.02 GLASS FIBERA. Manufacturers:

1. Owens Corning Corporation; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation ASJ: SSLwww.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle.

2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible.

1. K Value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F.3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film;moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02perm-inches.


PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19-2


A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install in accordance with North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA)

National Insulation Standards.C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including

fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansionjoints.

E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied.

Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoiningpipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

F. Inserts and Shields:1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.

G. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish atsupports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07 84 00.

H. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material,thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.

END OF SECTION


PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05-1

SECTION 22 10 05 - PLUMBING PIPINGPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Pipe, pipe fittings, specialties, and connections for piping systems.1. Sanitary sewer.2. Domestic water.3. Flanges, unions, and couplings.4. Pipe hangers and supports.5. Valves.6. Check.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.B. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.C. Section 22 07 19 - Plumbing Piping Insulation.D. Section 33 01 10.58 - Disinfection of Water Utility Piping Systems.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI Z21.22 - American National Standard for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff

Devices for Hot Water Supply Systems; 2015.B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; 2016.C. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012.D. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2018.E. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV; 2016.F. ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings -

DWV; 2012.G. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2014.H. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless; 2018.I. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2017.J. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014).K. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2015a.L. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2016.M. ASTM B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and

Copper Alloy Tube; 2016.N. ASTM B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper

Alloy Tube and Fittings; 2016.O. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules

40, 80, and 120; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2018).P. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Plastic Piping Systems; 2012 (Reapproved 2018).Q. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and

Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2014.R. ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings;

2011.



S. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for the Two-Step (Primer & Solvent Cement) Method ofJoining Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Pipe and PipingComponents with Tapered Sockets; 2015.

T. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipeand Fittings; 2016.

U. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2015.V. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry

Elements; 2015.W. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2015.X. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete

Elements; 2016.Y. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,

Application, and Installation; 2009.Z. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; 2013.AA. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends;

2010.AB. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2017.AC. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2016.AD. International Plumbing Code - Latest Edition

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide

manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.C. Sustainable Design Documentation: For soldered copper joints, submit installer's certification

that the specified installation method and materials were used.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes.B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.C. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification,

potable water certification, water pressure rating.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until

installation.C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections

of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux (if used), thatcomply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.



2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDINGA. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034.

1. Fittings: PVC.2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

2.03 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADEA. Copper Pipe: ASTM B42.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper.2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn50 solder.

B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665.1. Fittings: PVC.2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

2.04 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADEA. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L

1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder.3. Mechanical Press Sealed Fittings: Double-pressed type, NSF 61 and NSF 372 approved

or certified, utilizing EPDM, nontoxic, synthetic rubber sealing elements.a. Manufacturers:

1) Apollo Valves: www.apollovalves.com/#sle.2) Grinnell Products: www.grinnell.com/#sle.3) Viega LLC; ProPress: www.viega.com/#sle.4) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.05 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADEA. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type.2. Joints: Threaded or welded to ASME B31.1.

2.06 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGSA. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under:

1. Ferrous Pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions.2. Copper Tube and Pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.

2.07 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTSA. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.

1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriatetype using MSS SP-58 recommendations.

2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapezehangers.

3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure.4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp.5. Floor Supports: Concrete pier or steel pedestal with floor flange; fixture attachment.6. Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with bases that rest on top of

roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetratingthe roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified; and as follows:a. Bases: High-density polypropylene.b. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing

assembly.c. Steel Components: Stainless steel or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication

in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.



d. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type asindicated for equivalent indoor hangers and supports; corrosion-resistant material.

e. Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under pipe to top of roofing.f. Manufacturers:

1) PHP Systems/Design: www.phpsd.com2) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split

ring.2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.3. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.

C. Plumbing Piping - Water:1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split

ring.2. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.3. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 Inches to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.5. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

D. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.6. Other Types: As required.

2.08 BALL VALVESA. Manufacturers:

1. Apollo.2. Watts3. Jamesbury4. Nibco5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze or ductileiron body, 304 stainless steel or chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffingbox ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, threaded or grooved ends withunion.

2.09 RELIEF VALVESA. Pressure:

1. Manufacturers:a. Watts Regulator Company; Model 174A or larger as required for existing piping:

www.wattsregulator.com/#sle.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. ANSI Z21.22, AGA certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic,direct pressure actuated.

B. Temperature and Pressure:1. Manufacturers:

a. Watts Regulator Company; Model 40xl-125-210-1" or as required for existing piping.: www.wattsregulator.com/#sle.

b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.



2. ANSI Z21.22, AGA certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs,automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F, capacityASME BPVC-IV certified and labelled.


A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to

walls.D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space.E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.F. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of

insulation and access to valves and fittings.G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.H. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean,

and apply one coat of zinc-rich primer to welding.J. Install water piping to ASME B31.9.K. Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, using specified

solder, and flux meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux also complying withNSF 61 and NSF 372.

L. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855.M. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls, and floors.N. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.2. Support horizontal piping as indicated.3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent

work.4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe

movement without disengagement of supported pipe.6. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.7. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl

spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.3.04 APPLICATION

A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to

pipe.C. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASME%20BPVC-IV
























http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NSF%2061





















D. Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where indicated.3.05 TOLERANCES

A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated andslope to drain at minimum of 1/8 inch per foot slope.

B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points.3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed, and clean.3.07 SCHEDULES

A. Pipe Hanger Spacing:1. Metal Piping:

a. Pipe Size: 1/2 inches to 1-1/4 inches:1) Maximum Hanger Spacing: 6.5 ft.2) Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inches.

b. Pipe Size: 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches:1) Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 ft.2) Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inch.

c. Pipe Size: 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches:1) Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 ft.2) Hanger Rod Diameter: 1/2 inch.

END OF SECTION



























PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06-1

SECTION 22 10 06 - PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIESPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Cleanouts.B. Mixing valves.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping.B. Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASME A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; 2016.B. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2017.C. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2016.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Specialties in Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide products that comply with NSF 61 andNSF 372 for maximum lead content.

2.02 CLEANOUTSA. Manufacturers:

1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com/#sle.2. Josam Company: www.josam.com/#sle.3. Zurn Industries, LLC: www.zurn.com/#sle.

a. Finished Floors or Walls.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas (C02451-PVC):2.03 MIXING VALVES

A. Thermostatic Mixing Valves:1. Manufacturers:

a. ESBE: www.esbe.se/en.b. Honeywell International Inc: www.honeywellhome.com/#sle.c. Leonard Valve Company: www.leonardvalve.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel or copper alloy bellows, integraltemperature adjustment.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with

mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainagesystem.


























PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06-2

C. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.END OF SECTION









PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00-1

SECTION 22 40 00 - PLUMBING FIXTURESPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Water closetsB. Lavatories.C. Mop sinks.D. Under-lavatory pipe supply covers.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between fixtures and walls and floors.B. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping.C. Section 22 10 06 - Plumbing Piping Specialties.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.B. ASME A112.18.9 - Protectors/Insulators for Exposed Waste and Supplies on Accessible

Fixtures; 2011.C. ASTM C1822 - Standard Specification for Insulating Covers on Accessible Lavatory Piping;

2015.D. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to

Fungi; 2015.E. ASME A112.6.1M - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use; 1997

(Reaffirmed 2017).F. ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; 2018.G. ASME A112.19.2 - Ceramic Plumbing Fixtures; 2013.H. ASME A112.19.5 - Flush Valves and Spuds for Water Closets, Urinals, and Tanks; 2017.I. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2019b.J. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2017.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes,

trim, and finishes.C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's

name and registered with manufacturer.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in

place to protect fixtures and prevent use.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Potable Water Systems: Provide plumbing fittings and faucets that comply with NSF 61 andNSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.

B. Water Efficiency: EPA WaterSense label is required for all water closets, urinals, lavatoryfaucets, and showerheads.






2.02 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETSA. Water Closets: Vitreous china, ASME A112.19.2, floor mounted, siphon jet flush action, china

bolt caps.1. Bowl: ASME A112.19.2; 16.5 inches high with elongated rim.2. Flush Valve: Exposed (top spud).3. Flush Operation: Manual, oscillating handle.4. Handle Height: 22 inches or less.5. Supply Size: 1-1/2 inches.6. Outlet Size: 2 inches.7. Color: White.8. Manufacturers:

a. American Standard, Inc: www.americanstandard-us.com/#sle.b. Kohler Company; ______: www.kohler.com/#sle.c. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.comd. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Flush Valves: ASME A112.18.1, diaphragm type, complete with vacuum breaker stops andaccessories.1. Exposed Type: Chrome plated, escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop.2. Manufacturers:

a. American Standard, Inc: www.americanstandard-us.com/#sle.b. Sloan Valve Company: www.sloanvalve.com/#sle.c. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.comd. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

C. Seats:1. Manufacturers:

a. American Standard, Inc: www.americanstandard-us.com/#sle.b. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.comc. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, brass bolts, withcover.

D. Water Closet Carriers:1. Manufacturers:

a. Jay R. Smith MFG. Co: www.jrsmith.com/#sle.b. JOSAM Company: www.josam.com/#sle.c. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.03 LAVATORIESA. Lavatory Manufacturers:

1. American Standard, Inc: www.americanstandard-us.com/#sle.2. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com/#sle.3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Vitreous China Wall Hung Basin: ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china wall hung lavatory, 20 by 18inch minimum, with 4 inch high back, rectangular basin with splash lip, front overflow, and soapdepression.1. Drilling Centers: 4 inch.

C. Supply Faucet Manufacturers:1. American Standard, Inc: www.americanstandard-us.com/#sle.2. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com/#sle.3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com


























































4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.D. Supply Faucet: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated combination supply fitting with open grid

strainer, water economy aerator with maximum flow of 0.5 gallon per minute (low-flow), slowclose metering fauct with single lever handle

E. Accessories:1. Chrome plated 17 gage, 0.0538 inch brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with

escutcheon.2. Perforated grid drain with 1-1/4" tail piece.3. Loose Key stops.4. Rigid supplies.5. Carrier:

a. Manufacturers:1) Jay R. Smith MFG. Co: www.jrsmith.com/#sle.2) JOSAM Company: www.josam.com/#sle.3) Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com4) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

b. ASME A112.6.1M; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wallattachment, threaded studs for fixture hanger, bearing plate and studs.

2.04 UNDER-LAVATORY PIPE SUPPLY COVERSA. Manufacturers:

1. Tru-Bro "Lav Shield"2. Zurn.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Basis of Design: Zurn Z8946-3-NT for supplies and trap. Under-Lavatory Covers with Snap-Lock Fasteners (Molded): Zurn

C. General:1. Insulate exposed drainage piping including hot, cold and tempered water supplies under

lavatories or sinks per ADA Standards.2. Adhesives, sewing threads and two ply laminated materials are prohibited.3. Exterior Surfaces: Smooth nonabsorbent with no finger recessed indentations for easy

cleaning.4. Construction: 1/8 inch PVC with antimicrobial, antifungal and UV resistant properties.

a. Comply with ASTM C1822 Type III for covers on accessible lavatory piping.b. Comply with ASME A112.18.9 for covers on accessible lavatory piping.c. Comply with ICC A117.1.d. Microbial and Fungal Resistance for Interior and Exterior: Comply with ASTM G21.

5. Color: High gloss white.6. Fasteners: Reusable, snap-locking fasteners with no sharp or abrasive external surfaces.

No cable ties allowed.2.05 MOP SINKS

A. Mop Sink Manufacturers:1. Acorn Engineering Company: www.americanstandard-us.com/#sle.2. Just Manufacturing Company: www.justmfg.com/#sle.3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Material: High density plastic.C. Grid Strainer: Stainless steel; integral; removable.D. Accessories:

1. 5 feet of 1/2 inch diameter plain end reinforced plastic hose.

























































2. Hose clamp hanger.3. Mop hanger.


A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.B. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top

lavatories and sinks.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixturerough-in schedule for particular fixtures.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and

escutcheons.C. Install components level and plumb.D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts.

3.04 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONSA. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before

rough-in and installation of Classroom sinks.3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, oroverflow.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.

3.07 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations.B. Do not permit use of fixtures by construction personnel.C. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

3.08 SCHEDULESA. See drawings.B. Fixture Rough-In

1. Water Closet (Flush Valve Type):END OF SECTION








































TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93-1

SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVACPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.C. Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASHRAE Std 111 - Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building HVACSystems; 2008.

B. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of EnvironmentalSystems; 2015, Eighth Edition.

C. SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing; 2002.1.04 APPROVED BALANCERS

A. Butler Balancing (Thorndale, PA)B. Fisher Balancing (Williamstown, NJ)C. National Balancing (Cherry Hill, NJ)

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3300 - Submittal procedures.B. Installer Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB supervisor for

approval within 30 days after award of Contract.C. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be

followed and the specific approach for each system and component.1. Submit to Engineer.2. Submit six weeks prior to starting the testing, adjusting, and balancing work.3. Include certification that the plan developer has reviewed the contract documents, the

equipment and systems, and the control system with the Engineer and other installers tosufficiently understand the design intent for each system.

4. Include at least the following in the plan:a. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency

measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures,parameters, formulas to be used.

b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment tobe tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each.

c. Identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their most recentcalibration date.

d. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and pipingdrawings during the process.

e. Final test report forms to be used.f. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue, including:

1) Terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type).2) Diffuser proportioning.3) Branch/submain proportioning.4) Total flow calculations.5) Rechecking.6) Diversity issues.

g. Expected problems and solutions, etc.



h. Details of how TOTAL flow will be determined; for example:1) Air: Sum of terminal flows via control system calibrated readings or via hood

readings of all terminals, supply (SA) and return air (RA) pitot traverse, SA or RAflow stations.

i. Specific procedures that will ensure that air side equipment is operating at the lowestpossible pressures and methods to verify this.

j. Confirmation of understanding of the outside air ventilation criteria under allconditions.

k. Method of verifying and setting minimum outside air flow rate will be verified and setand for what level (total building, zone, etc.).

l. Proposed selection points for sound measurements and sound measurementmethods.

m. Methods for making coil or other system plant capacity measurements, if specified.n. Exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including any required room

pressure differentials.o. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution.

D. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would preent proper testing, adjusting, andbalancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.1. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report.2. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final

copies for Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.3. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page

and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduceddrawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, andindicating thermostat locations.

4. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date ofcalibration.

5. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a reportformat use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111.

6. Units of Measure: Report data in I-P (inch-pound) units only.7. Include the following on the title page of each report:8. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.9. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.10. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.11. Project name.12. Project Engineer.13. Project Contractor.14. Report date.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:1. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of

Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.2. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems.3. SMACNA (TAB).

B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete workprior to Substantial Completion of the project.

C. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including fire andsmoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspectionprocedures with the authorities having jurisdiction.



D. TAB Agency Qualifications:1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this

section.2. Having minimum of three years documented experience.3. Certified by one of the following:

a. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org.b. TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy

Management Institute: www.tabbcertified.org.E. TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization as TAB agency.

3.02 EXAMINATIONA. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following

conditions:1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final

filters.5. Duct systems are clean of debris.6. Fans are rotating correctly.7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.10. Air outlets are installed and connected.11. Duct system leakage is minimized.

3.03 PREPARATIONA. Hold a pre-balancing meeting at least one week prior to starting TAB work.

1. Require attendance by all installers whose work will be tested, adjusted, or balanced.B. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments

available to Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.C. Provide additional balancing devices as required.

3.04 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCESA. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and

plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to

space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.3.05 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING

A. Field Logs: Maintain written logs including:1. Running log of events and issues.

a. Discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others.1) Contract interpretation requests.2) Lists of completed tests.

b. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.c. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing

settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.d. Mark on the drawings the locations where traverse and other critical measurements

were taken and cross reference the location in the final report.e. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that

such disruption has been rectified.



f. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors,closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specifiedsettings.

g. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance andsubmit report.

3.06 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDUREA. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and

exhaust air quantities at site altitude.B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of

duct.C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts

and noise.E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not

create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devicessuch as dampers and splitters.

F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required.Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.

G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure

drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design

conditions.J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check

leakage.K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme

conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and atminimum air flow rate, full heating.

L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to providerequired relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive staticpressure near the building entries.

3.07 SCOPEA. Test, adjust, and balance the following:

1. VRV Air Conditioning Units2. Air Coils.3. Air Handling Units (Indoor and Outdoor).4. Fans.5. Air Inlets and Outlets.

3.08 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTEDA. Electric Motors:

1. Manufacturer.2. Model/Frame.3. HP/BHP.4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load.5. RPM.6. Starter size, rating, heater elements.7. Sheave Make/Size/Bore.



B. V-Belt Drives:1. Identification/location.2. Required driven RPM.3. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM.4. Belt, size and quantity.5. Motor sheave diameter and RPM.6. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual.

C. Heating and Cooling Coils:1. Identification/number.2. Location.3. Service.4. Manufacturer.5. Air flow, design and actual.6. Entering air temperature, design and actual.7. Leaving air temperature, design and actual.8. Air pressure drop, design and actual.

D. Return Air/Outside Air:1. Identification/location.2. Design air flow.3. Design return air flow.4. Actual return air flow.5. Design outside air flow.6. Actual outside air flow.7. Return air temperature.8. Outside air temperature.

E. Exhaust Fans:1. Location.2. Manufacturer.3. Model number.4. Serial number.5. Air flow, specified and actual.6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual.7. Inlet pressure.8. Discharge pressure.9. Sheave Make/Size/Bore.10. Number of Belts/Make/Size.11. Fan RPM.

F. Duct Leak Tests:1. Description of ductwork under test.2. Duct design operating pressure.3. Duct design test static pressure.4. Duct capacity, air flow.5. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor.6. Test apparatus:

a. Blower.b. Orifice, tube size.c. Orifice size.d. Calibrated.

7. Test static pressure.8. Test orifice differential pressure.9. Leakage.



G. Air Distribution Tests:1. Air terminal number.2. Room number/location.3. Terminal type.4. Terminal size.5. Area factor.6. Design velocity.7. Design air flow.8. Test (final) velocity.9. Test (final) air flow.10. Percent of design air flow.

END OF SECTION


DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13-1

SECTION 23 07 13 - DUCT INSULATIONPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Duct insulation.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.B. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Glass fiber ducts.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C1136: Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for

Thermal Insulation.B. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for

Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2013.C. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;

2014.D. ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to

Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts; 2016.E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2019b.F. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2016.G. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and

thickness for each service, and locations.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the typespecified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in thissection, with minimum three years of experience and approved by manufacturer.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification,

including product density and thickness.B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical

damage, by storing in original wrapping.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,mastics, and insulation cements.

B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50,maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.



2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE (INDOOR DUCT APPLICATION)A. Manufacturer:

1. Johns Manville: www.jm.com/#sle.2. Owens Corning Corporation; SoftR Duct Wrap FRK: www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle.3. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.C. ASTM C1136: Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for

Thermal Insulation.D. ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsE. Vapor Barrier Jacket:

1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film on interior ductwork. Provide fiber board with FSK jacket.

2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTME96/E96M.

3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.F. Vapor Barrier Tape:

1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressuresensitive rubber based adhesive.


A. Test ductwork for design pressure prior to applying insulation materials.B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.C. Insulated Ducts Conveying Air Below Ambient Temperature:

1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.4. Insulate entire system, including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections,

and expansion joints.D. Insulated Ducts Conveying Air Above Ambient Temperature:

1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket.2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of

insulation.E. Exterior Applications: Provide insulation with vapor barrier jacket. Cover with outdoor jacket as

directed by Venture Clad or other approved exterior ductwork insulation/jacket manufacturer.F. External Duct Insulation Application:

1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrieradhesive or tape to match jacket.

2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires.3. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where

necessary to prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation

without disturbing wrapping.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E96/E96M



































3.03 SCHEDULESA. Exhaust Ducts Within 10 ft of Exterior Openings: 1"B. Supply Ducts: 1"

END OF SECTION











HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 31 00-1

SECTION 23 31 00 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Metal ductwork.B. Duct cleaning.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.B. Section 23 07 13 - Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASHRAE (FUND) - ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals; Most Recent Edition Cited by

Referring Code or Reference Standard.B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2019a.D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2019b.E. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2018.F. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005 (Revised

2009).1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration

prior to start of work for low pressure class systems.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of productsspecified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience, and approved bymanufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 DUCT ASSEMBLIES

A. Regulatory Requirements: Construct ductwork to comply with NFPA 90A standards.B. Ducts: Galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated.C. Low Pressure Supply (Heating Systems): 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.D. Low Pressure Supply (System with Cooling Coils): 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized

steel.E. Return and Relief: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.F. General Exhaust: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.G. Outside Air Intake: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M FS Type B,

with G60/Z180 coating.B. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant.



1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration andcompatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class ofducts.

2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of zero and smoke developed indexof zero, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

3. For Use With Flexible Ducts: UL labeled.4. Manufacturers:

a. Carlisle HVAC Products; Hardcast Iron-Grip 601 Water Based Duct Sealant: www.carlislehvac.com/#sle.

b. Ductmate Industries, Inc, a DMI Company: www.ductmate.com/#sle.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

C. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, orcontinuously threaded.

2.03 DUCTWORK FABRICATIONA. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.B. No variation of duct configuration or size permitted except by written permission. Size round

duct installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE (FUND) Handbook -Fundamentals.

C. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.D. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on

centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foilturning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.

E. Provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation when acoustical lining isindicated.

F. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergencedownstream.

G. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).2.04 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS

A. Flexible Ducts: Black polymer film supported by helically wound spring steel wire.1. Pressure Rating: 4 inches WG positive and 0.5 inches WG negative.2. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees F to 175 degrees F.4. Manufacturers:

a. Hart & Cooley, Inc: www.hartandcooley.com/#sle.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.


A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open

ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.D. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions.E. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers.

Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can withspring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulatedductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.



F. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating andmaintenance activities.

G. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimpin direction of air flow.

H. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.I. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with one foot maximum length of flexible duct.

Do not use flexible duct to change direction.J. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with 8 feet maximum

length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp.K. At exterior wall louvers, seal duct to louver frame and install blank-out panels.

3.02 CLEANINGA. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment that could be

harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access intoductwork for cleaning purposes.

END OF SECTION


CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 23 34 16-1

SECTION 23 34 16 - CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Backward inclined centrifugal fans.B. Bearings and drives.C. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 05 83 - Wiring Connections: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with

specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet andoutlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Loren Cook Company: www.lorencook.com/#sle.B. Greenheck: www.greenheck.comC. Twin City Fan & Blower: www.tcf.com/#sle.D. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 WHEEL AND INLETA. Backward Inclined: Steel or aluminum construction with smooth curved inlet flange, heavy back

plate, backwardly curved blades welded or riveted to flange and back plate; cast iron or caststeel hub riveted to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screws.

2.03 HOUSINGA. All aluminum housing. 2-piece top cap with stainless steel quick release latches.B. Welded curb cap corners.C. Factory finish before assembly to manufacturer's standard. Provide finish as indicated on

plans.2.04 BEARINGS AND DRIVES

A. Permanetly lubricated ball bearings.B. Shafts: Hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with keyway, protectively coated with lubricating

oil, and shaft guard.2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Standard disconnect.B. Backdraft Damper.C. Roof curb.D. Fan speed controller.


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 23 34 16-2

3.02 SCHEDULESA. See drawings.

END OF SECTION


SINGLE DUCT VAV TERMINAL UNIT 23 36 00-1

SECTION 23 36 00 - SINGLE DUCT VAV TERMINAL UNITPART 1- GENERAL1.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:

A. Units shall be stored and handled per manufacturer’s recommendations.1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Insulation shall meet NFPA-90A requirements for flame spread and smoke generation andUL-181 requirements for anti-erosion, corrosion and fungus properties.

B. Hot water coils, when specified, shall be tested for leakage at 250 psig with the coil submergedin water.

C. Sound power levels shall be AHRI certified in accordance with the requirements ofAHRI-880-11.

1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:A. Units shall be stored and handled per manufacturer's recommendations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. General:1. Factory-assembled, externally powered, variable air volume control terminal. Unit shall be

complete with a damper assembly, flow sensor, externally mounted volume controller,collars for duct connection and all required features. Control box shall be clearly markedwith an identification label that lists such information as nominal cfm, maximum andminimum airflow limits, coil type and coil hand, where applicable.

B. Unit Cabinet:1. Constructed of 22-gage galvanized steel with round or rectangular inlet collar and

rectangular discharge with slip and drive connection. All primary air inlet collars shallaccommodate standard flex duct sizes

2. Unit casing shall be lined with 1/2” thick, 1 1/2 lb. dual density fiberglass insulation thatmeets UL 181 and NFPA 90A. Insulation shall be attached to the unit casing by adhesiveand weld pins.

3. 1” THICK INSULATION: Unit casing shall be lined with dual density, 1” thick, 1.5 lb.density fiberglass insulation that meets UL181 and NFPA-90A.

C. Damper Assembly:1. The control air damper assembly shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel

with solid shaft rotating in Delrin® bearings. Damper shaft shall be marked on the end toindicate damper position. Damper blade shall incorporate a flexible gasket for tight airflowshutoff and operate over a full 90°.

D. Controls:1. Units shall have electronic as specified, capable of maintaining required airflow set points

+/-5% of the unit’s capacity at any inlet pressure up to 6-in. wg. The controllers shall becapable of resetting between factory or field-set maximum and minimum (>350 fpm inletduct velocity) set points to satisfy the room thermostat demand. All VAV boxes shall becompatible with CM3 controls. See controls specification section for additionalinformation.

2. The unit shall be equipped with an amplified flow probe located in the unit inlet. Air flow forthe pressure independent controller (supplied by others) shall be determined with a factorysupplied 12 point total pressure, center averaging cross flow sensor, having amagnification resulting in no greater than 2625 fpm @ 1” developed signal.

E. Accessories:1. Hot Water Heating Coil:


SINGLE DUCT VAV TERMINAL UNIT 23 36 00-2

a. Coil shall be mounted in a minimum 20 Ga. Galvanized steel casing with slip anddrive discharge connections, and factory mounted on the base unit as shown on theequipment drawings. Coils shall have:

b. Aluminum fins (10 ft/in.) bonded to the copper tubes by mechanical expansion.c. Number of coil rows and circuits shall be selected to provide performance as required

by the plans.d. Right or left-hand fittings with sweat connection. Piping sizes as indicated on

drawings.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that conditions are suitable for installation.B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install the inlets of air terminal units and air flow sensors a minimum of four duct diameters from

elbows, transitions, and duct takeoffs.C. See drawings for the size(s) and duct location(s) of the air terminal units.D. Locate units above easily removable ceiling components.E. Support units individually from structure with wire rope complying with ASTM A492 and ASTM

A603 in accordance with SMACNA (SRM). See Section 23 05 48.F. Do not support from ductwork.G. Connect to ductwork in accordance with Section 23 31 00.H. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

3.03 ADJUSTINGA. Reset volume with damper operator attached to assembly allowing flow range modulation from

100 percent of design flow to zero percent full flow. Set units with heating coils for minimum 50percent full flow.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Provide manufacturer's field representative to test, inspect, instruct, and observe

field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections and to assist infield testing. Report results in writing.

3.05 SCHEDULESA. See drawings.

END OF SECTION


AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 37 00-1

SECTION 23 37 00 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Diffusers:B. Rectangular ceiling diffusers.C. Registers/grilles:

1. Ceiling-mounted, egg crate exhaust and return register/grilles.2. Ceiling-mounted, exhaust and return register/grilles.3. Ceiling-mounted, supply register/grilles.4. Wall-mounted, supply register/grilles.5. Wall-mounted, exhaust and return register/grilles.

D. Goosenecks.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting: Painting of ducts visible behind outlets and inlets.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; 2012.B. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices; 2010.C. AMCA 550 - Test Method for High Velocity Wind Driven Rain Resistant Louvers; 2015.D. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; 2006 (R2011).E. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012.F. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005 (Revised

2009).1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as

to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inletsshowing type, size, location, application, and noise level.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70.B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L.C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products

specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Krueger-HVAC: www.krueger-hvac.com/#sle.2. Price: www.priceindustries.com3. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Type: Provide square, adjustable pattern, stamped, multi-core, square and rectangular,multi-louvered, and square and rectangular, adjustable pattern diffuser to discharge air in 360degree, two way, and three way pattern.

C. Connections: Round.D. Frame: Provide surface mount and inverted T-bar type.



E. Fabrication: Steel with powder coat finish.F. Color: white.G. Accessories: Provide radial opposed blade and butterfly volume control damper; removable

core, sectorizing baffle, operating rod extension, anti-smudging device, and gaskets for surfacemounted diffusers with damper adjustable from diffuser face.

2.02 CEILING SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLESA. Manufacturers:

1. Krueger-HVAC: www.krueger-hvac.com/#sle.2. Price: www.priceindustries.com3. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face ofgrille, one-way deflection.

C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.D. Construction: Made of aluminum extrusions with factory powder coated finish.E. Color: white.F. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable

from face.2.03 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES


B. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with blades setat 45 degrees, vertical face.

C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.D. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frames and 22 gage, 0.0299 inch

minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frame, or aluminumextrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.

E. Color: As indicated.2.04 CEILING EGG CRATE EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES


B. Basis of Design: Krueger-HVAC; EGCX: www.krueger-hvac.com/#sle.C. Type: Egg crate style face consisting of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch grid core.D. Fabrication: Grid core consists of aluminum with mill aluminum finish.E. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with concealed mounting.F. Frame: Channel lay-in frame for suspended grid ceilings.

2.05 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLESA. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch

maximum spacing with spring or other device to set blades, vertical face, single deflection.



B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.C. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frames and 22 gage, 0.0299 inch

minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frame, or aluminumextrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.

D. Color: white.2.06 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES

A. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with spring orother device to set blades, vertical face.

B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.C. Fabrication: Steel frames and blades, with factory baked enamel finish.D. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable

from face.2.07 GOOSENECKS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) of minimum 18 gage, 0.0598 inch galvanizedsteel.

B. Mount on minimum 12 inch high curb base where size exceeds 9 by 9 inch.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Comply with SMACNA (ASMM) for flashing/counter-flashing of roof penetrations and supports

for roof curbs and roof mounted equipment.C. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to comply with

architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.D. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.E. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite

whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.F. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 09 91 23.

END OF SECTION


COMMERCIAL PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 23 73 14-1

SECTION 23 73 14 - COMMERCIAL PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERSPART 1: GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Commercial Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioners. (MPSA) - Refer to Equipment Schedules onthe drawings.

1.02 REFERENCESA. AFBMA 9-Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.B. AMCA 99-Standards HandbookC. AMCA 210-Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating PurposesD. AMCA 300-Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving DevicesE. AMCA 500-Test Methods for Louver, Dampers, and Shutters.F. ARI 340/360-Unitary Large EquipmentG. ARI 430-Central-Station Air-Handling Units.H. ARI 435-Application of Central-Station Air-Handling Units.I. IBC 2000 - International Building CodeJ. NEMA MG1-Motors and GeneratorsK. National Electrical Code.L. NFPA 70-National Fire Protection Agency.M. SMACNA-HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible.N. UL 900-Test Performance of Air Filter Units.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances,

construction details, field connection details, electrical characteristics and connectionrequirements.

B. Product Data:1. Provide literature that indicates dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance,

and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.2. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions.

1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTAINENCE DATAA. Maintenance Data: Provide instructions for installation, maintenance and service

1.05 QUALIFICATIONSA. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with

minimum five years documented experience, who issues complete catalog data on totalproduct.

B. Startup must be done by trained personnel experienced with rooftop equipment.C. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters

and remote controls are in place, bearings lubricated, and manufacturers’ installationinstructions have been followed.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site.B. Accept products on site and inspect for damage.C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to

avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.



PART 2: PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Daikin AppliedB. TraneC. CarrierD. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTIONA. Furnish as shown on plans, Daikin Applied Packaged Systems, Singlezone Heating and Cooling

Unit(s) model MPS. Unit performance and electrical characteristics shall be per the jobschedule.

B. Configuration: Fabricate as detailed on prints and drawings:1. Return plenum / economizer section2. Filter section3. Cooling coil section4. Supply fan section5. Gas heating section6. Condensing unit section

C. The complete unit shall be cULus listed. Gas furnace units shall be UL listed and classified inaccordance with ANSI-Z 21.47.

D. Unit will comply with ASHRAE 90.1-2016 Standard for efficiency and EER.E. The unit shall undergo a complete factory run test prior to shipment. The factory test shall

include final balancing of the supply fan assemblies, a refrigeration circuit run test, a unit controlsystem operations checkout, a unit refrigerant leak test and a final unit inspection.

F. All units shall have decals and tags to indicate caution areas and aid unit service. Unitnameplates shall be fixed to the main control panel door. Electrical wiring diagrams shall beattached to the control panels. Installation, operating and maintenance bulletins and start-upforms shall be supplied with each unit.

G. Performance: All scheduled capacities and face areas are minimum accepted values. Allscheduled amps, kW, and HP are maximum accepted values that allow scheduled capacity tobe met.

H. Warranty: The manufacturer shall provide 12-month parts only warranty. Defective parts will berepaired or replaced during the warranty period at no charge. The warranty period shallcommence at startup or six months after shipment, whichever occurs first.

I. The manufacturer shall provide extended 48-month, parts only, warranty on the compressor.Defective parts will be repaired or replaced during the warranty period at no charge. Thewarranty period shall commence at startup or six months after shipment, whichever occurs first.

2.03 CABINET, CASING, AND FRAMEA. Panel construction shall be 18 GA single wall construction with a baked powder coat finish.

Insulation shall be a minimum of 3/4" thick fiberglass with a foil face surface. Insulation shall beglued to the panel as well as mechanically fastened. In lieu of foil face insulation withmechanical fasteners, double wall construction may be substituted. Panel design shall not haveany exposed insulation edges.

B. Exterior surfaces shall be constructed of 18 GA, G90 galvanized, with a baked powder coatfinish of a neutral beige color. Finished panel surfaces to withstand a minimum 1000-hour saltspray test in accordance with ASTM B117 standard for salt spray resistance

C. Base frame shall be 14 GA galvanized steel and be a full perimeter design. The base frameshall have integral forklift slots and rigging holes. The unit base shall overhang the roof curb for



positive water runoff and shall seat on the roof curb gasket to provide a positive, weather tightseal.

D. The full unit base pan shall be a one-piece stamped design. The base pan shall have astamped 1 1/8” flange around the supply and return air openings to prevent any water topenetrate into the building. The base pan shall be insulated with foil face insulation withmechanical fasteners on the underside of the pan. The rooftop base pan shall not haveinsulation on the air stream side of the equipment

E. Service doors shall be provided on the filter section, supply fan section and the electrical controlpanel section. All service access doors shall be mounted on multiple hinges and shall besecured by a 1/4 turn latch system. Removable panels secured by multiple mechanicalfasteners are not acceptable.

2.04 SUPPLY FANA. Supply fan shall be a double width double inlet (DWDI) forward curved centrifugal fan. The

supply fan shall be mounted using solid-steel shafts and wheel hubs with mating keywaysB. The fan assembly shall have adjustable pitched sheaves on the motor. Bushings shall be used

on all sheaves to allow for easy removal of the pulleys from the fan and motor shaft. Fixedbore pulleys fastened to the shaft by setscrews will not be allowed. The drives shall be selectedwith a 1.2 service factor.

C. All fan assemblies shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory, including a finaltrim balance, prior to shipment. All fan assemblies shall employ solid steel fan shafts. Bearingsshall be sized to provide a L-50 life of 250,000 hours.

D. Fan motors shall be heavy-duty, 1800 rpm, open drip-proof (ODP). Motors efficiencies shallmeet EPAct efficiencies. Motors shall be mounted on an adjustable base that provides forproper alignment and belt tension adjustment.

E. The fan design shall allow for the fan and motor assembly to slide out of the rooftop unit forease of servicing the equipment.

2.05 ELECTRICALA. Unit wiring shall comply with NEC requirements and with all applicable UL standards. All

electrical components shall be UL recognized where applicable. All wiring and electricalcomponents provided with the unit shall be number and color-coded and labeled according tothe electrical diagram provided for easy identification. The unit shall be provided with a factorywired weatherproof control panel. Unit shall have a single point power connection for mainpower connection. A terminal board shall be provided for low voltage control wiring. Eachcompressor and condenser fan motor shall be furnished with contactors and thermal overloadprotection. Supply fan motors shall have a factory installed and wired control contactor.Knockouts shall be provided in the bottom of the main control panels for field wiring entrance.

2.06 INDOOR COIL SECTIONA. Direct expansion (DX) cooling coils shall be an all aluminum microchannel coil. The aluminum

tube shall be a micro channel design with high efficiency aluminum fins. Fins shall be brazed tothe tubing for a direct bond. All coils shall be factory leak tested with high pressure air underwater

B. A non-corrosive, positively sloped drain pan shall be provided with the cooling coil. The drainpan shall extend beyond the leaving side of the coil and underneath the cooling coilconnections. The drain pan shall have a minimum slope of 1/8" per foot to provide positivedraining. The slope of the drain pan shall be in two directions and comply with ASHRAEStandard 62.1 The drain pan shall be connected to a threaded drain connection extendingthrough the unit base.

C. The rooftop unit shall include a natural gas heating section. The heating module shall be atubular design with in-shot gas burners. The heat exchanger tubes shall be constructed of .



The module shall have an induced draft fan that will maintain a negative pressure in the heatexchanger tubes for the removal of the flue gases.

D. The heater shall have an electronic direct spark ignition system with a remote flame sensor. The gas furnace shall have a flame rollout safety protection switches and a high temperaturelimit switch that will shut the gas valve off upon detection of improper burner manifold operation. The induced draft fan shall have an airflow safety switch that will prevent the gas valve fromturning on in the event of no airflow in the flue chamber.

E. A factory-installed DDC control system shall control the gas heat furnace. The control systemshall shut down the entire heating system after two unsuccessful attempts at start-up andrequire a manual reset. Field installed heating systems shall require a field UL/ETL certification.The manufacturer’s rooftop unit UL/ETL certification shall cover the complete unit including thegas heating modules.

F. The heating modules shall have a field installed kit for conversion of the unit to LP gas.2.07 FILTERS

A. Unit shall be provided with a draw-through filter section. The filter rack shall be designed toaccept a 2” filter. The unit design shall have a hinged access door for the filter section.

2.08 OUTDOOR / RETURN AIR SECTIONA. A return air plenum shall be provided with a 0 to 30% outdoor air hood. The hood shall allow

outdoor air to enter at the back of the return air plenum. The hood shall include moistureeliminator filters to drain water away from the entering air stream. The return air plenum shallallow return air to enter from the bottom of the unit. The outdoor air damper shall be controlledby a factory installed direct coupled actuator. The unit controller shall control the actuator to anoutdoor air position setpoint that is adjustable from 0 to 30%. Upon unit shut down the outdoorair damper shall be power driven closed.an outdoor air position setpoint that is adjustable from0 to 30%. Upon unit shut down during unoccupied periods the outdoor air damper shall bepower driven closed.

2.09 OUTDOOR COIL SECTIONA. Condenser coils shall be multi-row and fabricated from high efficiency rifled copper tubing

mechanically bonded to high efficiency aluminum fins. Each condenser coil shall be factory leaktested with high-pressure air under water.

B. Outdoor coil fans shall be direct drive, axial type designed for low tip speed and vertical airdischarge. Condenser fan rpm shall be 1140 rpm maximum. Fan blades shall be constructed ofsteel and riveted to a steel center hub. Condenser fan motors shall be heavy-duty, non-reversing type with permanently lubricated ball bearing and thermal protection. Motordesign shall be totally enclosed air over (TEAO) to protect the motors from rain and damage bywater.

C. Low ambient cooling shall be allowed to 0 degrees F.D. Refrigeration circuit shall be complete with a thermal expansion valve and liquid line filter drier.E. Refrigerant gauge ports shall be external to the cabinet for both low and high pressure for ease

of service.F. Each unit shall have multiple, heavy-duty scroll compressors. Each compressor shall be

complete with gauge ports, anti-slug protection, motor overload protection and a time delay toprevent short cycling and simultaneous starting of compressors following a power failure.Compressors shall be isolated with resilient rubber isolators to decrease noise transmission.

2.10 ROOF CURBA. A prefabricated 14-gauge galvanized steel, mounting curb shall be provided for field assembly

on the roof decking prior to unit shipment. The roof curb shall be a full perimeter type withcomplete perimeter support of the air handling section and condensing section. The curb shall



be a minimum of 14" high and include a nominal 2" x 4" wood nailing strip. Gasket shall beprovided for field mounting between the unit base and roof curb.

B. Provide custom curb-adapters at areas where new units are replacing old units.END OF SECTION


INDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 81 26-1

SECTION 23 81 26 - INDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITSPART 1: GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Indoor Air Handling Units.1.02 REFERENCES

A. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.B. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.C. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.D. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.E. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louver, Dampers, and Shutters.F. AHRI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.G. AHRI 430 - Central-Station Air-Handling Units.H. AHRI 435 - Application of Central-Station Air-Handling Units.I. ASTMB117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray Apparatus.J. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators.K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.L. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.M. UL 723 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.N. UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.O. UL 1995 - Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment.P. UL 94 - Test for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances.Q. IBC 2000, 2003 - International Building Code.R. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.S. NFPA 5000 - Building Construction and Safety Code.T. ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Code.U. AHRI Standard 1060 - Rating Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation

Equipment.V. GSA 2003 Facilities Standard - 5.9 HVAC Systems and Components.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances,

construction details, field connection details, and electrical characteristics and connectionrequirements. Computer generated fan curves for each air handling unit shall be submitted withspecific design operating point noted. A computer generated psychometric chart shall besubmitted for each cooling coil with design points and final operating point clearly noted. Sounddata for discharge, radiated and return positions shall be submitted by octave band for eachunit. Calculations for required baserail heights to satisfy condensate trapping requirements ofcooling coil shall be included.

B. Product Data:1. Provide literature that indicates dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance,

finishes of materials, electrical characteristics, and connection requirements.2. Provide data of filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly, and filter frames.3. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions.



1.04 QUALIFICATIONSA. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Air Handler products specified in this

section must show a minimum five years documented experience and complete catalog data ontotal product.

1.05 SAFETY AGENCY LISTED & CERTIFICATIONA. Air Handling units shall be cETLus safety listed to conform with UL Standard 1995 and

CAN/CSA Standard C22.2 No. 236. Units shall be accepted for use in New York City by theDepartment of Building, MEA 342-99-E.

B. Air handler furnished with double width, double inlet (DWDI) fans and/or plenum fans whereapplicable, shall be certified in accordance with the central station air handling units certificationprogram, which is based on AHRI Standard 430. (NOTE: Above does not apply to fan array)

C. Air handling unit water heating & cooling coils shall be certified in accordance with the forcedcirculation air cooling and air heating coils certification program, which is based on AHRIStandard 410.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site.B. Accept products on site on factory-furnished shipping skids. Inspect for damage.C. Store in clean dry place and protect from construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage

to components, enclosures, and finish.PART 2: PRODUCTS2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. The following manufacturers are approved for use. No substitutions will be permitted.1. Daikin Applied 'Vision' Air Handler shall be the basis of design.2. Miller-Picking3. Temtrol4. Scott-Springfield5. Racan-Carrier Company

2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTIONA. Configuration: Fabricate as detailed on drawings.B. Performance: Conform to AHRI 430. See schedules on prints. (NOTE: above does not apply to

fan array)C. Acoustics: Sound power levels (dB) for the unit shall not exceed the specified levels shown on

the unit schedule. The manufacturer shall provide the necessary sound treatment to meet theselevels if required.

2.03 UNIT CONSTRUCTIONA. Fabricate unit with heavy gauge channel posts and panels secured with mechanical fasteners.

All panels, access doors, and ship sections shall be sealed with permanently applied bulb-typegasket. Shipped loose gasketing is not allowed.

B. Panels and access doors shall be constructed as a 2-inch nominal thick; thermal broke doublewall assembly, injected with foam insulation with an R-value of not less than R-13.1. The inner liner shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel.2. The outer panel shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel.3. The floor plate shall be constructed as specified for the inner liner.4. Unit will be furnished with solid inner liners.



C. Panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, maximum 5inches of positive or 6 inches of negative static pressure. Deflection shall be measured at thepanel midpoint.

D. The casing leakage rate shall not exceed 0.50 cfm per square foot of casing surface area atdesign static pressure up to a maximum of +5” w.c. in positive pressure sections and -6” w.c. innegative pressure sections (.0025 m3/s per square meter of cabinet area at 1.24 kPa staticpressure)

E. Module to module field assembly shall be accomplished with an overlapping, full perimeterinternal splice joint that is sealed with bulb type gasketing on both mating modules to minimizeon-site labor and meet indoor air quality standards.

F. Access doors shall be flush mounted to cabinetry, with minimum of two six inch long stainlesssteel piano-type hinges, latch and full size handle assembly. Access doors shall swing outwardfor unit sections under negative pressure. Access doors on positive pressure sections, shallhave a secondary latch to relieve pressure and prevent injury upon access.

G. A 6-inch formed G60 galvanized steel base rail shall be provided by the unit manufacturer forstructural rigidity and condensate trapping.. The base rail shall be constructed with 12-gaugenominal for unit sizes 003 - 035 and 10-gauge nominal for unit sizes 040 - 090. The followingcalculation shall determine the required height of the baserail to allow for adequate drainage.Use the largest pressure to determine base rail height. [(Negative)(Positive) static pressure (in)](2) + 4” = required baserail height. Should the unit baserail not be factory supplied at thisheight, the contractor is required to supply a concrete housekeeping pad to make up thedifference.

H. Construct drain pans from stainless steel with cross break and double sloping pitch to drainconnection. Provide drain pans under cooling coil section. Drain connection centerline shall bea minimum of 3’’ above the base rail to aid in proper condensate trapping. Drain connectionsthat protrude from the base rail are not acceptable. There must be a full 2’’ thickness ofinsulation under drain pan.

2.04 FAN ASSEMBLIESA. Acceptable fan assembly shall be a double width, double inlet, class II, belt-drive type housed

airfoil fan dynamically balanced as an assembly, as shown in schedule. Maximum fan RPMshall be below first critical fan speed. Fan assemblies shall be dynamically balanced by themanufacturer on all three planes and at all bearing supports. Copper lubrication lines shall beprovided and extend from the bearings and attached with grease fittings to the fan baseassembly near access door. If not supplied at the factory, contractor shall mount copper lubelines in the field. Fan and motor shall be mounted internally on a steel base. Provide access tomotor, drive, and bearings through hinged access door.

B. Fan and motor shall be mounted internally on a steel base. Factory mount motor on slide basethat can be slid out the side of the unit if removal is required. Provide access to motor, drive,and bearings through hinged access door. Fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on 2"deflection spring vibration type isolators inside cabinetry.

2.05 BEARINGS, SHAFTS, AND DRIVESA. Bearings: Basic load rating computed in accordance with AFBMA - ANSI Standards. The

bearings shall be designed for service with an L-50 life of 200,000 hours and shall be a heavyduty pillow block, self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball or spherical roller bearing type.

B. Shafts shall be solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, keyed to shaft, and protectivelycoated with lubricating oil. Hollow shafts are not acceptable.

C. V-Belt drives shall be cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts andkeyed. Fixed sheaves, matched belts, and drive rated based on motor horsepower. Minimumof 2 belts shall be provided on all fans with 10 HP motors and above. Standard drive service



factor minimum shall be 1.1 S.F. for 1/4 HP - 7.5 HP, 1.3 S.F. for 10 HP and larger, calculatedbased on fan brake horsepower.

2.06 ELECTRICALA. Fan motors shall be manufacturer provided and installed, Open Drip Proof, premium efficiency

(meets or exceeds EPAct requirements), 1750 RPM, single speed, 460V / 60HZ / 3P. Complete electrical characteristics for each fan motor shall be as shown in schedule.

B. The air handler(s) shall be ETL and ETL-Canada listed by Intertek Testing Services, Inc. Unitsshall conform to bi-national standard ANSI/UL Standard 1995/CSA Standard C22.2 No. 236.

C. Wiring Termination: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes,and materials indicated. Enclosed terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.

D. Manufacturer shall provide ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Efficiency equation details for individualequipment to assist Building Engineer for calculating system compliance.

E. Installing contractor shall provide GFI receptacle within 25 feet of unit to satisfy NationalElectrical Code requirements.

F. All electrical connection components shall be field provided and mounted as shown on projectschedule.

2.07 COOLING AND HEATING COILSA. Certification: Acceptable water cooling, water heating, steam, and refrigerant coils shall be

certified in accordance with AHRI Standard 410 and bear the AHRI label. Coils exceeding thescope of the manufacturer’s certification and/or the range of AHRI’s standard rating conditionswill be considered provided the manufacturer is a current member of the AHRI ForcedCirculation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils certification programs and that the coils have beenrated in accordance with AHRI Standard 410. Manufacturer must be ISO 9002 certified.

B. Water cooling coil shall be provided. Provide access to coil(s) for service and cleaning. Enclose coil headers and return bends fully within unit casing. Unit shall be provided with coilconnections that extend a minimum of 5” beyond unit casing for ease of installation. Drain andvent connections shall be provided exterior to unit casing. Coil connections must be factorysealed with grommets on interior and exterior panel liners to minimize air leakage andcondensation inside panel assembly. If not factory packaged, Contractor must supply all coilconnection grommets and sleeves. Coils shall be removable through side and/or top panels ofunit without the need to remove and disassemble the entire section from the unit.1. Headers shall consist of seamless copper tubing to assure compatibility with primary

surface. Headers to have intruded tube holes to provide maximum brazing surface fortube to header joint, strength, and inherent flexibility. Header diameter should vary withfluid flow requirements.

2. Fins shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0075 inch aluminum plate construction. Finsshall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube formaximum heat transfer. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to provide acontinuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length formaximum heat transfer rates. Bare copper tubes shall not be visible between fins.

3. Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch OD seamless copper, 0.020 inch nominal tube wall thickness,expanded into fins, brazed at joints.

4. Coil connections shall be carbon steel, NPT threaded connection. Connection size to bedetermined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and drainfittings shall be furnished on the connections, exterior to the air handler. Vent connectionsprovided at the highest point to assure proper venting. Drain connections shall beprovided at the lowest point to insure complete drainage and prevent freeze-up.

5. Coil casing shall be a formed channel frame of galvanized steel.C. Water heating coil shall be provided. Provide access to coil(s) for service and cleaning.

Enclose coil headers and return bends fully within unit casing. Unit shall be provided with coil



connections that extend a minimum of 5” beyond unit casing for ease of installation. Drain andvent connections shall be provided exterior to unit casing. Coil connections must be factorysealed with grommets on interior and exterior panel liners to minimize air leakage andcondensation inside panel assembly. If not factory packaged, Contractor must supply all coilconnection grommets and sleeves. Coils shall be removable through side and/or top panels ofunit without the need to remove and disassemble the entire section from the unit.1. Headers shall consist of seamless copper tubing to assure compatibility with primary

surface. Headers to have intruded tube holes to provide maximum brazing surface fortube to header joint, strength, and inherent flexibility. Header diameter should vary withfluid flow requirements.

2. Fins shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0075 inch aluminum plate construction. Finsshall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube formaximum heat transfer. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to provide acontinuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length formaximum heat transfer rates. Bare copper tubes shall not be visible between fins.

3. Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch OD seamless copper, 0.020 inch nominal tube wall thickness,expanded into fins, brazed at joints.

4. Coil connections shall be carbon steel, threaded connection. Connection size to bedetermined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and drainfittings shall be furnished on the connections, exterior to the air handler. Vent connectionsprovided at the highest point to assure proper venting. Drain connections shall beprovided at the lowest point to insure complete drainage and prevent freeze-up.

5. Coil shall be furnished as an uncased galvanized steel to allow for thermal movement andslide into a pitched track for fluid drainage.

2.08 FILTERSA. Furnish angled filter section with 2-inch pleated MERV 8 filter. Provide side loading and

removal of filters.B. Filter media shall be UL 900 listed, Class I or Class II.C. Filter Magnehelic gauge(s) shall be furnished and mounted by others.

2.09 ADDITIONAL SECTIONSA. Mixing box section shall be provided with end outside air opening and top return air opening with

or without parallel low leak airfoil damper blades. Dampers shall be hollow core galvanizedsteel airfoil blades, fully gasketed and have continuous vinyl seals between damper blades in agalvanized steel frame. Dampers shall have stainless steel jamb seals along end of dampers. Connecting linkage and ABS plastic end caps shall be provided when return and outside airdampers are each sized for full airflow. Return and outside air dampers of different sizes mustbe driven separately. Damper Leakage: Leakage rate shall be less than two tenths of onepercent leakage at 2 inches static pressure differential. Leakage rate tested in accordance withAMCA Standard 500.

PART 3: EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s Installation & Maintenance instructions.3.02 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filtersare in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.

3.03 EXTRA MATERIALSA. Provide [one, two, etc.] extra set(s) [fan belts, filters, etc.] for each unit as shown on project

schedule.END OF SECTION


REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 26 05 11-1

SECTION 26 05 11 - REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONSPART 1 - GENERAL1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section applies to all sections of Division 26.B. Furnish and install electrical systems, materials, equipment, and accessories in accordance with

the specifications and drawings. Capacities and ratings of motors, transformers, conductorsand cable, switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, motor control centers, generators, automatictransfer switches, and other items and arrangements for the specified items are shown on thedrawings.

C. Conductor ampacities specified or shown on the drawings are based on copper conductors,with the conduit and raceways sized per NEC. Aluminum conductors are prohibited.

1.02 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTSA. The latest International Building Code (IBC), Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Institute of

Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)codes and standards are the minimum requirements for materials and installation.

B. The drawings and specifications shall govern in those instances where requirements are greaterthan those stated in the above codes and standards.

1.03 TEST STANDARDSA. All materials and equipment shall be listed, labeled, or certified by a Nationally Recognized

Testing Laboratory (NRTL) to meet Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), standards where teststandards have been established. Materials and equipment which are not covered by ULstandards will be accepted, providing that materials and equipment are listed, labeled, certifiedor otherwise determined to meet the safety requirements of a NRTL. Materials and equipmentwhich no NRTL accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe, will be considered ifinspected or tested in accordance with national industrial standards, such as ANSI, NEMA, andNETA. Evidence of compliance shall include certified test reports and definitive shop drawings.

B. Definitions:1. Listed: Materials and equipment included in a list published by an organization that is

acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction and concerned with evaluation of productsor services, that maintains periodic inspection of production or listed materials andequipment or periodic evaluation of services, and whose listing states that the materialsand equipment either meets appropriate designated standards or has been tested andfound suitable for a specified purpose.

2. Labeled: Materials and equipment to which has been attached a label, symbol, or otheridentifying mark of an organization that is acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdictionand concerned with product evaluation, that maintains periodic inspection of production oflabeled materials and equipment, and by whose labeling the manufacturer indicatescompliance with appropriate standards or performance in a specified manner.

3. Certified: Materials and equipment which:a. Have been tested and found by a NRTL to meet nationally recognized standards or to

be safe for use in a specified manner.b. Are periodically inspected by a NRTL.c. Bear a label, tag, or other record of certification.

4. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory: Testing laboratory which is recognized andapproved by the Secretary of Labor in accordance with OSHA regulations.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES)A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and currently produce, as one of

the manufacturer's principal products, the materials and equipment specified for this project,and shall have manufactured the materials and equipment for at least three years.



B. Product Qualification:1. Manufacturer's materials and equipment shall have been in satisfactory operation, on three

installations of similar size and type as this project, for at least three years.2. The owner reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a list of installations where

the materials and equipment have been in operation before approval.C. Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained

by the manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation within four hours ofreceipt of notification that service is needed. Submit name and address of service organizations.

1.05 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA. Applicable publications listed in all Sections of Division 26 shall be the latest issue, unless

otherwise noted.B. Products specified in all sections of Division 26 shall comply with the applicable publications

listed in each section.1.06 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS

A. Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularlyengaged in the manufacture of such items, and for which replacement parts shall be available. Materials and equipment furnished shall be new, and shall have superior quality and freshness.

B. When more than one unit of the same class or type of materials and equipment is required,such units shall be the product of a single manufacturer.

C. Equipment Assemblies and Components:1. Components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer.2. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which include components made by others, shall

assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the

intended service.4. Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer.

D. Factory wiring and terminals shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on allwiring diagrams.

1.07 VARIATIONS FROM CONTRACT REQUIREMENTSA. Where the owner or the Contractor requests variations from the contract requirements, the

connecting work and related components shall include, but not be limited to additions orchanges to branch circuits, circuit protective devices, conduits, wire, feeders, controls, panelsand installation methods.

1.08 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PROTECTIONA. Materials and equipment shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical

damage, vermin, dirt, corrosive substances, fumes, moisture, cold and rain.1. Store materials and equipment indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to

prevent condensation.2. During installation, equipment shall be protected against entry of foreign matter, and be

vacuum-cleaned both inside and outside before testing and operating. Compressed airshall not be used to clean equipment. Remove loose packing and flammable materialsfrom inside equipment.

3. Damaged equipment shall be repaired or replaced, as determined by the //ResidentEngineer// //COR//.

4. Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy kraft paper,sheet vinyl or equal.

5. Damaged paint on equipment shall be refinished with the same quality of paint andworkmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not obvious.



1.09 WORK PERFORMANCEA. All electrical work shall comply with requirements of the latest NFPA 70 (NEC), NFPA 70B,

NFPA 70E, NFPA 99, NFPA 110, OSHA Part 1910 subpart J - General Environmental Controls,OSHA Part 1910 subpart K - Medical and First Aid, and OSHA Part 1910 subpart S - Electrical,in addition to other references required by contract.

B. Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of the Contractor.C. Electrical work shall be accomplished with all affected circuits or equipment de-energized.

However, energized electrical work may be performed only for the non-destructive andnon-invasive diagnostic testing(s), or when scheduled outage poses an imminent hazard topatient care, safety, or physical security. In such case, all aspects of energized electrical work,such as the availability of appropriate/correct personal protective equipment (PPE) and the useof PPE, shall comply with the latest NFPA 70E, as well as the following requirements:1. Only Qualified Person(s) shall perform energized electrical work. Supervisor of Qualified

Person(s) shall witness the work of its entirety to ensure compliance with safetyrequirements and approved work plan.

2. At least two weeks before initiating any energized electrical work, the Contractor and theQualified Person(s) who is designated to perform the work shall visually inspect, verify andconfirm that the work area and electrical equipment can safely accommodate the workinvolved.

3. At least two weeks before initiating any energized electrical work, the Contractor shalldevelop and submit a job specific work plan, and energized electrical work request to theEngineer and Owner or his/her designee. At the minimum, the work plan must includerelevant information such as proposed work schedule, area of work, description of work,name(s) of Supervisor and Qualified Person(s) performing the work, equipment to beused, procedures to be used on and near the live electrical equipment, barriers to beinstalled, safety equipment to be used, and exit pathways.

4. Energized electrical work shall begin only after the Contractor has obtained writtenapproval of the work plan, and the energized electrical work request from the Engineerand Owner or his/her designee. The Contractor shall make these approved documentspresent and available at the time and place of energized electrical work.

5. Energized electrical work shall begin only after the Contractor has invited and receivedacknowledgment from the Engineer and Owner or his/her designee to witness the work.

D. For work that affects existing electrical systems, arrange, phase and perform work to assureminimal interference with normal functioning of the facility.

E. New work shall be installed and connected to existing work neatly, safely and professionally.Disturbed or damaged work shall be replaced or repaired to its prior conditions.

F. Coordinate location of equipment and conduit with other trades to minimize interference.1.10 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Equipment location shall be as close as practical to locations shown on the drawings.B. Working clearances shall not be less than specified in the NEC.C. Inaccessible Equipment:

1. Where the Engineer or Owner determines that the Contractor has installed equipment notreadily accessible for operation and maintenance, the equipment shall be removed andreinstalled as directed at no additional cost to the owner.

2. "Readily accessible” is defined as being capable of being reached quickly for operation,maintenance, or inspections without the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawlingunder or over obstacles such as, but not limited to, motors, pumps, belt guards,transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit and raceways.



1.11 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATIONA. Identification signs for Normal Power System equipment shall be laminated black phenolic resin

with a white core with engraved lettering. Identification signs for Essential Electrical System(EES) equipment, as defined in the NEC, shall be laminated red phenolic resin with a white corewith engraved lettering.

B. Install adhesive arc flash warning labels on all equipment as required by the latest NFPA 70E. Label shall show specific and correct information for specific equipment based on its arc flashcalculations. Label shall show the followings:1. Nominal system voltage.

1.12 SUBMITTALSA. Submit to the Engineer in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT

DATA, AND SAMPLES.B. The Owner'ss approval shall be obtained for all materials and equipment before delivery to the

job site. Delivery, storage or installation of materials and equipment which has not had priorapproval will not be permitted.

C. All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings, testreports, certifications, samples, and other data necessary for the Engineer or Owner toascertain that the proposed materials and equipment comply with drawing and specificationrequirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall be legible and clearly identify specificmaterials and equipment being submitted.

D. Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies which consist of more than oneitem or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial submittals willnot be considered for approval.1. Mark the submittals, "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION__________________".2. Submittals shall be marked to show specification reference including the section and

paragraph numbers.E. The submittals shall include the following:

1. Information that confirms compliance with contract requirements. Include themanufacturer's name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical datasheets, shop drawings, manuals, pictures, nameplate data, and test reports as required.

2. Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for communication and signal systems,control systems, and equipment assemblies. All terminal points and wiring shall beidentified on wiring diagrams.

3. Parts list which shall include information for replacement parts and ordering instructions,as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

F. Maintenance and Operation Manuals:1. Submit as required for systems and equipment specified in the technical sections. Furnish

in hardcover binders or an approved equivalent.2. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words "MAINTENANCE AND

OPERATION MANUAL," the name and location of the system, material, equipment,building, name of Contractor, and contract name and number. Include in the manual thenames, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing the system orequipment and the local representatives for the material or equipment.

3. Provide a table of contents and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents,with tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall belegible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.

4. The manuals shall include:a. Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed

operation and control of the equipment.b. A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.



c. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.d. Installation instructions.e. Safety precautions for operation and maintenance.f. Diagrams and illustrations.g. Periodic maintenance and testing procedures and frequencies, including replacement

parts numbers.h. Performance data.i. Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the use

of special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply,recommended spare and replacement parts, and name of servicing organization.

G. Approvals will be based on complete submission of shop drawings, manuals, test reports,certifications, and samples as applicable.

1.13 SINGULAR NUMBERA. Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these specifications in the singular

number (e.g., "the switch"), this reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices asare required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings.

1.14 1.15 ACCEPTANCE CHECKS AND TESTSA. The Contractor shall furnish the instruments, materials, and labor for tests.B. Where systems are comprised of components specified in more than one section of Division 26,

the Contractor shall coordinate the installation, testing, and adjustment of all componentsbetween various manufacturer’s representatives and technicians so that a complete, functional,and operational system is delivered to the Government.

C. When test results indicate any defects, the Contractor shall repair or replace the defectivematerials or equipment, and repeat the tests for the equipment. Repair, replacement, andre-testing shall be accomplished at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.15 1.16 WARRANTYA. All work performed and all equipment and material furnished under this Division shall be free

from defects and shall remain so for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of theentire installation by the Architect.

1.16 1.17 INSTRUCTIONA. Instruction to designated Owner's personnel shall be provided for the particular equipment or

system as required in each associated technical specification section.B. Furnish the services of competent and factory-trained instructors to give full instruction in the

adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the specified equipment and system, includingpertinent safety requirements. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of theinstallation, and shall be factory-trained in operating theory as well as practical operation andmaintenance procedures.

C. A training schedule shall be developed and submitted by the Contractor and approved by theOwner at least 30 days prior to the planned training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)3.01 ---END---

END OF SECTION


LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19-1

SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLESPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Single conductor building wire.B. Metal-clad cable.C. Wiring connectors.D. Electrical tape.E. Oxide inhibiting compound.F. Wire pulling lubricant.G. Cable ties.H. Firestop sleeves.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.B. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013 (Reapproved 2018).B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,

Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011 (Reapproved 2017).C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical

Purposes; 2010, with Editorial Revision (2020).D. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper

Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2020).E. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic

Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2017.F. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.G. NECA 120 - Standard for Installing Armored Cable (AC) and Metal-Clad Cable (MC); 2012.H. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy;

2009.I. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

2017.J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.K. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.L. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.M. UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.N. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.O. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.P. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.Q. UL 1569 - Metal-Clad Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordination:



1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under othersections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductorsizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminationssuitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtaindirection before proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors

and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, andavailable sizes, configurations, and stranding.

C. Manufactured Wiring System Shop Drawings: Provide plan views indicating proposed systemlayout with components identified; indicate branch circuit connections.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Record actualrouting for underground circuits.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a

Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 andproduct listing.

B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated,permitted, or required.

C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.D. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable is not permitted.E. Service entrance cable is not permitted.F. Armored cable is not permitted.G. Metal-clad cable is permitted only as follows:

1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxes

to luminaires.1) Maximum Length: 6 feet.

b. Where concealed in hollow stud walls, above accessible ceilings, and under raisedfloors for branch circuits up to 20 A.

2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:a. Where not approved for use by the authority having jurisdiction.b. Where exposed to damage.c. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations, unless provided with a PVC jacket listed as

suitable for those locations.



2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTSA. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,

connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.D. Comply with NEMA WC 70.E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.G. Conductor Material:

1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project.Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.

2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copperconductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless otherwiseindicated.

3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.H. Minimum Conductor Size:

1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.a. Exceptions:

1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop.3) 20 A, 277 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.

2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG.I. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable

minimum size requirements specified.J. Conductor Color Coding:

1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority havingjurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.

2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded using vinyl

color coding electrical tape.3. Color Code:

a. 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:1) Phase A: Brown.2) Phase B: Orange.3) Phase C: Yellow.4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray.

b. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.4) Neutral/Grounded: White.

c. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.d. For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing color

code when existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the authorityhaving jurisdiction.

e. For control circuits, comply with manufacturer's recommended color code.2.03 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE

A. Manufacturers:1. Copper Building Wire:



a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com/#sle.b. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle.c. General Cable Technologies Corporation: www.generalcable.com/#sle.d. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.C. Conductor Stranding:

1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

2. Control Circuits: Stranded.D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.E. Insulation:

1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below.a. Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XHHW-2.b. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2.c. Fixture Wiring Within Luminaires: Type TFFN/TFN for luminaires with labeled

maximum temperature of 90 degrees C; Approved suitable type for luminaires withlabeled maximum temperature greater than 90 degrees C.

2.04 METAL-CLAD CABLEA. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems Inc: www.afcweb.com/#sle.2. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle.3. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and listedfor use in classified firestop systems to be used.

C. Conductor Stranding:1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.E. Insulation: Type THHN, THHN/THWN, or THHN/THWN-2.F. Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor.G. Armor: Aluminum or steel, interlocked tape.H. Provide PVC jacket applied over cable armor where indicated or required for environment of

installed location.2.05 WIRING CONNECTORS

A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with theconductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C asapplicable.

B. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors.2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression

connectors.C. Wiring Connectors for Terminations:

1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminationsdesigned for terminal lugs.



2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished withmechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified.

3. Stranded Conductors Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Use crimped terminals for connectionsto terminal screws.

D. Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use withconductors without stripping insulation.

E. Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated spring connectors.F. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications

and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed ascomplying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations.1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M: www.3m.com/#sle.b. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com/#sle.c. NSI Industries LLC: www.nsiindustries.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

G. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.1. Manufacturers:

a. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com/#sle.b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com/#sle.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

H. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.1. Manufacturers:


I. Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated, with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable forconnection to be made.1. Manufacturers:


2.06 ACCESSORIESA. Electrical Tape:

1. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated; listedas complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion,and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

2. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying withUL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight;conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperatureenvironment up to 221 degrees F.

B. Oxide Inhibiting Compound: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to beinstalled.

C. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed andsuitable for use at the installation temperature.

D. Cable Ties: Material and tensile strength rating suitable for application.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20510










E. Firestop Sleeves: Listed; provide as required to preserve fire resistance rating of buildingelements.


A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to

accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Circuiting Requirements:

1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.2. When circuit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing

required.3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.4. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location

indicated.5. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and

power-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.6. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70.7. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are indicated as

separate, combining them together in a single raceway is permitted, under the followingconditions:a. Provide no more than six current-carrying conductors in a single raceway. Dedicated

neutral conductors are considered current-carrying conductors.b. Increase size of conductors as required to account for ampacity derating.c. Size raceways, boxes, etc. to accommodate conductors.

8. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductorsamong up to three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the sameraceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for eachindividual branch circuit.

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).D. Install metal-clad cable (Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120.E. Installation in Raceway:

1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and othercontaminants.

2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum

pulling tension and sidewall pressure.4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not

recommended by the manufacturer.F. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same

manner.























































G. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supportsand methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support frombuilding structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.

H. Terminate cables using suitable fittings.1. Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC):

a. Use listed fittings.b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or

insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor.c. Do not use direct-bearing set-screw type fittings for cables with aluminum armor.

I. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.J. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment

enclosures.K. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded

conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.L. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.

1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or makesplices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.

2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections withoutcutting, nicking or damaging conductors.

3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion,

oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended

torque settings.6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools

and dies.M. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for

the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unsplicedconductors.

N. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.O. Field-Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrally

colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under "Color Coding", apply half overlapping turns oftape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible.

P. Identify conductors and cables in accordance with Section 26 05 53.Q. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using

materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00.R. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and

devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.B. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.

END OF SECTION

















































GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26-1

SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Grounding and bonding requirements.B. Conductors for grounding and bonding.C. Connectors for grounding and bonding.D. Ground rod electrodes.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional

requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding.B. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and


A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.B. NEMA GR 1 - Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings; 2017.C. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

2017.D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.E. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Verify exact locations of underground metal water service pipe entrances to building.2. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain

direction before proceeding with work.B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install ground rod electrodes until final backfill and compaction is complete.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for grounding

and bonding system components.C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of grounding electrode system

components and connections.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a


1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS

A. Existing Work: Where existing grounding and bonding system components are indicated to bereused, they may be reused only where they are free from corrosion, integrity and continuity areverified, and where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

B. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors,

connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a completegrounding and bonding system.

D. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicableminimum size requirements specified.

E. Grounding Electrode System:1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form

grounding electrode system.a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint.b. Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical

damage. Bond grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end withbonding jumper.

2. Metal Underground Water Pipe(s):a. Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection (where

present) water service pipe(s) that are in direct contact with earth for at least 10 feetat an accessible location not more than 5 feet from the point of entrance to thebuilding.

b. Provide bonding jumper(s) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipeelectrically continuous.

c. Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit removal ofmeter without disconnecting jumper.

3. Ground Rod Electrode(s):a. Provide three electrodes in an equilateral triangle configuration unless otherwise

indicated or required.b. Space electrodes not less than 10 feet from each other and any other ground

electrode.c. Where location is not indicated, locate electrode(s) at least 5 feet outside building

perimeter foundation as near as possible to electrical service entrance; wherepossible, locate in softscape (uncovered) area.

F. Service-Supplied System Grounding:1. For each service disconnect, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect neutral

(grounded) service conductor to grounding electrode system. Unless otherwise indicated,make connection at neutral (grounded) bus in service disconnect enclosure.

2. For each service disconnect, provide main bonding jumper to connect neutral (grounded)bus to equipment ground bus where not factory-installed. Do not make any otherconnections between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground on load side of servicedisconnect.

G. Bonding and Equipment Grounding:1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic

equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, andother normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electricalconductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance withNFPA 70.

https://downloads.nfpa.org/codes-and-standards/all-codes-and-standards/list-of-codes-and-standards/detail?code=70



2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuitraceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor.

3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipmentgrounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuitequipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipmentground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus.

6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided toaccommodate conduit movement.

7. Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with NFPA 70. Thisincludes, but is not limited to:a. Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground water

pipe used as grounding electrode.8. Provide bonding for metal building frame.

2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTSA. General Requirements:

1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.

B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 05 26:1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated.

a. Exceptions:1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with

earth.2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in

raceway).C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:

1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductorsand items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground,concealed and other inaccessible connections.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, orexothermic welded connections for accessible connections.

D. Ground Rod Electrodes:1. Comply with NEMA GR 1.2. Material: Copper-bonded (copper-clad) steel.3. Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet length, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has beencompleted.

B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes vertically.

Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, provide ground plates.
























































1. Outdoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with top of rod 6 inches belowfinished grade.

D. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without

cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitateinsertion into connector.

2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, andcontact surfaces.

3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for theitems to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommendedtorque settings.

5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended toolsand dies.

E. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 05 53.3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4.B. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within the

previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.C. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with

specified requirements.END OF SECTION





























HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29-1

SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Support and attachment requirements and components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes,and other electrical work.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.B. Section 26 05 33.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment

requirements for conduits.C. Section 26 05 36 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment

requirements for cable tray.D. Section 26 51 00 - Interior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for interior

luminaires.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron andSteel Products; 2017.

B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and SteelHardware; 2016a.

C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel;2019.

D. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; 2004.E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and

components to be installed.2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials required

for installation.3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at

the installed locations.4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other

potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain

direction before proceeding with work.B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete hasfully cured in accordance with Section 03 30 00.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. General Requirements:1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and

hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended, where

applicable.



3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select inaccordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to besupported with a minimum safety factor of _____. Include consideration for vibration,equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable.

4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and productlisting.

5. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports unlessspecifically indicated or permitted.

6. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment whereinstalled.a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise

indicated.b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, or

approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM

A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be

supported.1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.

C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel

(strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly ofsupports.1. Comply with MFMA-4.2. Channel Material:

a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use painted steel, zinc-plated steel, or galvanized steel.b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel.

3. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch.4. Minimum Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inch width by 13/16 inch height.

E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.F. Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor andfastener types indicated for the specified applications.

2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors.3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors.4. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts.5. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts.6. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs.7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.8. Wood: Use wood screws.9. Powder-actuated fasteners are permitted only as follows:

a. Where approved by Architect.b. Use only threaded studs; do not use pins.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A123/A123M




































3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,

ductwork, or other systems.D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended

ceiling support system or ceiling grid.E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck.F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural

Engineer.G. Equipment Support and Attachment:

1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) tosupport equipment as required.

2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted onhollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.

3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locationsto provide space between equipment and mounting surface.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted equipment on properly sized 4 inch highconcrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00.

5. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on itsown weight for support.

H. Conduit Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 05 33.13.I. Cable Tray Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 05 36.J. Interior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 51 00.K. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.L. Remove temporary supports.M. Identify independent electrical component support wires above accessible ceilings (only where

specifically indicated or permitted) with color distinguishable from ceiling support wires inaccordance with NFPA 70.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components.

END OF SECTION










































CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.13-1

SECTION 26 05 33.13 - CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).B. Aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC).C. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC).D. Flexible metal conduit (FMC).E. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).F. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).G. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit.H. Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC).I. Conduit fittings.J. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.B. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2015.B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel (EMT-S); 2015.C. ANSI C80.5 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit -- Aluminum

(ERMC-A); 2015.D. ANSI C80.6 - American National Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC);

2005.E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.F. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); 2013.G. NECA 102 - Standard for Installing Aluminum Rigid Metal Conduit; 2004.H. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC); 2003.I. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic

Tubing, and Cable; 2014.J. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; 2013.K. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing;

2016.L. NEMA TC 14 (SERIES) - Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings Series; 2015.M. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.N. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.O. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.P. UL 6A - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.Q. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.R. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.



S. UL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.

T. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.U. UL 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed, includingadjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping,equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipmentinstalled under other sections or by others.

4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve theintegrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.


B. Sequencing:1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete

between outlet, junction and splicing points.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conduits and

fittings.C. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground, conduits

embedded within concrete slabs, and conduits 2 inch (53 mm) trade size and larger.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE



1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70and product listing.

B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicatedfor the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with themost restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified,use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

C. Underground:1. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use rigid PVC conduit or reinforced thermosetting resin conduit

(RTRC).D. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal

conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).



E. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediatemetal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

F. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediatemetal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

G. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.H. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit,

intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).I. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or

intermediate metal conduit (IMC).1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to:

a. Where exposed below 8 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms orclosets.

J. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or aluminum rigid metal conduit.K. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit or Type MC

cable.L. Connections to Vibrating Equipment:

1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit.2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.3. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated.4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to:

a. Transformers.b. Motors.

M. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit.2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reused onlywhere they comply with specified requirements, are free from corrosion, and integrity is verifiedby pulling a mandrel through them.

B. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.D. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

1. Branch Circuits: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.3. Control Circuits: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size.4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 3/8 inch (12 mm) trade size.

E. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicableminimum size requirements specified.

2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)A. Manufacturers:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com/#sle.2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com/#sle.3. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSIC80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

C. Fittings:1. Manufacturers:

a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20C80.1






b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeledas complying with UL 514B.

3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw andcompression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.04 ALUMINUM RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)A. Manufacturers:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com/#sle.2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com/#sle.3. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC aluminum rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.5and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6A.


a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle.b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.


3. Material: Use aluminum.4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and

compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.2.05 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)

A. Manufacturers:1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com/#sle.2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com/#sle.3. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying withANSI C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1242.




3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and

compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.2.06 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)

A. Manufacturers:






































1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc; ______: www.afcweb.com/#sle.2. Electri-Flex Company; ______: www.electriflex.com/#sle.3. International Metal Hose; ______: www.metalhose.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeledas complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.



2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying withUL 514B.

3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.2.07 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)

A. Manufacturers:1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com/#sle.2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com/#sle.3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduitlisted and labeled as complying with UL 360.




3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.2.08 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Manufacturers:1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com/#sle.2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com/#sle.3. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.




3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.



















http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20514B






























4. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set-screw type.a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.

2.09 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUITA. Manufacturers:

1. Cantex Inc: www.cantexinc.com/#sle.2. Carlon, a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.carlon.com/#sle.3. JM Eagle: www.jmeagle.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated,Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degreesC.

C. Fittings:1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with

UL 651; material to match conduit.2.10 REINFORCED THERMOSETTING RESIN CONDUIT (RTRC)

A. Manufacturers:1. Champion Fiberglass, Inc; ______: www.championfiberglass.com.2. FRE Composites; ______: www.frecompositesinc.com3. United Fiberglass of America, Inc; ______: www.unitedfiberglass.com4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RTRC reinforced thermosetting resin conduit complying withNEMA TC 14 (SERIES).

C. Supports: Per manufacturer's recommendations.D. Fittings: Same type and manufacturer as conduit to be connected.

2.11 ACCESSORIESA. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the

conduit to be installed.B. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit

and fittings to be installed.C. Epoxy Adhesive for RTRC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit

and fittings to be installed.D. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force.E. Firestop Sleeves: Listed; provide as required to preserve fire resistance rating of building

elements.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.























http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20TC%2014%20SERIES
























D. Install aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 102.E. Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA 101.F. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.G. Conduit Routing:

1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.2. When conduit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing

required.3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Electrical rooms.b. Mechanical equipment rooms.c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.

5. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed:a. Across floors.b. Across roofs.c. Across top of parapet walls.d. Across building exterior surfaces.

6. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortestpossible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel orperpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours wherepractical.

7. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between

pull points.9. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.10. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at

sealing fittings where moisture may collect.H. Conduit Support:

1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 usingsuitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,ductwork, or other systems.

3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling supportsystem. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.

4. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit.a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide

space between conduit and mounting surface.5. Use metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel

surface-mounted conduits.6. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.7. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with

accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits.8. Where conduit support intervals specified in NFPA 70 and NECA standards differ, comply

with the most stringent requirements.I. Connections and Terminations:

1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanizedsteel conduits prior to making connections.

2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piececouplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.

3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.


























































4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquidinto connectors.

5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double locknuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.

6. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protectconductors.

7. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electricalcontinuity.

J. Penetrations:1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and

grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set

sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to

prevent entry of moisture and gases.6. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of

membrane.7. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and

curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations arenecessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system andmaintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealingwith submittals.

8. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, usingmaterials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00.

K. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansionand expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connectedequipment. This includes, but is not limited to:1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.2. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit

installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction.3. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for reinforced thermosetting resin conduit

(RTRC) conduit installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion andcontraction.

4. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.L. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial

temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessiblepoint near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to:1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.

M. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to beinstalled by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end.

N. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended bymanufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

B. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.


























































3.05 PROTECTIONA. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection

from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation ofconductors.

END OF SECTION












BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.16-1

SECTION 26 05 33.16 - BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pullboxes.

B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors and Panels: Panels for maintaining access to concealedboxes.

B. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices:

1. Wall plates.2. Additional requirements for locating boxes for wiring devices.

D. Section 27 10 00 - Structured Cabling: Additional requirements for communications systemsoutlet boxes.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2010.C. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic

Tubing, and Cable; 2014.D. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; 2013.E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018.F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.G. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.H. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.I. UL 508A - UL Standard for Safety Industrial Control Panels; 2018.J. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment,or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and workingclearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearancerequirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors,clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70.

4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement ofconnected conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70.

5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc.installed under other sections or by others.

6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity.7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of

flush-mounted boxes where indicated.




1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for cabinets and

enclosures, boxes for hazardous (classified) locations, floor boxes, and undergroundboxes/enclosures.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations for outlet and device boxes, pull boxes,cabinets and enclosures, floor boxes, and underground boxes/enclosures.



1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 BOXES

A. General Requirements:1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by

NFPA 70 and product listing.2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway

system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable

minimum size requirements specified.5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors

terminate.B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull

Boxes:1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise

indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers.3. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.4. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.5. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where

required.6. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.7. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.8. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL

514A.9. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL

514A; furnish with threaded hubs.10. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and

weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting ofluminaire where required.

11. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not usefield-connected gangable boxes unless specifically indicated or permitted.

12. Minimum Box Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:





















http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20514A











a. Communications Systems Outlets: 4 inch square by 2-1/8 inch (100 by 54 mm) tradesize.

13. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 27 26.C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:

1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL508A.

2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1, painted steel.

3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.

4. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwiseindicated.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes.C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install boxes in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA

130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are notindicated.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions and NFPA 70.

D. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems.E. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted.F. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are

indicated or permitted.G. Box Locations:

1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section 08 3100 as required where approved by the Architect.

2. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate.3. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others.

a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 26 27 26.b. Communications Systems Outlets: Comply with Section 27 10 00.

4. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.5. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.6. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide

minimum 6 inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated.7. Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire

resistance will not be reduced.a. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide

minimum 24 inches separation where wall is constructed with individualnoncommunicating stud cavities or protect both boxes with listed putty pads.

b. Do not install flush-mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches or suchthat the total aggregate area of openings exceeds 100 square inches for any 100square feet of wall area.


























http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NECA%20NEIS%20130





























8. Locate junction and pull boxes in the following areas, unless otherwise indicated orapproved by the Architect:a. Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings.b. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.c. Electrical rooms.d. Mechanical equipment rooms.

H. Box Supports:1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using

suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other

than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections inaccordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or othersystems.

3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or ceilingsupport system.

I. Install boxes plumb and level.J. Flush-Mounted Boxes:

1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. sothat front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surfacemore than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface.

2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box orassociated raised cover is flush with finished surface.

3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile,gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at theedge of the box.

K. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.L. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent

devices exceeds 300 V.M. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using

materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00.N. Close unused box openings.O. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment

installed or designated for future use.P. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

3.03 CLEANINGA. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.

3.04 PROTECTIONA. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until

ready for installation of conductors.END OF SECTION















































IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-1

SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Electrical identification requirements.B. Identification nameplates and labels.C. Wire and cable markers.D. Underground warning tape.E. Warning signs and labels.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for

power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape.B. Section 27 10 00 - Structured Cabling: Identification for communications cabling and devices.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2011.B. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011.C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.D. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior tofabrication of identification products.

B. Sequencing:1. Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended ceilings, until

identification products have been installed.2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by

manufacturer.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Existing Work: Unless specifically excluded, identify existing elements to remain that are notalready identified in accordance with specified requirements in areas of remodel.

B. Identification for Equipment:1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control

equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.a. Switchgear:

1) Identify ampere rating.2) Identify voltage and phase.3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location.4) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device.

Identify spares and spaces.



b. Panelboards:1) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location.2) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a

door. Identify spares and spaces.3) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identify

load(s) served for each branch device. Identify spares and spaces.c. Transformers:

1) ID2) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location.3) Identify load(s) served. Include location.

d. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers:1) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location.

2. Service Equipment:a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means.b. For buildings or structures supplied by more than one service, or any combination of

branch circuits, feeders, and services, use identification nameplate or means ofidentification acceptable to authority having jurisdiction at each service disconnectingmeans to identify all other services, feeders, and branch circuits supplying thatbuilding or structure. Verify format and descriptions with authority having jurisdiction.

3. Emergency System Equipment:a. Use identification nameplate or voltage marker to identify emergency system

equipment in accordance with NFPA 70.b. Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify type and

location of on-site emergency power sources.4. Use identification nameplate to identify disconnect location for equipment with remote

disconnecting means.5. Use identification label or handwritten text using indelible marker on inside of door at each

fused switch to identify required NEMA fuse class and size.6. Use identification label to identify overcurrent protective devices for branch circuits serving

fire alarm circuits. Identify with text "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT".7. Available Fault Current Documentation: Use identification label to identify the available

fault current and date calculations were performed at locations requiring documentation byNFPA 70, including but not limited to the following.a. Service equipment.

8. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards forelectrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, metersocket enclosures, and motor control centers that are likely to require examination,adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.

C. Identification for Conductors and Cables:1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 05 19.2. Identification for Communications Conductors and Cables: Comply with Section 27 10 00.3. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded

and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder orbranch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits servedby more than one nominal voltage system.

4. Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated forpower, control, and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following locations:a. At each source and load connection.

D. Identification for Raceways:1. Use identification labels, handwritten text using indelible marker, or plastic marker tags to

identify spare conduits at each end. Identify purpose and termination location.2. Use underground warning tape to identify underground raceways.



E. Identification for Devices:1. Identification for Communications Devices: Comply with Section 27 10 00.2. Use identification label to identify fire alarm system devices.3. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify serving branch circuit for all

receptacles.a. For receptacles in public areas or in areas as directed by Architect, provide

identification on inside surface of wallplate.F. Identification for Luminaires:

1. Use permanent red dot on luminaire frame to identify luminaires connected to emergencypower system.

2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELSA. Identification Nameplates:

1. Materials:a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates.b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates suitable for

exterior use.2. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically

non-conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engravedtext.

3. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etchedtext.

4. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved orlaser-etched text.

5. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inchhigh; Four, located at corners for larger sizes.

B. Identification Labels:1. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and

abrasion resistant.a. Use only for indoor locations.

2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unlessotherwise indicated.

2.03 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERSA. Manufacturers:

1. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com/#sle.2. HellermannTyton: www.hellermanntyton.com/#sle.3. Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-aroundself-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or vinyl splitsleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified.

C. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cableties.

D. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.E. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated.F. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch.G. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.

2.04 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPEA. Manufacturers:



1. Brady Corporation; ______: www.bradyid.com/#sle.2. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com/#sle.3. Seton Identification Products; ______: www.seton.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Materials: Use non-detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial, unless otherwiseindicated.

C. Non-detectable Type Tape: 6 inches wide, with minimum thickness of 4 mil.D. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape.E. Color:

1. Tape for Buried Power Lines: Black text on red background.2. Tape for Buried Communication, Alarm, and Signal Lines: Black text on orange

background.2.05 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.B. Warning Signs:

1. Materials:a. Indoor Dry, Clean Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid plastic or self-adhesive

vinyl signs.b. Outdoor Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid aluminum signs.

2. Rigid Signs: Provide four mounting holes at corners for mechanical fasteners.3. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated.

C. Warning Labels:1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or

self-adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; producedusing materials recognized to UL 969.

2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessoriesrecommended by label manufacturer.

3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and

maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear

access.4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.7. Conduits: Legible from the floor.8. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.9. Devices: Outside face of cover.

C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to

interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.



E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles orwrinkles and edges properly sealed.

F. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches belowfinished grade.

G. Secure rigid signs using stainless steel screws.H. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs

of improper adhesion.END OF SECTION


WIRING CONNECTIONS 26 05 83-1

SECTION 26 05 83 - WIRING CONNECTIONSPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Electrical connections to equipment.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.B. Section 26 05 33.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.D. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.E. Section 26 28 16.16 - Enclosed Switches.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2015).B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications; 2016.C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having


A. Coordination:1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and

manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.2. Determine connection locations and requirements.

B. Sequencing:1. Install rough-in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is required.2. Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a


PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided forequipment.1. Colors: Comply with NEMA WD 1.2. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO, multiconductor flexible cord with identified

equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.3. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit

overcurrent protection.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Disconnect Switches: As specified in Section 26 28 16.16 and in individual equipment sections.C. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 27 26.D. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 05 33.13.E. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 05 19.F. Boxes: As specified in Section 26 05 33.16.


WIRING CONNECTIONS 26 05 83-2


A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit

with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for

temperatures encountered.D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and

equipment connection boxes.G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete

equipment wiring requirements.H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete

equipment wiring requirements.END OF SECTION


LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23-1

SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICESPART 1 GENERAL1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Devices for manual control of lighting, including wallswitches, wall dimmers, and fan speed controllers.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic

Drivers and Discharge Ballasts; 2016.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, wiring, connectors,

hardware, components, accessories, etc. as required for a complete operating system.C. Products for Switching of Electronic Ballasts/Drivers: Tested and rated to be suitable for peak

inrush currents specified in NEMA 410.2.02 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Manufacturers:1. WattStopper: www.wattstopper.com/#sle.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.3. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained

from a single supplier.B. All Occupancy Sensors:

1. Description: Factory-assembled commercial specification grade devices for indoor usecapable of sensing both major motion, such as walking, and minor motion, such as smalldesktop level movements, according to published coverage areas, for automatic control ofload indicated.

2. Sensor Technology:a. Passive Infrared (PIR) Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by

sensing movement of thermal energy between zones.b. Ultrasonic Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by sensing frequency

shifts in emitted and reflected inaudible sound waves.c. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Designed to

detect occupancy using a combination of both passive infrared and ultrasonictechnologies.

3. Provide LED to visually indicate motion detection.4. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, occupancy sensor to turn load on when occupant

presence is detected and to turn load off when no occupant presence is detected during anadjustable turn-off delay time interval.

5. Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Field configurable turn-on and hold-on activationwith settings for activation by either or both sensing technologies.

6. Passive Infrared Lens Field of View: Field customizable by addition of factory maskingmaterial, adjustment of integral blinders, or similar means to block motion detection inselected areas.

7. Turn-Off Delay: Field adjustable, with time delay settings up to 30 minutes.8. Sensitivity: Field adjustable.9. Load Rating for Line Voltage Occupancy Sensors: As required to control the load

indicated on drawings.10. Isolated Relay for Low Voltage Occupancy Sensors: SPDT dry contacts, ratings as

required for interface with system indicated.



11. Where wired sensors are indicated, wireless sensors are not acceptable without priorapproval of Architect.

C. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors:1. All Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors:

a. Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box atstandard wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees and noleakage current to load in off mode.

b. Where indicated, provide two-circuit units for control of two separate lighting loads,with separate manual controls and separately programmable operation for each load.

c. Operation: Field selectable to operate either as occupancy sensor (automatic on/off)or as vacancy sensor (manual-on/automatic off).

d. Finish: Match finishes specified for wiring devices in Section 26 27 26, unlessotherwise indicated.

2. Ultrasonic Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of400 square feet.

3. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Capable ofdetecting motion within an area of 900 square feet.

D. Wall Dimmer Occupancy Sensors:1. General Requirements:

a. Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box atstandard wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integrateddimming control capability , and no leakage current to load in off mode.

b. Operation: Field selectable to operate either as occupancy sensor (automatic on/off)or as vacancy sensor (manual-on/automatic off).

c. Dimmer: 0-10v dimming controld. Provide fade-to-off operation to notify occupant of impending load turn-off.

E. Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:1. All Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:

a. Description: Low profile occupancy sensors designed for ceiling installation.b. Unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on drawings,

provide low voltage units, for use with separate compatible accessory power packs.2. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:

a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450 squarefeet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees.

F. Directional Occupancy Sensors:1. All Directional Occupancy Sensors: Designed for wall or ceiling mounting, with integral

swivel for field adjustment of motion detection coverage.a. Unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on drawings,

provide low voltage units, for use with separate compatible accessory power packs.2. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Directional Occupancy Sensors: Capable of

detecting motion within a distance of 40 feet at a mounting height of 10 feet.G. Luminaire Mounted Occupancy Sensors: Designed for direct luminaire installation and control,

suitable for use with specified luminaires.H. Power Packs for Low Voltage Occupancy Sensors:

1. Description: Plenum rated, self-contained low voltage class 2 transformer and relaycompatible with specified low voltage occupancy sensors for switching of line voltageloads.

2. Provide quantity and configuration of power and slave packs with all associated wiring andaccessories as required to control the load indicated on drawings.

3. Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac.END OF SECTION


LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE 26 21 00-1

SECTION 26 21 00 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCEPART 1 GENERAL1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.B. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.D. Section 31 23 16.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code; 2017.B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having


A. Coordination:1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of other utilities or obstructions

within the spaces dedicated for electrical service and associated equipment.2. Coordinate arrangement of service entrance equipment with the dimensions and clearance

requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain

direction before proceeding with work.B. Scheduling:

1. Where work of this section involves interruption of existing electrical service, arrangeservice interruption with Owner.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and installed service routing.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with the following:

1. IEEE C2 (National Electrical Safety Code).2. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).3. The requirements of the local authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a


1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Store products indoors in a clean, dry space having a uniform temperature to prevent

condensation (including outdoor rated products which are not weatherproof until completely andproperly installed). Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavyplastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

C. Handle products carefully to avoid damage to internal components, enclosure, and finish.


LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE 26 21 00-2

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ELECTRICAL SERVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide new electrical service consisting of all required conduits, conductors, equipment,metering provisions, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for connection between owner'spad mount transformer and service entrance equipment.

B. Electrical Service Characteristics: As indicated on drawings.C. Products Furnished by Contractor: Comply with Utility Company requirements.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that ratings and configurations of service entrance equipment are consistent with the

indicated requirements.C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Verify and mark locations of existing underground utilities.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Utility Company

requirements.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.D. Provide required trenching and backfilling in accordance with Section 31 23 16.13.E. Provide required support and attachment components in accordance with Section 26 05 29.F. Provide grounding and bonding for service entrance equipment in accordance with Section 26

05 26.G. Identify service entrance equipment, including main service disconnect(s) in accordance with

Section 26 05 53.3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed equipment from subsequent construction operations.END OF SECTION


WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-1

SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICESPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wall switches.B. Wall dimmers.C. Receptacles.D. Wall plates.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.B. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and


A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; 2017h.B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification);

2017g.C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.D. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2010.E. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2015).F. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications; 2016.G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.H. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.I. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.J. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.K. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.L. UL 1310 - Class 2 Power Units; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.M. UL 1449 - Standard for Surge Protective Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installedunder other sections or by others.

2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements ofactual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, toprovide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices.

4. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain directionprior to proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and

configurations.



C. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of wiring devices.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a


1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTIONA. Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS

A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served.B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere

rating not less than that of the branch circuit.C. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for receptacles

installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations.D. Provide tamper resistant receptacles for receptacles all areas.

1. Exceptions:a. Electrical Roomsb. Mechanical Rooms

E. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.F. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed in kitchens.G. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles serving electric drinking fountains.H. Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices.

2.02 WIRING DEVICE FINISHESA. Provide wiring device finishes as described below unless otherwise indicated.B. Wiring Devices, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Ivory with ivory nylon wall plate.C. Wiring Devices Installed in Finished Spaces: Ivory with ivory nylon wall plate.D. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: Gray with galvanized steel wall plate.E. Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations: Ivory with specified weatherproof cover.F. Surge Protection Receptacles: Blue.G. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power: Red with red nylon wall plate.

2.03 WALL SWITCHESA. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com/#sle.3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Wall Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switcheswith silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed ascomplying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for

back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.



C. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggletype switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single throw,three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.

2.04 WALL DIMMERSA. See Lighting controls

2.05 RECEPTACLESA. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com/#sle.3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; Designer Style: www.lutron.com/#sle.4. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMAWD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types asindicated on the drawings.1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for

back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.

C. Convenience Receptacles:1. Tamper Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V,

NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type; single or duplex as indicated onthe drawings.

2. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrialspecification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as tamper resistant typeand as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable forinstallation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

D. GFCI Receptacles:1. GFCI Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-testing, with feed-through protection and

light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection; listed as complyingwith UL 943, class A.

2. Tamper Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V,NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type.

3. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specificationgrade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled astamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SEsuitable for installation in damp or wet locations.

E. USB Charging Devices:1. USB Charging Devices - General Requirements: Listed as complying with UL 1310.

F. Surge Protection Receptacles:1. Tamper Resistant Surge Protection Receptacles - General Requirements: Listed and

labeled as complying with UL 1449, Type 2 or 3.a. Energy Dissipation: Not less than 240 J per mode.b. Protected Modes: L-N, L-G, N-G.c. UL 1449 Voltage Protection Rating (VPR): Not more than 700 V for L-N, L-G modes

and 1200 V for N-G mode.d. Listed and labeled as tamper resistant type.e. Diagnostics:

1) Visual Notification: Provide indicator light to report functional status of surgeprotection.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI/NEMA%20WD%206






































2.06 WALL PLATESA. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com/#sle.2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com/#sle.3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com/#sle.4. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring

devices.2. Size: Standard.3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.

C. Nylon Wall Plates: Smooth finish, high-impact thermoplastic.D. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 stainless steel.E. Galvanized Steel Wall Plates: Rounded corners and edges, with corrosion resistant screws.F. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover

and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use withattachment plugs connected and identified as extra-duty type.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are

properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to

wiring devices.F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA

130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated.B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33.16 as required for

installation of wiring devices provided under this section.1. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated.2. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches, or wall dimmers are installed at the same

location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wallplate.

3. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge ofdoor frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain directionprior to proceeding with work.

4. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountainaccording to manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.






















































D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacentdevices exceeds 300 V.

E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do notconnect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.

F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal andtightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-inpressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuitequipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

H. Provide GFCI receptacles with integral GFCI protection at each location indicated. Do not usefeed-through wiring to protect downstream devices.

I. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.J. Install wall switches with OFF position down.K. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as

instructed by manufacturer.L. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers.M. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted

receptacles with grounding pole on left.N. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely

covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes orimproperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting thisrequirement.

O. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed ordesignated for future use.

P. Identify wiring devices in accordance with Section 26 05 53.Q. Fire stop all rated assemblies.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.B. Operate each wall switch, wall dimmer, and fan speed controller with circuit energized to verify

proper operation.C. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.D. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's

instructions.E. Inspect each surge protection receptacle to verify surge protection is active.F. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.

3.05 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.B. Adjust presets for wall dimmers according to manufacturer's instructions as directed by

Architect.3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to matchoriginal factory finish.

END OF SECTION


















































FUSES 26 28 13-1

SECTION 26 28 13 - FUSESPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fuses.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products andrequirements.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; 2012.B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.C. UL 248-1 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 1: General Requirements; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.D. UL 248-8 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 8: Class J Fuses; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.E. UL 248-12 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 12: Class R Fuses; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:1. Coordinate fuse clips furnished in equipment provided under other sections for

compatibility with indicated fuses.2. Coordinate fuse requirements according to manufacturer's recommendations and

nameplate data for actual equipment to be installed.3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain

direction before proceeding with work.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data sheets including voltage and current

ratings, interrupting ratings, time-current curves, and current limitation curves.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE




A. Bussmann, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.B. Littelfuse, Inc: www.littelfuse.com/#sle.C. Mersen: ep-us.mersen.com/#sle.D. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 APPLICATIONSA. General Purpose Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time-delay.B. Individual Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time-delay.


FUSES 26 28 13-2

2.03 FUSESA. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide fuses for all fusible equipment as required

for a complete operating system.C. Provide fuses of the same type, rating, and manufacturer within the same switch.D. Comply with UL 248-1.E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide cartridge type fuses complying with NEMA FU 1, Class and

ratings as indicated.F. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.G. Class R Fuses: Comply with UL 248-12.

1. Class RK1, Time-Delay Fuses:H. Class J Fuses: Comply with UL 248-8.

1. Class J, Time-Delay Fuses:PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that fuse ratings are consistent with circuit voltage and manufacturer's recommendationsand nameplate data for equipment.

B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install fuses until circuits are ready to be energized.B. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.

END OF SECTION


ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 16.16-1

SECTION 26 28 16.16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHESPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Enclosed safety switches.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.B. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.D. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018.C. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); 2013.D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

2017.E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.F. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.G. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.H. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. ABB/GE: www.geindustrial.com/#sle.B. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle.C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.D. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com/#sle.E. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHESA. Description: Quick-make, quick-break enclosed safety switches listed and labeled as complying

with UL 98; heavy duty; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the

following service conditions:1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.2. Ambient Temperature: Between -22 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

D. Horsepower Rating: Suitable for connected load.E. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.F. Provide with switch blade contact position that is visible when the cover is open.G. Fuse Clips for Fusible Switches: As required to accept fuses indicated.



1. Where NEMA Class R fuses are installed, provide rejection feature to prevent installationof fuses other than Class R.

H. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.I. Provide insulated, groundable fully rated solid neutral assembly where a neutral connection is

required, with a suitable lug for terminating each neutral conductor.J. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed safety switch, with a suitable lug

for terminating each equipment grounding conductor.K. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for thefollowing installation locations:a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

2. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard, factory applied grey unlessotherwise indicated.

L. Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position withcapability of overriding interlock for testing purposes.

M. Heavy Duty Switches:1. Comply with NEMA KS 1.2. Conductor Terminations:

a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.b. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.

3. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position, capable ofaccepting three padlocks.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that the ratings of the enclosed switches are consistent with the indicated requirements.C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed safety switches.D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and NFPA 70.D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29.E. Install enclosed switches plumb.F. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount enclosed

switches such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79 inchesabove the floor or working platform.

G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.H. Provide fuses complying with Section 26 28 13 for fusible switches as indicated or as required

by equipment manufacturer's recommendations.I. Identify enclosed switches in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.



B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.1.1.C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed safety switches or associated

components.3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommendedtorque settings.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean dirt and debris from switch enclosures and components according to manufacturer's

instructions.B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION


INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00-1

SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTINGPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Interior luminaires.B. Exit signs.C. Ballasts and drivers.D. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.B. Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and


A. IES LM-63 - IESNA Standard File Format for Electronic Transfer of Photometric Data andRelated Information; 2002 (Reaffirmed 2008).

B. IES LM-79 - Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-StateLighting Products; 2008.

C. IES LM-80 - Approved Method: Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LEDPackages, Arrays, and Modules; 2015, with Errata (2017).

D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.E. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; 2006.F. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; 2006.G. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic

Drivers and Discharge Ballasts; 2016.H. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; 2012.I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.J. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,

Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.K. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.L. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.M. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other

sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc.required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims withmounting surfaces at installed locations.

2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping,equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential conflictsinstalled under other sections or by others.

3. Coordinate the placement of exit signs with furniture, equipment, signage or other potentialobstructions to visibility installed under other sections or by others.



4. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain directionprior to proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings:

1. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution uponrequest.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets includingdetailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mountingrequirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, andceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposedfeatures.1. LED Luminaires:

a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.2. Provide electronic files of photometric data certified by a National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program (NVLAP) lab or independent testing agency in IES LM-63 standardformat upon request.

3. Provide screen-shot of NJ DLC listing.D. Close out:

1. Provide copies of paid invoices for each type of luminaire.a. List quantity of each typeb. List price of each type.

E. Certificates for Dimming Ballasts: Manufacturer's documentation of compatibility with dimmingcontrols to be installed.

F. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of luminaires and anyassociated remote components.



PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, except where individual luminaire

types are designated with substitutions not permitted.2.02 LUMINAIRES

A. Manufacturers:1. Philips Lighting North America Corporation; www.lightingproducts.philips.com/#sle.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.C. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.D. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,

ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize andprotect the lamp and distribute the light.



F. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operatingsystem.

G. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without anydamage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

H. Recessed Luminaires:1. Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4.

I. LED Luminaires:1. Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.2. Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance,

calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.J. Luminaires Mounted in Continuous Rows: Provide quantity of units required for length

indicated, with all accessories required for joining and aligning.2.03 EXIT SIGNS

A. Manufacturers - Powered and Self-Luminous Signs:1. Philips Lighting North America Corporation; __________;

www.lightingproducts.philips.com/#sle.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Internally illuminated exit signs with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complyingwith NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complyingwith UL 924.1. Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location.2. Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for the installed location.

2.04 BALLASTS AND DRIVERSA. Manufacturers:

1. Philips Lighting North America Corporation; www.usa.lighting.philips.com/#sle.B. Ballasts/Drivers - General Requirements:

1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal

and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards.3. Electronic Ballasts/Drivers: Inrush currents not exceeding peak currents specified in

NEMA 410.C. Dimmable LED Drivers:

1. Dimming Range: Continuous dimming from 100 percent to one percent relative lightoutput unless dimming capability to lower level is indicated, without flicker.

2. Control Compatibility: Fully compatible with the dimming controls to be installed.2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Stems for Suspended Luminaires: Steel tubing, size as indicated, factory finished to matchluminaire or field-painted as directed.

B. Threaded Rods for Suspended Luminaires: Zinc-plated steel, minimum 1/4" size, field-paintedas directed.

C. Provide accessory plaster frames for luminaires recessed in plaster ceilings.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20410
















B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and areproperly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to

luminaires.E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33.16 as required for

installation of luminaires provided under this section.B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).C. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.D. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500

(commercial lighting).E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29.F. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.G. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires:

1. Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires.2. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling support

system is certified as suitable to do so.3. Secure pendant-mounted luminaires to building structure.4. Secure lay-in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at four

corners.5. In addition to ceiling support wires, provide two galvanized steel safety wire(s), minimum

12 gage, connected from opposing corners of each recessed luminaire to buildingstructure.

6. See appropriate Division 9 section where suspended grid ceiling is specified for additionalrequirements.

H. Recessed Luminaires:1. Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage.2. Non-IC Rated Luminaires: Maintain required separation from insulation and combustible

materials according to listing.I. Suspended Luminaires:

1. Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and accessories asrequired for specified mounting height.

J. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.K. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.L. Exit Signs:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from circuit indicated.Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls.

M. Identify luminaires connected to emergency power system in accordance with Section 26 05 53.N. Install lamps in each luminaire.




















































3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.D. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or

replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or asdirected by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.

B. Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properlydesignate egress path as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting),

and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material andrestore finishes to match original factory finish.

3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIESA. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.B. See Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct

deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.D. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed.

3.08 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION































STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-1

SECTION 27 10 00 - STRUCTURED CABLINGPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Communications system design requirements.B. Communications pathways.C. Copper cable and terminations.D. Communications equipment room fittings.E. Communications outlets.F. Communications grounding and bonding.G. Communications identification.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.B. Section 26 05 33.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 05 36 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems.D. Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.E. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products.F. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. EIA/ECA-310 - Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment; Revision E, 2005.B. NECA/BICSI 568 - Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling;

2006.C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.D. TIA-568 (SET) - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Set; 2019.E. TIA-568.2 - Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standards;

2009c, with Addendum (2016).F. TIA-569 - Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces; 2019e.G. TIA-606 - Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure; 2017c.H. TIA-607 - Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer

Premises; 2019d.I. UL 444 - Communications Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.J. UL 514C - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.K. UL 1863 - Communications-Circuit Accessories; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


1. Coordinate requirements for service entrance and entrance facilities with CommunicationsService Provider.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of other utilities or obstructionswithin the spaces dedicated for communications equipment.

3. Coordinate arrangement of communications equipment with the dimensions and clearancerequirements of the actual equipment to be installed.




1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each

product.C. Field Test Reports.D. Project Record Documents: Prepared and approved by BICSI Registered Communications

Distribution Designer (RCDD).1. Record actual locations of outlet boxes and distribution frames.2. Show as-installed color coding, pair assignment, polarization, and cross-connect layout.3. Identify distribution frames and equipment rooms by room number on drawings.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a


1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.B. Keep stored products clean and dry.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a 2 year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. Provide a complete permanent system of cabling and pathways for voice and datacommunications, including cables, conduits and wireways, pull wires, support structures,enclosures and cabinets, and outlets.1. Comply with TIA-568 (SET) (cabling) and TIA-569 (pathways) (commercial standards).2. Provide fixed cables and pathways that comply with NFPA 70 and TIA-607 and are UL

listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified.3. Provide connection devices that are rated for operation under conditions of 32 to 140

degrees F at relative humidity of 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing.4. In this project, the term plenum is defined as return air spaces above ceilings, inside ducts,

under raised floors, and other air-handling spaces.B. System Description:

1. Offices and Work Areas: Provide one voice outlet and one data outlet in each work area.C. Cabling to Outlets: Specified horizontal cabling, wired in star topology to distribution frame

located at center hub of star; also referred to as "links".2.02 PATHWAYS

A. Conduit: As specified in Section 26 05 33.13; provide pull cords in all conduit.B. Cable Trays: As specified in Section 26 05 36.C. Firestop Sleeves: Listed; provide as required to preserve fire resistance rating of building

elements.1. Products:

a. Specified Technologies Inc: www.stifirestop.com.



b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.D. Smoke and Acoustical Sleeves

1. Specified Technologies Inc: www.stifirestop.com2.03 COPPER CABLE AND TERMINATIONS

A. Manufacturers:1. CommScope: www.commscope.com/#sle.2. General Cable Technologies Corporation: www.generalcable.com/#sle.3. Siemon Company: www.siemon.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Copper Horizontal Cable:1. Description: 100 ohm, balanced twisted pair cable complying with TIA-568.2 and listed

and labeled as complying with UL 444.2. Cable Type - Voice and Data: TIA-568.2 Category 6 UTP (unshielded twisted pair); 23

AWG.3. Cable Capacity: 4-pair.4. Cable Applications:

a. Plenum Applications: Use listed NFPA 70 Type CMP plenum cable.b. Riser Applications: Use listed NFPA 70 Type CMR riser cable or Type CMP plenum

cable.5. Cable Jacket Color -Data Cable - Open system: Green.6. Cable Jacket Color -Data Cable - Closed system: Blue.

C. Copper Cable Terminations: Insulation displacement connection (IDC) type using appropriatetool; use screw connections only where specifically indicated.

D. Jacks and Connectors: Modular RJ-45, non-keyed, terminated with 110-style insulationdisplacement connectors (IDC); high impact thermoplastic housing; suitable for and complyingwith same standard as specified horizontal cable; UL 1863 listed.1. Performance: 500 mating cycles.2. Voice and Data Jacks: 8-position modular jack, color-coded for both T568A and T568B

wiring configurations.3. Product(s):

a. Leviton: ATLAS-X1™ CAT 6A COMPONENT-RATED QUICKPORT ® JACKSE. Copper Patch Cords:

1. Description: Factory-fabricated 4-pair cable assemblies with 8-position modularconnectors terminated at each end.

2. Patch Cords for Patch Panels:a. Quantity: One for each pair of patch panel ports.b. Length: 7 feet.

3. Product(s):a. CommScope; SYSTIMAX Category 6 U/UTP Patch Cords:

www.commscope.com/#sle.b. Leviton: ATLAS-X1 CAT 6A SLIMLINE BOOT PATCH CORDS.

2.04 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGSA. Copper Cross-Connection Equipment:

1. Manufacturers:a. Leviton Network Solutions: www.leviton.com .b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.3. Patch Panels for Copper Cabling: Sized to fit EIA/ECA-310 standard 19 inch wide

equipment racks; 0.09 inch thick aluminum; cabling terminated on Type 110 insulationdisplacement connectors; printed circuit board interface.



a. Flat QuickPort ® Patch Panel with eXtreme ® Cat 6 Connectors #69270-U48b. Jacks: Non-keyed RJ-45, suitable for and complying with same standard as cable to

be terminated; maximum 48 ports per standard width panel.c. Capacity: Provide ports sufficient for cables to be terminated plus 25 percent spare.d. Labels: Factory installed laminated plastic nameplates above each port, numbered

consecutively; comply with TIA-606.e. Provide incoming cable strain relief and routing guides on back of panel.f. Panels shall feature mounting standoffs for cable management bars, and front

write-on labeling.g. Panels shall be made of 16-gauge steel, and shall have a black painted finish with

white silk-screening.h. Plastic elements shall be fire-retardant with a UL flammability rating of 94V-0.i. Panels shall have the ability to allow for single port replacement of connectorsj.k.

4. Product(s):a. Leviton # 69270-U48.

B. Equipment Frames, Racks and Cabinets:1. Manufacturers:

a. ICC: ICC.com.2. Component Racks: EIA/ECA-310 standard 19 inch wide.3. Floor Mounted Racks: Aluminum construction with corrosion resistant finish; vertical and

horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs, and grounding lug.a. Materials:

1) Top Support: 16 Ga. CRS2) Base: 12 Ga. CRS3) Side Rails: 1/8" thick 5052 H-32 Aluminum

b. Finidh : Black Powerder Coat.c. Height: 84"d. Width: 24" for 19" unit

4. Product(s):a. ICC #ICCMSCMRH7.

2.05 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETSA. Outlet Boxes: Comply with Section 26 05 33.16.

1. Provide depth as required to accommodate cable manufacturer's recommended minimumconductor bend radius.

2. Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:a. Voice Only Outlets: 4 inch by 2 inch by 2-1/8 inch deep (100 by 50 by 54 mm) trade

size.b. Data or Combination Voice/Data Outlets: 4 inch square by 2-1/8 inch deep (100 by 54

mm) trade size.B. Wall Plates:

1. Comply with system design standards and UL 514C.2. Accepts modular jacks/inserts.3. Capacity:

a. Data or Combination Voice/Data Outlets: 8 ports.4. Wall Plate Material/Finish - Flush-Mounted Outlets: Match wiring device and wall plate

finishes specified in Section 26 27 26.2.06 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS

A. Comply with TIA-607.



B. Comply with Section 26 05 26.2.07 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with TIA-606.B. Comply with Section 26 05 53.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Comply with latest editions and addenda of TIA-568 (SET) (cabling), TIA-569 (pathways),TIA-607 (grounding and bonding), NECA/BICSI 568, NFPA 70, and SYSTEM DESIGN asspecified in PART 2.

B. Comply with Communication Service Provider requirements.C. Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with TIA-607 and NFPA 70.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYSA. Install pathways with the following minimum clearances:

1. 48 inches from motors, generators, frequency converters, transformers, x-ray equipment,and uninterruptible power systems.

2. 12 inches from power conduits and cables and panelboards.3. 5 inches from fluorescent and high frequency lighting fixtures.4. 6 inches from flues, hot water pipes, and steam pipes.

B. Outlet Boxes:1. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33.16 as required for

installation of telecommunications outlets provided under this section.a. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1) Telephone and Data Outlets: 18 inches above finished floor.2) Telephone Outlets for Side-Reach Wall-Mounted Telephones: 54 inches above

finished floor to top of telephone.3) Telephone Outlets for Forward-Reach Wall-Mounted Telephones: 48 inches

above finished floor to top of telephone.b. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise

indicated.c. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate outlet boxes for line voltage and low

voltage devices.d. Locate outlet boxes so that wall plate does not span different building finishes.e. Locate outlet boxes so that wall plate does not cross masonry joints.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND CABLINGA. Cabling:

1. Do not bend cable at radius less than manufacturer's recommended bend radius; forunshielded twisted pair use bend radius of not less than 4 times cable diameter.

2. Do not over-cinch or crush cables.3. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended cable pull tension.4. When installing in conduit, use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer and do not

chafe or damage outer jacket.B. Service Loops (Slack or Excess Length): Provide the following minimum extra length of cable,

looped neatly:1. At Distribution Frames: 120 inches.2. At Outlets - Copper: 12 inches.

C. Copper Cabling:1. Category 5e and Above: Maintain cable geometry; do not untwist more than 1/2 inch from

point of termination.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=TIA-607











































2. For 4-pair cables in conduit, do not exceed 25 pounds pull tension.3. Use T568B wiring configuration.

D. Floor-Mounted Racks and Enclosures: Permanently anchor to floor in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendations.

E. Identification:1. Use wire and cable markers to identify cables at each end.2. Use manufacturer-furnished label inserts, identification labels, or engraved wallplate to

identify each jack at communications outlets with unique identifier.3. Use identification nameplate to identify cross-connection equipment, equipment racks, and

cabinets.3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Comply with inspection and testing requirements of specified installation standards.C. Visual Inspection:

1. Inspect cable jackets for certification markings.2. Inspect cable terminations for color coded labels of proper type.3. Inspect outlet plates and patch panels for complete labels.

D. Testing - Copper Cabling and Associated Equipment:1. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks.2. Category 5e and Above Backbone: Perform near end cross talk (NEXT) and attenuation

tests.3. Category 5e and Above Links: Perform tests for wire map, length, attenuation, NEXT, and

propagation delay.E. Final Testing: After all work is complete, including installation of telecommunications outlets,

and telephone dial tone service is active, test each voice jack for dial tone.END OF SECTION

































FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 46 00-1

SECTION 28 46 00 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARMPART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fire alarm system design and installation, including all components, wiring, and conduit.B. Replacement and removal of existing fire alarm system components, wiring, and conduit

indicated.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 21 13 00 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Supervisory, alarm, and actuatingdevices installed in sprinkler system.

B. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Smoke dampers monitored and controlled by firealarm system.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.C. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring

Code or Reference Standard.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Proposal Documents: Submit the following:

1. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out to the extent known at the time.2. Manufacturer's detailed data sheet for each control unit, initiating device, and notification

appliance.3. Certification by Contractor that the system design will comply with Contract Documents.

C. Design Documents: Submit all information required for plan review and permitting by authoritieshaving jurisdiction, including but not limited to floor plans, riser diagrams, and description ofoperation:1. Copy (if any) of list of data required by authority having jurisdiction.2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out to the extent known at the time.3. Clear and concise description of operation, with input/output matrix similar to that shown in

NFPA 72 Appendix A-7-5-2.2(9), and complete listing of software required.4. System zone boundaries and interfaces to fire safety systems.5. Location of all components, circuits, and raceways; mark components with identifiers used

in control unit programming.6. Circuit layouts; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors; conduit fill

calculations; spare capacity calculations; notification appliance circuit voltage dropcalculations.

7. List of all devices on each signaling line circuit, with spare capacity indicated.8. Manufacturer's detailed data sheet for each component, including wiring diagrams,

installation instructions, and circuit length limitations.9. Description of power supplies; if secondary power is by battery include calculations

demonstrating adequate battery power.10. Certification by either the manufacturer of the control unit or by the manufacturer of each

other component that the components are compatible with the control unit.11. Certification by the manufacturer of the control unit that the system design complies with

Contract Documents.12. Certification by Contractor that the system design complies with Contract Documents.13. Do not show existing components to be removed.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NFPA%2072




















D. Evidence of installer qualifications.E. Inspection and Test Reports:

1. Submit inspection and test plan prior to closeout demonstration.2. Submit documentation of satisfactory inspections and tests.3. Submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Test Form," filled out.

F. Operating and Maintenance Data: See Section 01 78 00 for additional requirements; revise andresubmit until acceptable; have one set available during closeout demonstration:1. Complete set of specified design documents, as approved by authority having jurisdiction.2. Additional printed set of project record documents and closeout documents, bound or filed

in same manuals.3. Contact information for firm that will be providing contract maintenance and trouble

call-back service.4. Detailed troubleshooting guide and large scale input/output matrix.5. Detailed but easy to read explanation of procedures to be taken by non-technical

administrative personnel in the event of system trouble, when routine testing is beingconducted, for fire drills, and when entering into contracts for remodeling.

G. Project Record Documents: Have one set available during closeout demonstration:1. Complete set of floor plans showing actual installed locations of components, conduit, and

zones.2. "As installed" wiring and schematic diagrams, with final terminal identifications.3. "As programmed" operating sequences, including control events by device, updated

input/output chart, and voice messages by event.H. Closeout Documents:

1. Certification by manufacturer that the system has been installed in compliance withmanufacturer's installation requirements, is complete, and is in satisfactory operatingcondition.

2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out completely and signed by installer andauthorized representative of authority having jurisdiction.

1.05 WARRANTYA. Provide control panel manufacturer's warranty that system components other than wire and

conduit are free from defects and will remain so for 1 year after date of Substantial Completion.B. Provide installer's warranty that the installation is free from defects and will remain so for 1 year

after date of Substantial Completion.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fire Alarm Control Units and Accessories - Basis of Design: Simplex, a brand of JohnsonControls.

B. Existing Fire Alarm Control Unit: Simplex, 4100C. Initiating Devices and Notification Appliances:

1. Same manufacturer as control units.2. Provide initiating devices and notification appliances made by the same manufacturer,

where possible.2.02 EXISTING COMPONENTS

A. Existing Fire Alarm System: Remove existing components indicated and incorporate remainingcomponents into new system, under warranty as if they were new; do not take existing portionsof system out of service until new portions are fully operational, tested, and connected toexisting system.

B. Clearly label components that are "Not In Service."
























































C. Remove unused existing components and materials from site and dispose of properly.2.03 FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTERFACES

A. Supervision: Provide supervisory signals in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following:1. Sprinkler water control valves.

B. Alarm: Provide alarm initiation in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following:1. Sprinkler water flow.2. Duct smoke detectors.

C. HVAC:1. Duct Smoke Detectors: Close dampers indicated; shut down air handlers indicated.

D. Doors:1. Smoke Barrier Door Magnetic Holders: Release upon activation of smoke detectors in

smoke zone on either side of door, upon alarm from manual pull station on same floor, andupon sprinkler activation on same floor. Refer to Section 08 71 00.

2.04 COMPONENTSA. General:

1. Provide flush mounted units where installed in finish areas; in unfinished areas, surfacemounted unit are acceptable.

2. Provide legible, permanent labels for each control device, using identification used inoperation and maintenance data.

B. Fire Alarm Control Units: Analog, addressable type; listed, classified, and labeled as suitablefor the purpose intended. (Existing)

C. Initiating Devices:1. ADDRESSABLE MANUAL PULL STATIONS

a. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxesshall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrastingcolor; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessedoutlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

b. Description: Addressable double-action type, red LEXAN. Station shall mechanicallylatch upon operation and remain so until manually reset by opening with a keycommon with the control units. Station shall be pull-lever type; with integraladdressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm,or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. Where double-action stations are provided, themechanism shall require two actions [break front glass] [push top activation door] toinitiate an alarm.

c. Provide with a front showing red LED showing that will flash each time it is scannedby the Control Unit (once every 4 seconds). In alarm condition, the station LED shallbe on steady.

d. Indoor Protective Shield: Where required, or as indicated on the drawings, provide afactory-fabricated, tamperproof, clear LEXAN enclosure shield and red frame thateasily fits over manual pull stations which shall be hinged at the top to permit lifting foraccess to initiate a local alarm. Unit shall be NRTL listed. [Lifting the cover shallactuate an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarmoperation. The horn shall be silenced by lowering and realigning the shield. The hornshall provide 85dB at 10 feet and shall be powered by a 9 VDC battery.]

2. ADDRESSABLE ANALOG SMOKE SENSORSa. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1) Comply with UL 268, "Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems."Include the following features:

2) Factory Nameplate: Serial number and type identification.3) Operating Voltage: 24 VDC, nominal and shall be two-wire type.






















































